Manual Celdas Primera Limpieza

FLSMIDTH® WEMCO® 300m3 FLOTATION MACHINES
Serial No.: CSP0000891-01 A thru E
For
Esperanza Cleaner Expansion
Chile
Minera Esperanza
Purchase Order No.: 136753 V.0
FLSmidth Salt Lake City, Inc. Order No.: CSP0000891-01

Wemco 300m3 Flotation Cells
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Esperanza Project – Chile
Created by: Rob Bailey

Approved by: Nate Taylor
FLSmidth, 31-March-2014 Document No. CSP0000891-01
Revision History
The following table summarizes the revision history of this manual.
Revision Summary of changes Author Revision date
1.0 Initial Release-Instruction Manual Rob Bailey 31-March-2014
Contents 2
Document No. CSP0000891-01
Contents
Chapter 1: General Information 7

1.1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 7
1.2 Receiving and Inspection ......................................................................... 8
1.3 Packing Boxes and Covers ....................................................................... 8
1.3.1 Shipping Braces and Bars ........................................................ 8
1.3.2 Storage ................................................................................ 8
1.3.3 Erection Bolts ........................................................................ 8
1.4 FLSmidth Offices..................................................................................... 9
1.5 Mechanical Warranty ..............................................................................11
1.6 Copyright Information ............................................................................12
Chapter 2: General Safety Information 13

2.1 Safety - Introduction ..............................................................................13
2.2 Hearing Protection .................................................................................15
2.3 Safety Signs..........................................................................................16
2.3.1 Area Safety Signs..................................................................16
2.4 Equipment Safety Signs ..........................................................................17
2.4.1 Environment Management Cautions.........................................17
2.4.2 Paint ...................................................................................17
2.4.3 Cleaning Agents ....................................................................18
2.4.4 Cleaning Materials .................................................................18
2.4.5 Grease .................................................................................18
2.4.6 Lubricating Oil ......................................................................18
2.4.7 Hydraulic Oil .........................................................................18
Contents 4
2.4.8 Process Samples ...................................................................19

2.4.9 Used Parts and Materials ........................................................19
2.4.10 Installation and Maintenance Equipment ..................................19
Chapter 3: Installation 20
3.1 Special Instructions to Equipment Erectors ...............................................20
3.2 Storage ................................................................................................21
3.3 Storage of Rubber Products.....................................................................21
3.4 Required Special Tools, Materials and Supplies ..........................................22
3.5 Tank Support Structure ..........................................................................22
3.6 Tank and Component Lifting....................................................................22
3.7 Two Piece Tank Installation .....................................................................24
3.8 Internal Component Installation ..............................................................26
3.9 Feed Box Installation..............................................................................27
3.10 Discharge Box Installation ......................................................................28
3.11 Manway Door, Discharge Box Drain Cover and Blind Flange Installation ........30
3.11.1 Cell Assembly Manway Door ...................................................30
3.11.2 Feed Box and Discharge Box Mandoors ....................................30
3.11.3 Discharge Box Drain Cover .....................................................30
3.11.4 Blind Flange Installation .........................................................30
3.12 Baffles, Radial Launders and Weirs Installation ..........................................30
3.13 Support Beam Installation ......................................................................31
3.13.1 Mechanism Assembly .............................................................32
3.13.2 Mechanism Assembly Installation ............................................35
3.14 Hinged Dart Valve Assembly Installation ...................................................39
3.15 Level Sensor Assembly Installation ..........................................................40
3.16 Froth Sensor Assembly Installation ..........................................................41
3.17 Platform Assembly Installation ................................................................41
3.18 Electrical Power and Controls Installation ..................................................42
3.19 Final inspection before start-up ...............................................................43
3.20 Mechanical Check ..................................................................................44
3.20.1 Final Mechanical Check ..........................................................44
3.20.2 Arrangements for Service .......................................................44
3.20.3 DO NOT Fill the Tank with Water .............................................44
Contents 5
Chapter 4: Lubrication 45
Chapter 5: Maintenance 46
5.1 Maintenance and Start-up Services ..........................................................47
5.2 Parts and Repair Orders..........................................................................48
5.3 General Maintenance ..............................................................................48
5.4 Hinged Dart Valve Inspection and Maintenance..........................................50
5.5 Regularly Scheduled Shutdown for Inspection and Maintenance ...................52
5.6 Mechanism Assmebly Maintenance ...........................................................53
5.6.1 Mechanism Removal ..............................................................54
5.6.2 Component Removal and Installation.......................................56
5.7 Fastener Torque Specifications ................................................................61
Chapter 6: Operation 62
6.1 Flotation ...............................................................................................62
6.2 General Troubleshooting .........................................................................68
Chapter 7: Final Mechanical Checklist 74
Chapter 8: Appendices 80
8.1 Current Bill of Material............................................................................80
8.2 Recommended Spare Parts List ...............................................................81
8.3 Certified Drawings .................................................................................82
Contents 6
Chapter 1: General Information
1.1 Introduction
It is FLSmidth’s sincere desire that this equipment provide dependable, efficient and economical
operation throughout the entire period of service. To achieve this kind of performance and ensure full
warranty coverage, it is important to thoroughly read and understand the contents of this manual
before the unit is installed, adjusted, or operated.
The equipment, including the accessory equipment furnished but not built by FLSmidth, must be
stored, installed, operated and maintained according to these instructions to ensure the warranty
coverage.
The instructions in this manual are based on information available at the time of issue of this manual;
the right is reserved to make subsequent changes to the instructions without obligation to replace
existing copies.
Documents, drawings, technical manuals and all other information contained in this manual, provided
in conjunction with the purchase of FLSmidth products and services, are the property of FLSmidth and
are confidential and may not be made public or copied.
FLSmidth will not furnish editable electronic copies of any data and/or drawings at any time.
FLSmidth accepts no liability whatsoever for unauthorized changes and/or alterations to the data
provided.
English is the governing language. When manuals are provided in both English and any language other
than English, THE NON-ENGLISH TRANSLATION IS PROVIDED ONLY AS A CONVENIENCE.
FLSmidth shall not be liable for damages caused by errors in translation. The English translation will
govern in case of minor discrepancies. In the event of major discrepancies, notify your FLSmidth
representative immediately. Refer to the Offices page in this manual for applicable address and
telephone number.
1.2 Receiving and Inspection

Although all possible precautions are taken to protect the equipment against damage or losses during
shipment, before accepting the shipment check all items against the packing list for shortages and
inspect for evidence of physical damage.
If there is a shortage or evidence of physical damage, immediately notify the carrier and note on the
delivery ticket "Accepted subject to full inspection after unpacking". Notify FLSmidth within 7 days
(maximum) in case of shortages or discrepancies in the amounts received according to the packing
list. If not notified, FLSmidth will not be responsible for replacing those items.
Keep a record of all claims and correspondence. Photographs are recommended.
1.3 Packing Boxes and Covers

Do not remove protective covers unless there are indications of damage. Boxes opened for inspection
and inventory should be carefully repacked to ensure protection of the contents or the parts should be
packaged and stored in a safe place.
Examine all packing boxes, wrappings and covers for items attached to them, especially if they are to
be discarded. Refer to the Storage Instructions in Chapter 3 for specific storage instructions.
1.3.1 Shipping Braces and Bars

All braces, bars, etc., that are required for shipment, but are not a part of the mechanism, should not
be removed until necessary for installation or removal from the carrier. Shipping braces are marked
SHIPPING BRACE ONLY with white or purple painted letters.
1.3.2 Storage
When the equipment is not to be installed immediately, refer to the Storage Instructions for specific
procedures. These instructions are important to ensure warranty protection.
1.3.3 Erection Bolts

Check the packing lists to ensure the correct number of erection bolts are included to avoid shortages
later during installation.
Contents 8
1.4 FLSmidth Offices
FLSmidth
FLSmidth Salt Lake City Inc.
7158 South FLSmidth Drive
Midvale, Utah 84047-5559
Telephone: 801-871-7000
Toll Free: 1-800-826-6461
Facsimile: 801-871-7001
After completion of the contract, all service and spare parts will be supported by the Region
Headquarters.
North American Region Headquarters Europe, Africa, Mid-East Region

Headquarters
FLSmidth
FLSmidth Salt Lake City Inc. FLSmidth (UK) Ltd.
7158 South FLSmidth Drive 11 Mitchell Court
Midvale, Utah 84047-5559, U.S.A. Castle Mound Way
Telephone: 1 + 801-871-7000 Central Park
Toll Free: 1 + 800-826-6461 Rugby, Warwickshire
Facsimile: 1 + 801-871-7001 CV23 0UY

United Kingdom
FLSmidth S.A. de C.V Telephone: +44 (0) 1788 555777
San Alberto 406 Facsimile: +44 (0) 1788 560738
Col. Residencial Santa Barbara

San Pedro Garza Garcia • N.L, 66266 • Mexico FLSmidth (Pty.) Ltd.
Telephone: +52 81 1001-9500 Cnr Constantia Boulevard & Albert Schweitzer Streets
Facsimile: +52 81 1001-9545 Constantia Kloof, Roodepoort, 1709, Gauteng, South

Africa
Telephone: +27 (0)10-210-4000
Facsimile: +27 (0)10-210-4050
Latin American Region Headquarters Asia-Pacific Region Headquarters
FLSmidth S.A. FLSmidth Pty. Ltd.

Nueva de Lyon 072 – Office 1102 5 Comserv Close
Providencia, Santiago – 751-0078 Chile West Gosford. NSW 2250, Australia
Telephone: +56 - 2-290-0000 Telephone: + 61(0) 2-4320-4700
Facsimile: +56 - 2-334-3949 Facsimile: + 61(0) 2-4320-4777
FLSmidth Ltda. FLSmidth Beijing Ltd.

Divisão Minerals 7F, Tower A, Ping An International Financial Center
Rua Dolles. 264- 2º Andar No. 1-3 Xinyuan South Road
CEP-18.116-710-Jardim Clarice II- Votorantim - São Chaoyang District
Paulo- Brasil
100004 Beijing
Telephone: +55-15-3416-7400
Peoples Republic Of China
Facsimile: +55-15-3416-7599
Telephone: +86-10-8468-9100
Facsimile: +86-10-8468-9299
Canada Region Headquarters
FLSmidth Ltd.
174 West Street South
Orillia, Ontario L3V 6L4 Canada
Telephone: (705) 325-6181
Facsimile: (705) 325-3363
Contents 10
NOTE: All telephone/facsimile numbers are preceded by a country code (for example Mexico 52 +).
1.5 Mechanical Warranty

In the case of the purchase of new EQUIPMENT, and solely for the benefit of the original user, Seller
warrants to BUYER that, for a period of one year after acceptance of EQUIPMENT by BUYER, not to
exceed eighteen (18) months from shipment, all such EQUIPMENT specified in this AGREEMENT and
manufactured or modified by Seller will be free from defects in material and workmanship, provided
that the EQUIPMENT (i) is used in a normal manner, (ii) is repaired and maintained in accordance with
Seller approved repair and maintenance procedures and (iii) is operated by competent personnel.
Seller hereby assigns to BUYER the rights of Seller against the manufacturers of the portions of the
EQUIPMENT not manufactured or modified by Seller.
In the case of PARTS or used or reconditioned machinery or equipment, and unless otherwise
indicated, Seller warrants to BUYER that, for a period of six (6) months from the date of shipment to
BUYER, the PARTS or the used or reconditioned machinery or equipment will be free from defects in
material and workmanship provided that the same (i) are used in a normal manner, (ii) are repaired
and maintained in accordance with Seller-approved repair and maintenance procedures, and (iii) are
operated by competent personnel.
As clarification and not in limitation of the disclaimer below, SELLER HEREBY DISCLAIMS ANY
LIABILITY FOR: (a) ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY NOT SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT; (b)
the design or suitability of the EQUIPMENT for any particular use (except to the extent that a warranty
with respect to such a matter is expressly set forth in this AGREEMENT); (c) FAILURE OR DAMAGES
DUE TO NEGLIGENCE, accident, abuse, improper installation (including failure to comply with Seller’s
Field Service Policy on erection, installation and start-up, if applicable), improper operation,
incompatibility with other equipment not furnished by Seller, decomposition by chemical action, wear
caused by the presence of abrasive materials, or consumable parts not conforming to Seller’s estimate
of normal life in which case Seller will be responsible for parts replacement pro-rata, unless the failure
resulted from causes mentioned above; (d) any EQUIPMENT which has been altered or repaired in any
way without authorization by Seller. If any of Seller’s supply fails to comply with the warranty, Seller
shall do one of the following: repair, replace, or refund, as described below.
To make claim under Seller’s warranty set forth above the BUYER shall (a) notify Seller in writing
within fifteen (15) days after the discovery of any alleged defect and in any event not later than thirty
(30) days following expiration of the warranty period provided above; and (b) only if requested by
Seller, return all articles claimed to be defective to Seller at the Seller location designated by Seller,
freight or postage prepaid, for inspection by Seller; and (c) perform at BUYER’S expense all work in
connection with the removal of the defective articles and reinstallation following repair or replacement,
and (d) if Seller elects to make a refund of part or all of the purchase price, the refund shall be Seller’s
sole obligation. The alleged defective article shall be returned to the location designated by Seller only
if requested by Seller. If BUYER requests a replacement part from Seller prior to opportunity for Seller
to inspect the alleged defective part, the replacement part will be billed to BUYER at Seller’s regular
prices, and if upon inspection the allegedly defective PART(S) are found to be defective, Seller will
issue an appropriate credit to BUYER.
Contents 11
Regarding portions of Seller’s supply furnished by third parties, Seller’s obligation is limited to the
assignment of applicable warranties.
ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY, WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL OR STATUTORY, ARE
EXCLUDED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMISSIBLE BY LAW. ALL WARRANTIES AND OBLIGATIONS OF
SELLER SHALL TERMINATE IF: (1) SELLER’S CUSTOMER OR ORIGINAL USER FAILS TO PERFORM ITS
OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE PARTIES; OR (2) SELLER’S CUSTOMER OR
THE ORIGINAL USER FAIL TO PAY ANY CHARGES OTHERWISE DUE SELLER.
1.6 Copyright Information

Copyright © 2013 FLSmidth A/S, All Rights Reserved.
The information transmitted by this document is the proprietary and confidential property of
FLSmidth. No part of this manual may be disclosed, copied, duplicated, photocopied, reproduced,
translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without written consent
from FLSmidth.
The data included in this manual is not to be duplicated, used, or disclosed, in whole or in part, for any
purpose other than in the operation, maintenance, and service of the machine described. Nothing
contained herein should be construed to guarantee, modify, or enhance the operational capabilities as
described in the machinery specification. This manual does not imply liability to the manufacturer for
any or all operational capabilities that may be affected by the misuse or neglect in operating or
servicing this machine. The data subject to these limitations is contained in this manual.
Documents, drawings, technical manuals and all other information contained in this manual, provided
in conjunction with the purchase of FLSmidth Spokane, Inc. products and services, are the property of
FLSmidth and are confidential and may not be made public or copied.
Contents 12
Chapter 2: General Safety Information
2.1 Safety - Introduction

As with any other mechanical equipment, there are safety concerns associated with the installation,
operation and maintenance of FLSmidth supplied equipment. It is absolutely essential that operators,
maintenance personnel, and supervisors be instructed in safe working practices. All personnel should
observe the warnings on the equipment; in this instruction manual; and know the potential hazards
and how to avoid them.
Only personnel who have been trained in the safety procedures for this equipment should be allowed
around or in the area of the FLSmidth equipment or the accessory equipment furnished by FLSmidth.
No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent

accidents. Safety features and devices are meant only to supplement proper, careful, and safe
practices on the part of the individual.
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are included throughout this manual for your safety. Read and
understand them before installing, maintaining or operating this equipment. Also, refer to the
appropriate OSHA safety requirements for additional information concerning personnel working on or
around this equipment.
WARNING: Understanding and experience with this equipment is essential for

the safe operation and maintenance of the equipment.
In case of a question on how to safely proceed, contact the appropriate

FLSmidth regional office immediately.
WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

ignored, severe personal injury or death may occur. Safety practices accepted
by the industry, as well as those dictated by the responsible regulatory agencies
Contents 13
must be followed.
WARNING: The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to
the operator's health. Some fumes, such as those produced when working with
Zinc, Cadmium or painted surfaces can be toxic.
WARNING: To prevent injuries to yourself or others, use extreme care when

working near rotating or other moving parts. Any individual entering the area of
this equipment must wear adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses,
safety shoes, hard hat, hearing protection, etc. Loose fitting clothing, uncovered
long hair, or jewelry must not be worn when working around rotating or moving
equipment.
WARNING: Keep foreign objects, hands, etc. away from moving parts (chains,
sprockets, belts, sheaves, etc.) Do not operate this equipment if guards have
been removed or are damaged. All guards and safety devices must be properly
installed and functional before operating this equipment.
WARNING: Disable power from electrical equipment using a manual breaker or

a disconnect switch before starting any work or maintenance on the equipment.
Lock and tag the disconnect switch so it cannot be closed.
WARNING: Only trained, competent personnel should adjust electrical

equipment.
WARNING: No electrical safety function should ever be jumped or bypassed.

Control panel doors must be closed at all times. Never use oversize fuses, buss
bars, or heaters. Motor drives and accessories should be connected to an
electrical ground such as an underground water piping system, the frame of a
building, or etc.
WARNING: Where corrosive or dangerous chemicals are handled, or there is

possible operator exposure to these dangerous chemicals, anyone entering the
area of the equipment must be wearing adequate safety equipment such as full
face and/or eye protection, rubber gloves, safety shoes, hard hats, protective
clothing, and respiratory masks.
Contents 14
WARNING: Hydraulic oil is an eye irritant, a skin irritant, and is toxic if

ingested. Eye protection, skin protection, respiratory masks, etc, must be used
during maintenance and/or repair of hydraulic systems.
WARNING: To prevent injuries to yourself or others, use extreme care when

lifting structural components. Anyone entering the area of this equipment must
be wearing adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses, safety shoes,
hard hat, etc.
WARNING: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel who
are fully trained in the proper procedures for rigging and lifting of large
components. Verify the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate capacity.
Confirm the equipment being lifted or the lifting equipment cannot come into
contact with overhead electrical cables, etc.
WARNING: Stand clear as the equipment is lifted.
2.2 Hearing Protection
WARNING: Use hearing protection anytime there is exposure to noise.
Noise is a deceptive hazard. Workers can be exposed to considerable amounts of noise and not be
aware that they may have suffered permanent injury. Noise intensity exceeding an average of 90
decibels over an 8-hour period can cause hearing loss. This intensity exists in most industrial and
processing plants. Noise also increases a worker’s fatigue and stress level. It presents additional
hazards when the worker is unable to clearly hear instructions or warning signals.
The selection and proper use of adequate hearing protection should be taken seriously by personnel
operating and maintaining this equipment.
• Know the types of hearing protection required in your work area.
o The two basic types of hearing protection are earplugs and ear muffs.
o In extreme noise-exposure areas, both earplugs and ear muffs are recommended.
• Always use hearing protection in areas where it is specifically required by plant procedures for
the work environment.
• Select the hearing protection that is most effective.
Contents 15
• Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and storage of reusable hearing
protection.
2.3 Safety Signs
2.3.1 Area Safety Signs

Safety signs should be installed to alert any personnel entering dangerous areas. Several safety signs
may be required and located so they can be seen from any direction the equipment might be
approached.
• Suggested text for these signs in appropriate language would be:
WARNING:
Exposed moving parts – KEEP AWAY.
WARNING:
LOCK OUT POWER BEFORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE
WARNING:
HEARING PROTECTION REQUIRED
• If personnel working with this equipment cannot readily read or understand English, warning
signs on the equipment and procedures set forth in this manual must be translated and
provided for their benefit in a language they understand.
o Multilingual signs may be needed.
Contents 16
• Location of signs will depend upon the specific design and placement of the equipment. For
example: the signs may be located above catwalks, or affixed to walls adjacent to the
equipment, or on the equipment itself.
o Verify that these signs are visible to the operator during operation and visible to
persons approaching the area of the machine.
2.4 Equipment Safety Signs

• Safety and warning signs are shop mounted to the equipment. These signs must not be
removed.
• The signs must be kept clean and must not be covered up.
• If the signs are damaged or deteriorated; replace them.
2.4.1 Environment Management Cautions
CAUTION:
2.4.2 Paint
Field painting must be done in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. Use accepted
industry methods to limit paint overspray or dripping of wet paint.
Clean up after field painting must be done in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and local
and national environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant
policies and procedures.
Storage of unused paint must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national
environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant policies and
procedures.
Removal of old paint from component surfaces must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local
Disposal or recycling of old paint, in any form, must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local
Contents 17
2.4.3 Cleaning Agents

Storage, use, and disposal of cleaning agents must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local
2.4.4 Cleaning Materials

Storage, disposal, or recycling of cleaning materials must comply with manufacturer's instructions and
local and national environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant
2.4.5 Grease
Storage of grease must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national environmental
protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant policies and procedures.
Most greases used for lubrication are considered HAZARDOUS, and must be handled appropriately by
operating and maintenance personnel. Proper safety procedures must be followed when applying,
cleaning up or disposing of grease lubricants.
Disposal or recycling of grease must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national
procedures.
2.4.6 Lubricating Oil

Storage of lubricating oil must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national
procedures.
Most oils used for lubrication are considered HAZARDOUS, and must be handled appropriately by
operating and maintenance personnel. Proper safety procedures must be followed when applying,
cleaning up or disposing of lubricating oil.
Disposal or recycling of lubricating oil must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and
national environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant policies
and procedures.
2.4.7 Hydraulic Oil

Storage of hydraulic oil must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national
procedures.
Contents 18
Most hydraulic oils are considered HAZARDOUS, and must be handled appropriately by operating and
maintenance personnel. Proper safety procedures must be followed when applying, cleaning up or
disposing of hydraulic oil.
Disposal or recycling of hydraulic oil must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and
national environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant policies
and procedures.
2.4.8 Process Samples

Storage of process samples must comply with manufacturer's instructions and local and national
procedures.
Depending on the process, the samples may be considered HAZARDOUS, and must be handled
appropriately. Proper safety procedures must be followed when taking and analyzing samples, and
when disposing of sample materials following testing.
2.4.9 Used Parts and Materials

Disposal or recycling of used parts and materials must comply with manufacturer's instructions and
local and national environmental protection regulations, and should be done in accordance with plant
2.4.10 Installation and Maintenance Equipment

All tools and equipment used for installation and/or maintenance of this equipment must be used or
operated in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with plant policies and
procedures. Use and storage of tools and equipment must also comply with local and national
environmental protection regulations.
Contents 19
Chapter 3: Installation
3.1 Special Instructions to Equipment Erectors

FLSmidth does not anticipate problems with the erection of this equipment. However, due to the
nature of fabricated steel equipment, the erector may require a certain amount of field fit-up and
adapting work. This is considered to be a normal part of erection, as well as the use of such tools as
come-alongs, welding equipment, cutting torches, and drift pins. In case of such problems, the
following will apply:
1. The AISC "Code of Standard Practice", latest edition, specifically states under "Correction of
Errors" that cutting, reaming and use of drift pins are a part of standard erection practice:
"Normal erection operations include the correction of minor misfits by moderate amounts of
reaming, chipping, welding or cutting, and the drawing of elements into line through the use
of drift pins. Errors that cannot be corrected by the foregoing means or that require major
changes in member configuration are reported immediately to the owner and fabricator by the
erector. This is done in order to enable whoever is responsible either to correct the error or
to approve the most efficient and economic method of correction to be used by others."
2. Should a problem develop because of manufacturing or engineering errors, FLSmidth will not
accept back charges, unless they are authorized in advance and in writing by your FLSmidth
Project Manager. Before corrective work is started, the erector must obtain an FLSmidth Field
Work Order that must include a cost limitation. Payment may be refused for corrective work
that is done without the above authorization.
Authorized charges will be paid only on the basis of standard direct field labor hours, material,
and variable overhead. Other charges will not be allowed.
3. Drawings and erection or installation instructions must be followed. The drawings will govern
in case of minor discrepancies. In the event of major discrepancies, notify your FLSmidth
representative immediately, referring to the Table of Contents for the location of the Offices
page.
4. Grouting of tanks, feed box and discharge box, if required, is not by FLSmidth. Use non-
shrinking type grout (not by FLSmidth).
Contents 20
5. If a protective coating (paint, rubber, etc.) is to be field applied to the mechanism, it may
need to be applied to some parts before they are installed. Parts that must be coated before
installation are those that would be inaccessible after installation.
3.2 Storage
When the equipment is not to be installed immediately, proper storage is important to ensure
warranty protection.
1. Store motors, if shipped separately, in a dry, ventilated building if possible. Refer to the Motor
Manufacturer's Instructions. If stored outdoors, cover with a tarpaulin to protect against rain,
moisture and dust.
2. Store the drive mechanisms by elevating them on blocks, etc., above the ground level and
cover with tarpaulins.
3. A suitable corrosion inhibitive agent should be applied to all surfaces subject to rust or
corrosion, if the storage will be more than 2 months or under adverse conditions.
4. Check for the formation of rust, especially on bright or unpainted steel surfaces. Remove rust
or corrosion and apply a suitable corrosion inhibitor.
3.3 Storage of Rubber Products

Rubber products in storage can be adversely affected by the following: temperature, humidity, ozone,
sunlight, oils, solvents, corrosive liquids and fumes, insects and rodents, and radiation.
1. Rubber parts should be protected from the sun and from physical damage by objects that can
cut or tear.
2. The warehousing area should be relatively cool, dark, and free from dampness and mildew.
All rubber products should be stored on a first-in, first-out basis since even under these
conditions an unusual length of time in storage can result in the deterioration of certain
products.
3. Rubber products should not be stored under conditions of high or low humidity.
4. The ideal storage temperature for rubber products is 10 to 21°C (50 to 70°F) with a maximum
limit of 38°C (100°F). If stored below 0°C (32°F), some products may become stiff and should
be warmed before being placed in service. Rubber products should not be stored near sources
of heat, such as radiators and base heaters.
5. To protect against the adverse effects of ozone, rubber products should not be stored near
electrical equipment that may generate ozone and should not be stored for any lengthy period
in geographical areas of known high ozone concentrations. Exposure to direct and reflected
sunlight should also be avoided.
6. Whenever feasible, rubber products should be stored in their original shipping containers,
especially when such containers are wooden crates or cardboard cartons, since this will
Contents 21
provide protection against the deteriorating effects of oils, solvents, and corrosive liquids and
will also afford some protection against ozone and sunlight.
7. Since certain rodents and insects thrive on rubber products, adequate protection should be
provided against them.
3.4 Required Special Tools, Materials and Supplies

• Belt Tension Measurement Tool
• Transit
• Torque Wrench
• Straight Edge
• Machinist Level
• “Never Seize” Type Compound
• Welding Equipment
• Lifting Equipment
• Non-Shrinking Type Grout
• Shims
3.5 Tank Support Structure

1. The foundation must support the Total Weight of the tank, mechanism and slurry, as specified
on the Anchor Plan and Foundation Loading drawing. The supports should also be designed to
achieve and maintain the level tolerances, below, when filled with slurry.
2. A tank should be level in two directions (90o) within ±3 mm (1/8") in 3048 mm (10'-0).
A level mounting surface may save leveling time later when a tank is installed. If pre-leveling
will be done, check the foundation for level with a transit, from side to side and in the
direction of flow. Shim or grout for level referring to the Tank Installation instructions on a
following page.
3. Note the lift out height of the mechanism for determining clearance for lifting equipment (not
by FLSmidth). Refer to the General Arrangement drawing.
3.6 Tank and Component Lifting
Contents 22
WARNING: Use extreme care when lifting structural components, to prevent

injuries to yourself or others. Also, anyone entering the area of this equipment
must be wearing adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses, safety
shoes, hard hat, etc.
WARNING: Stand clear as the equipment is lifted!
CAUTION: All rigging and lifting must be done by experienced personnel who
structural components.
CAUTION: Make sure the rigging and hoist equipment are of adequate
capacity.
1. The tank, internal components (draft tube, radial launders, etc.), feed box and discharge box
will be shipped separately for field assembly.
2. Check the crane and rigging capacities to be sure they are capable of supporting the weight of
the equipment as given on the Final Assembly drawing and on the parts list.
3. Before each component or assembly is removed from the carrier, check to be sure the
blocking, bracing and banding securing it to the carrier have been removed and it is ready for
moving.
WARNING: Do not remove the internal blocking, bracing or any other

supporting or protecting materials until the tank installation is completed.
4. Use multiple-point lifting whenever possible. Use all lifting lugs provided. When lifting the
assembled mechanism assembly, make sure that the lifting cables/chains are vertical as not to
impart angular loads into the mechanism assembly. When lifting the gearbox and rotor
assembly, make sure that the lifting cables/chains are vertical as not to impart angular loads
into the gearbox. Refer to the "Rigging Illustrations" on the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
5. When lifting structural members of this equipment, avoid twisting or bending the
members. Use spreader beams, as necessary, to fully support the pieces as they are lifted.
6. Make sure the equipment being lifted or the lifting equipment cannot come into contact with
overhead electrical cables, etc.
Contents 23
7. Lift the equipment an inch or two off the carrier to be sure it is free to be moved and balanced
correctly. Keep it level at all times during the lifting. It may be necessary to use additional
snubber cable to stabilize the unit.
8. Do not bounce the equipment or move it in jerks and never allow it to strike the ground,
foundation or other objects.
3.7 Two Piece Tank Installation

1. Referring to the General Arrangement and Tank and Component Lifting procedures on a
previous page and using the lifting lugs provided, set the first tank bottom half in place on the
foundation, orienting as shown on the Final Circuit Assembly and Cell Assembly drawings. Use
multiple point lifting and spreader beams to provide a vertical lift from the lifting lugs provided
on the tank half to prevent bending of the tank shell. Check the bottom half of tank walls for
concentricity after the tank bottom half is in position on the foundation.
2. Using the tank bottom as a template, mark the anchor bolt (not by FLSmidth) locations on the
foundation.
3. Referring to the Tank and Component Lifting procedures on a previous page and using the
lifting lugs provided, remove the tank bottom from the foundation. Use multiple point lifting
and spreader beams to provide a vertical lift from the lifting lugs provided to prevent bending
of the tank shell.
4. Install the tank anchor bolts (not by FLSmidth). Refer to the Anchor Plan and Foundation
Loading drawing.
lifting lugs provided, place the tank bottom carefully over the anchor bolts and on the
foundation. Use care to prevent bending of the tank shell and to avoid damage to the tank
and bolts.
6. Referring to the General Arrangement and Tank and Component Lifting procedures and using
the lifting lugs provided, set the top tank in place on top of the tank bottom, orienting as
shown on the Final Circuit Assembly and Cell Assembly drawings. Use multiple point lifting
and spreader beams to provide a vertical lift from the lifting lugs provided on the tank to
prevent bending of the tank shell.
7. Adjust for alignment with the bottom tank then bolt the top half of the tank to the bottom
tank, using the fasteners specified. Refer to the Torque Values drawing for fasteners
tightening specifications. The tank walls must be concentric with the center of the tank.
8. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, field weld the splice connection between the top and
bottom tank sections.
9. Install the field rubber splice to the welded splice.
10. Check the tank top rim angle for level. Check tank level in two directions (90o) side to side.
Refer to Figure 1. The tank must be level within 10 mm (3/8") overall.
Contents 24
11. Level the tank by shimming with stainless steel shims (not by FLSmidth) between the tank
bottom and the foundation at the anchor bolt locations. Shims must be used where there is a
gap between the tank bottom and the foundation.
12. Install and secure the tank anchor nuts (tank anchor bolts and nuts are not by FLSmidth).
13. Weld the washers (not by FLSmidth) to the tank, as shown on the Foundation Loads drawing.
14. Grout (not by FLSmidth) between the tank bottom and the foundation, as required, using a
free flowing gravity fed grout (not by FLSmidth). A temporary dam (not by FLSmidth) will be
required around the base of the tank to retain the grout in place until it sets. The tank bottom
must be fully supported by the grout without gaps or voids. Allow the grout to set completely,
then, remove the temporary grout dam (not by FLSmidth).
NOTE: FLSmidth is not responsible for grouting the tank, the grouting material, or accuracy of
placement. Grouting specifications and placement of the grout are solely the responsibility of
the user, or his agent.
Figure 1
1 – Tank rim angle 2 – Peripheral launder (ref.) 3 – Maximum 10mm (3/8”) overall
15. Apply urethane sealant to the tank discharge flange.
16. Referring to the above procedures, assemble the next tank in place on the support structure
(not by FLSmidth), orienting as shown on the Final Circuit Assembly drawings and aligning the
tank-to-tank flanges.
Contents 25
17. Place the velocity ramp in position and complete the tank-to-tank connection using the
fasteners specified on the Final Circuit Assembly drawing.
NOTE: The velocity ramp is located on the upstream side of the connection flange.
18. Grout between the tank bottom and the foundation, referring to the above procedures.
19. Install the remaining tanks in the row, referring to the above procedures.
3.8 Internal Component Installation

1. Referring to the part numbers on the Cell Assembly drawing, install the anti-sanding plates in
the tank, using the fasteners specified.
2. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, assemble the velocity cone segments, using the
fasteners specified. Secure all fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
3. Referring to the Tank and Component Lifting procedures on a previous page and using all of
the lifting lugs provided, set the velocity cone assembly in position on the supports in the tank
bottom. Mount the velocity cone to the supports using the capscrews and washers specified.
4. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, place the false floor segments in position on the
supports in the tank bottom. Mount the false floor segments to the outer ring of supports,
using the capscrews and washers specified.
5. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, place the false floor tabs in position on the supports in
the tank bottom. Mount the false floor tabs to the supports, using the capscrews and washers
specified.
6. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, assemble the draft tube halves, using the fasteners
specified. Secure all fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
the lifting lugs provided, set the draft tube assembly in position on the false floor segments,
aligning the bolt holes in the draft tube assembly with the inner row of false floor mounting
bolt holes. Mount the daft tube assembly (and false floor segments) to the inner row of
supports in the tank bottom using the capscrews and washers specified.
8. Apply a 3mm bead of sealant around the grommet openings and bolt holes in the grommet
plate, as shown in Figure 1 and the Grommet Plate Assembly drawing.
9. Mount the grommets to the grommet plate, using the capscrews, nuts and washers specified.
10. Install the bolt caps, using the sealant specified to secure them in position.
11. Mount the grommet plate to the tank wall spool, using the fasteners specified on the Hinged
Dart Valve Assembly drawing.
Contents 26
5
2 6
1
3 4
Figure 2
1 – Grommet plate 2 – Grommet 3 – 3mm bead of sealant between

grommet and grommet plate
4 – Capscrew, nut and (2) washers 5 – Bolt cap 6 – Use the specified sealant to
secure bolt cap
3.9 Feed Box Installation

the lifting lugs provided, set the feed box in place on the support structure (not by FLSmidth),
orienting as shown on the Final Circuit Assembly drawings and aligning the feed box-to-tank
flanges.
2. Using the feed box as a template, mark the anchor bolt (not by FLSmidth) locations on the
foundation.
the lifting lugs provided, remove the feed box from the support structure.
4. Install the feed box anchor bolts (not by FLSmidth). Refer to the Anchor Plan and Foundation
Loading drawing.
5. Apply urethane sealant to the feed flange of the first tank in the circuit.
Contents 27
lifting lugs provided, place the feed box assembly carefully over the anchor bolts and on the
foundation. Use care to avoid damage to the feed box and bolts.
7. Place the velocity ramp in position and complete the feed box-to-tank connection using the
fasteners specified on the Final Circuit Assembly drawing.
8. Grout (not by FLSmidth) between the feed box bottom and the foundation, as required, using
a free flowing gravity fed grout (not by FLSmidth). A temporary dam (not by FLSmidth) will
be required around the base of the feed box to retain the grout in place until it sets. The feed
box bottom must be fully supported by the grout without gaps or voids. Allow the grout to set
completely, then, remove the temporary grout dam (not by FLSmidth).
NOTE: FLSmidth is not responsible for grouting the feed box, the grouting material, or
accuracy of placement. Grouting specifications and placement of the grout are solely the
responsibility of the user, or his agent.
3.10 Discharge Box Installation

the lifting lugs provided, set the discharge box in place on the support structure (not by
FLSmidth), orienting as shown on the Final Circuit Assembly drawings and aligning the
discharge box-to-tank flanges.
2. Using the discharge box as a template, mark the anchor bolt (not by FLSmidth) locations on
the foundation.
the lifting lugs provided, remove the discharge box from the support structure.
4. Install the discharge box anchor bolts (not by FLSmidth). Refer to the Anchor Plan and
Foundation Loading drawing.
5. Apply urethane sealant to the discharge flange of the last tank in the circuit
lifting lugs provided, place the discharge box assembly carefully over the anchor bolts and on
the foundation. Use care to avoid damage to the discharge box and bolts.
7. Place the velocity ramp in position and complete the discharge box-to-tank connection using
the fasteners specified on the Final Circuit Assembly drawing.
8. Grout (not by FLSmidth) between the discharge box bottom and the foundation, as required,
using a free flowing gravity fed grout (not by FLSmidth). A temporary dam (not by FLSmidth)
will be required around the base of the discharge box to retain the grout in place until it sets.
Contents 28
The discharge box bottom must be fully supported by the grout without gaps or voids. Allow
the grout to set completely, then, remove the temporary grout dam (not by FLSmidth).
NOTE: FLSmidth is not responsible for grouting the discharge box, the grouting material, or
accuracy of placement. Grouting specifications and placement of the grout are solely the
responsibility of the user, or his agent.
9. Apply a 3mm bead of sealant around the grommet openings and bolt holes in the grommet
plate, as shown in Figure 3 and the Grommet Plate Assembly drawing.
10. Mount the grommets to the grommet plate, using the capscrews, nuts and washers specified.
12. Mount the grommet plate to the discharge box spool, using the fasteners specified on the
Hinged Dart Valve Assembly drawing.
5
2 6
1
3 4
Figure 3

4 – Capscrew, nut and (2) washers 5 – Bolt cap 6 – Use the specified sealant to
secure bolt cap
Contents 29
3.11 Manway Door, Discharge Box Drain Cover and Blind

Flange Installation
3.11.1 Cell Assembly Manway Door

1. Referring to the Cell Assembly drawing, mount the manway door swing arm to the bracket on
the tank, using the cotter pin specified.
2. Mount the manway lifting hook to the door arm trunnion, using the washer, hex nut and jam
nut specified.
3. Hang the manway door from the manway lifting hook.
4. Using the door arm trunnion, swing the manway door into position on the tank manway door
flange. Mount the manway door to the flange, using the fasteners specified. Tighten all
fasteners equally to obtain a complete seal.
3.11.2 Feed Box and Discharge Box Mandoors

1. Referring to the Feed Box Assembly or Discharge Box Assembly drawings, mount the manway
door swing arm to the bracket on the box, using the cotter pin specified.
2. Mount the manway lifting hook to the manway door swing arm, using the washer, hex nut and
jam nut specified.
3. Hang the mandoor from the manway lifting hook.
4. Using the manway door swing arm, swing the mandoor into position on the box mandoor
flange. Mount the mandoor to the flange, using the fasteners specified. Tighten all fasteners
equally to obtain a complete seal.
3.11.3 Discharge Box Drain Cover

1. Referring to the Discharge box Assembly drawing, mount the discharge box drain cover in the
discharge box, using the capscrews, nuts and washers specified.
3.11.4 Blind Flange Installation

1. Referring to the Cell Assembly, Feed Box Assembly and Discharge Box Assembly drawings,
mount the blind flanges to the tank and box spools, using the fasteners specified.
2. Tighten all fasteners equally in a cross diameter sequence to obtain a complete seal.
3.12 Baffles, Radial Launders and Weirs Installation

1. Referring to the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing, mount the baffle plates to
the brackets on the peripheral launder, using the fasteners specified.
Contents 30
2. Referring to the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing, field cut to length adhere the
adhesive foam strip to the outside edge of the radial launder face.
3. Referring to the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing, mount the radial launders to
the brackets on the peripheral launder, using the fasteners specified.
4. Referring to the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing and Radial Launder Assembly
drawing, install the radial launder backing plates, using the fasteners specified. Do not secure
the fasteners at this time.
5. Referring to the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing and Figure 4, cut and install
the circumferential weir bars. Install the weir clips over the weir bars and launder lip at the
intervals specified on the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing to hold the weir bars
in contact with the launder lip all around the periphery.
3
1
Figure 4
1 – Circumferential weir bar 2 – Peripheral launder lip 3 – Weir clip
6. Adjusting all radial launders and weir bars so that the peripheral launder of the tank is level to
within 6mm overall, as specified on the Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly drawing, and
secure the radial launder backing plate fasteners to clamp the ends of the weir bars in place.
3.13 Support Beam Installation

1. Referring to the part numbers on the Final Circuit Assembly drawing, mount the support
beams to the tanks, using the fasteners specified.
Contents 31
2. Center the fasteners in their mounting holes on one support beam then tighten to 50% of
specified torque. Refer to the Torque Values drawing.
3. Secure the fasteners on the second beam hand tight only at this time. Refer to Figure 5.
4 4
1
3 3
Figure 5
1 – Support beam 2 – Support beam 3 – Torque beam-to-tank fasteners

to 50% of specified torque
4 – Tighten support beam-to-tank fasteners hand tighten only
3.13.1 Mechanism Assembly

1. Place the mechanism support frame on the maintenance stand or temporary shoring that will
allow installation of the standpipe and crowder, disperser, disperser hood and star rotor.
Refer to Tank and Component Lifting on a previous page.
NOTE: The mechanism assembly may be built in position inside the tank. Contact your
FLSmidth representative for additional information if this method of installation is desired.
2. Place a heavy bead of urethane adhesive sealant on the top web of the mechanism support
frame, inboard of the reducer mounting plate bolt holes, as specified on the Mechanism
Assembly drawing. Refer to Figure 6.
Contents 32
Figure 6
1 – Mechanism support 2 – Reducer mounting plate 3 – Place a heavy bead of urethane

mounting holes adhesive sealant inboard of
mounting holes
3. Mount the reducer mounting plate to the mechanism support frame, using the fasteners
specified. Refer to the Torque Values drawing for fastener tightening specifications.
4. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing and reducer manufacturer’s instructions, mount
the vertical reducer in position on the reducer mounting plate, orienting as shown and using
the fasteners specified.
5. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, place the air seal and air seal retainer (halves)
around the reducer housing and bolt them to the reducer mounting plate, using the fasteners
specified.
Contents 33
6. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the extension shaft to the gear reducer
coupling, using the fasteners specified.
7. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the star rotor to the extension shaft,
using the fasteners specified.
8. Check the extension shaft and star rotor assembly for alignment (runout) with the reducer
output shaft. The shaft must be in alignment within ± 1.5mm (1/16”) at the bottom of the
star rotor. Adjust, if necessary, by shimming between the extension shaft flange and the gear
reducer coupling flange, using stainless steel shims (not by FLSmidth) between the mounting
capscrews. After all adjustments are completed, secure the fasteners referring to the torque
value specified on the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
9. Assemble the standpipe and crowder segments as specified on the Mechanism Assembly
drawing.
10. Place a heavy bead of urethane adhesive sealant on the top flange of the standpipe and
crowder assembly, inboard of the mounting bolt holes. Refer to Figure 7.
3 3
2 2
Figure 7
1 – Crowder and standpipe 2 – Place a heavy bead of urethane 3 – Crowder and standpipe
assembly adhesive sealant inboard of assembly-to-mechanism support
mounting holes mounting holes
11. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the standpipe and crowder assembly to
the mechanism support frame, using the fasteners specified. Refer to the Torque Values
drawing for fastener tightening specifications.
12. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, assemble the disperser segments, using the
fasteners specified. Install the bolt caps over the capscrew heads and nuts.
13. Mount the disperser assembly to the standpipe and crowder assembly, using the fasteners
specified.
Contents 34
14. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the hood sector sections to the
disperser assembly using the capscrews with washers, hood sector bosses and hood sector
clamps.
15. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, connect the hood sector sections to each
other, using the fasteners specified at the splices. Tighten the sector-to-sector capscrews and
nuts only until the rubber begins to extrude. Install the bolt caps over the capscrew heads
and nuts.
16. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the motor mounting frame to the
mechanism support frame, using the fasteners specified.
17. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the support angles to the motor
terminal box support. Mount the terminal box support with support angles to the mechanism
support frame, using the fasteners specified
18. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the motor mount rails to the motor
mounting frame, using the fasteners specified.
19. Referring to the Drive Assembly drawing, mount the motor to the motor mount rails and
motor terminal box support, using the fasteners specified.
3.13.2 Mechanism Assembly Installation

capacity.
1. Check the crane and rigging capacities to be sure they are capable of supporting the weight of
the equipment as given on the Mechanism Assembly drawing and on the parts list.
Contents 35
2. Use multiple point lifting and spreader beams (not by FLSmidth) to provide a vertical lift from
each lifting point and to fully support the mechanism assembly as it is lifted. Refer to the
Mechanism Assembly Rigging Illustration on the Mechanism Assembly drawing for
3. Make sure the equipment being lifted or the lifting equipment cannot come into contact with
overhead electrical cables, etc.
4. Lift the mechanism assembly an inch or two off the the maintenance stand or support shoring
to be sure it is free to be moved and balanced correctly. Keep it level at all times during the
lifting. It may be necessary to use additional snubber cable to stabilize the mechanism
assembly.
5. Do not bounce the equipment or move it in jerks and never allow it to strike the ground,
foundation or other objects.
6. Place the mechanism assembly in position on the support beams, as shown on the Final Circuit
Assembly drawing, taking care not to allow the star rotor to contact the draft tube.
7. Referring to the Final Circuit Assembly drawing, attach the mechanism support to the support
beams, using the fasteners specified.
8. Referring to Figure 8, use come-alongs or chain falls (not by FLSmidth) attached to the
support beams to pull the loose support beam and mechanism support toward the secured
(beam-to-tank fasteners torqued to 50%) support beam and close any gaps at the mechanism
support-to-support beam connections.
3 3
5 5 2
6 6
4
1
3 3
Figure 8
Contents 36
1 – Support beam (beam-to-tank 2 – Support beam (beam-to-tank 3 – Shim plates (spacers) specified
fastneners torque to 50% of fasteners hand tight only)
specified torque)
4 – Mechanism assembly 5 – Come-alongs (not by FLSmidth) 6 – Pull second support beam and
mechanism support toward first
support beam
9. Torque tighten all mechanism support-to-support beam connection fasteners, as specified on

the Torque Values drawing.
NOTE: There must not be any gaps in this connection. All four end plates of the mechanism
support structure must have complete contact with the the main support beams. You must
contact your FLSmidth representative if this cannot be achieved!
10. Check the extension shaft and rotor for 0.8mm (0.030”) per 305mm (1 ft). plumb using a
machinist’s level on the extension shaft. Refer to Figure 9. Adjust for shaft plumb, if
necessary, by shimming between the support beams or outriggers and the mounting pads on
the tank using stainless steel shim stock (not by FLSmidth). Secure the fasteners at all
support beam-to-mounting pad and outrigger-to-mounting pad connections to full torque,
referring to the Torque Values drawing.
11. Check the star rotor for ± 6mm (¼”) concentricity with the draft tube. If the above tolerance
cannot be achieved, this is an indication that the draft tube is out of position and should be
adjusted accordingly to bring the rotor and draft tube into alignment.
2
3
Figure 9
1 – Star rotor 2 – Extension shaft 3 – Adjust for 0.8mm (0.030”) per

305mm (1 ft.) plum
Contents 37
4 – Machinist’s level 5 – Gear reducer coupling
12. Assemble the halves of the split collar together around the star rotor, using the fasteners
specified. Orient the splice of the split collar approximately 90° from the splice of the draft
tube, as specified on the Cell Assembly drawing.
13. Attach the split collar to the draft tube, using the fasteners specified.
14. Mount the reducer pipe on the manual air inlet assembly mounting flange on the mechanism
support, using the fasteners specified.
15. Mount the butterfly valve and air control stub in position on the reducer pipe, orienting as
shown and using the fasteners specified. Make sure the butterfly valve is positioned in the
fully opened position.
16. Mount the blanking plate to the reducer mounting plate, using the fasteners specified.
17. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly and Belt Drive Guard Assembly drawings, mount the
belt drive guard in position.
18. Mount the drive sheave on the motor shaft.
19. Mount the driven sheave on the reducer input shaft.
20. Check the sheaves for parallel alignment and adjust, as necessary. Secure all sheave
fasteners.
21. Place the V-belts in position on the reducer sheave.
22. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, loosen the motor-to-motor mount rail
fasteners and, using the two take-up adjusting screws, adjust the position of the motor to
allow just enough slack for the V-belts to slip over the motor sheave and remain in place.
There may be conditions where the sheaves provided will have more grooves than the number
of belts provided. If this is the case, install the belts in parallel grooves.
23. Tension the V-belts by turning the take-up adjusting screws equally, together, to take up the
slack in the belts. Proper alignment distributes the load equally to each V-belt.
24. For proper belt tensioning, refer to the belt tension plate on the belt guard, and as shown in
Figure 10, for the required tension and deflection per belt. A V-belt drive will successfully
transmit its rated horsepower if the belts are properly tensioned. Do not exceed the specified
belt tension.
NOTE: Excessive belt tension will cause excessive belt wear, reducing bearing life and may
result in possible motor or reducer failure.
25. After tensioning the V-Belts, tighten down adjusting screw jam nuts and secure the motor-to-
motor mount rail fasteners.
26. Later, after a few days operation, the belts will seat themselves in the sheave grooves, and it
may become necessary to readjust them. If the belts squeal, other than during start-up,
repeat the procedure for proper belt tensioning.
Contents 38
27. Referring to the Belt Drive Guard Assembly drawing, mount the belt drive guard cover in
position on the belt drive guard.
28. Referring to the part numbers on the Belt Drive Guard Assembly drawing, mount the reducer
shaft covers and motor shaft covers in position on the belt drive guard.
3 2
Figure 10
1 – CAUTION: Do not overtighten 2 – Lbs./Kg. max per belt/band 3 - Deflection

V-belts
29. Lubricate the motor and the reducer assembly, referring to the manufacturer’s instructions in
the “Reference Manual” furnished separately.
30. Connect electrical wiring to the motor and the reducer assembly, referring to the
manufacturer’s instructions in the "Reference Manual".
3.14 Hinged Dart Valve Assembly Installation

1. Mount the connection spool and wear plate to the hinged dart frame, using the fasteners
specified on the Hinged Dart Valve Assembly drawing.
2. Mount the dart valve to the connection spool, using the fasteners specified on the Hinged Dart
Valve Assembly drawing.
3. Mount the hinge assemblies to the hinged dart frame, using the fasteners specified.
4. Referring to the Tank and Component Lifting procedures on a previous page, set the hinged
dart valve assembly in position in the tank or discharge box, supporting it in place with
temporary shoring from the tank bottom.
Contents 39
5. Mount the hinge assemblies to the tank or discharge box brackets, as shown on the Hinged
Dart Valve Assembly drawing, using the fasteners specified.
6. Adjust the dart valve assembly, as necessary, to center the dart valve in the grommet plate
assembly (installed previously). Secure the fasteners.
7. Mount the dart valve rod to the hinge assembly, using the valve rod link plates and fasteners
specified on the Hinged Dart Valve Assembly drawing.
8. Mount the dart valve connector assembly to the top end of the dart valve rod.
9. Mount the trunnion mounted actuator frame to the tank or discharge box, using the fasteners
specified.
10. Mount the actuator assembly to the actuator bracket, using the fasteners specified.
11. Mount the piston rod flange to the actuator rod.
12. Mount the trunnion pins to the actuator bracket, using the fasteners specified.
13. Place the pivot frame assemblies on the trunnion pins.
14. Set the actuator assembly with actuator bracket and pivot frames in position on the trunnion
mounted actuator frame, bolting the pivot frame assemblies to the trunnion mounted actuator
frame with the fasteners specified. Support the actuator assembly in position with temporary
blocking.
15. With the dart valve seated in the grommet, adjust the dart valve connector assembly for
contact with the piston rod flange.
16. Attach the piston rod flange to the connector assembly, using the fasteners specified.
17. Secure the connector assembly in place on the dart valve rod, using the hex jam nut.
18. Connect pneumatic control piping and electrical wiring to the actuator, referring to Electrical
Power and Controls Installation on a following page and to the actuator manufacturer’s
instructions in the "Reference Manual".
19. Operate the actuator and check for smooth operation of the dart valve assembly and for
proper seating of the dart valve in the grommet. Adjust the dart valve assembly, as
necessary. Secure the all fasteners.
3.15 Level Sensor Assembly Installation

1. Insert the adjustable support post into the top of the level sensor mounting bracket, adjust for
the dimension specified on the Level Sensor Assembly drawing, and install the fasteners
specified. Note that this dimension may need to be reset during operation to meet actual
operating conditions.
2. Referring to the ultrasonic transmitter manufacturer’s instructions, mount the ultrasonic

transmitter to the adjustable support post.
Contents 40
3. Mount the adjustable guide bracket to the level sensor mounting bracket, positioning it as
specified on the Level Sensor Assembly drawing.
4. Place the level sensor mounting bracket with adjustable support post, adjustable guide bracket
and, ultrasonic transmitter on the mechanism support beam, as shown on the Level Sensor
Assembly, and Final Circuit Assembly drawings. Attach the mounting bracket to the
mechanism support beam using the level sensor clamp plates and fasteners specified.
5. Mount the top end of the level sensor brace to the level sensor mounting bracket, as shown on
the Level Sensor Assembly drawing, using the U-bolt, nuts and washers specified.
6. Attach the bottom end of the level sensor brace to the outrigger beam, as shown on the Level
Sensor Assembly drawing, using the anchor bolt, nut and washer specified.
7. Make sure that the opening in the adjustable guide bracket is in alignment with the float rod
hole in the level sensor mounting bracket.
8. Insert the float rod up through the level sensor mounting bracket and the adjustable guide
bracket.
9. Mount the level sensor target plate to the float and rod, using the fasteners specified.
10. Position the float at the maximum anticipated float level position and check the “minimum”
distance between the target plate and the ultrasonic transmitter. Adjust the elevation of the
ultrasonic transmitter, if necessary, by repositioning the adjustable support post.
11. Refer to Electrical Power and Controls Installation on a following page.
3.16 Froth Sensor Assembly Installation

1. Mount the ultrasonic sensor on the froth sensor mounting bracket referring to the sensor
manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Mount the froth sensor mounting bracket on the mechanism support beam, as shown on the
Froth Sensor Assembly, and Final Circuit Assembly drawings, using the level sensor clamp
plates and fasteners specified.
3. Refer to Electrical Power and Controls Installation on a following page.
3.17 Platform Assembly Installation

1. Referring to the part numbers on the Platform Assembly drawings, mount the platform beams
on the mechanism support beams and discharge box, using the fasteners specified. Secure
the fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
2. Referring to the Platform Assembly drawings, mount the stair stringers to the platform beams,
using the fasteners specified. Secure the fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
3. Referring to the Platform Assembly drawings, mount interconnection assemblies to the

platform beams, using the fasteners specified. Secure the fasteners, referring to the Torque
Values drawing
Contents 41
4. Referring to the Stairway Assembly drawing, mount the stair treads to the stair stringers,
using the fasteners specified. Secure the fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
5. Referring to the part numbers on the Platform Assembly and Interconnection Assembly
drawings, install the grating on the platform frames and interconnection assemblies. Make
sure the grating sections fit together without any dangerous gaps or openings. They must fit
flush without sharp corners or edges and they must be secure.
6. Referring to the part numbers on the Platform Assembly drawings, install the walkway,
interconnection assembly and stairway handrails, using the fasteners specified. Secure the
fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
7. Referring to the Platform General Arrangement drawing, install all platform and walkway
access (not by FLSmidth).
3.18 Electrical Power and Controls Installation

FLSmidth does not furnish, locate or install the interconnecting wiring, pneumatic piping, etc.
However, note that all interconnecting wiring and wiring connections must be in compliance with local
and national electrical codes.
Be aware:
1. All wiring must be installed in heavy-current conduit that is securely anchored. Heavy flexible
conduit must be used for all motor wiring. Bare conductors and wires are prohibited.
2. Whenever aluminum to copper or other dissimilar wiring materials connect, special

splicer/spacers must be used to prevent contact of the materials. Also, an anti-oxidant is
recommended at the connections. Anti-oxidant application prevents galvanic corrosion that
can lead to electrical fire and dangerous breaks in the connections.
3. All electrical boxes and panels must be closed during operation or when the power is on to the
equipment. Observe all warnings on the electrical panels and boxes.
4. Connect the mechanism drive motors to power according to the motor Manufacturer's
Instructions and be sure motors are grounded. Rotor direction is a customer choice.
However, FLSmidth recommends that the direction of rotation alternates from tank to tank
(i.e.: every other rotor has the opposite, or reverse, direction of rotation of the rotor in the
previous tank).
WARNING: Do not operate equipment with open electrical boxes or fittings.
WARNING: All guards and protective devices must be installed before the
machine is started. Contact with belts, sheaves, or couplings can result in
injury.
Contents 42
5. To ensure safe maintenance and repairs, the motors electrical service should have separate
lockouts and keys. And to prevent accidental restarting in the event of a power outage or
overload, the wiring must have a reset or device that will not allow automatic starting of the
motors when power is restored.
6. Install the pneumatic piping to the dart valve actuators, referring to the manufacturer’s
instructions in the "Reference Manual". FLSmidth does not furnish, locate or install the
interconnecting pneumatic piping. All piping must be independently supported.
NOTE: Whenever the installation, lubrication, maintenance, or operation of an accessory piece

of equipment, which has been furnished by FLSmidth but was manufactured by a third party,
is discussed in the FLSmidth instruction manual, this information is provided only as a
guideline and that information must be verified by consulting the manufacturer’s instruction
manuals, which are the ruling documents for the accessory equipment. The manufacturer’s
instructions will govern in case of minor discrepancies. In the event of major discrepancies,
notify your FLSmidth representative immediately.
7. Install electrical wiring to the dart valve actuator, referring to the manufacturer’s instructions
in the "Reference Manual".
8. Install electrical wiring to the level sensor assembly ultrasonic transmitter, referring to the
manufacturer’s instructions in the "Reference Manual".
9. Install electrical wiring to the froth sensor assembly sensor, referring to the manufacturer’s
instructions in the "Reference Manual".
3.19 Final inspection before start-up

1. Inspect the mechanisms, tanks, and feed and discharge boxes for any loose nuts and bolts, for
tools, debris and any other loose items. Make sure all guards, protective devices and covers
are in place.
2. Water-test the tank and check for leakage; minor tank leakage may occur at the bolted
connections, but it will stop when sealed off by fine solids in the feed slurry. Adjust or make
corrections, as required.
3. Check the controls for operation.
WARNING: Study these instructions carefully before putting the machines into
service to ensure safe, satisfactory start-up and operation. All operating
personnel must read and understand these instructions.
WARNING: If the machines will be out of service for a period of time, the
electrical service must be locked out with an approved lockout and key to
prevent accidental start-up and electrical dangers.
Contents 43
3.20 Mechanical Check
3.20.1 Final Mechanical Check

At the completion of erection or installation of the equipment, an FLSmidth Service Representative
must complete a final field mechanical check of the equipment. Unless accepted and signed-off by the
Service Representative at the completion, the warranty will not be in effect.
Previous inspections will not count towards final acceptance unless a sign-off is obtained, in writing,
from the Service Representative. Also, depending on any previous inspections, this final check may
be an additional paid service call.
3.20.2 Arrangements for Service

The "Final Mechanical Check List", included at the back of this manual, must be completed for each
mechanism furnished before contacting your FLSmidth representative to arrange for the final field
mechanical check.
Arrangements for final field mechanical check should be made at least two weeks in advance with your
FLSmidth representative. Refer to the Offices page to contact him.
3.20.3 DO NOT Fill the Tank with Water

The mechanical check cannot be done if the tank is filled with water. If the mechanical check cannot
be performed, an additional paid service day will be charged.
Contents 44
Chapter 4: Lubrication
The three parts of the flotation cell that require lubrication are the motor, vertical reducer and hinged
dart valve assembly actuator.
MOTOR: Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for lubricant, method and service interval.
VERTICAL REDUCER: Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for lubricant, method and service
interval.
HINGED DART VALVE ASSEMBLY ACTUATOR: Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions for
lubricant, method and service interval.
Contents 45
Chapter 5: Maintenance
No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent
accidents. Safety features and devices are meant only to supplement proper, careful, and safe
practices on the part of the individual.
WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

ignored, severe personal injury or death may occur. Safety practices accepted
by the industry, as well as those dictated by the responsible regulatory agencies
must be followed.
PERSONNEL SAFETY WARNINGS
WARNING: Use extreme care when working around rotating or other moving
parts, to prevent injuries to yourself or others. Also, anyone entering the area
of this equipment must wear adequate safety equipment such as safety glasses,
safety shoes, hard hat, hearing protection, etc. Loose fitting clothing,
uncovered long hair, or jewelry must not be worn when working around rotating
or moving equipment.
WARNING: Keep foreign objects, hands, etc. away from moving parts (chains,
sprockets, belts, sheaves, etc.). Do not operate this equipment if guards have
been removed, or are damaged. All guards and safety devices must be properly
installed and functional before operating this equipment.
Contents 46
WARNING: Lock-out power from electrical equipment using a manual breaker

or disconnect switch before starting any work or maintenance on the
equipment. Lock and tag disconnect switch so it cannot be closed.
WARNING: Experience with and understanding of this equipment is essential

for the safe operation and maintenance of the equipment. Therefore, in case of
a question on how to safely proceed, contact FLSmidth immediately.
WARNING: The fumes given off during welding and cutting can be injurious to
the operator's health. Some fumes, such as those produced when working with
Zinc; Cadmium and painted surfaces can be toxic.
WARNING: Use hearing protection anytime there is exposure to noise.
BEFORE OPERATION, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR OF THIS EQUIPMENT:
Read and understand the instructions in this manual.
As with any other mechanical equipment, there are safety concerns associated with the operation and
maintenance of FLSmidth supplied equipment. It is absolutely essential that operators, maintenance
personnel, and supervisors be instructed in safe working practices
Only personnel who have been trained in safety procedures for this equipment should be allowed
around or in the area of the FLSmidth equipment or its auxiliaries. Training can be done by your own
safety personnel or it can be conducted by an FLSmidth representative at your request.
Contact: FLSmidth, Midvale, Utah. Refer to the Offices page listed on the Table of Contents.
5.1 Maintenance and Start-up Services

Experienced FLSmidth engineers and service personnel are available to assist in the start-up and
maintenance of the equipment. They offer the benefits of their technical know-how and firsthand
knowledge of the equipment, plus the backing of FLSmidth’s entire engineering and research facilities.
They can instruct on proper operating and maintenance procedures advise on troubleshooting and, if
necessary, supervise the entire start-up, depending on requirements.
If such assistance is wanted, arrangements should be made at the earliest possible date, outlining the
services required, giving the approximate duration of such services. Charges for the services will be
arranged at that time.
Contact an FLSmidth representative, referring to the Offices page in this manual.
Contents 47
5.2 Parts and Repair Orders

To make sure the right replacement parts are received and to avoid undue delay, it is important to
give the following information with each order:
• Size and Type of Unit: These are found on the cover page of this manual and on the Parts List
pages.
• Serial Number: This is found on the unit nameplate, on the Top Level drawing, and on the
Parts List. In case the S/N is omitted on the Parts List, use the Order number since it and the
S/N are similar.
• Part Number and Descriptions: Listed on Parts List.
• Special Field Modifications: This is important if the original material or design has been
changed. Include drawings and/or other descriptive information.
Please contact FLSmidth, referring to the Offices page in this manual, for parts, repair orders, and/or
equipment service.
5.3 General Maintenance

WARNING: Refer to the safety procedures page in this manual before starting
any inspections, maintenance or repairs. Lock out means the equipment
electrical service must be locked out with a lockout and key.
General cleaning, inspection and preventive maintenance should be performed on a regular basis
according to the recommended schedules and whenever the machines are shut down.
1. General Cleaning
Keep platforms, stairs and the general work area free of obstacles, such as tools, rags, boxes,
etc. Clean up lubricant spills, water, the general area, etc. Periodically remove solids
accumulations by flushing down the mechanism below the motor drive, including the tank, and
fully inspect the equipment. Leave drains open until the cleaning is complete.
2. Drive V-Belt Tension
WARNING: Lockout the power to the drive.
a. Check the belts every 6 months for tension, and tension the belts if they are
squealing.
• Remove the belt drive guard cover.
Contents 48
• Check the belts for cracking, wear or glazed inner surface, which are conditions
requiring belt replacement. If one belt is damaged, all belts should be replaced.
New V-Belts must be installed as a matched set.
• Check the belts for tension, referring to the V-Belt Caution plate on the Belt guard
for the required tension and deflection per belt. Refer to Figure 11, for a copy of
that plate.
• To tension the V-belts, loosen the motor-to-motor mount rail fasteners and, using
the two take-up adjusting screws, adjust the position of the motor, turning the
take-up adjusting screws equally, together, to take up the slack in the belts.
Proper alignment distributes the load equally to each V-belt. After tensioning the
V-Belts, tighten down adjusting screw jam nuts and secure the motor-to-motor
mount rail fasteners.
• Recheck tension, referring to the V-Belt Caution plate to ensure proper tension. A
V-belt drive will successfully transmit its rated capacity horsepower, if its belts are
properly tensioned. Excessive tension will cause excessive belt wear, reduce
bearing life and result in possible reducer or motor failure.
3 2
Figure 11
1 – Caution: Do not overtighten V- 2 – Lbs./Kg max per Belt/Band 3 - Deflection

belts
• Reinstall the belt drive guard cover.
WARNING: Install the belt drive guard cover before the drive is operated.
Contents 49
b. Lubrication
• Refer to the Lubrication Instructions and the motor and reducer manufacturer’s
instructions for the recommended lubrication and schedule.
c. Reducer and Motor
• Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions in the "Reference Manual" for

recommended maintenance schedules and procedures.
d. Manual Air Inlet Assembly
• This assembly, mounted on the reducer mounting plate, allows the flow of air
between the standpipe and crowder and the atmosphere. Air flow is controlled by
means of the butterfly valve. The air inlet assembly should be clear and adjusted
for free flow of air generated by the rotor, for maximum froth formation with
minimum consumption of frothing agent.
• Check for accumulations of froth and solids within the mechanism support frame
and remove with a water spray for an unobstructed flow of air.
• Check for accumulation of foreign material on the air control stub screen and
remove, as required, for an unobstructed flow of air.
• Check periodically for smooth operation of the butterfly valve. Clean and
maintain, as required, referring to the manufacturer's instructions in the
"Reference Manual".
5.4 Hinged Dart Valve Inspection and Maintenance

1. Scale can reduce the effectiveness of the valves. Check them monthly, or periodically as
experience dictates, for shaft and hinge movement during actuation, for leakage, etc. Check
for adequate air pressure and clean air.
2. During each shutdown, flush the tanks and discharge box and inspect the valves and
grommets and the rods and hinges for wear. Replace any parts that show excessive wear.
The grommets are subject to high abrasion and will require periodic replacement.
WARNING: Lock out the power to the rotor drive whenever entering the tank.
3. Replace the grommet by pulling the valve up to its maximum raised position and blocking it in
place.
WARNING: The hinged dart frame with dart valve must be blocked in the
raised position during maintenance. The results of a failure to observe this
notice range from serious health endangering effects to life endangering injuries
to maintenance personnel.
Contents 50
4. Unbolt the existing grommet from the grommet plate and remove old sealant from the
grommet plate.
5. Apply a 3mm bead of sealant around the grommet opening and bolt holes in the grommet
plate, as shown in Figures 12 and the Grommet Plate Assembly drawing.
6. Mount the grommet to the grommet plate, using the capscrews, nuts and washers specified.
8. Remove the temporary blocking and lower the valve to ensure it is centered in the grommet.
9. Replace the dart valve by pulling the valve up to its maximum raised position. Then disconnect
the existing valve from the connection spool and replace with a new dart valve.
3
6
5
4
Figure 12

4 – Capscrew, nut and (2) washers 5 – Bolt cap 6 – Use specified sealant to secure
bolt cap
10. Check the valves for centering in the grommets by actuating the valves or applying air; at the
same time check for free movement of the hinges and rods. Refer to the Hinged Dart Valve
Assembly Installation instructions in the Installation section of this manual.
11. Maintain the actuator and positioner, referring to the manufacturer’s instructions in the
"Reference Manual".
Contents 51
5.5 Regularly Scheduled Shutdown for Inspection and

Maintenance
During a regularly scheduled shut down of the plant, perform the following inspections or
maintenance.
Drain and flush down the tank so the rotor, split collar, hood, disperser and standpipe can be
inspected.
WARNING: Lock out the power to the rotor drive whenever entering the tank.
1. Star Rotor
Check the vanes of the rotor for excessive wear or damage. Look for severe uneven wear,
deep grooves, etc. Uneven wear would indicate a failure to reverse rotor rotation with
sufficient frequency. The rotor can be reversed in direction of rotation for additional use.
Replace the rotor if it is severely worn, referring to Mechanism Assembly Maintenance on a
following page.
2. Hood Sectors
NOTE: Retaining nuts must be re-torqued at the first maintenance cycle (about one month).
Check the hood sectors for wear down to the reinforcing fabric. Replace all sectors if any one
sector shows this amount of wear. Refer to Mechanism Assembly Maintenance on a following
page.
Replace a hood sector if it is ripped, separated or damaged. Refer to Mechanism Assembly

Maintenance on a following page.
3. Disperser
Replace the disperser if it is ripped, separated or damaged. Refer to Mechanism Assembly

Maintenance on a following page.
4. Standpipe and Crowder Assembly
Check the lining for wear down to the metal, for damage or for proper positioning.
5. Tanks, Feed Box and Discharge Box
Check linings for wear or damage and repair or replace, as necessary.
6. Level Sensor Assembly
a. Check the level control rod with float and target plate are free of foreign material, and
that the level control rod with float and target plate move freely. Clean, as necessary.
Contents 52
b. Check the level control rod with float and target plate for wear or damage and repair
or replace, as necessary.
c. Maintain the ultrasonic level transmitter, referring to the manufacturer's instructions in

the "Reference Manual".
7. Froth Sensor Assembly
a. Maintain the ultrasonic sensor, referring to the manufacturer’s instructions in the

“Reference Manual”..
8. Fasteners
Make sure all fasteners are secure. Refer to Fastener Torque Specifications on a following
page.
5.6 Mechanism Assmebly Maintenance

capacity. Check the crane and rigging capacities to be sure they are capable of
supporting the weight of the equipment as given on the Mechanism Assembly
drawing and on the parts list.
1. Lifting the mechanism and equipment:
a. Check the capacities of the crane and rigging to be sure they are capable of lifting the
complete mechanism assembly. Refer above and to the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
b. Use multiple point lifting and spreader beams (not by FLSmidth) to provide a vertical lift
from each lifting point and to fully support the mechanism assembly as it is lifted. Refer
to the "Mechanism Assembly Rigging Illustration" on the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
Contents 53
c. Make sure the equipment being lifted or the lifting equipment cannot come into contact
with overhead electrical cables, etc.
d. While supporting the mechanism assembly with the lifting equipment, disconnect the
mechanism support from the support beams on the tank.
WARNING: Make sure the assembly if free to be moved and it is secure before
attempting the lift.
e. Adjust the lifting equipment, as required, to keep the mechanism assembly level and the
star rotor and shaft plumb. The star rotor must not bind in the split collar assembly.
f. Keep the mechanism assembly level at all times during the lifting to ensure balanced
loading. Check balance by lifting just enough to support the mechanism assembly entirely
with the lifting cables.
g. When lifting individual components, such as the reducer or motor, use the lifting eyes,
when provided by the manufacturer. Make sure lifting cables are secure before the
equipment is moved.
5.6.1 Mechanism Removal

For replacement or repair of the Star Rotor, Standpipe and Crowder Assembly, Hood Sectors or
Disperser, the Mechanism Assembly must be removed from the tank.
WARNING: Disconnect and lock out the power to the motor before starting any
disassembly.
1. Preparation for removal-
a. Remove the platform grating, as required for removal of the mechanism assembly.
b. Prepare the maintenance stand that will be used to support the mechanism assembly for
removal of the standpipe and crowder, disperser, disperser hood and star rotor. Refer to
Tank and Component Lifting in Chapter 3.
c. Disconnect all electrical wiring to the motor and reducer.
2. Remove the mechanism from the tank; refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
a. Remove the mounting bolts that attach the mechanism support frame to the support
beams on the tank.
b. Referring to the lifting procedures above, lift the mechanism assembly into place on the
maintenance stand. Secure the mechanism to the maintenance stand.
c. Refer below for component removal and installation procedures.
Contents 54
3. Reinstallation of the mechanism
The mechanism will be installed in basically the reverse order of the removal. Take note of the
following:
a. Use the same method for lifting as used for the removal.
b. Use new fasteners at the mechanism support frame-to-support beam connections.
c. Center the mechanism assembly over the tank before it is installed, taking care to prevent
any damage to platform and handrails. Then very carefully lower it into place, guiding it
onto position on the support beams. The rotor should be concentric with the draft tube and
the split collar assembly. Install the mechanism support frame-to-support beam
connection fasteners, referring to the Mechanism Assembly Installation instructions in
Chapter 3.
2
3
Figure 13
1 – Star rotor 2 – Extension shaft 3 – Adjust for 0.8mm (0.030”) per

305mm (1 ft.) plum
4 – Machinist’s level 5 – Gear reducer coupling
d. Check the extension shaft and rotor for 0.8mm (0.030”) per 305mm (1 ft.) plumb using a
machinist’s level on the rotor shaft. Adjust for shaft plumb, if necessary, by shimming
between the support beams and the mounting pads on the tank using stainless steel shim
stock (not by FLSmidth). Secure the fasteners referring to the Torque Values drawing
e. Check the split collar assembly for concentricity with the rotor. It must be within ± 6mm
(¼”) all around to provide optimum slurry circulation and solids suspension. Adjust for
Contents 55
concentricity of the rotor with the collar by adjusting the position of the mechanism
assembly on the support beams. Perfect concentricity is not required.
f. Secure all fasteners referring to the Torque Values drawing.
5.6.2 Component Removal and Installation

Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawings.
WARNING: Disconnect and lock out the power to the motor and reducer before
starting any disassembly.
Motor Removal:
1. Remove the V-belts - Remove the belt drive guard cover, reducer shaft covers and motor shaft
covers. Loosen the motor-to-motor mount rail fasteners. Then turn the two take-up adjusting
screws for the slack needed to remove the belts from the motor sheave. About 121mm
(4.75") movement should allow belt removal.
2. Remove the drive sheave from the motor shaft and the driven sheave from the reducer shaft.
3. Remove the belt drive guard.
4. Disconnect the wiring at the motor and tag the lines.
5. Support the motor from above with lifting equipment, according to the motor manufacturer's
instructions. Then, remove the motor-to-motor mount rail fasteners and lift the motor free of
the motor mount rails.
6. Set the motor in a dry maintenance area.
Motor Installation:
1. Lift the motor, according to the motor manufacturer's instructions, and mount it to the motor
mount rails with the fasteners specified.
2. Install the belt drive guard and the sheaves.
3. Install the V-belts in a matched set. Do not mix belts old and new belts.
4. Tension the V-belts referring to the General Maintenance instructions on a previous page.
5. Install the motor shaft covers, reducer shaft covers and belt drive guard cover..
6. Connect electrical wiring and check direction of rotation.
Contents 56
Reducer Removal:
1. Remove the V-belts - Remove the belt drive guard cover, reducer shaft covers and motor shaft
covers. Loosen the motor-to-motor mount rail fasteners. Then turn the two take-up adjusting
screws for the slack needed to remove the belts from the motor sheave. About 121mm
(4.75") movement should allow belt removal.
2. Remove the drive sheave from the motor shaft and the driven sheave from the reducer shaft.
3. Remove the belt drive guard.
4. Disconnect the wiring at the reducer and tag the lines.
5. Remove the seal retainer and seal from the reducer mounting plate.
6. Support the star rotor in position, using adequate shoring. Unbolt the extension shaft from
the reducer coupling.
7. Support the reducer from above with lifting equipment, according to the reducer
manufacturer's instructions. Then, remove the reducer-to-reducer mounting plate fasteners
and lift the reducer free of the reducer mounting plate.
8. Set the reducer in a dry maintenance area.
Reducer Installation:
1. Lift the reducer, according to the reducer manufacturer's instructions, and, Referring to the
Mechanism Assembly drawing and reducer manufacturer’s instructions, mount the vertical
reducer in position on the reducer mounting plate, orienting as shown and using new fasteners
specified. Torque tighten the mounting capscrews referring to the Torque Values drawing.
2. Install the belt drive guard and the sheaves.
3. Install the V-belts in a matched set. Do not mix belts old and new belts.
4. Tension the V-belts referring to the General Maintenance instructions on a previous page.
5. Install the motor shaft covers, reducer shaft covers and belt drive guard cover.
6. Connect electrical wiring.
7. Install and align the rotor with extension shaft, referring to the instructions on a following
page.
8. Reinstall the seal and seal retainer.
Air Inlet Assembly:
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly and Air Inlet Assembly drawings. Normally, the reducer pipe and air
control stub would not require replacement, but the butterfly valve may become corroded and not
adjustable. In that case the butterfly valve should be replaced.
Contents 57
Removal-
1. Remove the capscrews, nuts and washers attaching the butterfly valve and air control stub to
the reducer pipe and remove the butterfly valve and air control stub.
2. Inspect the air control stub screen for corrosion or damage. Replace the air control stub, if
necessary.
Installation-
1. Place the butterfly valve and air control stub in position on the reducer pipe. Mount the
butterfly valve and air control stub to the reducer pipe, using the fasteners specified.
Hood Sectors Removal:
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
1. Unbolt the hood sectors from each other.
2. Unbolt each hood sector from the disperser removing the hood sector clamps and sector.
Hood Sectors Installation:
1. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the hood sector sections to the
disperser assembly using the capscrews with washers, hood sector bosses and hood sector
clamps.
2. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, connect the hood sector sections to each
other, using the fasteners specified at the splices. Tighten the sector-to-sector capscrews and
nuts only until the rubber begins to extrude. Install the bolt caps on the capscrew heads and
nuts.
Disperser Removal:
Although the disperser may be significantly worn, it can still be heavy and unwieldy. Support it all
around during its removal. Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawing and Parts List for the weight.
1. Remove the mechanism assembly from the tank and set it on the fixture or shoring where the
disperser can be disconnected from the standpipe and crowder.
2. The disperser is attached to the standpipe and crowder with capscrews and washers. Support
the disperser in position with adjustable blocking or a device, such as lift truck, jacks and
pallet, etc., until all capscrews have been removed.
3. Then, lift the mechanism high enough to remove the disperser and set a new one in its place.
Disperser Installation:
Use the same device for lifting as used for supporting the disperser.
Contents 58
1. Attach the disperser sections to each other using the capscrews, nuts and washers specified.
Mount the bolt caps on the capscrew heads and nuts.
2. Lift the disperser assembly up to the standpipe and crowder, aligning the threaded mounting
holes in the disperser with the mounting holes in the standpipe and crowder.
3. Apply an anti-seize compound to the threads of the capscrews, and then install the washers
and capscrews and snug tighten.
4. Tighten all capscrews equally in half turns to draw the disperser up evenly, until all capscrews
are tightened to the torque specified on the Torque Values drawing.
5. The capscrews must be re-torqued to the torque specified on the Torque Values drawing after
one month of operation of the flotation unit.
Standpipe and Crowder Removal:
1. Remove the mechanism assembly from the tank and set it on the fixture or shoring.
2. Remove the hood sectors and disperser, referring to the above procedures.
3. Support the standpipe and crowder in position with adjustable blocking or a device, such as lift
truck, jacks and pallet, etc., until all fasteners have been removed.
4. Unbolt the standpipe and crowder from the mechanism support frame.
5. Then, lift the mechanism high enough to remove the standpipe and crowder.
6. Clean the bottom surface of the mechanism support to remove old sealant or other foreign
material from the standpipe and crowder mounting surface.
Standpipe and Crowder Installation:
1. Use the same device for lifting as used for supporting the disperser.
2. If the standpipe and crowder assembly is being replaced, assemble the new standpipe and
crowder segments as specified on the Standpipe and Crowder Assembly drawing.
3. Place a heavy bead of urethane adhesive sealant on the top flange of the standpipe and
crowder, inboard of the mounting bolt holes. Refer to Figure 14.
4. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the standpipe and crowder to the
mechanism support, using the fasteners specified.
5. Secure all fasteners, referring to the Torque Values drawing.
Contents 59
3 3
2 2
Figure 14
1 – Crowder and standpipe 2 – Place a heavy bead of urethane 3 – Crowder and standpipe
assembly adhesive sealant inboard fo assembly-to-mechanism support
mounting holes mounting holes
Star Rotor:
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly Drawings.
To reduce uneven wear on the rotor and increase its operating life, the rotor direction of rotation
should be reversed at least once a month. Rotors should be replaced if they flex under low loading,
which would be evident by the poor mixing.
Star Rotor Removal-
1. Support the star rotor from below so it will not fall when the mounting capscrews and nuts are
removed.
2. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, remove the extension shaft flange-to-rotor
capscrews and washers.
3. Lower the rotor enough to clear the bottom of the disperser. Set the star rotor on blocking
large enough to support it with at least (4) vanes.
Star Rotor Installation-
1. Referring to the Mechanism Assembly drawing, mount the star rotor to the extension shaft,
using the fasteners specified.
2. Check the extension shaft for alignment (runout) with the extension shaft. The extension
shaft must be in alignment within ± 1.5mm (1/16”) at the bottom of the rotor. Adjust, if
necessary, by shimming between the top extension shaft flange and the gear reducer coupling
Contents 60
flange, using stainless steel shims (not by FLSmidth) between the mounting capscrews. After
all adjustments are completed, torque tighten the fasteners referring to the Mechanism
Assembly drawing.
Split Collar Removal:
1. Disconnect the halves of the split collar at the splice connections.
2. Unbolt and remove the split collar halves from the draft tube.
Split Collar Installation:
1. Assemble the halves of the split collar together around the star rotor, using the fasteners
specified.
2. Attach the split collar to the draft tube, using the fasteners specified. Orient the split collar
splice approximately 90° from the splice of the draft tube. Refer to the Cell Assembly
drawing.
5.7 Fastener Torque Specifications

Use the Turn-of-Nut Method to tighten all High Strength Bolts to the required torque value after
proper snug tightening. Do not reuse the High Strength Bolts.
Bolt Length Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
As measured from Both faces normal to bolt One face normal to bolt Both faces sloped not
underside of head to axis. axis and other face sloped more than 1:20 from
extreme end of point. not more than 1:20 (bevel normal to bolt axis (bevel
washer not used) washers not used)
Up to and including (4) 1/ 3 turn ½ turn 2/3 turn

diameters
Over (4) diameters but ½ turn 2/3 turn 5/6 turn

not exceeding (8)
diameters
Over (8) diameters but 2/3 turn 5/6 turn 1 turn

not exceeding (12)
diameters
Nut rotation is the rotation relative to the bolt, regardless of the element (nut or Bolt). The Tolerance on rotation is
30o over or under.
Tighten all other fasteners according to the Torque Values drawing in the drawings section of this
manual. Note that all torque values for the fasteners are for clean dry threads.
Contents 61
Chapter 6: Operation
6.1 Flotation
Mineral froth flotation is the most important mineral processing technique available today. In flotation,
gas bubbles produced by the mechanical agitation of the mechanisms are used to float the mineral
particles, through adhesion, to the surface of the cells for recovery.
Basically, the adhesion of the small particles to the gas bubbles reduces the specific gravity of the
combined mineral-air particles so that the specific gravity of their association is less than the specific
gravity of the pulp, so they are induced to rise in the pulp.
1. WEMCO® 300 M3 Flotation Machines
Refer to the Mechanism Assembly drawing.
The 300 M3 flotation machine is a unique design with a patented rotor-disperser that delivers
intense, mixing and aeration. Ambient air is drawn into the cell and uniformly distributed
throughout the pulp, providing optimum air/particle contact. A conical draft tube channels the
flow for high pulp recirculation.
The combination of efficient aeration and optimum solids suspension gives high specie
recovery and concentrate grade performance, while reducing reagent consumption. Easy start-
ups, simple operation, low reagent consumption, long mechanism life and less required
maintenance are features of the WEMCO® flotation machines.
a. The Flotation Machine - General Description
The WEMCO® Flotation Cell Model Number is also the size of the cell tank. So, the Model
300 M3 Cell is a cylindrical tank with nominal 300 cubic meter volume capacity. It features
a motor and belt driven vertical reducer drive mechanism, a conical draft tube for
improved circulation, froth crowders to accelerate surface movement of froth, a feed box
for better feed solids distribution, a discharge box, and dart valves for level control.
Contents 62
The flotation cell, consisting of the cylindrical tank and drive assembly, is the basic module
of the WEMCO® system. The cells are connected together in a row. Each cell or pair of
cells are arranged in elevated steps for gravity flow of the pulp.
The cylindrical tank shape improves mixing and air distribution because all points on the
tank periphery are equidistant from the rotor discharge. All cells have a beveled bottom for
improved solids suspension.
The rotor position, which is well above the tank bottom, eliminates contact with abrasive,
oversize tramp material, thereby reducing wear on the rotor and disperser surfaces.
Induced airflow into the pulp by the turning rotor provides efficient aeration.
Since no forced air supply system is required, one mechanism can be removed for service
without shutting down the entire bank of cells, or it can be serviced on-line.
The elevated rotor also allows cells to restart instantly after a shutdown, unlike forced-air
systems with rotors. And, it can be restarted under full load. Mechanism erosion is further
reduced by large clearances between the rotor and disperser.
The standpipe and crowder is the elastomer lined steel cylinder below the mechanism
support frame. The lower end supports the disperser and hood, which control the flow of
bubbles to the surface of the cell. The crowder, around the standpipe at water surface,
accelerates movement of the froth across the surface of the tank, reducing residence time
in the froth phase and the air input required for froth support. The shortened recovery
period means energy savings, increased recovery and improved grade.
The conical draft tube promotes the circulation and suspension of solids in the flotation cell
by drawing the pulp from the tank bottom up the draft tube into the rotor, where the pulp
is mixed with air and pumped back out into the cell. Draft tubes are noted for their
efficiency of mixing. The beveled bottom increases circulation at the periphery of the tank.
The false bottom design manages coarse particles. All of the pulp circulates up through the
draft tube. The false bottom increases the velocity of the pulp as it flows along the bottom
to be drawn up into the draft tube.
Lip length of internal froth launder relates directly to froth removal. The lip length of a
round cell is longer than the launder of an equivalent volume rectangular unit. The internal
launder design conserves plant floor space.
The air inlet assembly mounted to the reducer mounting plate admits the air, induced by
the turning rotor, into the pulp where it is thoroughly dispersed through the pulp in the
form of bubbles that attach themselves to the particles for the flotation. The induced
airflow provides efficient aeration with mechanical simplicity.
Contents 63
The feed box is designed to receive the discharge from the grinding circuit, the previous
flotation machine or other plant unit operation. It facilitates mass flow and provides
uniform distribution of feed into the cell.
Dart valves in the cells and discharge box maintain the pulp level in the flotation cells by
controlling the flow between cells. The valves are raised and lowered by pneumatic
positioners that receive signals from the level controls.
The discharge box maintains the pulp level in the final cell in the row and provides a
connection to the tailing sump.
2. Cell Level Controls
Pulp level in the flotation cells is controlled by the automatically operated dart valves, located
in the cells and discharge box.
Level control is absolutely essential for good cell flotation performance. The key components
of a level control are:
1 - Level Sensor
2 – Controller (not by FLSmidth)
3 - Dart valves with actuator assemblies
a. Level sensor system
The electronic/pneumatic level control system uses the Ultrasonic Level Control system to
accurately measure and precisely control pulp level regardless of fluctuations in flow rate.
The ultrasonic level transmitter comes pre-calibrated for an indicated range and should
only be adjusted by qualified personnel. As originally specified, this is a highly reliable
electronic device and if kept clean and not abused, should function well for extended plant
service.
Ultrasonic Level Sensor Control
It consists of:
-a float and target,
-an ultrasonic level transmitter,
-a controller (not by FLSmidth), and
-the pneumatically actuated dart valves
Contents 64
The float with the target attached above the surface rises and falls with the surface.
The ultrasonic level transmitter sends a signal to the target and receives the reflected
signal back. The signal from the ultrasonic level transmitter goes to the controller (not by
FLSmidth) which sends a signal to the pneumatically actuated dart valves that open and
close to maintain the pulp level.
b. Dart Valves
The valves, which control the flow of pulp through the flotation cells, are actuated by rods
from pneumatic actuators, which move the valves in and out of circular grommet at the
bottoms of the cells and discharge box.
The dart valve actuators receive a signal from the controller (not by FLSmidth).
If a dart valve does not seat closed when the actuator is stroked to the full down position,
then a mechanical adjustment can be made, referring to the Installation and Maintenance
instructions in this manual. The level control is not the way to adjust the valves.
During plant shut downs, the valve darts and grommets should be checked for excessive
wear. The grommets are subject to high abrasion and will require periodic replacement.
Refer to the Maintenance Instructions.
Qualified instrumentation technicians should be available to check the function of the

controller (not by FLSmidth), and ultrasonic level transmitter and calibrate as necessary.
Refer to the "Reference Manual", for the manufacturer’s instructions for accessory
equipment furnished by FLSmidth.
3. Start-Up and Operation
a. Before the flotation begins, make a general inspection.
• Check for any loose nuts and bolts.
• Verify that all belts are tensioned and all cover guards are in place.
• Verify that all power and instrument air connections are secure.
• Check for and remove any debris from the tanks, feed and discharge boxes, and from
the platforms and stairways.
b. Turn the power on for all the instrumentation and level controls.
c. The dart valves are normally in the closed position when the cells are shut down. If the
valves are in the open position, close the dart valves.
d. Fill the cells with slurry or water. Each cell in a flotation cell row should be filled to
operating depth in succession starting at the feed box. Mechanisms normally should not be
operated while filling the cells (see e. below).
Contents 65
If the cells have substantial sand in the bottom there will be no problem starting the
mechanism; however, it may take about an hour to re-suspend all of the solids.
e. Although the mechanisms can be started at anytime, pumping will not start until the pulp
level is near the top of the draft tube.
Start the rotors when the slurry level is even with the top row of holes in the mechanism
assembly disperser.
Operation of the mechanism when the cells are being filled with reagent(s) and slurry can
produce an extremely deep froth and excessive flow into the froth launders, as the slurry
level is raised to the optimum operating depth.
f. Check the flow of froth over the weirs. Adjust weir height, as required, using the weir
clips provided.
g. Adjust the pulp operating level to provide for the expected froth level. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions for the Level Control, for adjustment of operating level with
the level sensors and the dart valves.
h. Check for seal and box leakage. Minor leakage may occur at the bolted connections at
first, but the leakage should stop when sealed off by the fine solids in the pulp.
i. Adjust reagents (collector and frother) and air intake to provide the desired froth character
and overflow rate.
j. Use a minimum of rinse water in the concentrate launders as this increases the volumetric
flow to the next stage, increasing dewatering problems and reducing retention time in
subsequent stages.
k. Sometimes extreme surging (increases) of flotation feed slurry is experienced during the
initial hours or days of operation because of unsteady unit operations upstream from the
flotation circuit.
The controller (not by FLSmidth) settings should not be changed for fast surge relief, as
this will result in poor control during normal operation, long after the feed surging problem
is solved.
l. When the operation of the cell is smooth and the metallurgy is acceptable, refrain from
making adjustments.
m. Operate the circuit consistent with management philosophy and instructions on all shifts.
Changing operating strategies is a major source of losses in recovery and is a disruption to
steady state operation.
n. Always operate with safety in mind and the objective of achieving quality production.
Contents 66
4. Shutdown
a. Planned Shutdown
• Turn off the feed to the cells.
• Once the feed has been turned off, adjust the level control to slowly drain all of the
cells.
• Do not open the dart valves to their fullest extent, as this can cause flooding
downstream.
• Shut off the mechanism when the rotor is no longer submerged in the pulp, as there is
no need to operate the rotor since it will not continue to mix.
• Once the cells are empty, check for sanding in the cells and in the feed and discharge
boxes. Clean out any areas of sanding that might cause problems for the next start-
up.
• The shutdown is complete, all power can be shut off.
• Check the mechanisms. Report items in need of repair immediately to the supervisor
as soon as discovered.
b. Unplanned Shutdown
• When an unplanned shutdown occurs, turn off the power for the mechanism motors,
reducers and controllers (not by FLSmidth) to avoid an unexpected start-up.
WARNING: Lock out the power if any inspection, maintenance or repairs will be
performed.
Normally the dart valves will fail closed. Open the dart valves, as required, to drain
the cells. Do not open the dart valves to their fullest extent, as this can cause flooding
downstream.
• Once the cells are empty, check for sanding in the feed and discharge boxes. Clean
any areas of sanding that might cause problems for the next start-up.
• Report items in need of repair immediately, as soon as discovered.
Contents 67
6.2 General Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
1. Motor does not No electrical power to motor • Check electrical breaker for ON
start
• Check with voltmeter for power to
motor
• Check emergency stop, if furnished
Motor locked or bound • Remove V-belts and turn motor shaft

by hand WARNING: Lock out power
• If motor won't turn by hand, refer to
Motor Manufacturer's Instructions
• Replace motor
Reducer locked or bound • Remove V-belts and turn driven

sheave by hand WARNING: Lock out
power to motor
• If sheave will not turn, remove the
mechanism and refer to the
Maintenance Instructions for reducer
replacement
2. Motor stops Loss of electrical power • Check power source

during operation
• Check with voltmeter for power to
motor
• Check control fuse; see below
Motor starter "trips" OFF • Ambient temperature at motor too

high; see "Motor runs hot"
• Voltage too low; check supply voltage,

also check motor requirement on
nameplate
• Check amperage under load; may need
to replace motor
• Check starter for properly sized heaters
Motor control fuse • Check for overheating of motor; see

"Motor runs hot"
• Check for motor overload; refer to
Manufacturer's Instructions
• Motor wired for wrong voltage. Check
line voltage with nameplate voltage.
See below
• Check wiring to motor for proper
hookup
3. Motor runs hot Motor overload • Check amperage through wires with
full load rating on nameplate. See
below
• Check electrical source and wiring
Contents 68
Inadequate air flow to motor • Check air flow around motor.Clean

surface of motor for better heat
transfer
• Check that the motor fan is rotating
and all blades are in good condition
Rotor RPM too high • Check shaft RPM with tachometer;

driver belt sheave may be improper
size according to factory
recommendation for rotor RPM
Mechanical problems with • Refer below to "4."

reducer
4. Drive is unusually Bearings need lubrication • Reducer needs lubrication or a bearing

noisy and/or is failing; see Manufacturer's
vibrating Instructions
excessively
• Motor needs lubrication or a bearing is
failing; see Manufacturer's
Instructions
Rotor out of balance or • Stop rotor; check for missing vane or

contacting other components, contact with other component, such
or large rocks or other objects as, disperser WARNING: Lock out
trapped in the draft tube power
• If a vane is missing, replace the rotor
• If another component is loose and
contacting the rotor, repair or replace
• Check for foreign material trapped
inside the draft tube
• Refer to Maintenance for repair or
replacement
Misalignment of the sheaves • Check run-out at the outer diameter

of the sheave using a dial indicator
• Check to be sure motor shaft is
parallel to the reducer shaft
• Check that both the driven and driver
sheaves are parallel
5. Rotor does not Motor does not run • Refer to Problems "1. Motor does not
turn when start" & "2. Motor stops during
electrical power operation"
is ON
Drive belts extremely loose or • Check belts to be sure they are intact
separated
• Check belts for tension; see
Maintenance Instructions for
tensioning WARNING: Lock out power
Rotor disconnected from • Check rotor

extension shaft
6. RPM of rotor Drive V-belts are loose and • Squealing belt is a slipping belt;
Contents 69
below rated slipping tension the belts; see Maintenance

design, affecting
• New belts stretch and need
product
retensioning
• Install new belts
V-belt drive ratio too large • Check sheave sizes with design
specification
• Check that belts fit groove of sheaves
Motor overload • See Problem "3. Motor runs hot" items

"a." and "c."
7. Leaks at New installation rubber • Some leakage is normal; leaks

bolted/gasketed covering damaged normally fill with fines and stop
connections leaking
• Persistent leakage can be corrected by
filling joint area with silastic sealer
Damage or gaps in internal • Repair leaking area by patching and

coating allowed accelerated welding; WARNING: Use experienced
corrosion welders and lock out power to the
drive
• Recoat the surface with specified

coating
8. Unplanned shut Loss of electrical power • Dart valves will normally fail closed.
down Open dart valve to drain tanks
• Lock out power to prevent accidental
start-up when power resumes;
perform maintenance as required
• Check for sanding when cells are
empty
Mechanical failure • Refer to "Shut down" in Operating

Instructions
• Lock out power before starting repairs
• Plan shut down for maintenance
before an equipment failure occurs
Loss of feed • Continue operating until drop in level

prevents normal operation, then shut
down
• Short down time, add water to
maintain operation
9. Cell does not Rotor is not turning when • See Problem "5."
produce froth or electrical power is ON
flotation bubbles
Air inlet is plugged • Air piping has obstructions. Clean air
piping
• Air control valve is closed. Open air

control valve
Contents 70
Part or all the disperser has • Pull mechanism and replace or

broken away from its reattach the disperser; see
connection to standpipe and Maintenance
crowder
• When disperser is installed, make sure
it is correctly installed and the
fasteners are secure
Rotor has broken loose or lost • Remount rotor; a disconnected rotor

some of its vanes would occur from improper
installation; refer to Maintenance
Instructions for correct installation
• Replace rotor if damaged; a damaged
rotor would vibrate excessively; see
Problem "4."
10. Pulp overflowing Pulp [slurry] level is too high in • Level of weir for pulp operating level
with froth cell may need adjustment for desired froth
depth
• Level control set point needs adjusting

for operating level; see Operation and
level control Manufacturer's
Instructions
• Check the dart valves, may be
manually closed; open valve; check
air lines to valve actuators
• Check dart valve control; may not be

functioning properly for pulp level;
check signal to actuator; see
Controller Instructions (not by
FLSmidth)
Feed rate may be excessive • Check discharge box discharge flow

rate; if rate is high then
decrease feed rate
• No action, since surge flows may
occur during first days of operation
due to unsteady operations upstream
• Check flow rates of discharge box that
would indicate dart valve malfunction;
see above
Controller (not by FLSmidth) • Reset controller (not by FLSmidth) set

set point not reset for proper point; controller settings should not
level after temporary change be changed for temporary feed surge
relief
• Recheck set point for proper setting
11. Froth recovery Pulp level is too low in cell for • Low feed level or no feed; check flow
poor, not up to froth level rate
requirements
• Weir level too low for required depth
of froth; adjust level upwards
• Controller (not by FLSmidth) setpoint
too low for dart valve position;
Contents 71
increase setpoint for desired froth

depth
Air control plugged or not • Remove any accumulations of solids

adjusted correctly around the air intake; see
Maintenance
• Try increasing the air intake into the
standpipe and crowder; make sure
intake is clear
Chemical reagent and/or • Dosage not optimal or correct; bench

frother not correct for pulp tests required to determine effective
reagent or frother and correct
amounts of each
• Check air intake; see above
• Feed composition has changed; need
more frequent evaluation for dosage
of chemicals
• Reduce feed flow through cells; it is

greater than optimal rate for desired
froth
Mechanical problem with rotor • RPM of rotor needs to be increased;

mechanism or mechanism not see Problem "6.
operating at optimum
• See Problem "9. Cell does not
produce..."
• Check if mechanism is vibrating,
reducing mixing ability; see Problem
"4."
12. Liquid level varies Level controller (not by • Refer to Controller; Manufacturer's
from original FLSmidth) malfunction Instructions (not by FLSmidth) for
setting operation and maintenance
• Check dart valves for response to
controller; refer above for controller;
refer below for valves
Dart valves not operating • Check movement of valve shafts;

properly jerky movement indicates alignment
or corrosion problem, see
Maintenance; no action indicates
controller problem, see item "a."
above
• Check for air leaks to valves; check
for adequate air actuation pressure;
see Maintenance
• Dart valves may be leaking at
grommets due to excessive wear;
refer to Maintenance
• Valves normally close at loss of
power; check for open valves
• Check control air supply pressure
• Check air signal to positioner to
Contents 72
ensure it is giving the positioner the

correct signal
Controller (not by FLSmidth) • Reset for correct set point

inadvertently reset for wrong
• Avoid changing set point for
set point after temporary
temporary changes in pulp flow
change
13. Vibration of the dart Over size or large foreign • Open the dart valve to a full open
valve assembly material has gone through the position by going to the manual mode
cell and is disrupting flow of operation. This will allow over size
or foreign material to pass through
the valve. Return to the automatic
mode of operation if desired.
Dart valve could be coming • Stop operation and empty both

loose upstream and downstream tanks (or
discharge box). Tighten the dart
valve-to-connection spool or
connection spool-to-hinged frame
fasteners.
Dart valve shaft hinges could • Check dart valve hinges for wear.
be worn. Replace as required.
14. Sanding in cells Accumulated sand in • Keep dart valves partially open during
and boxes connection boxes start-up to allow flow through
• Check valves for actuation; refer to
Problem "12." cause item "b."
Accumulated sand in cell • Restart rotor; it will start despite sand

in bottom of cell; rotor will gradually
resuspend the sand
• Drain the tank in case of an extended

shut down
• Check up stream process; feeds with

excessive course solids are sometimes
difficult to keep in suspension
Mechanism problem prevents • Refer to Problem “11.” Cause item

adequate mixing of feed and “e.”
suspension of solids
• Refer to the Maintenance instructions
Contents 73
Chapter 7: Final Mechanical Checklist

Serial Number: CSP0000891-01A-E
When the final mechanical check is completed for each WEMCO 300 M3 flotation cell furnished, both
the FLSmidth serviceman and the installer/erector must sign and date a copy of this CHECK
LIST, and return a copy of each checklist to the FLSmidth Project Management Department
to ensure warranty coverage. Sign off by initialing and dating each check made.
FLSmidth
Check Reference Installer Sign Off Serviceman Sign Off
Tankl Installation
Check tank foundation General Arrangement and

for level within ±3 mm Final Circuit Assembly
(1/8”) drawing, and Installation
instructions in the
FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check tank, feed box, Installation and

discharge box and Maintenance instructions
linings for damage in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check tank-to-tank Final Circuit Assembly

connections for proper drawings and Installation
gasketing instructions in the
manual
Check tank-to-tank Final Circuit Assembly

connection fasteners drawings and Installation
for proper torque instructions in the
manual
Check that tank grout Installation instructions in

(not by FLSmidth) has the FLSmidth instruction
Contents 74
been properly installed manual
Tank Assembly
Check each tank for 10 Installation instructions in

mm (3/8”) level at the the FLSmidth instruction
tank top rim angle. manual
Check each radial Installation instructions in

launder to ensure it is the FLSmidth instruction
level to the top of the manual
peripheral launder lip
Check tank-to-tank Installation instructions in

connections for the FLSmidth instruction
leakage after start-up manual
Check draft tube split Final Circuit Assembly

collar for specified drawing in the FLSmidth
engagement with rotor instruction manual
Check draft tube for Installation instructions in

specified concentricity the FLSmidth instruction
with rotor manual
Check false floor Cell Assembly drawings

segment and false floor and Installation
tab fasteners for instructions in the
proper torque FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check for proper Installation instructions in

installation of radial the FLSmidth instruction
launders and manual
peripheral weir bars
Check weir bars for Installation instructions in

level the FLSmidth instruction
manual
Feed and Discharge Boxes
Check tank-to-feed box Installation instructions in

connection fasteners the FLSmidth instruction
for proper torque manual
Check tank-to- Installation instructions in

discharge box the FLSmidth instruction
connection fasteners manual
for proper torque
Dart Valve
Check hinged dart Hinged Dart Valve

frame and hinges for Assembly drawings and
proper installation Installation instructions in
the FLSmidth instruction
Contents 75
manual
Check the grommet Installation instructions in

plates for proper the FLSmidth instruction
installation manual
Check for proper Hinged Dart Valve

seating of dart valves Assembly drawings and
in grommets Installation instructions in
manual
Check the dart valve Installation and

shaft is in alignment Maintenance instructions
in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check controls for General Arrangement and

proper installation Hinged Dart Valve
Assembly drawings and
Installation instructions in
manual
Check for specified air Installation instructions in

supply pressure the FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check dart valves for General Arrangement and

smooth operation Hinged Dart Valve
Assembly drawings and
Installation and
Maintenance instructions
in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Mechanism Assembly
Check mechanism Final Assembly drawing

support beam to tank and Installation
connections for instructions in the
specified fasteners FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check mechanism General Arrangement and

support beam to tank Final Assembly drawings,
connection fasteners and Installation
for specified torque instructions in the
manual
Check mechanism Assembly drawings and

extension shaft for Installation and
plumb Maintenance instructions
in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Contents 76
Check mechanism Final Assembly drawings

support frame-to- and Installation
support beam instructions in the
connections for FLSmidth instruction
specified fasteners and manual
shim plates
Check mechanism Final Assembly drawings,

support frame-to- Parts List and Installation
support beam and Maintenance
connection fasteners instructions in the
for specified torque FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check motor for proper Drive Assembly drawings

installation and Installation and
in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check reducer for Drive Assembly drawings

proper installation and Installation and
in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check reducer for Manufacturer’s

proper lubrication instructions in the
“Reference Manual”
Check motor for proper Manufacturer’s

lubrication instructions in the
Check motor wiring Manufacturer’s

instructions in the
Check sheaves for Installation instructions in

alignment the FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check V-Belt tension Installation and

in the FLSmidth
instruction manual
Check motor and Manufacturer’s

reducer wiring instructions in the
Check motor for General Arrangement and

specified direction of Assembly drawings, and
rotation motor manufacturer’s
instructions in the
Contents 77
Check the belt guards Assembly drawings, Parts

have been installed List and Installation
properly instructions in the
manual
Check all fasteners Torque Values drawing

have been properly and Installation
secured instructions in the
manual
Instrumentation and Controls
Check the level float Assembly drawings and

assembly for proper Installation instructions in
installation the FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check level control Manufacturer’s

system wiring instructions in the
Check level control air Installation instructions

system components for and Manufacturer’s
proper installation and instructions in the
operation “Reference Manual”
Check level control Manufacturer’s

system wiring and dart instructions in the
valve actuator “Reference Manual”
pneumatic piping
Check controls Manufacturer’s

furnished by FLSmidth instructions in the
for operation “Reference Manual”
Miscelaneous
Check platforms and Assembly drawings and

stairway assemblies installation instructions in
for proper installation the FLSmidth instruction
manual
Check all fasteners Torque Values drawing

have been properly and Installation
secured instructions in the
manual
Check all WARNING Assembly drawings and

and CAUTION signs are installation instructions in
properly installed and the FLSmidth instruction
clearly visible and manual
readable
Contents 78
Notes and Comments:
____________________________________________ _____________________
(Installer/Erector) (Date)
____________________________________________ _____________________
(FLSmidth Service Representative) (Date)
Contents 79
Chapter 8: Appendices
8.1 Current Bill of Material
Contents 80
FLSmidth Current Bill of Material
Table of Contents
ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE
CSP0000891-01 Engineering for (5) Wemco 300m3 Cells 1

682843 ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT 2
682844 ASSY, FEEDBACK 6
655825 ASSY, CELL, TYPE I, 8
679367 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PLATE, 11
682994 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER NON-STANDARD, 12
682845 ASSY, CELL, TYPE II, 13
682846 ASSY, CELL, TYPE III, 18
655829 ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX, 23
655826 ASSY, MECHANISM 25
589349-06 ROTOR, STAR, 1510mm (59.5") 32
650033 ASSY, BELT DRIVE GUARD 33
615347 ASSY, MOTOR MOUNT RAIL 300 CM FLOTATION 34
655828 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø700 GROMMET, 35
655765 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, FLOTATION 38
657234 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE, FLOTATION 39
655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 40
682851 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700, 41
682850 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø450 GROMMET, 42
655765 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, FLOTATION 45
657234 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE, FLOTATION 46
655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 47
682852 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450, 48
655830 ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR, ENDRESS + HAUSER, 49
655831 ASSY, FROTH SENSOR ENDRESS + HAUSER, 51
655823 ASSY, PLATFORM 52
686623 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE I 55
686634 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 2 58
686642 ASSY, STAIRWAY 68
686636 ASSY, INTERCONNECTION 69
BOM NUMBER: CSP0000891-01 DESCRIPTION: Engineering for (5) Wemco 300m3 Cells DRAWING NUM: CSP0000891-01
TOP PARENT: CSP0000891-01
Lvl Item Description / Material Base Qty Total Qty U/M Weight Bubl Drawing Rev Seq
1 CSP0000891-01 Engineering for (5) Wemco 300m3 1.0 1.0 LOT 0.00 KG CSP0000891-01 1 1
Cells
2 DRAWINGS ASSEMBLY & REFERENCE 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 0 N/A - 2

JOBMATL NOTES:
656216 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 300m 3 CELLS
656217 ANCHOR BOLT AND FOUNDATION LAYOUT 300m 3 CELLS
656218 PLATFORM ARRANGEMENT 300m 3 CELLS
656219 P &ID 300m 3 CELLS
687508 PAINT SPECIFICATION
ES0001 FLS WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
2 682843 ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT FIRST 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 300 682843 1 3
CLEANER FB-2-2-1-DB WEMCO
FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC
METER
2 655823 ASSY, PLATFORM WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 301 655823 1 440
METER
2 REVISION ENGINEERING CHANGES 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 999 N/A - 640

JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 65576 (REV 1) - INITIAL RELEASE
Print Date: 26-March-2014 7:47 am Total Weight: 0.00 Page 1 Of 70

BOM NUMBER: 682843 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT DRAWING NUM: 682843
3 682844 ASSY, FEEDBACK WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 682844 1 4

METER
3 655825 ASSY, CELL, TYPE I, WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 655825 1 19

METER
3 682845 ASSY, CELL, TYPE II, WEMCO 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 682845 1 67
METER
3 682846 ASSY, CELL, TYPE III, 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 682846 1 114
WEMCO FLOTATION, 300
CUBIC METER
3 655829 ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX, 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 655829 1 162

CUBIC METER
3 655826 ASSY, MECHANISM WEMCO 5.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 655826 3 183

METER
3 655828 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 655828 1 281
Ø700 GROMMET, WEMCO
METER
3 682850 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 682850 1 336
Ø450 GROMMET, FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
3 655830 ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR, 3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 655830 1 389

ENDRESS + HAUSER,
ULTRASONIC, LEVEL
TRANSMITTER FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER

3 655831 ASSY, FROTH SENSOR 3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 655831 1 409

ENDRESS + HAUSER,
ULTRASONIC, LEVEL
TRANSMITTER FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
3 686632 SUPPORT, BEAM 5.0 5.0 EA 1,658.60 K 11 686632 1 416

A36/GB Q235B STL
3 686633 SUPPORT, BEAM 5.0 5.0 EA 1,658.70 K 12 686633 1 417

A36/GB Q235B STL
3 682872 RAMP, VELOCITY 6.0 6.0 EA 32.30 KG 13 682872 1 418

A36/GB Q235B/A53 GRB STL/RUBBER
3 687503 ACCESS COVER, CHUTE 14.0 14.0 EA 8.40 KG 14 687503 1 419

BAFFLE
STL/RUBBER
3 678882-01 CHUTE BAFFLE, LEFT HAND, 3.0 3.0 EA 109.20 KG 15 678882 1 420
TYPE 1
STL/RUBBER
3 678882-02 CHUTE BAFFLE, RIGHT HAND, 3.0 3.0 EA 109.20 KG 16 678882 1 421
TYPE 1
STL/RUBBER
TYPE 2
STL/RUBBER
TYPE 2
STL/RUBBER
TYPE 3
STL/RUBBER
TYPE 3
Print Date: 26-March-2014 7:47 am Total Weight: 3,902.90 Page 3 Of 70

STL/RUBBER
3 300616 CAPSCR, HEX, M8 x 30 84.0 84.0 EA 0.00 KG 21 N/A - 426

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
3 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 348.0 348.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 N/A - 432

CL 8.8, ZNC
3 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 120.0 120.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 433

CL 8, ZNC
3 308141 NUT, HEX, M30 80.0 80.0 EA 0.00 KG 29 N/A - 434

CL 8, ZNC
3 307165 WSHR, HRD, 8, DIN 125A 84.0 84.0 EA 0.00 KG 30 N/A - 435
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682844 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FEEDBACK DRAWING NUM: 682844
4 682858 FEEDBOX WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 6,876.80 K 01 682858 3 5

METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING: 1125537
4 609284-04 DOOR, MANWAY 915mm 1.0 1.0 EA 159.80 KG 02 609284 2 6

A36 STL/MOR RUBBER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
4 611742 SWING ARM, MANWAY DOOR 1.0 1.0 EA 18.80 KG 03 611742 1 7

A36 STL
4 611765 HOOK, MANWAY, LIFTING 1.0 1.0 EA 0.40 KG 04 611765 2 8

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 354913 FLG, RF, PIPE, DLD, 150#, 8" 2.0 2.0 EA 19.50 KG7 05 N/A - 9
FS
4 632323-365 COTTER, PIN, Ø6.3 X 50MM 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 10

A4

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308324 NUT, HEX, JAM, M16 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 13

CL 4, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 14

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 58.0 58.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 15

CL 8.8, ZNC

BOM NUMBER: 682844 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FEEDBACK DRAWING NUM: 682844
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655825 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CELL, TYPE I, DRAWING NUM: 655825
4 682860 TANK, TOP SEGMENT WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 10,796.80 01 682860 3 20

METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863, 595695
4 682853 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT 1 1.0 1.0 EA 14,983.90 02 682853 2 21

CUBIC METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863
4 679367 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 679367 1 22

BAFFLE PLATE,INTERNAL
LAUNDER WEMCO
METER

A36 STL/MOR RUBBER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537

A36 STL

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 678938 VELOCITY, CONE SEGMENT 2.0 2.0 EA 410.36 KG 07 678938 1 42

4 678892 TUBE, DRAFT 2.0 2.0 EA 1,018.30 K 08 678892 1 43

A36/Q235B STL/RUBBER
4 577914 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC 2.0 2.0 EA 247.00 KG 09 577914 D 44

METER, WEMCO

A36 STL/RUBBER
4 682869 PLATE, ANTI-SANDING 2.0 2.0 EA 132.50 KG 10 682869 1 45

4 682854 FALSE FLOOR, SEGMENT 6.0 6.0 EA 171.00 KG 11 682854 1 46

A36/Q235B STL
4 682856 TAB, FALSE FLOOR 1.0 1.0 EA 362.00 KG 12 682856 1 47

A36/Q235B STL
4 682857 FALSE FLOOR, TAB 1.0 1.0 EA 177.00 KG 13 682857 1 48

A36/Q235B STL
4 623754-03 WASHER, FALSE FLOOR, M24, 64.0 64.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 623754 2 49

Ø26
A36 STL
4 354915 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD 150# 12" 2.0 2.0 EA 43.30 KG 15 N/A - 50
FS

A4

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC


CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 4, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 145.0 145.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 60

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 140.0 140.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 61

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 24.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 N/A - 62

CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 679367 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PLATE, DRAWING NUM: 679367
5 682994 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER 12.0 12.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 682994 1 23

NON-STANDARD,
ITEM NOTES:
120MM SHORT WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
5 679366 PLATE, BAFFLE, INTERNAL 8.0 8.0 EA 116.00 KG 02 679366 1 30

LAUNDER
A36/ GB Q235B STL
5 655626 WEIR BARS, 12.0 12.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 655626 1 31

CIRCUMFERENTIAL
316/316L 20 GAUGE
ITEM NOTES:
655626 replaces 614662-01 thru 614662-20 and 614663-01 thru 614663-28.
5 614858-02 CLIP, WEIR 90.0 90.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 614858 1 32

R/L 302 SERIES
5 603786 STRIP, ADHESIVE FOAM 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 603786 2 33

NEOPRENE

A4

A4
5 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 116.0 116.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 36

A4
5 597459 WSHR, OVERSIZED, M12, DIN 232.0 232.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 37

9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682994 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER NON-STANDARD, DRAWING NUM: 682994
6 682993 RADIAL, LAUNDER 1.0 12.0 EA 21.60 KG 01 682993 1 24

GFRP
6 616174 PLATE, RADIAL LAUNDER 1.0 12.0 EA 11.70 KG 02 616174 1 25

BACKING
A36 STL
6 611170 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 80, FULL 6.0 72.0 EA 0.10 KG 03 N/A - 26
THRD
A4
6 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 6.0 72.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 27

A4

9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682845 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CELL, TYPE II, DRAWING NUM: 682845

METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863, 595695
4 682861 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT II 1.0 2.0 EA 15,012.50 02 682861 2 69

CUBIC METER
STL/ RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863

LAUNDER WEMCO
METER

A36 STL/MOR RUBBER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537

A36 STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

4 678892 TUBE, DRAFT 2.0 4.0 EA 1,018.30 K 08 678892 1 91


METER, WEMCO

A36 STL/RUBBER


A36/Q235B STL

A36/Q235B STL

Ø26
A36 STL
FS

A4

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 4, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 145.0 290.0 EA 0.00 KG 24 N/A - 107

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 140.0 280.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 108

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 24.0 48.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 109

CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:


NON-STANDARD,
ITEM NOTES:

LAUNDER
A36/ GB Q235B STL
5 655626 WEIR BARS, 12.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 655626 1 79

CIRCUMFERENTIAL
316/316L 20 GAUGE
ITEM NOTES:
5 614858-02 CLIP, WEIR 90.0 180.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 614858 1 80

R/L 302 SERIES

NEOPRENE

A4

A4
5 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 116.0 232.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 84

A4

9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:


GFRP

BACKING
A36 STL
THRD
A4
6 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 6.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 75

A4

9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682846 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CELL, TYPE III, DRAWING NUM: 682846
METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863, 595695
4 682862 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT III 1.0 2.0 EA 15,426.50 02 682862 1 116
CUBIC METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS: 1125537, 682863
LAUNDER WEMCO
METER

A36 STL/MOR RUBBER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
A36 STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

4 678892 TUBE, DRAFT 2.0 4.0 EA 1,018.30 K 08 678892 1 138

METER, WEMCO

A36 STL/RUBBER


A36/Q235B STL
4 682855 TAB, FALSE FLOOR 1.0 2.0 EA 352.00 KG 12 682855 1 142

A36/Q235B STL

A36/Q235B STL
Ø26
A36 STL
FS
A4

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308234 NUT, HEX JAM, 5/8-11 1.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 24 N/A - 154
GR 5
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 145.0 290.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 155

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 136.0 272.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 156

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 24.0 48.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 N/A - 157

CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:


NON-STANDARD,
ITEM NOTES:

LAUNDER
A36/ GB Q235B STL
5 655626 WEIR BARS, 12.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 655626 1 126

CIRCUMFERENTIAL
316/316L 20 GAUGE
ITEM NOTES:
5 614858-02 CLIP, WEIR 90.0 180.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 614858 1 127

R/L 302 SERIES

NEOPRENE

A4

A4
5 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 116.0 232.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 131

A4
9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:


GFRP

BACKING
A36 STL
THRD
A4
6 308185 NUT, HEX, M12 6.0 144.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 122

A4
9021
A4

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655829 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX, DRAWING NUM: 655829
4 682859 DISCHARGE BOX WEMCO 1.0 1.0 EA 6,789.20 K 01 682859 3 163

METER
STL/RBR-L
4 678893 COVER, DRAIN DISCHARGE 1.0 1.0 EA 210.90 KG 02 678893 1 164

BOX
A36/Q235B/RUBBER

A36 STL/MOR RUBBER
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
A36 STL

A36/GB Q235B STL
FS

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 10.0 10.0 EA 0.00 KG 11 N/A - 173

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 4, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 13 N/A - 175

BOM NUMBER: 655829 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX, DRAWING NUM: 655829
CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 42.0 42.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 N/A - 176

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 24.0 24.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 N/A - 177

CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655826 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, MECHANISM DRAWING NUM: 655826
4 632781-03 WELDMENT, SUPPORT 1.0 5.0 EA 3,137.20 K 01 632781 7 184

FRAME, MECHANISM
A36/Q235 STL/RC
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
4 632806 WELDMENT, MOUNTING 1.0 5.0 EA 1,918.00 K 02 632806 1 185

PLATE, GEARBOX
A36/Q235 STL
4 589349-06 ROTOR, STAR, 1510mm (59.5") 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 589349 3 186
CUBIC METER
ITEM NOTES:
4 573999 SEGMENT, DISPERSER 2.0 10.0 EA 790.00 KG 04 573999 6 189

POLY
ITEM NOTES:
DO NOT STOCK
4 570086 HOOD SECTOR, DISPERSER 12.0 60.0 EA 37.00 KG 05 570086 4 190

POLY
4 682989 STANDPIPE & CROWDER, 6.0 30.0 EA 413.40 KG 06 682989 1 191

CLEANER DUTY WEMCO
METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
4 541744 REDUCER, VERTICAL B3BV 15 1.0 5.0 EA 4,115.00 K 07 541744 6 192
4 642449 WELDMENT, REDUCER, PIPE, 1.0 5.0 EA 35.80 KG 08 642449 1 193

DN 350 x DN 250
A36/Q235 STL

4 602763 VALVE, BUTTERFLY, DN250 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 602763 3 194

UPVC
4 602764 STUB, AIR CONTROL 1.0 5.0 EA 11.00 KG 10 602764 1 195

A36 STL
4 644543 PLATE, BLANKING, 1.0 5.0 EA 2.20 KG 11 644543 1 196

FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
4 624115 CLAMP, HOOD SECTOR 12.0 60.0 EA 3.40 KG 12 624115 1 197

A4 SS
4 1160209-01 SEAL, REDUCER HOUSING, 1.0 5.0 EA 1.26 KG 13 1160209 3 198

NEOPRENE
4 1160208-01 SEAL, RETAINER, REDUCER 1.0 5.0 EA 9.53 KG 14 1160208 3 199

HOUSING (2 HALVES)
A36 STL
ITEM NOTES:
1 EACH = 2 HALVES
4 650033 ASSY, BELT DRIVE GUARD 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 650033 1 200
4 1126231-01 HOOD SECTOR, BOSS 48.0 240.0 EA 0.00 KG 16 1126231 3 212

316 SS
4 624114-02 CLAMP, HOOD SECTOR, 300 12.0 60.0 EA 0.00 KG 17 624114 1 213
CM
A4
4 678888 SHAFT, EXTENSION WEMCO 1.0 5.0 EA 615.60 KG 18 678888 2 214

METER
STL/RBR-L
ITEM NOTES:
4 579763-04 PLATE, ADAPTER 1.0 5.0 EA 62.90 KG 19 579763 2 215

A36 STL/ RBR-L

ITEM NOTES:
4 570104-06 CAP,ROTOR 1.0 5.0 EA 12.00 KG 20 570104 B 216

M.O.R. RUBBER
4 615347 ASSY, MOTOR MOUNT RAIL 2.0 10.0 EA 0.00 KG 21 615347 1 217
300 CM FLOTATION
4 687502 SUPPORT, MOTOR TERMINAL 1.0 5.0 EA 53.80 KG 22 687502 1 228

BOX WEMCO FLOTATION, 300
CUBIC METER
A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687501-01 ANGLE SUPPORT, LEFT HAND 1.0 5.0 EA 11.40 KG 23 687501 1 229
CUBIC METER
A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687501-02 ANGLE SUPPORT, RIGHT 1.0 5.0 EA 11.40 KG 24 687501 1 230

HAND WEMCO FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
A36/ GB Q235B STL
4 574005 CAP M12 BOLT 300 CUBIC M 216.0 1,080.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 574005 A 231
POLYURETHANE
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 905200
4 674001 SPROCKET #80 36T C/W 44.0 220.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A 232
BUSHING
4 678898-04 CAP, M20 BOLT 78.0 390.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 678898 1 233

M.O.R.
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
4 579756-06 CAP,BOLT,M24,M.O.R. 12.0 60.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 579756 A 234

RUBBER

ITEM NOTES:
ADD DWG: 1125537

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308136 NUT, HEX, M10 6.0 30.0 EA 0.00 KG 44 N/A - 250

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 108.0 540.0 EA 0.00 KG 45 N/A - 251

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 12.0 60.0 EA 0.00 KG 46 N/A - 252

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 94.0 470.0 EA 0.00 KG 47 N/A - 253

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308140 NUT, HEX, M24 44.0 220.0 EA 0.00 KG 48 N/A - 254

CL 8, ZNC
4 308142 NUT, HEX, M36 18.0 90.0 EA 0.00 KG 49 N/A - 255

CL 8, ZNC
4 593974 WSHR, NORDLOCK, M24 12.0 60.0 EA 0.00 KG 50 N/A - 256

STL, ZNC
4 593984 WSHR, NORDLOCK, M36 18.0 90.0 EA 0.00 KG 51 N/A - 257

STL ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
4 307169 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A 322.0 1,610.0 EA 0.00 KG 55 N/A - 261
TP200 ZNC

TP200 ZNC
4 363189 WSHR, M36, DIN 125A 18.0 90.0 EA 0.10 KG 57 N/A - 263
TP200 ZNC
4 603477 WSHR, HRD, M52, DIN 125B, 4.0 20.0 EA 0.00 KG 58 N/A - 264
TP200 ZNC
4 566867-29 NAMEPLATE, LEGEND 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 59 566867 7 265

WEMCO FLOTATION,
MACHINE
302 SS
4 W69017-1 DECAL, WARNING "MOVING 1.0 5.0 EA 0.01 KG 60 69017 B 266

PARTS"
4 579800 PLATE, CAUTION V-BELT 1.0 5.0 EA 0.20 KG 61 579800 B 267

316 SS
4 360121 POP RIVET, #46.125" x 8.0 40.0 EA 0.00 KG 62 N/A - 268

.313"-.375"
300 SS
4 88930A TAB, LOCATOR, 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 63 88930 - 269

LUBRICATION FITTING
VINYL
4 903150A SEALANT, 10.3F OZ 4.0 20.0 EA 0.00 KG 64 903150 A 270

URETHANE ADHESIVE
4 678891 MOUNTING FRAME, MOTOR 1.0 5.0 EA 435.00 KG 65 678891 2 271

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 655832 MOTOR, 335kW, 3300V, 50Hz, 4 1.0 5.0 EA 3,016.00 K 66 655832 1 272
POLE WEMCO FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
4 603789-11 V-BELTS, 8VX1800, 180" 10.0 50.0 EA 0.00 KG 67 603789 2 273

4 678885 SHEAVE, 15" O.D., 8V, 1.0 5.0 EA 243.00 KG 68 678885 1 274
10-GROOVE
4 678894 BUSHING, TYPE M, Ø4" BORE 1.0 5.0 EA 47.20 KG 69 678894 1 275
4 678886 SHEAVE, 22.4" O.D., 8V, 1.0 5.0 EA 300.00 KG 70 678886 1 276
10-GROOVES
4 678887 BUSHING, TYPE N, Ø90mm 1.0 5.0 EA 77.50 KG 71 678887 1 277

BORE
4 678865 KEY, RECTANGULAR, 14MM X 1.0 5.0 EA 0.40 KG 72 678865 1 278

25MM X 130MM
C1018/1035 STL
4 86957BY KEY, SQ, 1 x 9 1.0 5.0 EA 0.00 KG 73 86957 A 279

C1018/1035

JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 64685 (REV 2) - INITIAL RELEASE IN SYTELINE, ITEM 3 PART NO. 589349-06 WAS 589349-05, ITEM 18 PART NO.
579763-04 WAS 579763-, ITEM 20 PART NO. 570104-06 WAS 570104-05.
ECN 66475 (REV 3) - Item 35 QTY 61 was 62, item 36 QTY 111 was 112, item 47 QTY 94 was 96, item 55 QTY 322 was 326.

BOM NUMBER: 589349-06 DESCRIPTION: ROTOR, STAR, 1510mm (59.5") DRAWING NUM: 589349
5 589350-02 INSET, STAR ROTOR (W/O 1.0 5.0 EA 1,616.30 K 0 589350 3 187
HOLES) WEMCO FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
STL

JOBMATL NOTES:
ECN 64685 (REV 3) - INITIAL RELEASE INTO SYTELINE. Drawing updated to new cad system. Updated part numbers in BOM list.
Added isometric views in sheet & detail views are moved to sheet 2. Added notes 3 & 4.

BOM NUMBER: 650033 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, BELT DRIVE GUARD DRAWING NUM: 650033
5 650034 WELDMENT, BELT DRIVE 1.0 5.0 EA 176.00 KG 01 650034 1 201

GUARD
A36/Q235 STL
5 650035 WELDMENT, COVER, BELT 1.0 5.0 EA 30.00 KG 02 650035 1 202

DRIVE GUARD
A36/Q235 STL
5 651219 WELDMENT, COVER, 2.0 10.0 EA 11.40 KG 03 651219 1 203

REDUCER SHAFT,
A36/Q235 STL
5 651221 WELDMENT, COVER, MOTOR 1.0 5.0 EA 15.70 KG 04 651221 1 204

SHAFT,
A36/Q235 STL
5 651222 WELDMENT, COVER, MOTOR 1.0 5.0 EA 7.80 KG 05 651222 1 205

SHAFT,
A36/Q235 STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
5 308136 NUT, HEX, M10 12.0 60.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 208

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
9021
CL 8.8 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:
EN 53404 (REV 1) - INITIAL RELEASE

BOM NUMBER: 615347 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, MOTOR MOUNT RAIL 300 CM FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 615347
5 615346 WELDMENT, MOTOR MOUNT 1.0 10.0 EA 71.30 KG 01 615346 1 218

RAIL, A36 STL
5 573591 TAKE-UP BLOCK 1.0 10.0 EA 8.70 KG 02 573591 1 219

A36 STL
5 573590 SLIDE BLOCK, 1.0 10.0 EA 9.60 KG 03 573590 1 220

A36 STL
5 603474 STUD, M24 x 130mm 2.0 20.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 221

CL 10, ZNC
5 603475 STUD, M36 x 650mm, 1.0 10.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 N/A - 222

CL 10, ZNC
5 308166 NUT, HEX, M36 2.0 20.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 223

CL 10, ZNC
5 308164 NUT, HEX, M24 2.0 20.0 EA 0.00 KG 07 N/A - 224

CL 10, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
5 577948-1 BEARING, THRUST, NEEDLE 2.0 20.0 EA 0.05 KG 10 577948 A 226

NOSE (KIT)
ITEM NOTES:
W/THRUST WASHER ASSY (M40)

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655828 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø700 GROMMET, DRAWING NUM: 655828
4 679368 ASSY, PNEUMATIC 2.0 4.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 679368 1 282

ACTUATOR, Ø300MM BORE, X
350MM STROKE
4 682982 FRAME, TRUNNION 1.0 2.0 EA 96.20 KG 02 682982 1 283

MOUNTED ACTUATOR
A36/GB Q235B STL

ACTUATOR
A36/GB Q235B STL
4 655765 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, 4.0 8.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 655765 1 285

FLOTATION
4 655772 WELDMENT, TRUNNION PIN, 4.0 8.0 EA 3.10 KG 05 655772 1 289

FLOTATION
A36/GB Q235 STL
4 682979 BRACKET, ACTUATOR 2.0 4.0 EA 33.40 KG 06 682979 1 290

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 682981 ROD, PISTON FLANGE 2.0 4.0 EA 8.50 KG 07 682981 1 291

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 657234 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART 2.0 4.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 657234 1 292

VALVE, FLOTATION
4 682980 ROD, DART VALVE 2.0 4.0 EA 64.80 KG 09 682980 1 299

A36/GB Q235B/A53 GRB STL
4 655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 6.0 12.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 655780 1 300

ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 905200
4 657215 PLATE, LINK, VALVE ROD, 4.0 8.0 EA 2.30 KG 11 657215 1 304
FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
4 655777 WELDMENT, FRAME, HINGED 2.0 4.0 EA 96.20 KG 12 655777 1 305

DART

A36/A235 STL
4 657235-01 WELDMENT, CONNECTION 2.0 4.0 EA 24.80 KG 13 657235 2 306

SPOOL, FLOTATION, 250 CM
A36/GB Q235B STL
4 541719-04 VALVE DART 27" 2.0 4.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 541719 3 307

STL/POLYURETHANE
4 682851 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, 1.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 682851 1 308

Ø700, WEMCO FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
4 657228-03 WELDMENT, WEAR PLATE, 2.0 4.0 EA 8.70 KG 16 657228 1 317

HINGED DART, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 301711 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4-10 x 4 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 326

GR 5, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 48.0 96.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 327

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 110.0 220.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 N/A - 328

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308141 NUT, HEX, M30 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 329

CL 8, ZNC
CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
4 307106 WSHR, HRD, AW, 3/4 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 33 N/A - 334
F436, ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655765 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 655765
5 655776 WELDMENT, TRUNNION 1.0 8.0 EA 6.10 KG 01 655776 1 286

BLOCK, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
5 655764 BUSHING, Ø50mm SHAFT, 1.0 8.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 655764 1 287

FLOTATION
ALLOY 932 (SAE 660) CAST BRONZE

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 657234 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 657234
5 657232 ADAPTER, FLANGE, 1.0 4.0 EA 7.20 KG 01 657232 2 293

ACTUATOR, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
5 657233 ROD, THREADED, FLOTATION 1.0 4.0 EA 7.80 KG 02 657233 1 294

A36/Q235 STL
5 657237 PIN, SLOTTED SPRING 1.0 4.0 EA 7.80 KG 03 N/A - 295

STL
CL 8, ZNC
5 614731 WSHR, HRD, 48 DIN, 125A 2.0 8.0 EA 0.60 KG 05 N/A - 297
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655780 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 655780
5 655778 WELDMENT, PLATE, HINGE, 2.0 24.0 EA 3.70 KG 01 655778 1 301

FLOTATION
A36/GB Q235 STL/316/316L SS
5 655779 PIN, HINGE CONNECTOR 1.0 12.0 EA 0.10 KG 02 655779 1 302

AISI 1040 / 1045 CRS

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682851 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700, DRAWING NUM: 682851
5 682865 PLATE, GROMMET, Ø700 1.0 2.0 EA 348.10 KG 01 682865 1 309

A36/GB Q235B/RUBBER
5 596900-16 GROMMET, DART VALVE, 2.0 4.0 EA 33.00 KG 02 596900 2 310

Ø700
A36 STL/POLY

CL 8.8, ZNC
5 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 20.0 40.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 312

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
5 598969-01 CAP BOLT, M12 20.0 40.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 598969 1 314

URETHANE
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 8017659

URETHANE ADHESIVE

JOBMATL NOTES:


MOUNTED ACTUATOR
A36/GB Q235B STL
4 679368 ASSY, PNEUMATIC 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 679368 1 338

ACTUATOR, Ø300MM BORE, X
350MM STROKE
4 655765 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, 4.0 4.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 655765 1 339

FLOTATION
4 655772 WELDMENT, TRUNNION PIN, 4.0 4.0 EA 3.10 KG 04 655772 1 343

FLOTATION
A36/GB Q235 STL
4 682979 BRACKET, ACTUATOR 2.0 2.0 EA 33.40 KG 05 682979 1 344

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 657234 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 657234 1 345

VALVE, FLOTATION
4 682981 ROD, PISTON FLANGE 2.0 2.0 EA 8.50 KG 07 682981 1 352

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 682866 ROD, DART VALVE 2.0 2.0 EA 88.30 KG 08 682866 1 353

4 655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 6.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 655780 1 354

ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 905200
4 657215 PLATE, LINK, VALVE ROD, 4.0 4.0 EA 2.30 KG 10 657215 1 358
FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
4 655777 WELDMENT, FRAME, HINGED 2.0 2.0 EA 96.20 KG 11 655777 1 359

DART
A36/A235 STL
4 1152923-04 VALVE, DART, 29.53" 2.0 2.0 EA 52.00 KG 12 1152923 1 360

STL/ POLYURETHANE

ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWINGS 905200
4 682852 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 13 682852 1 361

Ø450, WEMCO FLOTATION,
300 CUBIC METER
4 657228-03 WELDMENT, WEAR PLATE, 2.0 2.0 EA 8.70 KG 14 657228 1 370

HINGED DART, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL/RL
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 1125537
4 657235-04 WELDMENT, CONNECTION 2.0 2.0 EA 22.90 KG 15 657235 2 371

SPOOL
A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 301711 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4-10 x 4 8.0 8.0 EA 0.00 KG 23 N/A - 379

GR 5, ZNC

4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 74.0 74.0 EA 0.00 KG 24 N/A - 380

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 80.0 80.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 381

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308141 NUT, HEX, M30 8.0 8.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 382

CL 8, ZNC
CL 8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
4 307106 WSHR, HRD, AW, 3/4 8.0 8.0 EA 0.00 KG 31 N/A - 387
F436, ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655765 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FRAME PIVOT, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 655765
5 655776 WELDMENT, TRUNNION 1.0 4.0 EA 6.10 KG 01 655776 1 340

BLOCK, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
5 655764 BUSHING, Ø50mm SHAFT, 1.0 4.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 655764 1 341

FLOTATION
ALLOY 932 (SAE 660) CAST BRONZE

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 657234 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 657234
5 657232 ADAPTER, FLANGE, 1.0 2.0 EA 7.20 KG 01 657232 2 346

ACTUATOR, FLOTATION
A36/Q235 STL
5 657233 ROD, THREADED, FLOTATION 1.0 2.0 EA 7.80 KG 02 657233 1 347

A36/Q235 STL
5 657237 PIN, SLOTTED SPRING 1.0 2.0 EA 7.80 KG 03 N/A - 348

STL
CL 8, ZNC
5 614731 WSHR, HRD, 48 DIN, 125A 2.0 4.0 EA 0.60 KG 05 N/A - 350
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655780 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION DRAWING NUM: 655780
5 655778 WELDMENT, PLATE, HINGE, 2.0 12.0 EA 3.70 KG 01 655778 1 355

FLOTATION
A36/GB Q235 STL/316/316L SS
5 655779 PIN, HINGE CONNECTOR 1.0 6.0 EA 0.10 KG 02 655779 1 356

AISI 1040 / 1045 CRS

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 682852 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450, DRAWING NUM: 682852
5 682867 PLATE, GROMMET, Ø450 1.0 1.0 EA 260.10 KG 01 682867 1 362

5 596900-11 GROMMET, DART VALVE, 2.0 2.0 EA 23.30 KG 02 596900 2 363

Ø450
A36 STL/POLY

CL 8.8, ZNC
5 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 16.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 04 N/A - 365

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
5 598969-01 CAP BOLT, M12 16.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 598969 1 367

URETHANE
ITEM NOTES:
ADD DRAWING 8017659

URETHANE ADHESIVE

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655830 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR, ENDRESS + HAUSER, DRAWING NUM: 655830
4 611790 BRACKET, MOUNTING, LEVEL 1.0 3.0 EA 7.90 KG 01 611790 3 390

SENSOR
316 SS
4 683015 SUPPORT, ADJUSTABLE POST 1.0 3.0 EA 3.90 KG 02 683015 1 391

316/316L SS
4 611791 PLATE, TARGET, LEVEL 1.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 03 611791 1 392

SENSOR
316/316L SS
4 614657-03 FLOAT & ROD, LEVEL SENSOR 1.0 3.0 EA 5.60 KG 04 614657 2 393
316/316L SS
4 683074-04 PLATE, CLAMP, LEVEL 1.0 3.0 EA 1.70 KG 05 683074 1 394

SENSOR
A36/Q235B STL
4 614658 BRACKET, GUIDE, 1.0 3.0 EA 1.30 KG 06 614658 2 395

ADJUSTABLE
316/316L SS
4 619153 BRACE, LEVEL SENSOR 1.0 3.0 EA 2.10 KG 07 619153 1 396

316/316L SS
4 619154 BOLT, ANCHOR, M10 x 262 1.0 3.0 EA 0.20 KG 08 619154 1 397
304 SS
4 1181380-01 SENSOR, ULTRA-SONIC, E&H 1.0 3.0 EA 2.50 KG 09 1181380 1 398

ALUMI
4 360034 U-BOLT, DIN 3570 A, M10 x 76 x 1.0 3.0 EA 0.10 KG 10 N/A - 399
38 x 40
304 SS

A2

A2

BOM NUMBER: 655830 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR, ENDRESS + HAUSER, DRAWING NUM: 655830
A2
4 308170 NUT, HEX, M6 2.0 6.0 EA 0.00 KG 14 N/A - 403

A2
4 308172 NUT, HEX, M10 3.0 9.0 EA 0.00 KG 15 N/A - 404

ISO 4032, A2
A2
A2
A2

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655831 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, FROTH SENSOR ENDRESS + HAUSER, DRAWING NUM: 655831
4 683014 BRACKET, MOUNTING, 1.0 3.0 EA 8.30 KG 01 683014 1 410

FROTH SENSOR
316/316L SS
4 1181380-01 SENSOR, ULTRA-SONIC, E&H 1.0 3.0 EA 2.50 KG 02 1181380 1 411

ALUMI
4 683074-04 PLATE, CLAMP, LEVEL 1.0 3.0 EA 1.70 KG 03 683074 1 412

SENSOR
A36/Q235B STL

A2
A2

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 655823 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, PLATFORM DRAWING NUM: 655823
3 686623 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE I 1.0 1.0 EA 0.00 KG 01 686623 1 441

CUBIC METER
3 686634 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 2 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 02 686634 1 475

CUBIC METER

CUBIC METER

CUBIC METER
3 686642 ASSY, STAIRWAY WEMCO 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 05 686642 1 588

METER
3 686636 ASSY, INTERCONNECTION 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 686636 1 602
3 686660 HANDRAIL , WALKWAY 1.0 1.0 EA 75.80 KG 07 686660 1 613

3 686667 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 2.0 2.0 EA 36.80 KG 08 686667 1 614


3 686656 ANGLE 16.0 16.0 EA 3.20 KG 10 686656 1 616

A36/GB Q235B STL
3 686666-15 GRATING, WALKWAY 2.0 2.0 EA 20.90 KG 11 686666 1 617

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV
3 686665 COVER, DISCHARGE BOX 1.0 1.0 EA 8.80 KG 19 686665 1 625

A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
3 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 68.0 68.0 EA 0.00 KG 24 N/A - 630

CL 8.8, ZNC
3 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 30.0 30.0 EA 0.00 KG 25 N/A - 631

CL 8.8, ZNC
3 308137 NUT, HEX, M12 3.0 3.0 EA 0.00 KG 26 N/A - 632

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC

3 597960 WSHR, BEVEL,M20, DIN434 2.0 2.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 634

TP200 ZINC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
3 1166573-01 GRATING CLIP, SADDLE 56.0 56.0 EA 0.02 KG 31 1166573 1 637

GALV/ CARBON STL
3 619720 THRD CUT SCR, HEX/WSHR 56.0 56.0 EA 0.00 KG 32 N/A - 638
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 686623 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE I DRAWING NUM: 686623
4 686629 BEAM, PLATFORM 1.0 1.0 EA 108.30 KG 01 686629 1 442

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL




STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV
4 686656 ANGLE 8.0 8.0 EA 3.20 KG 20 686656 1 461

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687504 ANGLE 12.0 12.0 EA 2.50 KG 21 687504 1 462

A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 32.0 32.0 EA 0.00 KG 27 N/A - 468

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 78.0 78.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 469

CL 8.8, ZNC

TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

GALV/ CARBON STL
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 686634 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 2 DRAWING NUM: 686634

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL



A36/GB Q235B/ A53 GRB STL


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV
4 686656 ANGLE 8.0 16.0 EA 3.20 KG 21 686656 1 496

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687504 ANGLE 12.0 24.0 EA 2.50 KG 22 687504 1 497

A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 32.0 64.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 503

CL 8.8, ZNC

4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 80.0 160.0 EA 0.00 KG 29 N/A - 504

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

GALV/ CARBON STL
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:


A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL





STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV
4 686656 ANGLE 8.0 8.0 EA 3.20 KG 21 686656 1 531

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687504 ANGLE 12.0 12.0 EA 2.50 KG 22 687504 1 532

A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 32.0 32.0 EA 0.00 KG 28 N/A - 538

CL 8.8, ZNC

4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 78.0 78.0 EA 0.00 KG 29 N/A - 539

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

GALV/ CARBON STL
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:


A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B STL

A36/GB Q235B/ A53 GRB STL





STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

STL/GALV

4 686656 ANGLE 11.0 11.0 EA 3.20 KG 29 686656 1 574

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 687504 ANGLE 12.0 12.0 EA 2.50 KG 30 687504 1 575

A36/GB Q235B STL

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308139 NUT, HEX, M20 44.0 44.0 EA 0.00 KG 36 N/A - 581

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 84.0 84.0 EA 0.00 KG 37 N/A - 582

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

GALV/ CARBON STL
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 686642 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, STAIRWAY DRAWING NUM: 686642
4 686643 STAIR STRINGER 1.0 2.0 EA 56.00 KG 01 686643 1 589

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 686644 STAIR STRINGER 1.0 2.0 EA 56.00 KG 02 686644 1 590

A36/GB Q235B STL
4 686648 HANDRAIL, STAIRWAY 1.0 2.0 EA 44.20 KG 03 686648 1 591

4 686649 HANDRAIL, STAIRWAY 1.0 2.0 EA 43.00 KG 04 686649 1 592

4 686658 TREAD, STAIRWAY 5.0 10.0 EA 7.30 KG 05 686658 1 593

A36 STL/GALV

CL 8.8, ZNC

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 08 N/A - 596

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308136 NUT, HEX, M10 20.0 40.0 EA 0.00 KG 09 N/A - 597

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 597959 WSHR, BEVEL, M16, DIN 434 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 10 N/A - 598
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC
TP200 ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

BOM NUMBER: 686636 DESCRIPTION: ASSY, INTERCONNECTION DRAWING NUM: 686636
4 686635 INTERCONNECTING, 1.0 2.0 EA 124.50 KG 01 686635 1 603

PLATFORM
A36/GB Q235B STL


STL/GALV

STL/GALV

CL 8.8, ZNC
4 308138 NUT, HEX, M16 8.0 16.0 EA 0.00 KG 06 N/A - 608

CL 8.8, ZNC
TP200 ZNC

GALV/ CARBON STL
HD, 1/4-20 x 2"
STL ZNC

JOBMATL NOTES:

8.2 Recommended Spare Parts List
FLSmidth Sales Order: CSP0000891-01
Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL)
RSPL Codes
A – Wear Parts
B – Insurance Parts
C – Misc. Parts
Quantities listed on the recommended spare parts list

(RSPL) are the total for one unit. For recommendations
for quantities to be maintained on site, contact FLSmidth
Customer Service, referring to the “Offices” page in this
manual.
FLS Recommended Spare Parts List
(RSPL)
Equipment Number: CSP0000891-01

Description: Engineering for (5) Wemco 300m3 Cells
Revision Number: 1
Drawing Number: CSP0000891-01
Drawing RSPL Quantity Unit of

Item Description Number Code Per Unit Measure
655831 ASSY, FROTH SENSOR ENDRESS + HAUSER

1181380-01 SENSOR, ULTRA-SONIC, E&H 1181380 B 1.00 EA
655825 ASSY, CELL, TYPE I,

577914 COLLAR, SPLIT, 300 CUBIC METER, WEMCO 577914 A 2.00 EA
679367 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PLATE

682994 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER NON-STANDARD 682994 A 12.00 EA
682845 ASSY, CELL, TYPE II


682846 ASSY, CELL, TYPE III


655826 ASSY, MECHANISM

589349-06 ROTOR, STAR, 1510mm (59.5") 589349 A 1.00 EA
573999 SEGMENT, DISPERSER 573999 A 2.00 EA
570086 HOOD SECTOR, DISPERSER 570086 A 12.00 EA
655832 MOTOR, 335kW, 3300V, 50Hz, 4 POLE 655832 B 1.00 EA
603789-11 V-BELTS, 8VX1800, 180" 603789 B 10.00 EA
678885 SHEAVE, 15" O.D., 8V, 10-GROOVE 678885 B 1.00 EA
678894 BUSHING, TYPE M, Ø4" BORE 678894 B 1.00 EA
Date: 3/28/2014 Page 1 of 2

FLS Recommended Spare Parts List
(RSPL)
Equipment Number: CSP0000891-01

Description: Engineering for (5) Wemco 300m3 Cells
Revision Number: 1
Drawing Number: CSP0000891-01
Drawing RSPL Quantity Unit of

Item Description Number Code Per Unit Measure
541744 REDUCER, VERTICAL B3BV 15 541744 B 1.00 EA

678886 SHEAVE, 22.4" O.D., 8V, 10-GROOVES 678886 B 1.00 EA
678887 BUSHING, TYPE N, Ø90mm BORE 678887 B 1.00 EA
655828 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø700 GROMMET,

679368 ASSY, PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, Ø300MM BORE 679368 B 2.00 EA
655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 655780 A 6.00 EA
541719-04 VALVE DART 27" 541719 A 2.00 EA
682851 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700 682851 A 1.00 EA
682851 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700

596900-16 GROMMET, DART VALVE, Ø700 596900 A 2.00 EA
682850 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø450 GROMMET

1152923-04 VALVE, DART, 29.53" 1152923 A 2.00 EA
682852 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450 682852 A 1.00 EA
679368 ASSY, PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, Ø300MM BORE 679368 B 2.00 EA
655780 ASSY, HINGE, FLOTATION 655780 A 6.00 EA
682852 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450

596900-11 GROMMET, DART VALVE, Ø450 596900 A 2.00 EA
655830 ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR, ENDRESS + HAUSER

1181380-01 SENSOR, ULTRA-SONIC, E&H 1181380 B 1.00 EA
Date: 3/28/2014 Page 2 of 2

8.3 Certified Drawings
Drawing Title Drawing Number Rev. Level
Top Level Release CSP0000891-01 1
General Arrangement 656216 7
Anchor Bolt and Foundation Layout 656217 5
Platform General Arrangement 656218 6
Piping & Instrumention Diagram 656219 5
Installation Tolerances 595691 4
Final Circuit Assembly 682843 1
Cell Assembly Typer I 655825 1
Cell Assembly Type II 682845 1
Cell Assembly Type III 682846 1
Feed Box Assembly 682844 1
Discharge Box Assembly 655829 1
Radial Launder & Baffle Plate Assembly 679367 1
Radial Launder Assembly 682994 1
Hinged Dart Valve Assembly-700 655828 1
Hinged Dart Valve Assembly-450 682850 1
Dart Valve Connector Assembly 657234 1
Grommet Plate Assembly-700 682851 1
Grommet Plate Assembly-450 682852 1
Mechanism Assembly 655826 3
Belt Drive Guard Assembly 650033 1
Level Sensor Assembly 655830 1
Froth Sensor Assembly 655831 1
Platform Assembly 655823 1
Platform Assembly Type 1 686623 1

Drawing Title Drawing Number Rev. Level
Interconnection Assembly 686636 1
Stairway Assembly 686642 1
Torque Values 114808 4
Contents 83
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION PART NO. DRAWING NO.
NOTES: REFERENCE DRAWINGS

A A
1 All components to be manufactured in compliance with FLSMIDTH workmanship standard ES0001. 100 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 300m3 CELLS 656216 656216
ANCHOR BOLT AND FOUNDATION
101 656217 656217
2 Unless other wise specified (as noted below) paint shall be per FLSMIDTH 687508 LAYOUT 300m3 CELLS
102 PLATFORM ARRANGEMENT 300m3 CELLS 656218 656218
3 All sub vendor manufacturer supplied items shall have the manufacturers' standard coating system.
This includes, but is not limited to: all pumps, gear reducers, electrical motors, bearings, heaters, valves, 103 P &ID 300m3 CELLS 656219 656219
B instruments, and control panels. The following surfaces shall not be painted unless specified otherwise: B
stainless steel, zincated steel, plastic, nameplates, seals, fasteners, threads, ceramic and machined 104
surfaces.
105
Items to be painted per Paint Scheme 687508 01 (Non Submerged)
106
DRAWING NO. DESCRIPTION ITEMS
107
682843 ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT ITEMS 11 & 12
C 655825 ASSY, CELL TYPE I ITEMS 1, 2, 4, 5 & 6 108 C
682845 ASSY, CELL TYPE II ITEMS 1, 2, 4, 5 & 6 109
682846 ASSY, CELL TYPE III ITEMS 1, 2, 4, 5 & 6
655823 ASSY, PLATFORM ITEMS 10 & 19 110
686623 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 1 ITEMS 1 THRU 4; 20 & 21 111
686634 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 2 ITEMS 1 THRU 4; 21 & 22
D 686637 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 3 ITEMS 1 THRU 4; 21 & 22 112 D
686647 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 4 ITEMS 1 THRU 5; 29 & 30 113
SERIALIZATION (TAG#566867)
686642 ASSY, STAIRWAY ITEMS 1 & 2
686636 ASSY, INTERCONNECTION ITEM 1 114
MACHINE TAG NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
655826 ASSY, MECHANISM ALL ITEMS AS REQUIRED EXCLUDING NO. SPECIFICATIONS/REQUIREMENTS
ITEMS 3, 6, 12, 15, 17, 18, 19, 20. 1 324 FC 601 CSP0000891 01A
E 2 200 PAINT SPECIFICATION 687508 E
655828 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 700 ITEMS 2, 3, 4 & 6 2 324 FC 602 CSP0000891 01B
682850 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 450 ITEMS 1, 3, 4 & 5 1 201 FLS WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS ES0001
3 324 FC 603 CSP0000891 01C ITP FOR STRUCTURAL FABRICATION F82417SLC
202
4 324 FC 604 CSP0000891 01D COATINGS (GENERAL PURPOSE) CSP0000891 01
Items to be painted per Paint Scheme 687508 02 (Submerged) 203
5 324 FC 605 CSP0000891 01E
DRAWING NO. DESCRIPTION ITEMS 204
F F
682843 ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT ITEMS 13 THRU 20
205
655825 ASSY, CELL TYPE I ITEMS 7, 9 THRU 13
682845 ASSY, CELL TYPE II ITEMS 7, 9 THRU 12 ASSEMBLIES
682846 ASSY, CELL TYPE III ITEMS 7, 9 THRU 13
300 1 ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT FIRST CLEANER 682843 682843
655826 ASSY, MECHANISM ITEMS 3, 6, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20.
655828 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 700 ALL ITEMS AS REQUIRED EXCLUDING 301 1 ASSY, PLATFORM 655823 655823
G ITEMS 2, 3, 4 & 6 G
302
682850 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, 450 ALL ITEMS AS REQUIRED EXCLUDING
ITEMS 1, 3, 4 & 5 303
679367 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PL ITEM 2 304
305
H H
Items to be painted per Paint Scheme 687508 03 (Exterior) 306
307
682844 ASSY, FEED BOX ITEMS 1THRU 5 308
655829 ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX ITEMS 1, 3, 4, 5 & 6
309
I I
PARTS
400
Items to be painted per 687508 04 (Safety Items)
401
655823 ASSY, PLATFORM ITEMS 7, 8 & 9 402
J 686623 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 1 ITEMS 5, 6 & 7 J
403
686634 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 2 ITEMS 5 THRU 8
686637 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 3 ITEMS 5 THRU 8 404
686647 ASSY, PLATFORM TYPE 4 ITEMS 6 THRU 10
405
686642 ASSY, STAIRWAY ITEMS 3 & 4
686636 ASSY, INTERCONNECTION ITEM 2 406
K 655826 ASSY, MECHANISM ITEM 15 K

407
408
409
410
L 411 L
412
413
SPARES
500
M M
501
503
5
N 4
N
1 LGC CAF 18 Mar 14 Initial Release
O Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description O
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
ESPERANZA EXPANSION PROJECT
324 FC 601 THRU 324 FC 605
PROJECT ESPERANZA EXPANSION PROJECT
P CLIENT MINERA ESPERANZA P
TOP LEVEL
CONSULTING ENGINEER JRI INGENIERIA 300m3 FLOTATION MACHINES (1) ROW ARRANGED FB 2 2 1 DB
CUSTOMER ORDER NUMBER E29200 WEMCO FIRST CLEANERS
FLS ORDER NUMBER CSP0000891 01 Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: ISO E Based on: ISO A
PROJECT LOCATION CHILE Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: Sheet 1 of 1
Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
DATE FLSMIDTH SALT LAKE CITY, INC. the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
Ref. From No.: Content
CSP0000632 01 CSP0000891 01 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
3
7 7
2
2
3 3
3 7
3 3 3 3 3
2 4
7
3
6
3
3
3
2
2 2
6
6
3
5
3 3 3 3 3
3 3
2
4 4
2
4
4
3 2 4
4
3 4
3
4
2
3 3 4
4 4
4
3
4
3 2 4
4
2 3
2
5
3 3 3 3 3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4 4
4
5
4
4
4
4 4
4
4
3
5
4
4
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WT (kg)
1 1 ASSY, FEEDBOX 682844 682844 7052

A 6 2 1 ASSY, CELL, TYPE I 655825 655825 32578 A
3 2 ASSY, CELL, TYPE II 682845 682845 64844
4 2 ASSY, CELL, TYPE III 682846 682846 65758
5 1 ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX 655829 655829 7230
6 5 ASSY, MECHANISM 655826 655826 105920
7 2 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø700 GROMMET 655828 655828 3192
B 8 1 ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø450 GROMMET 682850 682850 1590 B
6 9 3 ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR 655830 655830 78
10 3 ASSY, FROTH SENSOR 655831 655831 36
11 5 SUPPORT BEAM 686632 686632 8293
12 5 SUPPORT BEAM 686633 686633 8293.5
13 6 VELOCITY RAMP 682872 682872 193.8
C C
14 14 ACCESS COVER, CHUTE BAFFLE 687503 687503 117.6
15 3 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 1 LH 678882 01 678882 327.6
16 3 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 1 RH 678882 02 678882 327.6
7
17 2 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 2 LH 678896 01 678896 170.2
PR
6 OC 18 2 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 2 RH 678896 02 678896 170.2
D E SS 19 2 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 3 RH 678897 01 678897 156.4

D
FLO 20 2 CHUTE BAFFLE TYPE 3 LH 678897 02 678897 156.2
W 21 84 CAPSCR, HEX, M8 x 30 CL 8.8 ZNC 300616 0

22 42 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 40 CL 8.8 ZNC 301876 4.2
1 23 348 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 301881 34.8
24 40 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 80 CL 8.8 ZNC 302510 16
TAG. NO. 324 FC 601 01
E 25 80 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 X 390 CL 8.8 ZNC 617596 120 E
27 348 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
28 120 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0
6
29 80 NUT, HEX, M30 CL 8, ZNC 308141 0
30 84 WSHR, HRD, 8, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307165 0
F 31 738 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307169 0 F
2
TAG. NO. 324 FC 601
SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01A Total mass: 305538 kg
7
G G
3
H H
TAG. NO. 324 FC 602
SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01B
8
I I
4
J TAG. NO. 324 FC 603 J
SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01C
K K
TAG. NO. 324 FC 604

SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01D
L L
M M
4
TAG. NO. 324 FC 605

SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01E
5
N 5 4
N
TAG. NO. 324 FC 605 01 3
1 STY CAF 26 Nov 13 Initial Release
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P
ASSY, FINAL CIRCUIT
FIRST CLEANERS, FB 2 2 1 DB
WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
Notes: Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO A
Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 1 of 4
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
2. Field locate and install in approximate location. Ref. From No.: Content
638132 682843 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
PLAN VIEW
A 51804 A
APPROX. OVERALL LENGTH
CL CL
1654 CL 6200 CL 8960 CL 8960 8960 8960 CL 6200 CL 1850
B 11 1575 1575 11 11 11 11 B
TYP. TYP.
C C
APPROX. OVERALL WIDTH
D D
8992
CL
4475 FROTH NOZZLE
TYP.
E E
1440
TYP.
F F
9 2 10 2 12 12 9 2 10 2 12 9 2 12
12 10 2
G G
ELEVATION VIEW
(See Sheet 3) 6 (See Sheet 3) 2 9 6 10 2
E D
H 7 6 9 2 6 10 2 H
(See Sheet 3) 7 2 9 6 10 2 8
F
9059 APPROX. OPERATING HEIGHT
I I
7296 TOP OF MECHANISM FRAME
7735 TOP OF FEEDBOX
6655 TOP OF TANK
J J
4440 FROTH DISCHARGE
(See Sheet 4) (See Sheet 4)

K H H J J K
(See Sheet 4) (See Sheet 4)
H H J J
(See Sheet 4)
K K
L D L
A B
2X 1000
CL DISCHARGE
DROP
1 (See This Sheet) 2 (See This Sheet) 3
4 3
DISCHARGE
750
M C M
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C 4 (See This Sheet) 5
215
DROP
(From This Sheet) (From This Sheet) (From This Sheet)
4X
N N
1 2 3
2 4 5
O O
2X 2X
2X
23 27 31 23 27 31
23 27 31
P P
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO?A
13 13 2X
13 2X Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 2 of 4
Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
23 27 31 23 27 31 23 27 31 the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S. © FLSmidth A/S All rights reserved.
2X
No.: Content
682843 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
DETAIL E
(From Sheet 2)
B SECTION D?D 2X B
(From Sheet 2)
5X 33 29 26 12
4 OR 3 OR 2
C CL C
(See This Sheet)

D G 6 D
12 11
E E
F F
ROTOR SUBMERGENCE
G G
1092
DETAIL F
(From Sheet 2)
H H
ROTOR ENGAGEMENT
12
2X
I I
24 28 32
180
J J
2 OR 3 OR 4
K K
DETAIL G
L (From This Sheet) L
Typical Detail
12 6
2X
M 25 28 32 M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
682843 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION H?H SECTION J?J

(From Sheet 2) (From Sheet 2)
B B
14 31 22 2 3 22 31 14
14 31 22 3 4
C C
L L (See This Sheet)
D D
19
18 16
2000 OPENING
E E
2000 OPENING
F F
17 20 15
G G
H H
14 31 22
14 31 22 22 31 14
I I
SECTION K?K SECTION L?L

(From Sheet 2) (From This Sheet)
J (Typical Chute Cover Detail) J
14 31 22 4
K K
21 30
L L
14
16
2000 OPENING
M M
N N
15
O O
P P
5
14 31 22 Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
No.: Content
682843 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 TANK, TOP SEGMENT 682860 682860 10795

A 2 1 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT I 682853 682853 14983.9 A
3 1 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PLATE 679367 679367 1345
4 1 MANWAY DOOR 609284 04 609284 159.8
5 1 MANWAY DOOR SWING ARM 611742 611742 18.8
3 6 1 MANWAY LIFTING HOOK 611765 611765 0.4
7 2 VELOCITY CONE SEGMENT 678938 678938 820.72
B 8 2 DRAFT TUBE 678892 678892 2036.6 B
9 2 COLLAR SEGMENT 577914 577914 503.2
10 2 PLATE, ANTI SANDING 682869 682869 317.4
11 6 FALSE FLOOR SEGMENT 682854 682854 1026
12 1 FALSE FLOOR TAB 682856 682856 362
13 1 FALSE FLOOR TAB 682857 682857 177
C C
14 64 WASHER, SQUARE, M24 A36 STL 623754 03 623754 6.4
15 2 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD, 150#, 12" FS 354915 86.6
16 1 COTTER PIN, 6.3 DIA X 80MM A4 632323 365 0
D D
24 1 NUT, HEX JAM, M16 CL 4, ZNC 308324 0
E 25 145 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0 E

26 140 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
27 24 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0
1 29 280 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307169 0
F F
Total mass: 33497 kg
G G
H H
I I
J J
K K
L L
M M
5
N 4
N
1 VILSA CAF 28 Oct 13 Initial Release
12 11 21 14 9 21 14 13 8 22 14 19 26 29 Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
DETAIL NUMBER 2X
P P
ASSY, CELL, TYPE I
XX
2 682863 WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
Notes: Weight: ISO A
Mat.: N/A N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 1 of 4
Q INSTRUCTION DRAWING NUMBER the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q
2. Material: Elastomer M.O.R Rubber per FLSmidth specification 1125537 or equivalent as approved by FLSmidth engineering department. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
No elastomer lining permitted on bolt holes. All overlaps must be ground flat. See drawing 682863 for elastomer lining details. Ref. From No.: Content
631682 655825 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B B
PLAN VIEW
CL
C C
(See Sheet 4) ELEVATION VIEW
H
1 CL
D D
H
E E
2
F F
G G
10 J
(See
Sheet 4)
10 B
6655
H H
CL
(See
A Sheet 3) A
C (See Sheet 3)
(See Sheet 3) B
4440
I I
12 13 2
F (See
Sheet 3)
J
J J
K K
505
505
L L
G
(See Sheet 4)
11
M M
4477.5 4477.5
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
655825 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION B?B
(From Sheet 2)
B DETAIL C B
SECTION A?A (From Sheet 2)
(From Sheet 2) 1
2X
17 25 28
C CL C
TYP. 9
16
682863
D D
9
2
19 26 29
E 2X E
F F
DETAIL D DETAIL E
(From This Sheet) (From This Sheet)
4X
G G
9 2X
19 26 29
7
3
H H
2
9
I I
8
J D (See This Sheet) 21 30
J
8
DETAIL F
(From Sheet 2)
K 10 K
10
2X 2X 8
L 29 26 18 18 26 29 L
M M
21 14
N N
19 26 29
21 14
E 2X
(See This Sheet) 7 22 14 21 14
O O
P P
No.: Content
655825 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B SECTION G?G VIEW H?H B

(Rotated Counter Clockwise) (From Sheet 2)
(From Sheet 2) (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
2X
C 6 24 25 28 C
5
D D
E E
2 15
F F
G G
16
20 26 29
H 2X H
23 27 30
I 2X I
J J
SECTION J?J
(From Sheet 2)
(Rotated Clockwise)
K K
CL 2X
19 26 29
L L
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
655825 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 TANK, TOP SEGMENT 682860 682860 10795

A 2 1 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT II 682861 682861 15012.5 A
4 1 MANWAY DOOR 609284 04 609284 159.8
6 1 MANWAY LIFTING HOOK 611765 611765 0.4
3
B 8 2 DRAFT TUBE 678892 678892 2036.6 B
9 2 COLLAR SEGMENT 577914 577914 503.2
12 2 FALSE FLOOR TAB 682857 682857 354
C C
14 2 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD, 150#, 12" FS 354915 86.6
D D
24 145 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
E 25 140 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0 E

26 24 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0
1
F Total mass: 32589 kg F
G G
H H
I I
2
J J
K K
L L
M M
5
N 4
N
1 STY CAF 28 Oct 13 Initial Release

DETAIL NUMBER
Language
12 20 13 9 20 13 8 21 13 18 25 28
Scale: N/A Rev.:
11 12
XX 2X
2 682863
P P
ASSY, CELL, TYPE II

INSTRUCTION DRAWING NUMBER Notes: Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO A
Q 2. Material: Elastomer M.O.R Rubber per FLSmidth specification 1125537 or equivalent as approved by FLSmidth engineering department. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
No elastomer lining permitted on bolt holes. All overlaps must be ground flat. See drawing 682863 for elastomer lining details. Ref. From No.: Content
631682 682845 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B B
PLAN VIEW
CL
C C
H
1 CL
D D
H
E E
2
F F
G G
10 J
(See
Sheet 4) 10 B
6655
H H
CL
(See
A Sheet 3)
A
C (See Sheet 3)
(See Sheet 3) B
4440
I 12 I
12 2
F (See
J Sheet 3)
J J
K K
505
505
L L
G
(See Sheet 4)
11
M M
4477.5 4477.5
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
682845 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION B?B
(From Sheet 2)
B DETAIL C B
(From Sheet 2) 1
2X
16 24 27
C CL C
TYP 9
16
D 682863 D
2
18 25 28
E E
2X
F F
DETAIL D DETAIL E
(From This Sheet)
(From This Sheet) 4X
G G
2X
9
18 25 28
7
3
H H
9
I I
8 20 29
J D J
(See This Sheet)
DETAIL F
(From Sheet 2)
K 10 K
10
2X 2X
8
L 28 25 17 17 25 28 L
M M
20 13
13 20
N N
18 25 28
E 2X
(See This Sheet) 7 21 13 20 13
O O
P P
No.: Content
682845 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B
VIEW H?H B
(From Sheet 2)
SECTION G?G (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
(Rotated Counter Clockwise)
(From Sheet 2)
2X
C 6 23 24 27 C
5
D D
E E
F F
2 14
G G
15
19 25 28
H 2X H
I 22 26 29 I
2X
J J
SECTION J?J
(From Sheet 2)
(Rotated Clockwise)
K K
2X
CL
18 25 28
L L
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
682845 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 TANK, TOP SEGMENT 682860 682860 10795

A 2 1 TANK, BOTTOM SEGMENT III 682862 682862 15426.5 A
4 1 MANWAY DOOR 609284 04 609284 159.8
3
B 8 2 DRAFT TUBE 678892 678892 2036.6 B
9 2 COLLAR SEGMENT 577914 577914 503.2
12 1 FALSE FLOOR TAB 682855 682855 352
13 1 FALSE FLOOR TAB 682857 682857 177
C C
15 2 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD, 150#, 12" FS 354915 86.6
D D
E 25 145 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0 E

26 136 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
27 24 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0
1
F F
G G
H H
I I
J J
K K
L L
M M
5
N 4
N

DETAIL NUMBER
Language
12 11 21 14 9 21 14 13 8 22 14 19 26 29 Scale: N/A Rev.:
2X
XX
2 682863
P P
ASSY, CELL, TYPE III
Notes: WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER

INSTRUCTION DRAWING NUMBER Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO A
Q 2. Material: Elastomer M.O.R Rubber per FLSmidth specification 1125537 or equivalent as approved by FLSmidth engineering department. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
No elastomer lining permitted on bolt holes. All overlaps must be ground flat. See drawing 682863 for elastomer lining details. Ref. From Content
No.:
631682 682846 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B B
PLAN VIEW
CL
C C
H
1 CL
D D
H
E E
2
F F
G G
J
(See
Sheet 4)
10 B
6655
H H
CL
(See
A Sheet 3) A 2
C (See Sheet 3)
(See Sheet 3) B
4440
I I
13
12
F (See
J Sheet 3)
J J
1505
K K
505
L L
G
(See Sheet 4)
11
M M
4477.5 4477.5
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
682846 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION B?B
(From Sheet 2)
B DETAIL C B
(From Sheet 2) 1
2X
17 25 28
C CL C
TYP 9
16
D 682863 D
9
2
19 26 29
E 2X E
F F
DETAIL D DETAIL E
4X
G G
9
2X
19 26 29 7
3
H H
9
I I
8
21 30
J D 8 J
(See This Sheet)
DETAIL F
(From Sheet 2)
K K
10
2X
8
L 18 26 29 L
M M
21 14
N N
19 26 29
E 2X
21 14 (See This Sheet) 7 22 14 21 14
O O
P P
No.: Content
682846 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION G?G VIEW H?H

B (From Sheet 2) B
(From Sheet 2) (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
2X
6 24 25 28
C C
D D
E E
2 15
F F
G G
16
20 26 29
H 2X H
23 27 30
2X
I I
J J
SECTION J?J
(From Sheet 2)
(Rotated Clockwise)
K 2X K
CL
19 26 29
L L
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
682846 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
1 1 FEEDBOX 682858 682858 6812.9
A 2 1 MANWAY DOOR 609284 04 609284 159.8 A
5 2 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD, 150#, 8" FS 354913 39
SECTION A A 7 42 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 70 CL 8.8 ZNC 301880 4.2
B (Rotated 180 ) 8 16 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 100 CL 8.8 ZNC 301883 1.6 B
10 1 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
4 12 10 9 11 58 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
C C
3
Total mass: 7052 kg
2X
13 11 7
D D
E E
1717.5
F F
4265
6
3095 INSIDE
G G
2
H H
SECTION B B
2X
I I
J 1 5 J
2X
8 11 13
1
K K
7735
L L
M M
5
N 4
N
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
P B P
ASSY, FEEDBOX

Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO A
505
Notes: the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
B 1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. Ref. From
No.: Content
631671 682844 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1717.5 1850
1 1 DISCHARGE BOX 682859 682859 6721
A A A 2 1 COVER, DRAIN, DISCHARGE BOX 678893 678893 210.9 A
3 1 MANWAY DOOR 609284 04 609284 159.8
VIEW A A 6 2 FLG, RF, PIPE, BLD, 150#, 12" FS 354915 86.6
(Rotated 180 ) 7 1 COTTER PIN, 6.3 DIA X 80MM A2 632323 352 0
B 8 10 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301248 0 B
5 17 13 12
B 10 24 CAPSCR, HEX, M24 x 110 CL 8.8 ZNC 302513 9.6
2X 11 10 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8, ZNC 308137 0
4 12 1 NUT, HEX JAM, M16 CL 4, ZNC 308324 0

9 14 18
13 1 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
C C
14 42 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
3 15 24 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0

D D
Total mass: 7230 kg
B SECTION D D
2X
E E
1 6
2X
10 15 19
F F
7
3095 INSIDE
G G
H H
I I
SECTION B B
J J
SECTION C C 2X
K 10X K
8 11 16
2
2
7735
L L
M M
C C
5
N 4
N
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
D
P P
ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX
750
720

Notes: Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
D Ref. From No.: Content
651211 655829 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 12 ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER 682994 682994 408

A 2 8 PLATE, BAFFLE 679366 679366 928 A
3 12 BAR, CIRCUMFERENTIAL WEIR 655626 655626 88.8
4 90 CLIP, WEIR, RUBBER LINED 614858 02 614858 0
SECTION A A 5 2 ADHESIVE FOAM STRIP 603786 603786 0
(From This Sheet) 6 104 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 50 A4 301292 0
(Rotated Clockwise) 7 12 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 60 A4 301293 0
B 8 116 NUT, HEX, M12 A4 308185 0
B
9 232 WSHR, OVERSIZED, M12, DIN 9021 A4 597459 0
1 Total mass: 1437 kg
C C
2X
D D
7 8 9
E E
(See Sheet 2) B
2
F F
G G
2X
H H
6 8 9
I I
A
J J
71
16
K K
A
(See This Sheet)
L L
C 3
(See
M Sheet 2) C M
5
N 4
N
1 ARAMO CAF 23 Oct 13 Initial Release
O Installation Procedure: Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description O

1. Install all radial launders (Item 1) into each peripheral opening. Leave
all radial launder backing plates and fasteners loose for installation of Language
weir bars (Item 3). Scale: N/A Rev.:
2. Cut the weir bars (Item 3) to the length required to span between
each radial launder. The weir bar will slide down between the tank wall
P and the adhesive strip attached to the radial launder flange. Use the P
ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER & BAFFLE PLATE
weir clips (Items 4) to hold the weir bars tightly against the tank wall INTERNAL LAUNDER
until all fasteners can be properly tightened. WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
3. Adjust all radial launders and weir bars so that the peripheral launders
of the tank is level to within 6mm overall. Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 1 of 2
Q 4. When final leveling is complete, tighten all fasteners to secure the radial CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
launders and weir bars into position. permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
665064 679367 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
DETAIL B WEIR CLIP

(From Sheet 1) INSTALLATION DETAIL
B B
TANK REFERENCE 3
C WEIR CLIP C
D D
WEIR CLIP
(50)
E WEIR BAR OVERLAP E
(SEE NOTE 2)
INSTALL WITH FINGER

F WEIR LOOP INSIDE LAUNDER F
3 AT A MAXIMUM
SPACING OF 300mm.
5
TANK WALL LAUNDER SIDE

G G
USE FASTENERS PROVIDED WITH

LAUNDER ASSEMBLY TO CLAMP
WEIR BAR AND ADHESIVE STRIP TO TANK.
FASTENERS ALSO USED TO
ADJUST LAUNDER.
H H
I I
VIEW C*C
(From Sheet 1)
J J
1 5
K K
L L
M M
ADHERE ADHESIVE STRIP TO OUTSIDE

EDGE OF RADIAL LAUNDER FACE
N & WEIRS BARS AS SHOWN. CUT ADHESIVE N
STRIP TO LENGTH AS REQUIRED.
O O
P P
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO*A
No.: Content
679367 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 RADIAL LAUNDER, NON STANDARD 682993 682993 21.6

A 2 1 RADIAL LAUNDER BACKING PLATE, 300 CUBIC METER A36 STL 616174 616174 11.7
A
3 6 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 X 80, FULL THRD A4 611170 0.6
4 6 NUT, HEX, M12 A4 308185 0
5 12 WSHR, OVERSIZED, M12, DIN 9021 A4 597459 0
B Total mass: 34 kg B
C C
D D
1
E E
F F
G G
H H
I I
2 4
J 3 J
2
1 DCA CAF 12 Nov 13 Initial Release
5 4 3 Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description
K 2X K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
L ASSY, RADIAL LAUNDER L

NON STANDARD, 120mm SHORT
M CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved. M
616177 682994 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 ASSY, PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, Ø300mm BORE x 350mm STROKE 679368 679368 240
A 2 1 FRAME, TRUNNION MOUNTED ACTUATOR 682982 682982 96.2 A
3 1 FRAME, TRUNNION MOUNTED ACTUATOR 682983 682983 96.2
4 4 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT 655765 655765 24
5 4 WELDMENT, TRUNNION PIN 655772 655772 12.4
6 2 BRACKET, ACTUATOR 682979 682979 66.8
7 2 ROD, PISTON FLANGE 682981 682981 17
B 8 2 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE 657234 657234 34 B
6
9 2 ROD, DART VALVE 682980 682980 129.6
10 6 ASSY, HINGE 655780 655780 42
11 4 PLATE, LINK, VALVE ROD 657215 657215 9.2
12 2 WELDMENT, FRAME, HINGED DART 655777 655777 192.4
1 2 13 2 WELDMENT, CONNECTION SPOOL 657235 01 657235 49.6
C C
14 2 DART VALVE, 27" 541719 04 541719 146.6
15 1 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700 682851 682851 416
5
16 2 WELDMENT, WEAR PLATE, HINGED DART 657228 03 657228 15.8
4 18 8 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 301555 0
D D
3
E 25 8 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4 10 x 4 GR 5 ZNC 301711 0.8 E
26 48 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
27 110 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
28 8 NUT, HEX, M30 CL 8, ZNC 308141 0
29 2 NUT, HEX, JAM, M48 CL 8, ZNC 657236 1.2
F 31 220 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307169 0
F
33 8 WSHR, HRD, AW, 3/4 F436 ZNC 307106 0
Total mass: 1596 kg
G G
9
H H
I I
J J
K 11 K
10 10
L L
15
M M
5
N 4
N
1 DCA CAF 28 Oct 13 Initial Release
14 13 16 12
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
Notes:
P P
ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø700 GROMMET
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise.
FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
2. With the actuator rod fully extended, adjust the linkage rod so that the dart valve (item 14 ) fully contacts the valve seat (item Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO A
15 ) around the complete circumference of the valve. The dart valve (item 14 ), when properly adjusted should compress the Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
Q valve seat by 2mm 4mm [1/16" 1/8'']. Air supply to actuator for set up and testing should be set to 420 480 kpa[60 70 PSI]. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
655781 655828 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A
SECTION B?B A
(From This Sheet)
2X
PLAN VIEW SECTION A?A
(From This Sheet)
2X
1
B 1 B
2X 28 32
MATCH DRILL PLATFORM
18 26 30 MEMBERS ON SITE
C 2X C
6
19 26 30
31 27 23
2X 9
D 2X D
20 26 30
ASSY, TANK 7
31 27 22 REFERENCE
NOT
SEE
2X
E2
E E
ASSY, TANK
REFERENCE
F 8 F
29
2
9
G G
CL GROMMET
DETAIL C SECTION D?D

H B B (See This Sheet) 9 H

=
2X 12
24 27 31 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
1200
I 11 I
A A (See This Sheet) 2X 15
24 27 31 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
=
10
J 11 J
2X 14
GROMMET CL
24 27 31 TORQUE TO 530 N?m

25 33
(See TORQUE TO 530 N?m
K D This Sheet)
K
C 12
3 (See This Sheet) E (See This Sheet)
16
L L
M 17 26 30 DETAIL E DETAIL F M
14 (From This Sheet) (From This Sheet)
ASSY, TANK 2X
REFERENCE 2X 2X
12 15
TORQUE TO 530 N?m 31 27 24 10 24 27 31 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
N N
21 27 31
(See This Sheet) F 2X TORQUE TO 530 N?m 31 27 23
O
D O
13 2X
ASSY, TANK
REFERENCE
P P
No.: Content
655828 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 FRAME, TRUNNION MOUNTED ACTUATOR 682868 682868 302.7

A 2 2 ASSY, PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR, Ø300mm BORE x 350mm STROKE 679368 679368 240 A
3 4 ASSY, FRAME PIVOT 655765 655765 24
4 4 WELDMENT, TRUNNION PIN 655772 655772 12.4
5 2 BRACKET, ACTUATOR 682979 682979 66.8
2
6 2 ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE 657234 657234 34
7 2 ROD, PISTON FLANGE 682981 682981 17
B B
8 2 ROD, DART VALVE 682866 682866 176.6
5 1 9 6 ASSY, HINGE 655780 655780 42
10 4 PLATE, LINK, VALVE ROD 657215 657215 9.2
11 2 WELDMENT, FRAME, HINGED DART 655777 655777 192.4
2 12 2 VALVE, DART 1152923 04 1152923 101
C 13 1 ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450 682852 682852 308 C

14 2 WELDMENT, WEAR PLATE, HINGED DART 657228 03 657228 15.8
15 2 WELDMENT, CONNECTION SPOOL 657235 04 657235 45.8
D 19 8 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 301878 0.8 D
23 8 CAPSCR, HEX, 3/4 10 x 4 GR 5 ZNC 301711 0.8
24 74 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
E E
25 80 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
26 8 NUT, HEX, M30 CL 8, ZNC 308141 0
31 8 WSHR, HRD, AW, 3/4 F436 ZNC 307106 0
Total mass: 1590 kg
G G
8
H H
I I
J J
K K
L L
10
9
9
M M
13
5
N 4
N
1 DCA CAF 31 Oct 13 Initial Release
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
Notes:
P P
ASSY, HINGED DART VALVE, Ø450 GROMMET
12 15 14 11 1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise.
2. With the actuator rod fully extended, adjust the linkage rod so that the dart valve (item 12 ) fully contacts
the valve seat (item 13 ) around the complete circumference of the valve. The dart valve (item 12 ), Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 1 of 2
Q when properly adjusted should compress the valve seat by 2mm 4mm [1/16" 1/8'']. Air supply to actuator for the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q
set up and testing should be set to 420 480 kpa [60 70 PSI]. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
652941 682850 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A SECTION A?A SECTION B?B A

2
B B
2X 2
29 25 21
1
C PLAN VIEW 26 30 C
2X
2X
20 25 29
5 17 24 28
D ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX D

REFERENCE
1
E ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX E

REFERENCE
SEE N
7
O TE 2
F F
CL GROMMET
G G
B B
(See This Sheet) 28 24 18 6 27 8
=
2X
H DETAIL C SECTION D?D H

1000
CL
A A 8
(See This Sheet) 2X
=
I 22 25 29 TORQUE TO 530 N?m 11 I
10
GROMMET CL
2X
22 25 29 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
J 13 J
10 9
2X
22 25 29 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
K 12 K
11
23 31
TORQUE TO 530 N?m

L L
ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX

REFERENCE
C
M
D (See This Sheet) DETAIL E M
(From This Sheet)
(See This Sheet) E
2X 2X
14 TORQUE TO 530 N?m 29 25 22 9 22 25 29 TORQUE TO 530 N?m
N DETAIL F N
(From This Sheet) 13
2X 2X
16 24 28 17 24 28
12
O TORQUE TO 260 N?m O
11
2X
ASSY, DISCHARGE BOX
19 25 29 REFERENCE
P P
15
D Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
Q F the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
(See This Sheet) (See This Sheet)
No.: Content
682850 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 ADAPTER, FLANGE, ACTUATOR 657232 657232 7.2

A 2 1 ROD, THREADED 657233 657233 7.8 A
3 1 M6 x 70mm SLOTTED SPRING PIN, STEEL 657237 0
5 2 WSHR, HRD, 48 DIN, 125A TP200 ZNC 614731 0.6
Total mass: 17 kg
B B
C
A A C
D D
E E
SECTION A*A
2 3 1
F F
G 5 G
H H
4
64
I I
5
411
4
374
J 3 J
2
1 RAHSA JCG 03*Dec*12 Initial Release
Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description
K K
215
Notes: Language
***
Scale: N/A Rev.:
2. Trim, Spring pin as required. ASSY, CONNECTOR, DART VALVE

L L
2 FLOTATION
Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO*A
M STANDARD FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
N/A 657234 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 GROMMET PLATE, Ø700 682865 682865 348.1

A 2 2 Ø700 GROMMET 596900 16 596900 66 A
1 2 3 20 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301248 0
4 20 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8, ZNC 308137 0
6 20 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 598969 01 598969 0
B 7 1 URETHANE, ADHESIVE SEALANT 903150A 903150 0 B
Total mass: 416 kg
C C
A
A
D D
E E
1200
F F
G G
SECTION A A
H H
3 2 6 2
I I
J 3 J
1 2
3 4 5
2X 1 ARAMO CAF 24 Oct 13 Initial Release
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
Notes:
L ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø700 L
2. Use a little sealant (item 7 ) to secure cap (item 6 ).
M 3. Apply 3 mm bead of sealant (item 7 ) on diameter as shown. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
639465 682851 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 GROMMET PLATE, Ø450 682867 682867 260.1

A 2 2 Ø450 GROMMET 596900 11 596900 46.6 A
2
4 16 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8, ZNC 308137 0
6 16 M12 BOLT CAP URETHANE 598969 01 598969 0
B 7 1 URETHANE, ADHESIVE SEALANT 903150A 903150 0 B
Total mass: 308 kg
C C
D A D
E E
F 1000 F
G G
SECTION A A
H H
3 2 6 2
I I
J 3 J
2
1 3 4 5
1 ARAMO CAF 24 Oct 13 Initial Release
2X
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
Notes:
L ASSY, GROMMET PLATE, Ø450 L
2. Use a little sealant (item 7 ) to secure cap (item 6 ).
M 3. Apply 3 mm bead of sealant (item 7 ) on diameter as shown. CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
639465 682852 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
ENGINEERING TABLE ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WT (kg) ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL PART NO. DRAWING NO. TOTAL WT (kg)
65 1 MOUNTING FRAME, MOTOR 678891 678891 435 1 1 WELDMENT, SUPPORT FRAME, MECHANISM 632781&03 632781 3137
ROTOR SPEED (RPM) 91.7
A 66 1 MOTOR, 450 HP, 1500 RPM, 3300 V, 50 Hz 655832 655832 3016 2 1 WELDMENT, MOUNTING PLATE, SIEMENS&FLENDER GEARBOX 632806 632806 1918 A
SUBMERGENCE (mm) 1092 67 10 BELT, 8VX, 1800 603789&11 603789 26 2 3 1 STAR ROTOR, 1510mm (59.5") 589349&06 589349 1978
SERVICE (SALT&APPLICATION) 68 1 SHEAVE, 15" O.D., 8V, 10&GROOVES 678885 678885 243 4 2 DISPERSER SEGMENT 573999 573999 1580
69 1 BUSHING, TYPE M, Ø4" BORE 678894 678894 47.2 5 12 DISPERSER HOOD SECTOR 570086 570086 444
INSTALLED POWER (kW) 335
70 1 SHEAVE, 22.4" O.D., 8V, 10&GROOVES 678886 678886 300 6 6 STANDPIPE & CROWDER, CLEANER DUTY 682989 682989 2480.4
71 1 BUSHING, TYPE N, Ø90mm BORE 678887 678887 77.5 7 1 REDUCER, FLENDER, B3BV 15 541744 541744 3898
B 72 1 KEY, RECTANGULAR, 14mm x 25mm x 130mm 678865 678865 0.4 8 1 WELDMENT, REDUCER, PIPE, DN 350 x DN 250 642449 642449 35.8 B
73 1 KEY, SQ ENDS, 1" X 9" 86957BY 86957 0.3 9 1 BUTTERFLY VALVE, DN250 602763 602763 28
10 1 AIR CONTROL STUB 602764 602764 11
Total mass: 21181.1 kg
11 1 PLATE, BLANKING 644543 644543 2.2
15
63 12 12 HOOD SECTOR CLAMP 624115 624115 40.8
13 1 SEAL 1160209&01 1160209 2
C 7 C
14 1 SEAL RETAINER 1160208&01 1160208 11
15 1 ASSY, BELT DRIVE GUARD 650033 650033 253
16 48 HOOD SECTOR BOSS 1126231&01 1126231 0
17 12 CLAMP, HOOD SECTOR 300 CUBIC METER 624114&02 624114 13.2
18 1 EXTENSION SHAFT 678888 678888 615.6
10
D 2 19 1 ADAPTER PLATE 579763&04 579763 62.9
D
9 2 20 1 ROTOR CAP 570104&06 570104 12
21 2 MOTOR MOUNT RAIL ASSEMBLY 615347 615347 196
66
22 1 SUPPORT, MOTOR TERMINAL BOX 687502 687502 53.8
23 1 ANGLE SUPPORT & LEFT HAND 687501&01 687501 11.4
8 24 1 ANGLE SUPPORT & RIGHT HAND 687501&02 687501 11.4
E 25 216 M12 BOLT CAP 574005 574005 2.16 E
26 44 M20 BOLT CAP 574001 574001 0
2
27 78 M20 BOLT CAP 678898&04 678898 0
28 12 M24 BOLT CAP 579756&06 579756 0
F 31 108 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 45 CL 8.8 ZNC 301246 0 F
1

G 3 G
H H
24 43 4 CAPSCR, HEX, M52 X 175 CL 8.8 ZNC 603476 17.6
44 6 NUT, HEX, M10 CL 8, ZNC 308136 0
45 108 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8, ZNC 308137 0
22
46 12 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
3 47 94 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
I 23 48 44 NUT, HEX, M24 CL 8, ZNC 308140 0 I

49 18 NUT, HEX, M36 CL 8, ZNC 308142 0
21 50 12 WSHR, NORDLOCK, M24 STL ZNC 593974 0

51 18 WSHR, NORDLOCK, M36 STL ZNC 593984 1.8
6
J 54 32 WSHR, HRD, 16, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307168 0 J
65 3 55 322 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307169 0
57 18 WSHR, M36, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 363189 1.8
58 4 WSHR, HRD, M52, DIN 125B TP200 ZNC 603477 1.2
59 1 NAMEPLATE, WEMCO® FLOTATION MACHINE 302 SS 566867&29 566867 0.2
K 60 1 LABEL, WARNING && W69017&1 69017 0 K
61 1 PLATE & CAUTION BELT TENSION 316 SS 579800 579800 0.2
62 8 POP RIVET #46, .125" X .313"&.375" 300 SS 360121 0
63 1 LUBRICATION FITTING LOCATOR TAB 88930A 88930 0
64 4 SEALANT, ADHESIVE URETHANE 903150A 903150 0
L L
5
M M
5
Notes:
4
N 1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise.
N
3 STY CAF 22&Jan&14 ECN 66475: Item 35 QTY 61 was 62, item 36 QTY 111 was 112, item
47 QTY 94 was 96, item 55 QTY 322 was 326.
2. Paint fasteners or cover with sealant (item 64 ) after assembly to protect from abrasion. ECN 64685: Item 3 part no. 589349&06 was 589349&05, item&19 part
2 STY CAF 19&Dec&13 no. 579763&04 was 579763, item 20 part no. 570104&06 was
570104&05.
3 2
3. Lay a heavy bead of sealant (item 64 ) inside bolt holes prior to placing (item 2 ). 1 STY CAF 22&Oct&13 Initial Release
O 4. Stamp or engrave V&Belt caution plate (item 61 ) with the following: Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description O
1. Deflection = 24mm (0.94")
2. Max. force = 120 N [27 LBF.] per belt 17
3. Min force = 111 N [25 LBF.] per belt Language
Scale: N/A Rev.: &&&
4. Initial force = 160 N [36 LBF.] per belt 12 OPENINGS IN HOOD SECTORS
4
A. Upon installation, tension the belts to the 'initial' values specified. NOT SHOW IN ISO&VIEW
B. After 24&hours of operation, re&tension the belts to within the 'maximum' and minimum' FOR SIMPLICITY
P values specified. the tension should be maintained in this range throughout the life of the belts P
ASSY, MECHANISM
5. Stamp or engrave Name Plate (item 59 ) with serial numbers found on top level drawing. WEMCO FLOTATION, 300 CUBIC METER
locate on approximate position shown. Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO&A
6. Apply 2&drops of Loctite® Threadlocker Blue 242® or equivalent threadlocker to fasteners indicated. OPENINGS IN DISPERSER Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
Q NOT SHOWN IN ISO&VIEW the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q
FOR SIMPLICITY CSP0000891&01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
7. Fill & cover with sealant (item 64 ) after assembly to protect from abrasion. Ref. From Content
No.:
624104 655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
PLAN VIEW
A A
4976
B 1 B
11
C C
54 34
D D
2 64 3
E E
F F
(See Sheet 5)
K K
G G
H 65 H
4640
CL
I I
21
J J
K K
66
L L
2320
M B B M
(See Sheet 3)
N N
55 37
O A A O
(See Sheet 3)
P P
1255 4 62 61 60 5 62 59 Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO?A
CL
Q 2990 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
No.: Content
655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A SECTION A?A A
(From Sheet 2) CL MOTOR
64
46 TAKE?UP ALLOWANCE
(See Sheet 4) F INSTALL SLACK?OFF
B 72 71 70 15 1 5 37 B
73 69 68
CL REDUCER 10 X
7 67
C C
SECTION B?B
C (From Sheet 2) TORQUE TO 600 N?m 6
D D
621
318
43 58 TORQUE TO 6700 N?m
55 37 2X 7
E E
435
29 44 52
2
C 66
(See This Sheet) 22
F F
32 46 54
2X
1 21
33 46 54
2X
G 24 55 37 G
33 46 54 2
2X
H H
65 39 48 56
2X
6 TORQUE TO 600 N?m 38 48 56
2X
I I
3 55 47 35 36 47 55 3 SECTION C?C
TORQUE BUSHING BOLTS TO 405 N?m (From This Sheet) TORQUE BUSHING BOLTS TO 305 N?m
2X 5X 2X (Rotated Clockwise)
10 X
STANDARD MOUNTING 71 70 15 68 69 STANDARD MOUNTING
67
J J
17
12
K K
5
66
APPROXIMATE
CLEARANCE
L CL REDUCER CL MOTOR L
7 SEE NOTE #4 ON SHEET 1
35
(See This Sheet) FOR BELT TENSIONING AND
DEFLECTION INFORMATION
E
M M
SECTION D?D SECTION E?E
E 26
D D (See This Sheet) 5 25
N N
2X
5
4 55 47 36
O 25 O
4
53 45 31
3 2
P P
F 20 2 Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO?A
4
26 Content
No.:
655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION F?F DETAIL G

B B
6 27 7
66 15 35 55 12 27 36 55 7
LEAVE BOLTS LOOSE
UNTIL ALL HOOD SECTORS
C ARE IN PLACE AND C
FASTENED TOGETHER
17
D D
12
E E
1 2
435
16
H (See This Sheet)
4
F F
J
(See This Sheet)
549
DETAIL H
(From This Sheet)
12
G G
53 30 53 30 30 53
H M (See Sheet 5) H
I 3 I
35 47 55
1360
2X
36 47 55 2
2X
J J
18
G (See This Sheet)
N (See Sheet 5)
K K
P P (See Sheet 5) DETAIL J
342
(From This Sheet)
L L
5
2
M M
13
1590
N N
14
O 54 34 O
3 2 4
P P
20 2 Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO?A
Q S S (See Sheet 5) the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
No.: Content
655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
66
DETAIL L
B
SECTION K?K (From This Sheet) B
(From Sheet 2)
(Rotated 180 )
10
2X
41 48 56
C C
7 9
D D
L (See This Sheet)
8
E E
824
2X
2 37 55 38 48 56
F F
52 44 29
2X 2
G G
54 46 32
2X 23
H H
54 46 33
1
2X
54 46 33
I 2X I
7
18 34 54 14
J J
DETAIL N SECTION P?P VIEW S?S

K (From Sheet 4) SECTION R?R K
DETAIL M (From Sheet 4) (From This Sheet)
(From Sheet 4)
(From Sheet 4)
42 49 57 6 TORQUE TO 2150 N?m 18

28 7
39 56 6 TORQUE TO 600 N?m 20 2
40 50 6 TORQUE TO 600 N?m 19 2
L L
18 18
M R M
7
(See This Sheet)
R
19 2
18 19 2
N N
3 2
2 3
51 39 56
O O
P P
No.: Content
655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
MECHANISM ASSEMBLY TO BE LIFTED SUCH

THAT THE LIFTING CABLES/CHAINS ARE VERTICAL AS GEARBOX & ROTOR ASSEMBLY TO BE LIFTED SUCH
B NOT TO IMPART ANGULAR LOADS INTO MECHANISM ASSEMBLY THAT THE LIFTING CABLES/CHAINS ARE VERTICAL AS B
NOT TO IMPART ANGULAR LOADS INTO GEARBOX
LIFTING BEAMS
(NOT BY FLSMIDTH)
LIFT HERE
C LIFTING BEAMS C
(NOT BY FLSMIDTH)
LIFT HERE
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
I I
J J
K K
L L
M M
N N
O O
GEARBOX & ROTOR ASSEMBLY

RIGGING ILLUSTRATION
P P
ESTIMATED MASS Kg Unless otherwise specified, adhere to General Workshop Instruction No: ES0001 Replacing: N/A Sheet 6 of 6
MECHANISM ASSEMBLY 21181 3 Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
Q
MECHANISM ASSEMBLY the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
RIGGING ILLUSTRATION GEARBOX & ROTOR ASSEMBLY 8630 permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S. © FLSmidth A/S All rights reserved.
No.: Content
655826 Rev.:
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 WELDMENT, BELT DRIVE GUARD 650034 650034 178

A 2 1 WELDMENT, COVER, BELT DRIVE GUARD 650035 650035 30 A
3 2 WELDMENT, COVER, REDUCER SHAFT 651219 651219 22.8
4 1 WELDMENT, COVER, MOTOR SHAFT 651221 651221 15.7
5 1 WELDMENT, COVER, MOTOR SHAFT 651222 651222 7.8
B 8 12 NUT, HEX, M10 CL 8, ZNC 308136 0
B
10 24 WSHR, OVERSIZED, M10, DIN 9021 CL 8.8 ZNC 363374 0
Total mass: 255 kg

C C
D D
ISOMETRIC VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW

(Rotated 180 )
E E
F F
G G
H H
I I
J J
K K
L L
M M
N 4 N
2 VSAS CAF 21%Mar%14

ECN 68178: Drawing revised to reflect the changes done in
weldment, belt drive guard (item 1).
1 RAJRS BEG 14%Sep%12 Initial Release
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.: %%%
P P
ASSY, BELT DRIVE GUARD

Mat.: N/A Weight: N/A Welds: N/A Based on: N/A ISO%A
Notes: Original S.O. Property of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing contains confidential, proprietary, and/or trade secret information of FLSmidth A/S. This drawing and/or
Q STANDARD FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not Q
1. All Dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
N/A 650033 Rev.:
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
B B
6 9 2 1
A
C C
D D
E E
1005
F F
G G
A
510
H 2320 H
I I
J VIEW A?A J
K K
L L
M M
N N
O O
5 4 7 8 10 3 3 7 8 10
P P
2X 2X
No.: Content
650033 Rev.:
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 LEVEL SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET 611790 611790 7.9

A 2 1 ADJUSTABLE SUPPORT POST 683015 683015 3.9 A
3 1 LEVEL SENSOR TARGET PLATE 611791 611791 0.8
4 1 FLOAT AND ROD 614657 03 614657 5.6
5 1 LEVEL SENSOR CLAMP PLATE 683074 04 683074 1.7
6 1 ADJUSTABLE GUIDE BRACKET 614658 614658 1.3
7 1 LEVEL SENSOR BRACE 619153 619153 2.1
B 8 1 ANCHOR BOLT, M10 x 262 619154 619154 0.2 B
9 1 SENSOR, ULTRA SONIC 1181380 01 1181380 2.5
9 10 1 U BOLT, DIN 3570 A, M10 X 76 X 38 X 40 304 SS 360034 0.1
11 1 CAPSCR, HEX, M6 x 35 A2 300196 0
12 1 CAPSCR, HEX, M6 x 40 A2 300197 0
13 2 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 50 A2 301277 0
C C
250 MINIMUM
2
14 2 NUT, HEX, M6 A2 308170 0
3 15 3 NUT, HEX, M10 A2 308172 0
16 4 WSHR, 6, DIN 125A A2 307174 0
17 3 WSHR, 10, DIN 125A A2 307176 0
18 2 WSHR, 12, DIN 125A A2 307177 0
D Total mass: 26 kg D
16 14 12 11 14 16
E 2X 2X E
1
F F
1840
G G
6
H 10 15 17 H
2X 2X
I I
810
7
J J
K K
17 15 8
L Installation Sequence: L
1.) Slide level sensor assembly onto beam so that the hold down wedges are firmly seated
13 18 against the beam flange.
2.) Slide clamp plate and fasteners up against the beam flange on the opposite side.
5
3.) Snug fasteners so clamp plate firmly secures assembly to beam.
M Warning, Do NOT over tighten fasteners. M
5
N 4
N
3
OUTRIGGER
BEAM REF. 2
1 SAY CAF 12 Nov 13 Initial Release
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P
ASSY, LEVEL SENSOR
ENDRESS + HAUSER. ULTRASONIC. LEVEL TRANSMITTER
Q Notes: the information contained therein, may only be used for the limited purposes of evaluating proposals or installing, operating or maintaining
Q
CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. Ref. From No.: Content
646428 655830 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 BRACKET, MOUNTING, FROTH SENSOR 683014 683014 8.3

A 2 1 SENSOR, ULTRA SONIC 1181380 01 1181380 2.5 A
3 1 LEVEL SENSOR CLAMP PLATE 683074 04 683074 1.7
4 2 CAPSCR, HEX, M12 x 50 A2 301277 0
5 2 WSHR, 12, DIN 125A A2 307177 0
Total mass: 12 kg
B B
C 2 C
D D
1
E E
400
F F
490
4 5
G G
Installation Sequence:
H H
1.) Slide froth sensor assembly onto beam so that the hold down wedges are firmly seated
against the beam flange.
2.) Slide clamp plate and fasteners up against the beam flange on the opposite side.
3 3.) Snug fasteners so clamp plate firmly secures assembly to beam.
I Warning, Do NOT over tighten fasteners. I
5
OUTRIGGER 4
BEAM REF.
J 3 J
2
1 SAY CAF 11 Nov 13 Initial Release
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
L ASSY, FROTH SENSOR L

ENDRESS + HAUSER. ULTRASONIC. LEVEL TRANSMITTER
M Notes: CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
646429 655831 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 1 686623 686623 2154

A 2 2 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 2 686634 686634 4342 A
1 3 1 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 3 686637 686637 2134
4 1 ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 4 686647 686647 2737
5 2 ASSY, STAIRWAY 686642 686642 472
6 2 ASSY, INTERCONNECTION 686636 686636 628
7 1 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686660 686660 75.8
B 8 2 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686667 686667 73.6 B
10 16 ANGLE 686656 686656 51.2
11 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 15 686666 41.8
2 12 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 16 686666 57
13 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 17 686666 28.5
C C
14 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 18 686666 56.8
15 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 19 686666 36.4
16 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 23 686666 23.4
17 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 24 686666 23.4
PR 18 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 26 686666 19.5
OC 19 1 COVER, DISCHARGE BOX 686665 686665 8.8
D E D
SS 20 66 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 301878 6.6
FL 21 2 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301879 0.2
OW 22 30 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 50 CL 8.8 ZNC 301555 0
24 68 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
E 25 30 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0 E
26 3 NUT, HEX, M12 CL 8, ZNC 308137 0
28 2 WSHR, BEVEL, M20, DIN 434 TP200 ZNC 597960 0.2
F 31 56 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0 F
32 56 THRD CUT SCR, HEX/WSHR HD. 1/4 20 x 2" 619720 0
2
TAG.NO. 324 FC 601
SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01A
G G
6
H H
TAG.NO. 324 FC 602
4
SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01B
I I
TAG.NO. 324 FC 603

SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01C
J J
6
K K
TAG.NO. 324 FC 604

SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01D
L L
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL

(4 CLIPS PER PANEL MINIMUM) 5
M FLOOR PANEL M
TAG.NO. 324 FC 605

32 31 SERIAL NO. CSP0000891 01E
DRILL STEEL WORK
WITH .228 INCH PILOT
FOR THREAD CUTTING 5
SCREW
N 4
N
1 HRS CAF 15 Nov 13 Initial Release

STEEL WORK
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P
ASSY, PLATFORM

Notes:
2. Use fixing clips provided with grating for every 1000mm of grating(minimum 4). permitted without the prior written permission of FLSmidth A/S © 2012, FLSmidth A/S. All rights reserved.
N/A 655823 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
6200 8960 8960 8960 8960 6200

B B
1 2 3 2 4
C (See Sheet 3) C
A 17 7
(See
Sheet 3)
E
D D
C
E E
(See D D
Sheet 3)
(See
Sheet
B 3)
B
F F
G
C 16 (See
Sheet 3)
(See Sheet 3)
6 15 5 14 6 15 5 14
G G
H H
I I
F
J (See Sheet 3) J
7328 TOP OF GRATING
K K
6655 TOP OF TANK
L L
M M
TYP.
1000
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
655823 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
DETAIL A SECTION B?B
(From Sheet 2) SECTION C?C
2X (From Sheet 2) (From Sheet 2)
2X (Rotated Clockwise)
2X
B B
2X 2X
20 24 27 27 24 20
C C
9 5
D 15 D
2X
27 24 20
E 11 E
27 24 20 6 10 10 20 24 27
27 24 20
2X
2X 2X 2X
F 29 25 22 F
10 14
G 8 G
12
20 24 27
2X
H H
27 24 20 10
2X
I DETAIL G I
(From Sheet 2)
7
J J
SECTION D?D SECTION E?E DETAIL F
(From Sheet 2) (Rotated Counter Clockwise) (From Sheet 2)
(From Sheet 2)
2X
17
K DISCHARGE BOX K
7
L L
27 24 20 13
22 25 29 4
M 2X 18 M
4
4
28 27 24 21 30 26 23
N 2X N
19
O O
16
P P
No.: Content
655823 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686629 686629 108.3

A 2 2 PLATFORM BEAM 686630 686630 201.6 A
3 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686631 686631 108.4
4 6 PLATFORM BEAM 687505 687505 96.6
B 8 10 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 01 686666 324 B
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL 9 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 02 686666 28.5
(4 CLIPS PER PANEL MINIMUM)
10 3 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 03 686666 99.3
18 6 12 16 13 8 11 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 04 686666 206.4

FLOOR PANEL 12 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 05 686666 85.6
13 5 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 06 686666 267.5
C C
32 31 14 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 07 686666 38.8
DRILL STEEL WORK 15 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 08 686666 22
16 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 09 686666 17.7
FOR THREAD CUTTING
SCREW 17 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 10 686666 34.8
18 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 27 686666 27.4
5
19 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 28 686666 21.1
D 7 D
20 8 ANGLE 686656 686656 25.6
21 12 ANGLE 687504 687504 30
8 STEEL WORK
E
D (See Sheet 2) 25 48 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 45 CL 8.8 ZNC 301554 0 E
27 32 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
9
28 78 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
8 29 64 WSHR, HRD, 20, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307169 0
F 31 156 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0 F
D 32 156 THRD CUT SCR, HEX/WSHR HD. 1/4 20 x 2" 619720 0
19
Total mass: 2154 kg
10 GAP
G G
TYP.
8
H 10 GAP H
TYP.
5
6
17 17
I I
J J
10 15 11 6 13 14
K K
L L
6
7
5 7
6
1
M M
A A (See Sheet 2) 5
N 4
N

E MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
(See Sheet 2) Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P
ASSY, PLATFORM, TYPE 1

Notes:
2. Use fixing clips provided with grating for every 1000mm of grating(minimum 4).
642467 686623 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION A?A SECTION B?B SECTION C?C VIEW D?D
(From Sheet 1) (From This Sheet) (From This Sheet)
(Rotated Counter Clockwise) (From Sheet 1)
(Handrails & Gratings removed for clarity) (Rotated Counter Clockwise) Rotated Clockwise
(Typical Detail) (Typical Detail) (Typical Detail)
B B
20 3 20 2
MECHANISM SUPPORT FRAME

C C
(See This Sheet) B (See This Sheet)
C MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
29 27 22 29 27 22 2X
2X 2X
D 30 28 26 D
23 27 29
B C
2 1 2X 23 27 29
1107
1117
2X
E 3 2 E
MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
F 4 F
4
1220
1220
G G
DETAIL E SECTION F?F
4 4 (From Sheet 1) (From This Sheet)
(Typical Detail) (Typical Detail)
1220
1220
(See
This Sheet) 2X
H
F F 24 28 30 21 4 21 H
MECHANISM
(See SUPPORT BEAM
This Sheet)F F 4
1117
1107
I I
4 2X 2X
30 28 25 25 28 30
J J
MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM 25 28 30 30 28 25

2X 2X
K K
L L
803 2641 2641 803
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
686623 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686668 686668 108.3

A 2 2 PLATFORM BEAM 686630 686630 201.6 A
3 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686657 686657 108.3
4 6 PLATFORM BEAM 687505 687505 96.6
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL 5 1 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686624 686624 136.6
B FLOOR PANEL 8 1 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686641 686641 136.6 B
9 10 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 01 686666 324
10 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 02 686666 28.5
33 32
11 3 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 03 686666 99.3
19 5 13 17 14 9 DRILL STEEL WORK
WITH .228 INCH PILOT 12 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 04 686666 206.4
FOR THREAD CUTTING 13 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 05 686666 85.6
C SCREW C
14 5 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 06 686666 267.5
15 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 07 686666 38.8
16 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 08 686666 22
17 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 09 686666 17.7
18 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 10 686666 34.8
7
D 6 STEEL WORK 19 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 27 686666 27.4
D
20 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 28 686666 21.1
21 8 ANGLE 686656 686656 25.6
22 12 ANGLE 687504 687504 30
9
E
D (See Sheet 2)
25 20 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301556 0 E
9 28 32 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0

29 80 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
D 32 156 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0
20 33 156 THRD CUT SCR, HEX/WSHR HD. 1/4 20 x 2" 619720 0
Total mass: 2171 kg

10 GAP
TYP.
G G
9
9
H 7 5 H
10 GAP
TYP.
18 18
I I
J J
11 16 12 8 14 15
K K
L L
8 8 6
7 6 1
M M
A A (See Sheet 2) 5
N 4
N

E Language
(See Sheet 2) Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P

Notes:
642467 686634 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION A?A SECTION B?B SECTION C?C
(From This Sheet) VIEW D?D
(From Sheet 1) (From This Sheet) (From Sheet 1)
(Handrails & Gratings removed for clarity) (Rotated Counter Clockwise) (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
(Typical Detail) (Rotated Clockwise)
B B
21 3 21 2

C C
(See This Sheet) (See This Sheet)
B C MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
30 28 23 30 28 23 2X
2X 2X 31 29 27
D D
24 28 30
B C
2 1 2X 24 28 30
1107
1117
2X
E 3 2 E
F 4 F
1220
1220
4
G DETAIL E SECTION F?F G

4 4 (Typical Detail) (Typical Detail)
1220
1220
(See 2X
This Sheet)
F F 25 29 31 22 4 22
H H
MECHANISM
SUPPORT BEAM
(See
F F
1117
1107
This Sheet) 4 2X
I 2X I
4
31 29 26 26 29 31
J J
26 29 31 31 29 26
2X 2X
K MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM K
L L
803 2641 2641 803
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
686634 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686629 686629 108.3

A 2 2 PLATFORM BEAM 686630 686630 201.6 A
3 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686638 686638 108.2
4 6 PLATFORM BEAM 687505 687505 96.6
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL 9 10 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 01 686666 324
10 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 02 686666 28.5
19 5 13 17 14 9 11 3 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 03 686666 99.3

13 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 05 686666 85.6
C C
33 32 14 5 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 06 686666 267.5
DRILL STEEL WORK 15 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 07 686666 38.8
16 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 08 686666 22
FOR THREAD CUTTING
18 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 10 686666 34.8
19 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 27 686666 27.4
D 6 D
8 20 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 28 686666 21.1
21 8 ANGLE 686656 686656 25.6
22 12 ANGLE 687504 687504 30
9 STEEL WORK
E
D (See Sheet 2)
25 20 CAPSCR, HEX, M16 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301556 0 E
9 28 32 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0
29 78 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
F 20 31 156 WSHR, HRD, 16, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307168 0 F
D 32 156 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0
Total mass: 2134 kg

10 GAP
TYP.
G G
9
9
H 10 GAP H
TYP. 8
5
18 18
I I
J J
11 14 15
16 12 7
K K
L L
7
7 6
8 6
1
M M
A A (See Sheet 2) 5
N 4
N

E Language
(See Sheet 2) Scale: N/A Rev.:
P P

Notes:
642467 686637 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION A?A SECTION B?B SECTION C?C
(From This Sheet) VIEW D?D
(From Sheet 1) (From This Sheet) (From Sheet 1)
(Handrails & Gratings removed for clarity) (Rotated Counter Clockwise) (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
(Typical Detail) Rotated Clockwise
B B
21 3 21 2

C (See This Sheet) (See This Sheet) C
B C MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
30 28 23 30 28 23 2X
D 2X 2X 31 29 27 D
24 28 30
B C
2 1 2X
1107
1117
24 28 30
3 2 2X
E E
4 4
F F
1220
1220
G DETAIL E SECTION F?F G
4 (Typical Detail) (Typical Detail)
4
1220
2X
1220
(See
This Sheet) 25 29 31 22 4 22
H F F H
MECHANISM
SUPPORT BEAM
(See F F 4
This Sheet) 4
1117
1107
2X 2X
I I
31 29 26 26 29 31
J J
26 29 31 31 29 26
2X 2X
K K
L L
803 2641 2641 803
M M
N N
O O
P P
No.: Content
686637 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686638 686638 108.2

A 2 2 PLATFORM BEAM 686630 686630 201.6 A
3 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686662 686662 108.3
4 1 PLATFORM BEAM 686651 686651 337.4
5 6 PLATFORM BEAM 687505 687505 96.6
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL 9 1 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686652 686652 73.2
19 11 10 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 01 686666 324

27 6 15 16 11
13 3 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 03 686666 99.3
C C
41 40 14 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 04 686666 206.4
DRILL STEEL WORK 15 4 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 05 686666 85.6
16 5 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 06 686666 267.5
FOR THREAD CUTTING
10 23 20 25 18 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 08 686666 22
19 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 09 686666 17.7
D 8 D
20 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 10 686666 34.8
20 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 11 686666 43
22 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 12 686666 44.2
11 STEEL WORK
23 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 13 686666 59.8
24 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 14 686666 62.8
E 25 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 21 686666 11.8 E

26 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 22 686666 11.8
12 27 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 27 686666 27.4
28 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 28 686666 21.1
29 11 ANGLE 686656 686656 35.2
30 12 ANGLE 687504 687504 30
F 31 16 CAPSCR, HEX, M20 x 60 CL 8.8 ZNC 301879 1.6 F
10 GAP
36 44 NUT, HEX, M20 CL 8, ZNC 308139 0

TYP.
G 37 84 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0 G

11
26 40 190 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0

H Total mass: 2737 kg H

10 GAP 8
TYP. 6
20
I I
G G (See Sheet 2)
24 22 9
J J
10
13 18 14 7 17 16 11 20
K K
L L
7 9
7
8
M M
A A (See Sheet 2) 5
N 4
N

D MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
(See Sheet 2) Scale: N/A Language
Rev.:
P P

Notes:
642467 686647 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
A A
SECTION A?A SECTION C?C
(From Sheet 1) SECTION B?B
(Handrails & Gratings removed for clarity) (From This Sheet) (From This Sheet)
(Rotated Counter Clockwise) (Rotated Counter Clockwise)
B B
29 1 29 2

C C
(See This Sheet) B C (See This Sheet)
38 36 31 38 36 31
D 2X 2X D
(See This Sheet)
B F 4 32 36 38
C 2 3
32 36 38
1107
2X
1117
1 2X
E 2 E
F MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM
5
F F
1220
1220
5
G DETAIL D DETAIL E G
E (From Sheet 1) (From This Sheet)
5 (Typical Detail)
(See
This Sheet)
1220
1220
(See 2X
This Sheet) 3 4
33 37 39
H H 5 H H
H H
(See
1117
1107
I This Sheet) I
5
5
32 36 38
2X
J J
29 32 36 38
MECHANISM SUPPORT BEAM 2X

SECTION F?F
K (From This Sheet) VIEW G?G K
(Rotated Clockwise) (From Sheet 1)
2X (Typical Detail)
2X
3 32 36 38 29
L L
803 2641 2641 803
M SECTION H?H M
(From This Sheet)
(Typical Detail) 2X
32 36 38
30 5 30
N N
39 37 35
2X
2X 2X
O 39 37 34 34 37 39 O
P P
34 37 39 39 37 34
2X 2X
No.: Content
686647 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 INTERCONNECTING PLATFORM 686635 686635 124.5

A 2 2 HANDRAIL, WALKWAY 686639 686639 107.2 A
3 2 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 20 686666 58.8
4 1 GRATING, WALKWAY 686666 25 686666 23.3
2 3 4
6 8 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
B 1 7 16 WSHR, HRD, 16, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307168 0 B
8 12 GRATING CLIP 1166573 01 1166573 0
Total mass: 315 kg
C C
970
10 GAP
TYP
1 2
D D
2
E E
GRATING PANEL FIXING DETAIL

F FLOOR PANEL F
2
9 8
DRILL STEEL WORK
FOR THREAD CUTTING
G SCREW G
H
A H
STEEL WORK
1
1
1
I I
5 6 7 5
2X 4
J 3 J
DETAIL A 2
(Typical Detail) 1 RENRA CAF 07 Nov 13 Initial Release
10 GAP TYP
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
L ASSY, INTERCONNECTION L
Notes:
M 5 CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
N/A 686636 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 1 STAIR STRINGER 686643 686643 56

A 2 1 STAIR STRINGER 686644 686644 56 A
4 3 1 HANDRAIL, STAIRWAY 686648 686648 44.2
4 1 HANDRAIL, STAIRWAY 686649 686649 43
5 5 TREAD, STAIRWAY 686658 686658 36.5
B 2 7 20 CAPSCR, HEX, M10 x 30 CL 8.8 ZNC 300927 0 B
8 8 NUT, HEX, M16 CL 8, ZNC 308138 0
9 20 NUT, HEX, M10 CL 8, ZNC 308136 0
10 8 WSHR, BEVEL, M16, DIN 434 TP200 ZNC 597959 0
C 12 40 WSHR, HRD, 10, DIN 125A TP200 ZNC 307166 0 C

5
900
Total mass: 238 kg
4
D D
1
E 3 E
F F
1
G G
H H
5
11 10 8 6
I 3 I
J 3 J
2
12 9 7 1 HRS CAF 13 Nov 13 Initial Release
2X Drawn Appr. Appr. Date Zone/Description
1
K K
Language
Scale: N/A Rev.:
L ASSY, STAIRWAY L
Notes: Original S.O.
M CSP0000891 01 FLSmidth® equipment. Disclosure, distribution, duplication, modification, or other use of this drawing and/or the information therein is not
1. All dimensions are in millimeters unless noted otherwise. Ref. From No.: Content
646044 686642 Rev.:
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
REVISION ECN BY CHECK'D DATE
A1
ORIGINAL S.O. DO NOT SCALE PRINTS
TORQUE VALUES FOR REF. FROM ---
DATE 1-8-81 MACHINERY CONNECTIONS FOR SHEET 1 OF 2

DRAWN GBH REV
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS DWG.
114808
CHCK'D JKM
NO.
4
4
A1
REV
DO NOT SCALE PRINTS SHEET 2 OF 2 114808 4
MOTOR MANUAL
LEVEL SENSOR
Operating Instructions
Prosonic M FMU40/41/42/43/44
Ultrasonic Level Measurement
BA00237F/00/EN/13.12
71164384
Valid as of software version:
V 01.04.00 (amplifier)
V 01.04.00 (communication)
Brief operating instructions Prosonic M - HART
Brief operating instructions
KA 183F/00/a2/02.02
52010993 Prosonic M - Quick Setup
000
measured value Contrast: + or +
008
- + E E dist./
Group E
meas value
- + E
selection
00 002 003 004 005 059 006 008 051 052 053
basic setup tank shape medium process empty blocking full dist./ check range of start
property cond. calibr. distance calibr. meas value distance mapping mapping
+
01 - dome - unknown - standard input E BD is input F D and L are - ok confirm
safety settings ceiling - liquid - calm (s. sketch) displayed (s. sketch) displayed - too small suggestion
- horizontal - > 4 mm surface (s. sketch) (s. sketch) - too big or specify
0E
temperature cyl. - < 4 mm - add. - unknown range
- bypass agitator - manual
04 … …
linearisation
05
extended calibr.
06
output (HART, FF)
profibus param.(PA) BD
100%
0E 0E1 0E2
Envelope curve plot settings recording D
curve
09 092 … … E
display language
F
-
0A 0A0 0A1 0A3 0A4
diagnostics present previous … … reset unlock … … L
error error parameter
0C 0C0 333 (HART) 100 (HART)
system tag no. … … 33333 (PA,FF) 2457 (PA,FF) 0%
parameter
BD: blocking distance
52010993
L00-FMU4xxx-05-00-00-en-001
Contents of the operating instructions

This operating instructions describes the installation and commissioning of the Prosonic M
ultrasonic level transmitter. It contains all the functions required for a normal measuring operation.
Also, the Prosonic M provides additional functions for optimising the measuring point and for
converting the measured value. These functions are not included in this operating instructions.
You can find an overview of all the device functions in the Appendix.
You can find a detailed description of all the device functions in the operating instructions
BA00240F/00/EN "Prosonic M - Description of Instrument Functions". This is located on the
supplied documentation CD-ROM.
2 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7.2 Application errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1.1 Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2 Installation, commissioning, operation . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 Maintenance and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.3 Operational safety and process safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and symbols . . . . . . . . . 5 8.2 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3 Repairs to Ex-approved devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
2 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 8.4 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.5 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
2.1 Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
8.6 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.2 Product structure FMU40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
8.7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.3 Product structure FMU41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
8.8 Software history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.4 Product structure FMU42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.9 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.7 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.8 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 9.1 Weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.9 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 9.2 Installation bracket for FMU40, FMU41 . . . . . . . . . 58
9.3 Screw in flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 9.4 Cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
9.5 Mounting Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.1 Design; dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
9.6 Wall Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
3.2 Installation variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
9.7 Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43, FMU44 . . . 62
3.3 Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
9.8 Commubox FXA195 HART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.4 Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
9.9 Commubox FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.5 Installation hint for FMU40, FMU41 . . . . . . . . . . . 25
9.10 ToF Adapter FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.6 Turn housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
9.11 Remote display FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.7 Installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
10 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
10.1 Technical data at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.1 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 11 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.4 Potential matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 11.1 Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.5 Checking the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 11.2 Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.1 Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.2 Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.3 Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.4 Operation using the on-site display VU331 . . . . . . 35
5.5 HART communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.6 Lock/unlock configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.7 Resetting the customer parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.8 Resetting an interference echo suppression
(tank map) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.2 Power up instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.3 Basic calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.4 Envelope curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.1 System error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Endress+Hauser 3
Safety instructions Prosonic M - HART
1 Safety instructions
1.1 Designated use

The Prosonic M is a compact measuring device for continuous, non-contact level measurement.
Depending on the sensor, the measuring range is up to 20 m (66 ft) in fluids and up to 10 m (33 ft)
in bulk solids. By using the linearisation function, the Prosonic M can also be used for flow
measurements in open channels and measuring weirs.
1.2 Installation, commissioning, operation

The Prosonic M is fail-safe and is constructed to the state-of-the-art. It meets the appropriate
standards and EC directives. However, if you use it improperly or other than for its designated use,
it may pose application-specific hazards, e.g. product overflow due to incorrect installation or
configuration. Installation, electrical connection, start-up, operation and maintenance of the
measuring device must therefore be carried out exclusively by trained specialists authorised by the
system operator. Technical personnel must have read and understood these operating instructions
and must adhere to them. You may only undertake modifications or repair work to the device when
it is expressly permitted by the operating instructions.
1.3 Operational safety and process safety

Alternative monitoring measures must be taken to ensure operational safety and process safety
during configuration, testing and maintenance work on the device.
Hazardous areas
Measuring systems for use in hazardous environments are accompanied by separate "Ex
documentation", which is an integral part of this Operating Manual. Strict compliance with the
installation instructions and ratings as stated in this Additional documentation is mandatory.
• Ensure that all personnel are suitably qualified.
• Observe the specifications in the certificate as well as national and local regulations.
4 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Safety instructions
1.4 Notes on safety conventions and symbols

In order to highlight safety-relevant or alternative operating procedures in the manual, the following
conventions have been used, each indicated by a corresponding symbol in the margin.
Safety conventions
#
Warning!
A warning highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, will lead to personal
injury, a safety hazard or destruction of the instrument
"
Caution!
Caution highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may lead to personal
injury or incorrect functioning of the instrument
!
Note!
A note highlights actions or procedures which, if not performed correctly, may indirectly affect
operation or may lead to an instrument response which is not planned
Explosion protection
0
Device certified for use in explosion hazardous area
If the device has this symbol embossed on its name plate it can be installed in an explosion hazardous
area
Explosion hazardous area
- Symbol used in drawings to indicate explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in and wiring
entering areas with the designation “explosion hazardous areas” must conform with the stated type
of protection.
.
Safe area (non-explosion hazardous area)
Symbol used in drawings to indicate, if necessary, non-explosion hazardous areas. Devices located in
safe areas still require a certificate if their outputs run into explosion hazardous areas
Electrical symbols
% Direct voltage
A terminal to which or from which a direct current or voltage may be applied or supplied
&
Alternating voltage
A terminal to which or from which an alternating (sine-wave) current or voltage may be applied or
supplied
)
Grounded terminal
A grounded terminal, which as far as the operator is concerned, is already grounded by means of an
earth grounding system
*
Protective grounding (earth) terminal
A terminal which must be connected to earth ground prior to making any other connection to the
equipment
+
Equipotential connection (earth bonding)
A connection made to the plant grounding system which may be of type e.g. neutral star or
equipotential line according to national or company practice
Temperature resistance of the connection cables

t >85°C
States, that the connection cables must be resistant to a temperature of at least 85 °C (185 °F).
Endress+Hauser 5
Identification Prosonic M - HART
2 Identification
2.1 Nameplate
ENDRESS+HAUSER Made in Germany

PROSONIC M D-79689 Maulburg
5 Order Code:
4 Ser.-No.: NEMA 4X/6P / IP68
3 14 ... 30 V DC 0.8W 1
2-wire
4 ... 20 mA HART
Ta > 70°C
if modification
X = see sep. label
2
Dat./Insp.: 2010-12
L00-FMU4xxxx-18-00-00-yy-001
1 Designation according to Directive 94/9/EC and designation of the type of protection (only for certified device
variants)
2 Reference to additional safety-relevant documentation (only for certified device variants)
3 Communication variant and supply voltage
4 Serial number
5 Order Code
6 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Identification
2.2 Product structure FMU40

This overview does not mark options which are mutually exclusive.
010 Certificates
A Variant for non-hazardous area
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
G ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC T6
I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6
J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6
K TIIS EEx ia II C T6
N CSA General Purpose
Q NEPSI DIP
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
1 ATEX II 1/2G EEx ia IIC T6
2 ATEX II 1/2D, Alu blind cover
4 ATEX II 1/2G EEx d (ia) IIC T6
5 ATEX II 1/3D
6 ATEX II 3D Ex t IIIC T* °C Dc
Y Special certificate
020 Process connection

R G 1½“ threadISO 228
N NPT 1½“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version
030 Power supply/communication

B 2 wire, 4 to 20mA-loop/HART
H 4 wire, 10,5 to 32VDC / 4-20mA HART
G 4 wire, 90 to 253VAC / 4-20mA HART
D 2 wire, PROFIBUS PA
F 2 wire, FOUNDATION Fieldbus
J 2-wire; 4-20mA HART, 5-point linearity protocol
K 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA, 5-point linearity protocol
L 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus, 5-point linearity protocol
M 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART,5-point linearity protocol
N 4-wire 10.5-32VDC;4-20mA HART,5-point linearity protocol
Y Special version
040 Display / on-site operation

1 Without LC display
2 With LC display VU331 incl. on-site operation
3 Prepared for remote display FHX 40
9 Special version
050 Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP68 NEMA6P
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP68 NEMA6P; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP68 NEMA6P+OVP; with separate terminal
compartment; with overvoltage protection
9 Special version
060 Screw union/entry

2 M20x1.5 screw union
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug-in connector
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
Endress+Hauser 7
995 Marking
1 Tagging (TAG)
2 Bus address
FMU40 - Product designation
8 Endress+Hauser

010 Certificates
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
J NEPSI Ex d(Ia) IIC T6
K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6
Q NEPSI DIP
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl.I Div.2, zone 0,1,2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G /zone 1,2
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2, zone 0,1,2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / zone 1,2
5 ATEX II 1/3D

R G 2“ threadISO 228
N NPT 2“ - 11,5 thread
Y Special version

Y Special version

9 Special version
050 Housing
A Aluminium F12 housing coated to IP 68 NEMA 6P
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 NEMA 6P; with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 NEMA 6P; with separate terminal
9 Special version

3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
995 Marking
1 Tagging (TAG)
2 Bus address
Endress+Hauser 9

010 Certificates
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6
J NEPSI Ex d (Ia) IIC T6
K TIIS EEx ia II C T6 (in preparation)
Q NEPSI DIP
S FM IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
T FM XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
U CSA IS Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G / NI Cl. I Div. 2
V CSA XP Cl. I,II,III Div. 1 Gr. A-G
1 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T6
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover
4 ATEX II 1/2 G EEx d [ia] IIC T6
5 ATEX II 1/3D

M Mounting bracket FAU20
P UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
suitable for 3" 150lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10K 80
Q UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
S UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
suitable for 4" 150lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10K100
U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
Y Special version

Y Special version

9 Special version
050 Housing
C Aluminium T12 housing coated to IP 68 NEMA 6P, with separate terminal compartment
D Aluminium T 12 housing coated to IP 68 NEMA 6P, with separate terminal
Y Special version
10 Endress+Hauser
060 Gland/Entry
2 M20x1.5 gland
3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
5 M12 PROFIBUS-PA plug
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
070 Sealing Sensor/Flange

2 VITON flat sealing
3 EPDM flat sealing
9 special version
080 Additional options

A Additional options not selected
995 Marking
1 Tagging (TAG)
2 Bus address
Endress+Hauser 11

010 Certificates
5 ATEX II 1/3D
M FM DIP Cl.II Div.1 Gr.E-G, NI Cl.I Div.2, Zone 2
P CSA DIP Cl.II Div.1 Gr.E-G, NI Cl.I Div.2, zone 2
Q NEPSI DIP
Y Special version
020 Process connection/material

P Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, PP (universal slip-on flange included)
S Flange DN 100/ANSI 4"/JIS 16K100, SS 316TI (universal slip-on flange included)
K Without slip-on flange/without mounting bracket (customer mounting equipment)
M With mounting bracket FAU20
Y Special version

Y Special version

2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site
9 Special version
050 Housing
9 Special version

3 G 1/2“ entry
4 NPT 1/2“ entry
6 7/8" FF plug
9 Special version
995 Marking
1 Tagging (TAG)
2 Bus address
12 Endress+Hauser

010 Approval
A Non-hazardous area
2 ATEX II 1/2 D, Alu blind cover
5 ATEX II 1/3 D
S FM IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2, Zone 0,1,2 (in preparation)
T FM XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, Zone 1,2 (in preparation)
U CSA IS Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G, NI Cl.I Div.2, zone 0,1,2
V CSA XP Cl.I,II,III Div.1 Gr.A-G
K TIIS EEx ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
I NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6 (in preparation)
J NEPSI Ex d(ia) IIC T6 (in preparation)
E NEPSI Ex nA II T6 (in preparation)
Q NEPSI DIP (in preparation)
Y Special version, to be specified

A 8" 150lbs FF, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./36psia
E UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
F UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./36psia,
suitable for 6" 150lbs /DN150 PN16 / 10K 150
G UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L, max 2.5bar abs. 36psia,
H UNI flange DN200/200, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia,
suitable for DN200 PN16 / 10K 200
J UNI flange DN200/200, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
K UNI flange DN200/200, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
L 8" 150lbs FF, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
M Mounting bracket FAU20
N 8" 150lbs FF, PVDF, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia
T UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
U UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF, max. 2.5bar abs./ 36 psia,
V UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L, max 2.5bar abs./ 36psia,
030 Power supply; Output

B 2-wire; 4-20mA HART
D 2-wire; PROFIBUS PA
F 2-wire; FOUNDATION Fieldbus
G 4-wire 90-250VAC; 4-20mA HART
H 4-wire 10.5-32VDC; 4-20mA HART
040 Operation
1 w/o display, via communication
2 4-line display VU331, Envelope curve display on site
3 Prepared for FHX40, Remote display (accessory)
9 Special version, to be specified
Endress+Hauser 13
050 Housing
A F12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P
C T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P, Separate conn. compartment
D T12 Alu, coated IP68 NEMA6P + OVP, Sep. conn. compartment, OVP = overvoltage
protection
060 Cable entry

2 Gland M20 (EEx d > thread M20)
3 Thread G1/2
4 Thread NPT 1/2
5 Plug M12
6 Plug 7/8“
070 Process Sealing Sensor/ Flange

2 Viton
3 EPDM
080 Additional option

A Basic version
995 Marking
1 Tagging (TAG)
2 Bus address
FMU44 - complete product designation
14 Endress+Hauser
2.7 Scope of delivery
2.7.1 Instrument and accessories

• Instrument according to the version ordered
• Accessories ( ä 58)
• Brief operating instructions KA01062F/00/EN for quick commissioning
• Brief operating instructions KA00183F/00/A2 (basic setup/troubleshooting), housed in the
instrument)
• For certified instrument versions: Safety Instructions, Control- or Installation drawings
• For FMU40 *R**** and FMU41 *R****: counter nut (PC)
• For FMU40/41: sealing ring (EPDM)
• For gland M20x1.5:
– 1 cable gland for 2-wire instruments
– 2 cable glands for 4-wire instruments
The cable glands are mounted on delivery.
• Endress+Hauser operating program on the enclosed CD-ROM
• CD-ROM with further documentation, e. g.
- Technical Information
- Operating Instructions
- Description of Intrument Functions
! Note!
Additional safety instructions (XA, ZE, ZD) are supplied with certified device versions. Refer to the
nameplate for the names of the safety instructions that apply to your device version.
2.8 Certificates and approvals

CE mark, declaration of conformity
The device is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the
factory in a condition in which it is safe to operate. The device complies with the applicable
standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of conformity and thus complies with the
statutory requirements of the EC directives. Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the
device by affixing to it the CE mark.
2.9 Registered trademarks

HART®
Registered trademark of HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA
FieldCare®
Trademark of Endress+Hauser Process Solutions AG.
ToF®
Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany
PulseMaster®
Registered trademark of the company Endress+Hauser GmbH+Co. KG, Maulburg, Germany
Endress+Hauser 15
Installation Prosonic M - HART
3 Installation
3.1 Design; dimensions
3.1.1 FMU40, FMU41
F12 T12 65 78
(2.6) (3.1)
~86 65 78 68 94
(~3.4) (2.6) (3.1) 32 (1.3)
(2.7) (3.7)
ø129 (5.1)
ø129 (5.1)
150 (5.9)
162 (6.4)
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
85 85
(3.3) (3.3)
FMU40 FMU41
SW (AF) 60
(0.9)
SW (AF) 60
22
(0.9)
22
~148 (5.8)
~148 (5.8)
G1½” G2”
1½ NPT
~83 (3.3)
(~3.4)
2 NPT
~87
ø39 (1.5)
ø50 (2.0)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-006
Dimensions in mm (in)
3.1.2 FMU42, FMU44 with slip-on flange
F12 T12 65 78
(2.6) (3.1)
~86 65 78 68 94
(~3.4) (2.6) (3.1) 32 (1.3)
(2.7) (3.7)
ø129 (5.1)
ø129 (5.1)
150 (5.9)
162 (6.4)
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
85 85
(3.3) (3.3)
FMU42 FMU44
~ 110 (4.3)
~ 145 (5.7)
(3.3)
~ 85
~ 107
(4.2)
ø70 (2.8)
ø98 (3.9)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-007
16 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Installation
3.1.3 FMU42, FMU44 with mounting bracket
FMU42 FMU44
ENDRESS+HAUSER ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M Prosonic M
F12/ F12/
T12 T12
M8 M8
105 (4.1)
125 (4.9)
30 (1.2)
30 (1.2)
75
(3.0) 119 (4.7)
119 (4.7)
98
(3.9)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-008
3.1.4 FMU43
A B
~86 65 78
(3.4) (2.6) (3.1)
F12
ø129 (5.1)
ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
150 (5.9)
Proson
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
~248 (9.8)
2 x M8
.0)
75 (3
85 (3.3)
.5)
89 (3
6.2)
158 (
ANSI 4” DN 100 * ø230 (9.1)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-009
A With slip-on flange B With mounting bracket
3.1.5 Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43 and FMU44
25
119 (4.68) (0.98)
~123 (4.8)
120 (4.7)
2 (0.079)
40 (1.6) 40 (1.6)
25
(0.98)
11 (0.43)
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-010
Endress+Hauser 17
3.1.6 Flanges for FMU42 and FMU44
A
B
D
20 (0.79)
G2”
ISO228
C
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-011
suitable for A B C D E number of

boreholes
3" 150 lbs / DN80 PN16 / 10 K 80 150 mm 160 mm 200 mm 19 mm 45° 8

(5.91") (6.30") (7.87") (0.75")
4" 150 lbs / DN100 PN16 / 10 K 100 175 mm 190.5 mm 228.6 mm 19 mm 45° 8
(6.90") (7.50") (9.00") (0.75")
6" 150 lbs / DN150 PN16 / 10 K 150 240 mm 241.3 mm 285 mm 23 mm 45° 8
(9.45") (9.50") (11.22") (0.91")
8" 150 lbs 298.5 mm 298.5 mm 342.9 mm 22. 5 mm 45° 8

(11.75") (11.75") (13.50") (0.89")
DN200 PN16 / 10 K 200 290 mm 295 mm 340 mm 23 mm 30° 12

(11.42") (11.61") (13.39") (0.91")
18 Endress+Hauser
3.2 Installation variants
3.2.1 Installation variants FMU40, FMU41
A B
C D
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
4 1
3 2
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-002
A Installation with counter nut

1 Counter nut (PC) supplied for G1½ and G2 instruments
B Installation with sleeve
1 Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied
C Installation with installation bracket
D Installation with screw in flange
1 Sealing ring (EPDM) supplied
2 Nozzle
3 Sensor
4 Screw in flange
For installation bracket or adapter flange  ä 58, "Accessories".
Endress+Hauser 19
3.2.2 Installation variants FMU42, FMU44
A B
ER
HAUS
ESS+
ENDR ic M
Proson
- .
L00-FMU42xxxx-17-00-00-yy-001
A Installation with universal flange, (Ex-hazardous, e.g. Zone 20)

B Installation with mounting bracket, (Non-Ex-hazardous, Zone 20)
3.2.3 Installation variants FMU43
A B
USER
ESS+HA
ENDR ic M
Proson
3 1
- . L00-FMU43xxxx-17-00-00-yy-001
A Installation with universal slip-on flange (option)

1 Sensor
2 Nozzle
3 Slip-on flange
B Installation with mounting bracket
20 Endress+Hauser
3.3 Installation conditions
3.3.1 Installation conditions for level measurements
2 3 4
1 7
5
1/6D
D L
6 a
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-005
• Do not install the sensor in the middle of the tank (3). We recommend leaving a distance between
the sensor and the tank wall (1) measuring 1/6 of the tank diameter.
• Use a protective cover, in order to protect the device from direct sun or rain (2).
• Avoid measurements through the filling curtain (4).
• Make sure that equipment (5) such as limit switches, temperature sensors, etc. are not located
within the emitting angle . In particular, symmetrical equipment (6) such as heating coils, baffles
etc. can influence measurement.
• Align the sensor so that it is vertical to the product surface (7).
• Never install two ultrasonic measuring devices in a tank, as the two signals may affect each other.
• To estimate the detection range, use the 3 dB emitting angle .
Sensor  Lmax rmax

FMU40 11° 5 m (16 ft) 0.48 m (1.6 ft)
FMU41 11° 8 m (26 ft) 0.77 m (2.5 ft)
FMU42 9° 10 m (33 ft) 0.79 m (2.6 ft)
FMU43 6° 15 m (49 ft) 0.79 m (2.6 ft)
FMU44 11 ° 20 m (66 ft) 1.93 m (6.3 ft)
3.3.2 Installation in narrow shafts

In narrow shafts with strong interference
echoes, we recommend using an ultrasound
guide pipe (e.g. PE or PVC wastewater pipe) 1
with a minimum diameter of 100 mm (3.94 in).
Make sure that the pipe is not soiled by accumu-
lated dirt. If necessary, clean the pipe at regular
intervals.
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-010
1 Venting hole
Endress+Hauser 21
3.3.3 Installation conditions for flow measurements

• Install the Prosonic M at the inflow side, as close above the maximum water level Hmax as possible
(take into account the blocking distance BD).
• Position the Prosonic M in the middle of the channel or weir.
• Align the sensor membrane parallel to the water surface.
• Keep to the installation distance of the channel or weir.
• You can enter the "Flow to Level" linearisation curve ("Q/h curve") using the operating program
FieldCare or manually via the on-site display.
Example: Khafagi-Venturi flume
B C
BD
E
Hmax =F V
A
1 x b0
b0
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-xx-003
A Khafagi-Venturi flume
B Inflow
C Outflow
BD Blocking distance
E Empty calibration
F Full calibration
V Direction of flow
22 Endress+Hauser
Example: Triangular weir
min. 2 Hmax
a
H max (= F)
min. 2 H max
min. 3 Hmax
BD
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-xx-012
BD Blocking distance
E Empty calibration
F Full calibration
Endress+Hauser 23
3.4 Measuring range
3.4.1 Blocking distance, Nozzle mounting

Install the Prosonic M at a height so that the blocking distance BD is not undershot, even at
maximum fill level. Use a pipe nozzle if you cannot maintain the blocking distance in any other way.
The interior of the nozzle must be smooth and may not contain any edges or welded joints. In
particular, there should be no burr on the inside of the tank side nozzle end. Note the specified limits
for nozzle diameter and length. To minimise disturbing factors, we recommend an angled socket
edge (ideally 45°).
FMU40/41 FMU42/44 FMU43
BD
SD
E
F L
L
L
D D
D
L00-FMU4KAxx-17-00-00-yy-004
BD Blocking distance F Full calibration (span)

SD Safety distance D Nozzle diameter
E Empty calibration L Nozzle length
Maximum nozzle length [mm (in)]
Nozzle diameter FMU40 FMU41 FMU42 FMU43 FMU44

DN50/2" 80 (3.15)
DN80/3" 240 (9.45) 240 (9.45) 250 (9.84)
DN100/4" 300 (11.8) 300 (11.8) 300 (11.8) 300 (11.8)

DN150/6" 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
DN200/8" 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
DN250/10" 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
DN300/12" 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 400 (15.7) 300 (11.8) 400 (15.7)
Sensor characteristics
Emitting angle  11° 11° 9° 6° 11°

Blocking distance [m (ft)] 0.25 (0.8) 0.35 (1.1) 0.4 (1.3) 0.6 (2.0) 0.5 (1.6)
Max. range [m (ft)] 5 (16.0) 8 (26.0) 10 (33.0) 15 (49.0) 20 (66.0)

in liquids
Max. range [m (ft)] 2 (6.6) 3.5 (11.0) 5 (16.0) 7 (23.0) 10 (33.0)
in solids
" Caution!
If the blocking distance is undershot, it may cause device malfunction.
24 Endress+Hauser
3.4.2 Safety distance

If the level rises to the safety distance SD, the device switches to warning or alarm status.
The size of SD can be set freely in the "Safety distance" (015) function.The "in safety distance"
(016) function defines how the device reacts if the level enters the safety distance.
There are three options:
• Warning: The device outputs an error message but continues measurement.
• Alarm: The device outputs an error message. The output signal assumes the value defined in the
"Output on alarm" (011) function (MAX, MIN, user-specific value or holds the last value). As
soon as the level drops below the safety distance, the device recommences measurement.
• Self holding: The device reacts in the same way as for an alarm. However, the alarm condition
continues after the level drops below the safety distance. The device only recommences
measurement when you cancel the alarm using the "Ackn. alarm" (017) function.
3.4.3 Range
The sensor range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information
TI00365F/00/EN for an estimation. The maximum range is shown in the above diagram (valid for
good conditions).
Sensor Maximum range
FMU40 5 m (16 ft)

FMU41 8 m (26 ft)
FMU42 10 m (33 ft)
FMU43 15 m (49 ft)
FMU44 20 m (66 ft)
3.5 Installation hint for FMU40, FMU41

" Caution!
1
Use only the screw-in piece to screw in the
Prosonic M.
Screw the Prosonic M at the screw-in piece
using an 60 AF spanner.
Maximum torque: 20 Nm (14.75 lbf ft).
2
60
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-009
1 Housing F12 or T12

2 60 AF
Endress+Hauser 25
3.6 Turn housing

After mounting, the housing can be turned 350° in order to simplify access to the display and the
terminal compartment. Proceed as follows to turn the housing to the required position:
• Undo the fixing screws (allen key 4 mm (0.16 in))
• Turn the housing in the required direction
• Tighten up the fixing screws. Maximum torque 0.5 Nm (0.36 lbf ft).
• Loctite can be used for securing the screw.
A B
2. 2.
1. 1.
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-013
A Housing F12
B Housing T12
3.7 Installation check

After installing the device, carry out the following checks:
• Is the device damaged (visual inspection)?
• Does the device correspond to the measuring point specifications for process temperature, process
pressure, ambient temperature, measuring range etc.
• If available: Are the measuring point number and labelling correct (visual inspection)?
• Is the measuring device sufficiently protected against precipitation and direct sunlight?
• Are the cable glands tightened correctly?
• After aligning the housing, check the process seal at the nozzle or flange.
26 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Wiring
4 Wiring
4.1 Electrical connection

" Caution!
Before connection please note the following:
• The power supply must be identical to the data on the nameplate.
• Switch off power supply before connecting up the instrument.
• Connect equipotential bonding to transmitter ground terminal before connecting up the
instrument ( ä 30, "Potential matching")
# Warning!
When you use the measuring system in hazardous areas, make sure to comply with national
standards and the specifications in the safety instructions (XA’s). Make sure you use the specified
cable gland.
4.1.1 Wiring in the housing F12

1. Unscrew housing cover (1).
2. Remove display (2) if fitted. 1
3. Remove cover plate (3) from terminal
compartment.
4. Pull out terminal module (4) slightly using
pulling loop.
5. Insert cable (5) through gland (6).
2
" Caution!
If possible, insert the cable from above and
let a draining loop in order to avoid EN
DR
ES
S+
HA
US
ER
intrusion of humidity.
6. Connect cable screen to the grounding
terminal (7) within the terminal
compartment. 6 3
7. Make connection according to terminal
assignment (see below).
8. Re-insert terminal module (4).
9. Tighten cable gland (6).
5
10. Tighten screws on cover plate (3).
11. Insert display (2) if fitted. 4 7
12. Screw on housing cover (1).
13. Switch on power supply.
1 2 3 4
L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-008
Endress+Hauser 27
Wiring Prosonic M - HART
4.1.2 Wiring in the housing T12

1. Unscrew the cover (1) of the separate 1
connection room.
2. Insert cable (2) through gland (3).
" Caution!
If possible, insert the cable from above and
let a draining loop in order to avoid
intrusion of humidity.
3. Connect cable screen to the grounding
terminal (4) within the connection room.
4. Make connection according to the terminal
assignment (see below). 3
5. Tighten cable gland (3).
6. Screw on housing cover (1).
7. Switch on power supply.
2
1 2 3 4
L00-FMU4xxxx-04-00-00-yy-009
28 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Wiring
4.2 Terminal assignment
A 1 B 5 1
2
3
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
L- L+ I+ I- I+ I- L1/L+ N/L-
L00-FMxxxxxx-04-00-00-xx-040
A Loop-powered version 3 Plant ground

B 4-wire version (active) 4 4...20 mA HART
1 Power 5 Display unit, recorder, PCS
2 Test clamp for testing of the signal current
! Note!
• When operating via a handheld terminal or via a PC with an operating program, a minimum
communication resistance of 250  must be taken into account. Observe the max. load  ä 30.
• The connecting options for Commubox FXA195 or Field Xpert SFX100, see Technical
Information TI00404F or BA00060S/04/EN.
• More Information of the complete measuring system  ä 34.
4.3 Supply voltage
4.3.1 HART, 2-wire

The following values are the voltages across the terminals directly at the instrument:
Current Terminal voltage Terminal voltage

Version
consumption minimum maximum
2-wire HART 4 mA 14 V 36 V
Standard
20 mA 8V 36 V
4 mA 14 V 30 V
Ex ia
20 mA 8V 30 V
4 mA 14 V 30 V
Ex d
20 mA 11 V 30 V
Fixed current,
adjustable, e.g. for Standard 11 mA 10 V 36 V
solar power
operation
(measured value via Ex ia 11 mA 10 V 30 V
HART)
Fixed current for Standard 4 mA1) 14 V 36 V

HART multidrop
mode Ex ia 4 mA1 14 V 30 V
1) Start-up current 11 mA
Endress+Hauser 29
Wiring Prosonic M - HART
4.3.2 HART, 4-wire, active
Version Voltage max. load
DC 10.5 to 32 V 600 
AC 50/60 Hz 90 to 253 V 600 
" Caution!
When using the public powers supply, install an easy accessible power switch in the proximity of
the instrument. Mark the power switch as a disconnector for the instrument (IEC/EN 61010).
4.4 Potential matching
1 1
L00-FMU4xxxx-17-00-00-yy-014
1 External ground terminal of the transmitter
Connect the equipotential bonding to the external ground terminal of the transmitter.
" Caution!
In Ex applications, the instrument must only be grounded on the sensor side. Further safety
instructions are given in the separate documentation for applications in explosion hazardous areas.
! Note!
Since the housing is isolated from the tank by the plastic sensor, interference signals may occur if
the potential matchin gline is not prolerly connected.
For optimum electromagnetic compatibility the potential matching line should be as short as
possible and at least 2,5 mm2 (14 AWG) in cross-section.
If increased electromagnetic interference is to be expected due to the installation conditions, we
recommend usage of a ground strap.
4.5 Checking the connection

After wiring the device, carry out the following checks:
• Are the terminals correctly assigned?
• Is the cable gland tight?
• Is the housing cover fully screwed on?
• If power supply available: Does a display appear on the display module?
30 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Display and operating elements
5.1.1 On-site display VU331

The LCD module VU331 for display and operation is located beneath the housing cover. The
measured value is legible through the glass in the cover. Open the cover to operate the device.
ENDR
Order MICR ESS+
Code:
Ser.-No. OPILOHAUS
: T II ER
1
Messber
Measuri
eich
ng
range
U 16...36 max.
4...20 20
Maulburg
V m
mA DC
IP
65
T
Made in Germany
A >70°C
: t
>85°C
ENDRESS + HAUSER
3 – + E
L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-001
1 LCD liquid crystal display

2 Snap fit
3 Keys
4 Symbols
Endress+Hauser 31
Operation Prosonic M - HART
5.1.2 Display appearance
measured value display
1. label
6
2. symbol
1 3. value
4. bargraph
5. unit
6. position in menu
2 3 4 5
group selection
1. selection list
Function with free parameter
1. label
3
2. help texts
1 3. position in menu
envelope curve
1. envelope curve
In the measured value display, the bargraph corresponds to the output.

The bargraph is segmented in 10 bars. Each completely filled bar represents a change of 10% of the
adjusted span.
5.1.3 Display symbols

The following table describes the symbols that appear on the liquid crystal display:
Sybmol Meaning
ALARM_SYMBOL
This alarm symbol appears when the instrument is in an alarm state. If the symbol flashes, this indicates a
warning.
LOCK_SYMBOL
This lock symbol appears when the instrument is locked,i.e. if no input is possible.
COM_SYMBOL
This communication symbol appears when a data transmission via e.g. HART, PROFIBUS PA or
FOUNDATION Fieldbus is in progress.
32 Endress+Hauser
5.1.4 Function of the keys
Key(s) Meaning
O or V Navigate upwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function
S or W Navigate downwards in the selection list

Edit numeric value within a function
X or Z Navigate to the left within a function group
F Navigate to the right within a function group, confirmation.
O and F
or Contrast settings of the LCD
S and F
Hardware lock / unlock
After a hardware lock, an operation of the instrument via display or
O and S and F communication is not possible!
The hardware can only be unlocked via the display. An unlock parameter must
be entered to do so.
5.2 Function codes

For easy orientation within the function menus, for each function a position is shown on the display.
empty calibr. 005
6.500 m
distance membrane
to min. level
 005 1 2
1 Function group
2 Function
The first two digits identify the function group:
• basic setup 00
• safety settings 01
• linearisation 04
...
The third digit numbers the individual functions within the function group:
• basic setup 00  • tank shape 002

• medium property 003
• process cond. 004
...
Hereafter the position is always given in brackets (e.g. "tank shape" (002)) after the described
function.
Endress+Hauser 33
5.3 Operating options
5.3.1 4 to 20 mA output with HART protocol

The complete measuring system consists of:
1 3
2 4
5
ENDRESS + HAUSER
10 – +
%
ENDRESS + HAUSER
RMA 422
9 8 7 6
L00-FMxxxxxx-14-00-06-xx-020
1 PLC (programmable logic controller)

2 Commubox FXA191 (RS232) or FXA195 (USB)
3 Computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare)
4 Commubox FXA291 with ToF Adapter FXA291
5 Power supply (for 4-wire)
6 Prosonic with display and operating modul
7 Field Xpert SFX100
8 VIATOR Bluetooth-Modem modem with connection cable
9 Connection for Commubox FXA191, FXA195 or Field Xpert SFX100
10 Transmitter supply unit RMA422 or RN221N (communication resistor included)
If the HART communication resistor is not built into the supply unit, it is necessary to insert a
communication resistor of 250  into the 2-wire line.
34 Endress+Hauser
5.4 Operation using the on-site display VU331
ENDRESS + HAUSER
– + E
X
F 2x X
X X >3 s
basic setup F tank shape F medium property

... Return to
O Group Selection
safety settings
O dome ceiling
horizontal cyl
O unknown
liquid
temperature bypass solid<4mm
stilling well solid>4mm
linearisation
...
S flat ceiling
sphere
S
no ceiling
S ...
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-018
1. Change from Measured Value Display to Group Selection by pressing F.

2. Press S or O to select the required Function Group and confirm by pressing F.
The active selection is marked by a ✓ in front of the menu text.
3. Activate Edit mode with O or S .
Selection menus
a. Select the required Parameter in selected function with S oder O .
b. F confirms selection; ✓appears in front of the selected parameter.
c. F confirms the edited value; system quits edit mode.
d. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode.
Typing in numerals and text

a. Press O or S to edit the first character of the numeral / text.
b. F positions the cursor at the next character; continue with a. until you have completed
your input.
c. If a  symbol appears at the cursor, press F to accept the value entered; system quits edit
mode.
d. If a  symbol appears at the cursor, press F to return to the previous character (e.g. for
correction of entries).
e. O and S (= Q) interrupts selection; system quits edit mode.
4. Press F to select the next function.
5. Press O and S (= Q) once; return to previous function.
Press O and S (= Q) twice; return to Group Selection.
6. Press O and S (= Q) to return to Measured value display.
Endress+Hauser 35
5.5 HART communication

Apart from local operation, you can also parameterise the measuring instrument and view measured
values by means of a HART protocol. There are two options available for operation:
• Operation via the universal handheld operating unit Field Xpert SFX100.
• Operation via the Personal Computer (PC) using the operating program FieldCare.
! Note!
The device can also be operated locally using the keys. If operation is prevented by the keys being
locked locally, parameter entry via communication is not possible either.
5.5.1 Operation via Field Xpert SFX100

Compact, flexible and robust industry handheld terminal for remote parametrization and measured
value inspection via the HART current output or FOUNDATION Fieldbus. For details refer to
Operating Instructions BA00060S/04/EN.
36 Endress+Hauser
5.5.2 FieldCare operating program
FieldCare is an Endress+Hauser asset management tool based on FDT technology. With FieldCare,
you can configure all Endress+Hauser devices as well as devices from other manufacturers that
support the FDT standard. Hardware and software requirements you can find on the internet:
www.endress.com ➝ select your country ➝ search: FieldCare ➝ FieldCare ➝ Technical Data.
FieldCare supports the following functions:
• Configuration of transmitters in online operation
• Singal analysis via envelope curve
• Tank linearisation
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• Documentation of the measuring point
Connection options:
• HART via Commubox FXA195 and the USB port on a computer
• Commubox FXA291 with ToF Adapter FXA291 (USB) via service interface
Menu-guided commissioning:
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-021
• You can find the function groups and functions of the device in the navigation bar.
• You can find the input fields for the parameters in the main window.
• If you click on a parameter name, the Help pages open with precise explanations of the required
input.
Endress+Hauser 37
Signal analysis via envelope curve:

The FieldCare offers easy analysis of the envelope curve via the "Envelope" menu:
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-en-022
5.6 Lock/unlock configuration
5.6.1 Software security locking

Enter a number 100 in the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function in the "diagnostics" (0A)
function group.
The symbol appears on the display. Inputs are no longer possible.
If you try to change a parameter, the device jumps to the "unlock parameter" (0A4) function.
Enter "100"
Now change the parameters.
5.6.2 Hardware security locking

Press S, O and F simultaneously.
Inputs are no longer possible.
If you try to change a parameter, the following appears:
L00-fmrxf0a4-20-00-00-de-001
Press S, O and F simultaneously. The "unlock parameter" (0A4) function appears.

Enter "100"
Now change the parameters.
! Note!
A hardware locking can only be unlocked again via the display by pressing the O, S and F keys at
the same time again. It is not possible to unlock the hardware by communication.
38 Endress+Hauser
5.7 Resetting the customer parameters

It is advisable to reset the customer parameters if you want to use a device with an unknown history.
Effects of resetting:
• All customer parameters are reset to their default values.
• Customer interference echo suppression is not deleted.
• Linearisation is switched to "linear", but the table values are kept. The table can be switched
back on in the "linearisation" (04) function group in the "linearisation" (041) function.
In order to carry out the reset, enter the number "333" in the "reset" (0A3) function in the
"diagnostics" (0A) function group.
" Caution!
A reset may lead to impairment of the measurement. As a rule, a basic calibration is required after
a reset.
! Note!
The default values of each parameter are shown in bold in the menu overview in the appendix.
! Note!
5-point linearity protocol
The specified measuring accuracy is a typical value  ä 66, "Performance characteristics".
With the production of the 5-point linearity protocol the measuring system (sensor and electronic)
is adjusted exactly to one another and the measuring accuracy is optimized for the specified range.
To realize this, the parameter "zero distance" is fine adjusted. After a reset the value for the zero
distance has to be re-parameterized in the service menu according to the data on the associated 5-
point linearity protocol. Please contact the Endress+Hauser service.
5.8 Resetting an interference echo suppression (tank map)

It is always advisable to reset the interference echo suppression (tank mapping) when:
• a device with an unknown history is used
• an incorrect suppression was input.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch to the "extended calibr." (05) function group and to the "selection" (050)
function.
2. Select "extended map."
3. Then proceed to the "cust. tank map" (055) function.
4. Select
– "reset", to delete (reset) the existing interference echo suppression.
– "inactive" to deactivate an existing interference echo suppression. The suppression remains
saved.
– "active" to reactivate an existing interference echo suppression.
! Note!
5-point linearity protocol
The specified measuring accuracy is a typical value  ä 66, "Performance characteristics"..
With the production of the 5-point linearity protocol the measuring system (sensor and electronic)
is adjusted exactly to one another and the measuring accuracy is optimized for the specified range.
To realize this, the parameter "zero distance" is fine adjusted. After a reset the value for the zero
distance has to be re-parameterized in the service menu according to the data on the associated 5-
point linearity protocol. Please contact the Endress+Hauser service.
Endress+Hauser 39
Commissioning Prosonic M - HART
6 Commissioning
Commission the Prosonic M in the following stages:
• Installation check
• Power-up device
• Basic calibration
• Measuring signal check using the envelope curve
The chapter describes the commissioning process using the on-site display. Commissioning using
FieldCare is identical.
6.1 Function check

Make sure that all final checks have been completed before you start up your measuring point:
• Checklist “Post installation check” (  ä 26).
• Checklist “Post connection check” (  ä 30).
6.2 Power up instrument

After switching on the supply voltage, the instrument is first initialised.
Then the following appear for approximately five seconds:
• Device type
• Software version
Press E to exit this display.
On first power-up, you are requested to select

the language for the display texts. Available
language:
• English L00-fmrxf092-20-00-00-en-001
• Deutsch
• Français
• Español
• Italiano
• Nederlands
• Japanese
Then you are requested to select the unit of

length for your measurements. Available unit of
length:
•m L00-fmrxf0c5-20-00-00-en-001
• ft
• mm
• inch
A measured value is displayed. This is NOT

equivalent to the level in your tank. Firstly carry
out a basic calibration.
L00-fmrxf000-20-00-00-en-001
Press F to switch to the group selection.

Press F again to start the basic calibration.
L00-fmrxfg00-20-00-00-en-001
40 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Commissioning
6.3 Basic calibration

The "Basic setup" (00) function group lists all the functions which are required for a standard
measurement task to commission the Prosonic M. When you have completed your input for a
function, the next function appears automatically. In this way, you are guided through the complete
calibration.
tank shape BD 20 mA
SD
dome ceiling
100%
medium property E
F
Unknown
process cond. 4 mA
0%
Standard
safety settings
empty calibr.
linearisation
option
full calibr.
extended calibr.
Interference echo
suppression ...
(tank mapping)
L00-FMU4xxx-19-00-00-en-000
D Distance (distance from the sensor membrane (= reference point of the measurement) / product)
E Empty calibr. (= zero point
F Full calibr. (= span)
L Level
BD Block distance
SD Safety distance
Endress+Hauser 41
6.3.1 Measuring point settings
Function "tank shape" (002)

In this function, select one of the following options:
A B C
D E
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-06-en-001
A Dome ceiling
B Horizontal cyl
C Bypass, stilling well/ultrasonic guide pipe
D No ceiling, e.g. dumps, open levels, chanels, weirs
E Sphere
F Flat ceiling
Function "medium property" (003)

Set the medium type in this function.
You have the following options:
• unknown (e.g. pasty media such as greases, creams, gels etc.)
• liquid
• solid, grain size < 4mm, (fine)
• solid, grain size > 4mm, (coarse)
42 Endress+Hauser
Function "process conditions" (004)

For this function, you have the following options:
standard liquids calm surface turb. surface
For all fluid applications which do not Storage tanks with immersion tube or Storage / accumulation tanks with
fit in any of the following groups. bottom filling uneven surface due to free filling,
mixing nozzles or small bottom stirrers
L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-001 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-002
The filters and output damping are set The averaging filters and output Special filters for stabilising the input
to average values. damping are set to large values. signal are activated.
-> Stable measured value -> Stable measured value
-> Accurate measurement -> Medium reaction time
-> Slow reaction time
add. agitator fast change standard solid
Moving surfaces (poss. with vortex Rapid level change, particularly in For all bulk solids applications which
formation) due to agitators small tanks do not fit in any of the following
groups.
L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-003 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-004 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-006
Special filters for stabilising the input The averaging filters are set to small The filter and output damping are set
signal are set to large values. values. to average values.
-> Stable measured value -> Rapid reaction time
-> Medium reaction time -> Possibly unstable measured value
Endress+Hauser 43
solid dusty conveyor belt Test: no filter
Dusty bulk solids Bulk solids with rapid level change All the filters can be switched off for
purposes of service and diagnosis.
ENDRESS+HAUSER
Prosonic M
L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-007 L00-FMU4xxxx-14-00-00-xx-005
The filters are set to detect even The averaging filters are set to small All filters off
relatively weak signals. values.
-> Rapid reaction time
Possibly unstable measured value
44 Endress+Hauser
6.3.2 Empty and full calibration
BD 20 mA
SD 100%
E F
4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-00-yy-019
BD Blocking distance F Full calibration (= span)

SD Safety distance D Nozzle diameter
E Empty calibration (= zero point) L Level
Function "empty calibration" (005)

In this function, enter the distance E from the sensor membrane to the minimum level (zero point).
" Caution!
With dished boiler heads or conical outflows, the zero point should not be deeper than the point at
which the ultrasonic wave impinges on the tank bottom.
Function "blocking distance" (059)

In this function the blocking distance (BD) of the sensor is displayed.
" Caution!
When entering the full calibration (span), please take into account, that the maximum level may not
project into the blocking distance (BD)
! Note!
After basic calibration, enter a safety distance (SD) in the "safety distance" (015) function. If the
level is within this safety distance, the Prosonic M signals a warning or an alarm, depending on your
selection in the "in safety distance" (016) function.
Function "full calibration" (006)

In this function, enter the span F, i.e. the distance from the minimum level to the maximum level.
Endress+Hauser 45
6.3.3 Interference echo suppression (tank mapping)
Function "dist./measured value" (008)

In the "dist./meas.value" (008) function, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane
to the product surface is displayed together with level L. Check these values.
Function "check distance" (051)

The mapping is initialized by this function.
+ 2
+
L00-FMR2KAxx-14-00-06-xx-010
1 Distance too small

2 Distance = ok
Select
• "distance=ok" if the correct distance is displayed. Any echoes closer to the sensor will be
suppressed by the following interference echo suppression.
• "dist. too small" if the displayed distance is too small. In this case, the signal comes from an
interference echo which will be suppressed.
• "dist. too big" if the displayed distance is too large. This error cannot be cancelled by suppressing
the interference echo. This means that the following two functions are skipped. Check the
application parameters "tank shape" (002), "medium proerty" (003) and "process
cond." (004) and the "empty calibr."(005) in the "basic setup" (00) function group.
• "dist. unknown" if you do not know the actual distance. This means that the following two
functions are skipped.
• "manual" if you want to specify the suppression area yourself in the following function.
Function "range of mapping" (052)

The suggested suppression area is displayed in this function. The reference point is always the sensor
membrane. You can still edit the value. With manual suppression, the default value is 0 m.
" Caution!
The suppression range must end 0.5 m (1.6 ft) in front of the echo of the actual level. With an empty
tank, do not enter E but E – 0.5 m.
46 Endress+Hauser
Function "start mapping" (053)

You have the following options for this function:
• off: Nothing is suppressed.
• on: Starts suppression.
! Note!
If a mapping already exists, it will be overwritten up to the distance specified in the "range of
mapping" (052) function. Beyond this distance the existing mapping remains unchanged.
Function dist./measured value (008)

After suppression, the measured distance D from the sensor membrane to the product surface is
displayed together with the level. Check that the values correspond to the actual level and/or the
actual distance.
The following cases may occur:
• Distance correct – Level correct -> End of basic calibration
• Distance incorrect – Level incorrect -> An additional interference echo suppression must be
carried out. Go back to the "check distance" (051) function.
• Distance correct – Level incorrect -> Check the value of the "empty calibr." (005) function.
Return to group selection

After the mapping has been recorded the basic calibration is completed and the device automatically
returns to the group selection.
Endress+Hauser 47
6.4 Envelope curve

After the basic setup, an evaluation of the measurement with the aid of the envelope curve
("envelope curve" (0E) function group) is recommended.
6.4.1 Funxtion "plot settings" (0E1)

In this function, select whether you want to display
• just the envelope curve
• The envelope curve and the echo evaluation line FAC
• The envelope curve and interference echo suppression (map)
! Note!
The FAC and the interference echo suppression (map) are explained in BA00240F "Prosonic M -
Description of Instrument Functions"
6.4.2 Function "recording curve" (0E2)

In this function, specify whether you want to display
• an individual envelope curve
• The current envelope curve, with cyclical refreshment.
6.4.3 Function "envelope curve display" (0E3)

The envelope curve is displayed in this function. You can use it to obtain the following information:
quality of evaluated echo

full calibr. evaluated echo is marked
envelope curve empty calibr.

only
minimum distance distance of maximum distance

of the plot evaluated echo of the plot
map interference echo level echo
envelope curve and

interference echo
suppression (map)
L00-FMU4xxxx-07-00-00-en-003
Check that the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The echo quality at the end of measuring range should be at least 10dB.
• There should be practically no interference echoes in front of the level signal.
• If interference echoes cannot be avoided, they must be below the suppression curve.
! Note!
If the cyclical envelope curve display is still active on the display, the measured value is updated at
a slower cycle time. We therefore advise you to exit the envelope curve display after optimising the
measuring point. To do this, press F. (The instrument does not leave the envelope curve display
automatically.)
48 Endress+Hauser
6.4.4 Navigation in the envelope curve display

Using navigation, the envelope curve can be scaled horizontally and vertically and shifted to the left
or the right. The active navigation mode is indicated by a symbol in the top left hand corner of the
display.
Horizontal Zoom mode:
- horizontal zoom in
OE3
- horizontal zoom out
Move mode:
- moved to the left
- moved to the right
Vertical Zoom mode:
… - vertical zoom (4 steps)

L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-en-004
Horizontal Zoom mode

Firstly, go into the envelope curve display. Then press O or S to switch to the envelope curve
navigation. You are then in Horizontal Zoom mode. Either or is displayed.
• O increases the horizontal scale.
• S reduces the horizontal scale.
S O
L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-007
Move mode
Then press F to switch to Move mode. Either or is displayed.
• O shifts the curve to the right.
• S shifts the curve to the left.
S O
L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-008
Endress+Hauser 49
Vertical Zoom mode

Press F once more to switch to Vertical Zoom mode. is displayed. You now have the following
options.
• O increases the vertical scale.
• S reduces the vertical scale.
The display icon shows the current zoom factor ( to ).
S O
L00-FMxxxxxx-07-00-00-yy-009
Exiting the navigation

• Press F again to run through the different modes of the envelope curve navigation.
• Press O and S to exit the navigation. The set increases and shifts are retained. Only when you
reactivate the "recording curve" (0E2) function the display settings return to their standard
values.
50 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 System error messages
7.1.1 Current error

Errors which the Prosonic M detects during commissioning or operation are displayed:
• In the "measured value" (000) function
• In the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "present error" (0A0) function
Only the highest priority error is displayed; in the case of multiple errors, you can scroll between
the different error messages by pressing O or S.
7.1.2 Last error

The last error is displayed in the "diagnostics" (0A) function group in the "previous error"
(0A1) function. This display can be deleted in the "clear last error" (0A2) function.
7.1.3 Types of error
Type of error Symbol Meaning

The output signal assumes a value which can be set using the "output
on alarm" (010) function:
Alarm (A) • MAX: 110%, 22mA

• MIN: -10%, 3,8mA
continuous • Hold: last value is on hold
• User-specific value
Warning (W) The device continues measurement. An error message is displayed.
flashing
Alarm/Warning (E) You can define whether the error should behave as an alarm or as a warning.
7.1.4 Error codes
Code Error description Action
A102 checksum error Reset;

A110 If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics
A152
A160
W103 initialising If the message does not disappear after several seconds, replace the electronics
A106 downloading Wait; Message disappears after load sequence
A111 electronics defect Reset;

A113 Check system for EMC, improve as necessary
A114 If alarm still present after reset, replace electronics
A115
A121
A125
A155
A164
A171
A116 download error Check connection; Restart download
W153 initialising Wait a few seconds; if error is still displayed, switch the power off and on again
A231 sensor defect Check connection, if necessary replace HF module or electronics
Endress+Hauser 51
Troubleshooting Prosonic M - HART
Code Error description Action
A281 interruption temperature Exchange sensor

sensor
A502 Sensor type not detected Exchange sensor and/or electronics
A512 recording of mapping Alarm disappears after a few seconds
A521 new sensor type detected Reset

W601 linearisation curve not Correct table (enter monotonously increasing table)
monotone
W611 less than 2 linea-risation Enter additional value pairs

points
W621 simulation on Switch simulation mode off ["output" (06) function group, "simulation"
(065) function]]
E641 no usable echo Check basic calibration
E651 level in safety distance - Error disappears when the level leaves the safety distance. Possibly reset the
risk of overspill lock. ["safety settings" (01) function group, "ackn. alarm" (017) function]]
A661 Sensor overtemperature
A671 Linearisation incomplete Activate linearisation table
W681 current out of range Carry out basic calibration;

check linearisation
W691 Filling noise detected, level ramp is active
52 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Troubleshooting
7.2 Application errors
Error Example Elimination
Measured value (00) is 1. Check empty calibration (005) and full calibration (006)
incorrect but measured
2. Check linearisation
distance (008) is correct F m/ft 100% – level/ullage (040)
D m/ft (008) – max. scale(046)
– diameter vessel(047)
expected
– linearisation table
Measured value (000) and 1. For measurements in bypass or stilling well:

measured distance (008) actual Select the according option in the "tank shape" (002) function
are incorrect
E m/ft 2. Carry out interference echo suppression
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-019
No change in 1. Carry out interference echo suppression

measured value on filling/
2. Clean sensor if necessary
emptying 100%
3. If necessary, select better installation position
4. If necessary due to wide interference echoes, set function "detection
actual window" (0A7) to "off"
expected
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-014
With an uneven surface 1. Carry out interference echo suppression

(e.g. filling, emptying,
100%
2. Set the process cond. (004) to "calm surface" or "add. agitator"
running agitator) the
measured value actual 3. Increase output damping (058)
may jump sporadically to 4. If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor
higher levels expected
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-015
100%
actual
expected
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-016
On filling/emptying the 1. Check tank shape (002), e.g. "dome ceiling" or "horizontal cyl."
measured value drops
2. If possible, do not select a central installation position
100%
3. Possible user stilling well/echo guide pipe
expected
actual
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-017
Endress+Hauser 53
Troubleshooting Prosonic M - HART
Error Example Elimination
E 641 (echo loss) 1. Check application parameters (002), (003) and (004)
2. If necessary, select a different installation position and/or a larger sensor
100%
3. Align the sensor parallel to the product surface (particularly for bulk solids
eingetreten applications)
E 641
erwartet
0% t→
L00-FMR2xxxx-19-00-00-en-018
54 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Maintenance and repairs
8 Maintenance and repairs
8.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior, always use cleaning agents that do not attack the surface of the housing
and the seals.
8.2 Repairs
The Endress+Hauser repair concept assumes that the measuring devices have a modular design and
that customers are able to undertake repairs themselves  ä 56, "Spare Parts". For more
information on service and spare parts, contact the Service Department at Endress+Hauser.
8.3 Repairs to Ex-approved devices

When carrying out repairs to Ex-approved devices, please note the following:
• Repairs to Ex-approved devices may only be carried out by trained personnel or by the
Endress+Hauser Service.
• Comply with the prevailing standards, national Ex-area regulations, safety instructions (XA) and
certificates.
• Only use original spare parts from Endress+Hauser.
• When ordering a spare part, please note the device designation on the nameplate. Only replace
parts with identical parts.
• Carry out repairs according to the instructions. On completion of repairs, carry our the specified
routine test on the device.
• Only Endress+Hauser Service may convert a certified device into a different certified variant.
• Document all repair work and conversions.
8.4 Replacement
After a complete instrument or electronic module has been replaced, the parameters can be
downloaded into the instrument again via the communication interface. Prerequisite to this is that
the data were uploaded to the PC beforehand using FieldCare. Measurement can continue without
having to carry out a new setup. Only a linearisation and a tank map (interference echo suppression)
have to be recorded again.
Endress+Hauser 55
Maintenance and repairs Prosonic M - HART
8.5 Spare Parts

An overview of the spare parts for your device is available in the internet at www.endress.com.
To obtain information on the spare parts, proceed as follows:
1. Go to "www.endress.com" and select your country.
2. Click "Instruments".
3. Enter the product name into the "product name" field.
4. Select the device.

5. Click the "Accessories/Spare parts" tab.
6. Select the required spare parts (You may also use the overview drawing on the right side of the
screen.)
When ordering spare parts, always quote the serial number indicated on the nameplate. As far as
necessary, the spare parts also include replacement instructions.
56 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Maintenance and repairs
8.6 Return
Returning devices
The measuring device must be returned if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the
wrong measuring device has been ordered or delivered. According to legal regulations,
Endress+Hauser, as an ISO-certified company, is required to follow certain procedures when
handling returned products that are in contact with medium.
To ensure swift, safe and professional device returns, please read the return procedures and
conditions on the Endress+Hauser website at www.services.endress.com/return-material
8.7 Disposal
In case of disposal please seperate the different components according to their material consistence.
8.8 Software history
Software version / date Changes to software Changes to documentation
V 01.02.00 / 01.2002 Original software

V 01.02.02 / 03.2003 Compatible with:
• ToF Tool
• Commuwin II (version 2.05.03 and
higher
• HART Communicator DXR 275 (from
OS 4.6) with Rev. 1, DD 1
V 01.02.04 / 02.2004 • FMU 42 added FMU 42 added

• compatible with HART Communicator
DXR 375
V 01.04.00 / 07.2006 • "detection window" function added "detection window" added

can be operated via: Version: 07.06
• ToF Tool from version 4.50
• HART Communicator DXR375 with
Rev. 1, DD1
8.9 Contact addresses of Endress+Hauser

Contact addresses can be found on our homepage: www.endress.com/worldwide. If you have any
questions, please do not hesitate to contact your Endress+Hauser representative.
Endress+Hauser 57
Accessories Prosonic M - HART
9 Accessories
9.1 Weather protection cover

A Weather protection cover made of stainless steel is recommended for outdoor mounting (order
code: 543199-0001). The shipment includes the protective cover and tension clamp.
.45) 135
240 (9 (5.3
1)
70 (2.76)
95
1 °
45
(3.7
4)
Maulburg
Made in Germany
mm (in)
L00-FMU4xxxx-00-00-06-xx-001
1 F12 / T12 housing
9.2 Installation bracket for FMU40, FMU41
400
120
G
A ø16
250
120
3
30
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-de-001
Dimensions in mm
• for FMU40, G1½: Order No. 942669-0000

• for FMU41, G2: Order No. 942669-0001
suited for NPT 1½" and 2" as well
58 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Accessories
9.3 Screw in flange
4 1
3 2
L00-FMU30xxx-00-00-00-xx-001
1 Screw in flange
2 Nozzle
3 Sensor
4 Sealing ring EPDM (supplied)
Screw in flange FAX50
015 Material:
BR1 DN50 PN10/16 A, steel flange EN1092-1
BS1 DN80 PN10/16 A, steel flange EN1092-1
BT1 DN100 PN10/16 A, steel flange EN1092-1
JF1 2" 150lbs FF, steel flange ANSI B16.5
JG1 3" 150lbs FF, steel flange ANSI B16.5
JH1 4" 150lbs FF, steel flange ANSI B16.5
JK2 8" 150lbs FF, PP max 3bar abs/44psia flange ANSI B16.5
XIF UNI flange 2"/DN50/50, PVDF max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 2" 150lbs/DN50 PN16/10K 50
XIG UNI flange 2"/DN50/50, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 2" 150lbs/DN50 PN16/10K 50
XIJ UNI flange 2"/DN50/50, 316L max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 2" 150lbs/DN50 PN16/10K 50
XJF UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PVDF max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 3" 150lbs/DN80 PN16/10K 80
XJG UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 3" 150lbs/DN80 PN16/10K 80
XJJ UNI flange 3"/DN80/80, 316L max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 3" 150lbs/DN80 PN16/10K 80
XKF UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PVDF max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs/DN100 PN16/10K 100
XKG UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs/DN100 PN16/10K 100
XKJ UNI flange 4"/DN100/100, 316L max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 4" 150lbs/DN100 PN16/10K 100
XLF UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PVDF max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs/DN150 PN16/10K 150
XLG UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs/DN150 PN16/10K 150
XLJ UNI flange 6"/DN150/150, 316L max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for 6" 150lbs/DN150 PN16/10K 150
XMG UNI flange DN200/200, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for DN200 PN16/10K 200
XNG UNI flange DN250/250, PP max 4bar abs/58psia, suitable for DN250 PN16/10K 250
YYY Special version
020 Sensor Connection:

A Thread ISO228 G3/4
B Thread ISO228 G1
C Thread ISO228 G1-1/2
D Thread ISO228 G2
E Thread ANSI NPT3/4
F Thread ANSI NPT1
G Thread ANSI NPT1-1/2
H Thread ANSI NPT2
Y Special version
The filled in options result in the complete order code.
015 020
FAX50 -
Endress+Hauser 59
9.4 Cantilever
20
C
20
100
50
35
25
D M8
75 75 100 B 35
50/
62
22
C
105
6.5
15
L00-FMU4xxxx-06-00-00-yy-005
Dimensions in mm
A B C D for Sensor Material Order Code
585 (23) 250 (9.84) 2 (0.08) 200 (7.87) 1½" 316Ti (1.4571) 52014132
galv. steel 52014131

2" 316Ti (1.4571) 52014136
1085 (42.7) 750 (29.5) 3 (0.12) 300 (11.8) 1½" 316Ti (1.4571) 52014134
2" 316Ti (1.4571) 52014138

mm (in)
• The 50 mm (2.17 in) or 62 mm (2.44 in) orifices serve for the mounting of the FMU40 or FMU41
sensor, respecitvely.
• The 22 mm (0.87 in) orifice may be used for an additional sensor.
For the mounting of the cantilever can be used:
• mounting frame  ä 61
• wall bracket  ä 61
60 Endress+Hauser
9.5 Mounting Frame
3.2 (0.13)
60 (2.36)
ø33.7(1.3)
20 (0.8) 4 (0.16)
(27.6 / 55.1)
700/1400
13 (0.5)
100 (3.9)
(2.99)
76
45 (1.77)
200 (7.87)
6.5 (0.3)
(3.94)
100
55 (0.98)
25
(2.17)
100
130 (5.12) (3.94)
150 (5.91)
mm (in)
L00-FMUxx-00-00-00-xx-005
Height Material Order Code

700 (27.6) galv. steel 919791-0000
700 (27.6) 316Ti (1.4571) 919791-0001
1400 (55.1) galv. steel 919791-0002
1400 (55.1) 316Ti (1.4571) 919791-0003
mm (in)
9.6 Wall Bracket
3.2
5 ø 33.7
6.5
180
213
150
110
25
13
88 110
150
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-yy-006
Dimensions in mm
Material Order Code
galv. steel 919792-0000
316Ti (1.4571) 919792-0001
Endress+Hauser 61
9.7 Mounting bracket for FMU42, FMU43, FMU44
25
119 (4.68) (0.98)
~123 (4.8)
120 (4.7)
2 (0.079)
40 (1.6) 40 (1.6)
25
(0.98)
11 (0.43)
L00-FMU4x-00-00-00-xx-003
9.8 Commubox FXA195 HART

For intrinsically safe communication with FieldCare via the USB interface.
For details refer to TI00404F/00/EN.
9.9 Commubox FXA291

The Commubox FXA291 connects Endress+Hauser field instruments with CDI interface
(= Endress+Hauser Common Data Interface) to the USB interface of a personal computer or a
notebook. For details refer to TI00405C/07/EN.
! Note!
For the instrument you need the "ToF Adapter FXA291" as an additional accessory.
9.10 ToF Adapter FXA291

The ToF Adapter FXA291 connects the Commubox FXA291 via the USB interface of a personal
computer or a notebook for the instrument. For details refer to KA00271F/00/A2.
62 Endress+Hauser
9.11 Remote display FHX40
Wall-mounting Pipe-mounting
(without mounting bracket) (mounting bracket and plate
supplied optionally,
s. product structure)
(0 8,5
1)
3)
5.9
.3
0( Separate housing
15 FHX40 (IP 65)
180 (7.09)
160 (6.3)
Micropilot M 122
Levelflex M (4.8)
Prosonic M
(3 8 0
.51
EN
DR
)
Orde ES
r S+
Se Code
r.-N HA
o.: : US
ER
Me
Messbere
asu ich
ring
U 16
ran
ge
ma
Cable 88
4...20...36 x. 20
Maulburg
m
mAV DC
T
IP
65
120 (4.72) 118 (4.65)
Made in Germany
A >7
0°C
: t
>85
82 (3.23)
°C
6
(0 ,3 96 (3.78)
.25
) max. 80 (3.15)
min. 30 (1.18)
106 (4.71)
122 (4.8)
pipe
mm (in)
L00-FMxxxxxx-00-00-06-de-003
9.11.1 Technical data (cable and housing) and product structure
Max. cable length 20 m (65 ft)
Temperature range -40 °C to +60 °C (-40 °F to 140 °F)

Degree of protection IP65/67 (housing); IP68 (cable) acc. to IEC 60529
Dimensions [mm] / [inch] 122x150x80 (HxWxD) / 4.8x5.9x3.2
Endress+Hauser 63
010 Approval:
A Non-hazardous area
2 ATEX II 2G Ex ia IIC T6
3 ATEX II 2D Ex ia IIIC T80°C
G IECEx Zone1 Ex ia IIC T6/T5
S FM IS Cl. I Div.1 Gr. A-D, zone 0
U CSA IS Cl. I Div.1 Gr. A-D, zone 0
K TIIS Ex ia IIC T6
C NEPSI Ex ia IIC T6/T5
Y Special version, TSP-Nr. to be spec.
020 Cable:
1 20m / 65ft: for HART
5 20m / 65ft: for PROFIBUS PA/FOUNDATION Fieldbus
9 Special version, TSP-Nr. to be spec.
030 Additional option:

A Basic version
B Mounting bracket, pipe 1"/ 2"
Y Special version, TSP-Nr. to be spec.
995 Marking:
1 Tagging (TAG)
FHX40 - Complete product designation
For connection of the remote display FHX40 use the cable which fits the communication version of
the respective instrument.
64 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Technical Data
10 Technical Data
10.1 Technical data at a glance
10.1.1 Input
Measured variable The distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface is measured.
Using the linearisation function, the device uses D to calculate:
• level L in any units
• volume V in any units
• flow Q across measuring weirs or open channels in any units
Maximum range/blocking Sensor Maximum range in liquids1 Maximum range in solids1 blocking distance
distance
FMU40 5 m (16 ft) 2 m (6.6 ft) 0.25 m (0.8 ft)
FMU41 8 m (26 ft) 3.5 m (11 ft) 0.35 m (1.1 ft)
FMU42 10 m (33 ft) 5 m (16 ft) 0.4 m (1.3 ft)
FMU43 15 m (49 ft) 7 m (23 ft) 0.6 m (2.0 ft)
FMU44 20 m (66 ft) 10 m (33 ft) 0.5 m (1.6 ft)
1
The actual range is dependent on the measuring conditions. Refer to Technical Information
TI00365F/00/EN for an estimation.
10.1.2 Output
Output signal 4 to 20 mA with HART protocol
Signal on alarm • Error symbol, error code and plain text description on the on-site display
• Error code via HART communication
• Current output (configurable)
10.1.3 Power supply
Terminals Cable cross-section: 0.5 to 2.5 mm (20 to 14 AWG)
Cable entry • Cable gland M20x1.5 (recommended cable diameter 6 to 10 mm (0.24 to 0.39 in)
• Cable entry G½ or ½ NPT
Supply voltage • Loop-powered HART: 14 to 36 V (depending on output current )

• Loop-powered fixed current: 10 to 36 V
• 4-wire DC: 10.5 to 32 VDC
• 4-wire AC: 90 to 253 VAC
There may be additional restrictions for devices with an explosion protection certificate. Refer to the
notes in the appropriate safety instructions (XA).
Endress+Hauser 65
Technical Data Prosonic M - HART
Power consumption Version Power consumption
2-wire 51 mW to 800 mW
4-wire AC max. 4VA
4-wire DC; FMU40/41 330 mW to 830 mW

4-wire DC; FMU42/43 600 mW to 1 W
Load HART Minimum load for HART communication: 250 
HART ripple 47 to 125 Hz: Vpp = 200 mV (measured at 500 )
Max. noise HART 500 Hz to 10 kHz: Vrms = 2.2 mV (measured at 500 )
Galvanic isolation With 4-wire devices, the evaluation electronics and mains voltage are galvanically isolated from
each other.
10.1.4 Performance characteristics
Reaction time The reaction time depends on the parameter settings. The minimum values are:
• 2-wire devices (FMU40/41/42): min. 2 s
• 2-wire devices (FMU44): min. 3 s
• 4-wire devices (FMU40/41/42/43/44): 0.5 s
Reference operating • Temperature = +20 °C (+68 °F)

conditions • Pressure = 1013 mbar abs. (15 psi abs.)
• Humidity = 50 %
• Ideal reflective surface (e.g. calm, smooth fluid surface)
• No interference reflections within signal beam
• Set application parameters:
– Tank shape = flat ceiling
– Medium property = liquid
– process conditions = calm surface
Measured value resolution Sensor Measured value resolution
FMU40 1 mm (0.04 in)
FMU41 1 mm (0.04 in)

FMU42 2 mm (0.08 in)
FMU43 2 mm (0.08 in)
FMU44 2 mm (0.08 in)
66 Endress+Hauser
Measuring error Typical specifications for reference operating conditions (include linearity, repeatability, and
hysteresis):
Sensor Measuring error
FMU40 ±2mm (0.08 in) or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1
FMU41 ± 2 mm (0.08 in) or 0.2% of set measuring distance (empty calibration)1
1whichever is greater
Influence of the vapor pressure The vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) gives a hint on the accuracy of the ultrasonic level
measurement. If the vapor pressure at 20 °C (68 °F) is below 50 mbar (1 psi), ultrasonic level
measurement is possible with a very high accuracy. This is valid for water, aqueous solutions, water-
solid-solutions, dilute acids (hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, ...), dilute bases (caustic soda, ...), oils,
greases, slurries, pastes, ...
High vapor pressures or outgassing media (ethanol, acetone, ammonia, ...) can influence the
accuracy. If conditions like these are present, please contact the Endress+Hauser support.
10.1.5 Operating conditions: Environment
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +80 °C (-40 °F to +176 °F)

The functionality of the LC display becomes restricted at Tu<-20 °C (Tu<-4 °F) and Tu>+60 °C
(Tu>+140 °F).
If the device is operated outdoors in strong sunlight, you should use a protective cover.
Storage temperature -40 °C to +80 °C (-40 °F to +176 °F)
Climate class DIN EN 60068-2-38 (Test Z/AD) DIN/IEC 68 T2-30Db
Ingress protection • With closed housing, tested according to

– IP 68, NEMA 6P (24h at 1.83 m (6 ft) under water surface)
– IP 66, NEMA 4x
• With open housing: IP 20, NEMA 1 (also ingress protection of the display)
Vibration resistance DIN EN 60068-2-64 / IEC 68-2-64: 20 to 2000 Hz, 1 (m/s)2/Hz; 3 x 100 min
Electromagnetic compatibility • Electromagnetic compatibility according to all relevant requirements of the EN 61326- series and
(EMC) NAMUR recommendation EMC (NE21). For details see declaration of conformity.
• A standard installation cable is sufficient if only the analogue signal is used. Use a screened cable
when working with a superimposed communication signal (HART).
Endress+Hauser 67
Technical Data Prosonic M - HART
10.1.6 Operating conditions: Process
Process temperature -40°C to +80°C (-40 °F to +176 °F)

A temperature sensor is integrated in the sensor for correction of the temperature-dependent time-
of-flight.
Process pressure • FMU40/41: 0.7 bar to 3bar abs. (10.15 psi to 43.5 psi abs.)
• FMU42/43/44: 0.7 bar to 2.5bar abs. (10.15 psi to 36.25 psi abs.)
68 Endress+Hauser
Endress+Hauser 69
Appendix Prosonic M - HART
11 Appendix
11.1 Operating menu
basic setup 00 tank shape 002 medium property 003 process cond. 004 empty calibr. 005 full calibr. 006
dome ceiling liquid standard liquid distance membrane span
horizontal cyl. solid < 4mm calm surface to min. level max.: empty - BD
bypass solid > 4mm turb. surface Default: Default:
stilling well unknown add. agitator FMU40: 5 m FMU40: 4,75 m
flat ceiling fast change FMU41: 8 m FMU41: 7,6 m
sphere standard solid FMU42: 10 m FMU42: 9,6 m
no ceiling solid dusty FMU43: 15 m FMU43: 14,4 m
conveyor belt FMU44: 20 m FMU44: 19,5 m
test: no filter
safety settings 01 output on alarm 010 outp. echo loss 012 delay time 014
MAX 110% 22 mA hold in case of echo loss
hold alarm max. 4000 sec.
MIN - 10% 3,6 mA Default: 60 s
userspecific output on alarm 011 ramp %/min Rampe %span/min 013
specify value specify value
temperature 03 measured temp. 030 max. temp. limit 031 max. meas. temp. 032 react. high temp 033 defect temp. sens. 034
is displayed is displayed is displayed warning alarm
alarm warning
linearisation 04 level/ullage 040 linearisation 041

level CU 040 clear table customer unit 042 linearisation next point 045
ullage CU table on TabNo 043 yes
manual Level 044
semi-automatic volum 045 no
horizontal cyl. customer unit 042
linear customer unit 042
level DU 040
ullage DU
extended calibr. 05 selction 050 dist./meas. value 008 check distance 051 range of mapping. 052 start mapping 053
mapping the following are manual accept proposed value off
displayed: distance = ok or on
- distance membrane distance too small specify range of
to level mapping
- measured value
dist. unknown
distance too big
common
extended map.
pres. map dist. 054 cust. tank map 055
is displayed inactive
active
reset
output 06 commun. address 060 no. of preambles 061 low output limit 062 curr. output mode 063 4 mA value 068
on curr. turn down specify value
off fixed current
standard
envelope curve 0E plot settings 0E1 recording curve 0E2

envelope curve single curve
env. curve + FAC cyclic
env. curve + cust. map
display 09 language 092 back to home 093 format display 094 no. of decimalas 095
specify time decimal x
Default: 100 s 1/16” x.x
x.xx
x.xxx
diagnostics 0A present error 0A0 previous error 0A1 clear last error 0A2 reset 0A3 unlock parameter 0A4
keep for reset code for unlock code
erase see manual see manual
system parameters 0C tag no. 0C0 protocol + sw-no. 0C2 serial no. 0C4
Note! The Default values of the parameters are typed in bold face.
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-01-en-005
70 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Appendix
dist./meas. value 008 check distance 051 range of mapping. 052 start mapping 053 dist./meas. value 008
the following are manual accept proposed value off the following are
displayed: distance = ok or on displayed:
- distance membrane distance too small specify range of - distance membrane
to level mapping to level
- measured value - measured value
dist. unknown
distance too big
safety distance 015 in safety dist. 016 ackn. alarm 017

from blocking distance warning no
Default: 0,1m self holding yes
alarm
max. scale 046 diameter vessel 047
Return to Group selection

max. scale 046
dist./meas. value 008

the following are
displayed:
- distance membrane
to level
- measured value
echo quality 056 offset 057 output damping 058 blocking dist. 059
is displayed will be added to the Default: 2 s is displayed
measured level
20 mA value 069 simulation 065 output current 067

specify value
sim. off
fixed cur. value 064
sim. level simulation value 066
sim. volume
sim. current
sep. character 096 display test 097

. period off
, comma on
measured dist. 0A5 measured level 0A6 detection window 0A7 application par. 0A8
off not modified
on modified
reset
distance unit 0C5 temperature unit 0C6 download mode 0C8

parameter only
param. + cust. map
mapping only
L00-FMU4xxxx-19-00-02-en-005
Endress+Hauser 71
Appendix Prosonic M - HART
11.2 Measuring principle
BD 20 mA
100%
E
F
4 mA
0%
L00-FMU4x-15-00-00-xx-001
E: Empty distance; F: Span (full distance); D: Distance from sensor membrane - product surface; L: Level; BD: Blocking
distance
Sensor BD Max. range fluids Max. range bulk materials
FMU40 0.25 m (0.8 ft) 5 m (16 ft) 2 m (6.6 ft)
FMU41 0.35 m (1.1 ft) 8 m (26 ft) 3.5 m (11 ft)

FMU42 0.4 m (1.3 ft) 10 m (33 ft) 5 m (16 ft)
FMU43 0.6 m (2.0 ft) 15 m (49 ft) 7 m (23 ft)
FMU44 0.5 m (1.6 ft) 20 m (66 ft) 10 m (33 ft)
11.2.1 Time-of-flight method

The sensor of the Prosonic M transmits ultrasonic pulses in the direction of the product surface.
There, they are reflected back and received by the sensor. The Prosonic M measures the time t
between pulse transmission and reception. The instrument uses the time t (and the velocity of sound
c) to calculate the distance D between the sensor membrane and the product surface:
D = c  t/2
As the device knows the empty distance E from a user entry, it can calculate the level as follows:
L=E-D
An integrated temperature sensor compensates for changes in the velocity of sound caused by
temperature changes.
11.2.2 Interference echo suppression

The interference echo suppression feature on the Prosonic M ensures that interference echos (e.g.
from edges, welded joints and installations) are not interpreted as a level echo.
11.2.3 Calibration
Enter the empty distance E and the span F to calibrate the device.
72 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Appendix
11.2.4 Blocking distance

Span F may not extend into the blocking distance BD. Level echos within the blocking distance
cannot be evaluated due to the transient characteristics of the sensor.
Endress+Hauser 73
Prosonic M - HART Index
Index
A R
alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
application errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 repairs to Ex-approved devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
return. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
B
blocking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 45 S
Service Interface FXA291 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
C shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
cantilever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 software security locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Commubox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 T
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 turn housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
D W
declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
display appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 weather protection cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
display symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
E
error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
F
FHX40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Field Xpert SFX100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
flow measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
full calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
H
hardware security locking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
hazardous area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
I
installation bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
interference echo suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
K
key assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Khafagi-Venturi flume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
L
level measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
M
measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
N
nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
O
on-site display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
P
process conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
74 Endress+Hauser
Prosonic M - HART Index
Endress+Hauser 75
www.endress.com/worldwide
BA00237F/00/EN/13.12
71164384
FM+SGML 9.0
71164384
CARPETA DE CALIDAD
CENTRO DE COSTO 36157
PROVEEDOR SMC CHILE S.A.
O/C PROVEEDOR 138192
PROJECT MANAGER
EQUIPOS Y PROYECTO Actuador Con Posicionador
INSPECTOR FLSMIDTH Patricio Briones
CARPETA 1 DE 1
PURCHASE ORDER
REVISED PROTOCOLS MANUFACTURING
CS1 SERIES MANUAL
Air Cylinder
Series CS1
ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300
Series Variations CJ1

Standard variations Bore size
Basic Page
Series Action Type
With Copper- (mm) CJP
rod boot free
CJ2
Standard 125
Lube
Series CS1 140 CM2
160
180
Single rod 200 CG1
250
Series Non-lube 6-9-2
CS1 (ø125 to ø160 only)
300 MB
125 MB1
Air-hydro 140
Double acting
Series CS1 160 CA2
125 CS1
Lube 140
160 C76
180
Double rod 200
250 C85
Series Non-lube 6-9-21
300
CS1W
Series CS1W C95
125
Air-hydro 140 CP95
160
NCM
Low Friction NCA
Series CS1Q
D-
Double acting
Single rod 125

Series Non-lube 140 6-9-31 -X
CS1Q 160
20-
Data
6-9-1
Air Cylinder: Standard Type
Dobule Acting, Single Rod
Series CS1
Lube, Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160
How to Order
CS1 L 160 300 JR

Mounting style Suffix for cylinder
B Basic style Rod J Nylon tarpaulin
Foot style boot K Heat resistant tarpaulin
L
F Rod side flange style N Without cushion
G Head side flange style R With cushion in rod side
Cushion
C Single clevis style H With cushion in head side
D Double clevis style With cushion in both sides
Nil (Air-hydro type has no
T Center trunnion style
cushion.)
∗ If specifying more than one symbol,
Tubing material indicate them in alphabetically
Symbol Bore size (mm) Tubing material ∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol
125 to 160 Aluminum tube indicates no cushion.
Nil
180 to 300 Steel tube
F 125 to 160 Steel tube
Cylinder stroke (mm)
(Refer to “Maximum Stroke ” on page 6-9-3.)
Type
Nil Lube Bore size
N Non-lube
Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
H Air-hydro
125 125 mm 125 125 mm
140 140 mm 140 140 mm
160 160 mm 160 160 mm
180 180 mm
200 200 mm
250 250 mm
300 300 mm
Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300 For “How to Order” with auto switch, refer to
Foot style∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 CS1-L18 CS1-L20 CS1-L25 CS1-L30 page 6-9-7.
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20 CS1-F25 CS1-F30
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16 CS1-C18 CS1-C20 CS1-C25 CS1-C30
Double clevis style∗∗ CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 CS1-D18 CS1-D20 CS1-D25 CS1-D30
∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
∗∗ When ordering the double clevis, the clevis pin and the cotter pin (2 pcs.) are attached.
6-9-2
Dobule Acting, Single Rod Series CS1
Specifications
Type Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro
Fluid Air Turbine oil
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa Note)
Maximum operating pressure 0.97 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 0.5 to 200 mm/s
Cushion Interchangeable None
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 70°C (No freezing), Air-hydro type: 5 to 60°C CJ1
Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
250 or less st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1,000 st: +1.4
0 , 1,001 to 1,500 st: +1.8
0
CJP
Stroke length tolerance (mm)
1501 to 2000 st
: +2.2
0 , 2001 to 2400 st
: +2.6
0
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style,

CJ2
Mounting Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style CM2
Note) Item corresponding to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act is 1.46 MPa.
CG1
Accessory MB
Rod side Head side Single Double Center
Basic Foot
Mounting
style style
flange flange clevis clevis trunnion MB1
style style style style style
Standard
equipment Clevis pin, Cotter pin — — — — — — CA2
Rod end nut
Single knuckle joint CS1
Option Double knuckle joint

(Clevis pin, Cotter pin) C76
Rod boot
In the case of using the rod end nut together with the single knuckle joint or double knuckle joint,
C85
refer to page 6-9-19.
C95
JIS Symbol
Maximum Stroke (mm)
CP95
Double acting
Tubing material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel tube
NCM
Mounting Basic style
bracket Basic style, Head side flange style Head side flange style
Single clevis style, Double clevis style Single clevis style Foot style NCA
Center trunnion style, Foot style Double clevis style Rod side flange style
Bore size Rod side flange style
Made to Order Specifications (mm) Center trunnion style D-
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) 125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
140 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
-X
Symbol Specifications
-XA Change of rod end shape 20-
-XB5 Oversized rod cylinder 180 — 1200 or less 2000 or less
-XC3 Special port location 200 — 1200 or less 2000 or less Data
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper 250 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C) 300 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Class 2 Pressure Vessel Rod Boot Material
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type In the case of exceeding the following strokes, the Maximum ambient
Symbol Material temperature
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position cylinder is subject to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act.
-XC15
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
Change of tie-rod length
Bore size (mm) Cylinder stroke (mm)
-XC18 NPT finish piping port K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
180 1,569
-XC27 Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made ∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod
of stainless steel 200 998 boot itself.
-XC30 Front trunnion 250 813
-XC35 With coil scraper 300 564
6-9-3
Series CS1
Principal Parts Material and Surface Treatment
Cover
Description Material
Rolled steel plate
Note
Black painted
Precautions
Aluminum alloy Hard anodized Be sure to read before handling.
ø125, ø140, ø160 For Safety Instructions and
Tube Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated
Actuator Precautions, refer to
ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated pages 6-20-3 to 6-20-6.
Lube NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring
Sliding part Non-lube NBR PNY, NLP
Warning
seal
Air-hydro NBR SKY, RPS
Do not use the cylinder as a shock
absorber.
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
• Using the cylinder as a shock absorber
Lube Cast iron may cause damage.
Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
Non-lube
Piston (Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
Caution
Air-hydro Do not open the cushion valve
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
excessively.
• If the cushion valve is rotated excessively
Weight/Aluminum Tube: Lube (Non-lube, Air-hydro) (kg) in the opening direction could be damaged
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160
because the portion of the threads that is
engaged (counterclockwise), be aware that
14.85 17.98 24.77 the valve could slip out, or the threads
Basic style
(13.73) (16.57) (23.03) becomes too short.
16.48 20.50 27.57
Foot style Regarding the installation of a
(15.36) (19.09) (25.83)
knuckle joint
17.53 22.98 31.16 • Please contact SMC if a knuckle joint must
Rod side flange style
(16.41) (21.57) (29.42) be installed on the piston rod by using the
17.53 22.98 31.16 rod end nut.
Basic Head side flange style
weight (16.41) (21.57) (29.42)
17.92 22.27 30.26
Single clevis style
(16.80) (20.86) (28.52)
Double clevis style 18.38 23.02 31.11
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin) (17.26) (21.61) (29.37)
18.98 23.71 32.17
Trunnion style
(17.86) (22.30) (30.43)
Additional weight per
1.77 1.96 2.39
each 100 mm of stroke
Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56
Accessory Double knuckle 1.37 1.81 2.48

bracket (Knuckie pin, Cotter pin)
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23
∗ ( ): Denotes the non-lube and air-hydro type.
Calculation example: CS1L160-500

• Basic weight·················27.57 (Foot style, ø160)
• Additional weight··········2.39/100 stroke
• Cylinder stroke·············500 stroke
27.57 + 2.39 x 500/100 = 39.52 kg
Weight/Steel Tube (kg)

Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
Basic style 15.20 18.38 25.24 34.16 42.66 79.78 115.94
Foot style 16.83 20.90 28.04 38.36 47.54 89.28 133.22
Rod side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 43.99 54.57 101.62 146.14
Standard Head side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 43.99 54.57 101.62 146.14
weight Single clevis style 18.27 22.67 30.73 42.55 52.56 98.17 149.22
Double clevis 18.73 23.42 31.58 44.23 54.59 101.36 154.96
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin)
Trunnion style 19.33 24.11 32.64 44.78 56.65 107.62 156.37

Additional weight per
each 100 mm of stroke 2.66 3.01 3.58 4.95 5.75 9.08 12.15
Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90 5.38 10.82
Accessory Double knuckle
bracket (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin)
1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 9.22 17.17
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85 1.26 1.43
6-9-4
Dobule Acting, Single Rod Series CS1
Construction
Lube
CJ1
CJP
Non-lube
CJ2
CM2
CG1
MB
In the case of aluminum tube
MB1
Air-hydro
CA2
CS1
C76
C85
C95
In the case of aluminum tube
CP95
Component Parts Seal List NCM
No. Description Material Note Part no.
No. Description Material
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 ø250 ø300 NCA
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted Lube
ø125 to ø160 Aluminum alloy Hard anodized @3 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 SDR-60 SDR-70 D-
e Cylinder
tube ø125 to ø300 Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated ∗∗ PCS-85 (R)
@4 Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S DSM-75S
r Piston Cast iron∗∗ DSM-75S (H) -X
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @5 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A P60 P70
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @6 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 P165 P185 P235 P285 20-
NBR
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @7 Valve seal P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
i Valve guide Brass @8 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 CS160-1618-G4 CS160-1618-G5 Data
∗∗
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated @9 Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35 G45 G45
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated #0 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65 G80 G90
∗∗
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #1 Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except @5 and @6 are the same as for the lube-type.
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated @5 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50 PNY-60 PNY-70
NBR
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated @6 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A NLP-250A NLP-300A
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except @5 and @6 are the same as for the lube-type. (Except cushion seal)
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated Part no.
!7 Spacer A Rolled steel Zinc chromated ø125 ø140 ø160
!8 Spacer B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @5 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
NBR
!9 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @6 Piston seal RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
@0 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel
@1 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
@2 Tie-rod reinforcement ring∗ Rolled steel Black painted • For replacement parts no. (seal kit) for air cylinder standard type Series
CS1, refer to page 6-9-6.
#2 Wear ring Resin
∗∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket
∗ In the case of long strokes because those are not replaceable parts.
∗∗ Aluminum tubing material of non-lube and air-hydro type
is material is an aluminum alloy casted.
6-9-5
Series CS1
Standard/Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits) Standard (Lube)
for standard style Series CS1 air cylinders,
Bore size 23 25 26 27 28 30
indicate the order number listed in the table on Kit no. Retaining plate
the right. (mm) Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket gasket
Each set of replacement parts contains the 125 CS1-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55
following: Wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal,
valve seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket 140 CS1-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
(for 1 cylinder). 160 CS1-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
180 CS1-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 P165 P7 C175 G65
200 CS1-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A P185 P7 C195 G65
250 CS1-250A-PS SDR-60 P60 P235 P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1-300A-PS SDR-70 P70 P285 P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90
Standard (Non-lube)
Bore size 23 25 26 27 28 30
Kit no. Retaining plate
(mm) Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket gasket
125 CS1N125A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
250 CS1N250A-PS SDR-60 PNY-60 NLP-250A P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1N300A-PS SDR-70 PNY-70 NLP-300A P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90
Air-hydro
Retaining plate
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket gasket
125 CS1H125A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-125 P7 C120 G55
Low Friction
23 25 26 27 28 30
Bore size
(mm)
Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining
gasket
plate
125 CS1Q125A-PS SFR-36K PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55

6-9-6
Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch
Double Acting, Single Rod
Series CDS1
ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200
How to Order CJ1
CDS1 L 160 300 JR Y7BW CJP

Number of auto switches CJ2
Built-in magnet Nil 2 pcs.
3 3 pcs.
Mounting style S 1 pc.
CM2
B Basic style n “n” pcs.
Type
L Foot style
Nil Lube
CG1
F Rod side flange style Auto switch
N Non-lube
G Head side flange style
H Air-hydro
Nil Without auto switch MB
C Single clevis style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer
D Double clevis style to the table below.
Bore size ∗ D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7 types are MB1
Lube, Non-lube Air-hydro shipped together, (but not assembled).
125 125 mm 125 125 mm (But, only the mounting bracket for the
above models is assembled at the time of
CA2
140 140 mm 140 140 mm
shipment.)
160 160 mm 160 160 mm CS1
180 180 mm Suffix for cylinder
200 200 mm J Nylon tarpaulin
Cylinder stroke Rod boot
K Heat resistant tarpaulin C76
(Refer to “Minimum/Maximum Stroke” on page 6-9-8.) N Without cushion
R With cushon in rod side C85
H With cushon in head side
Built-in Magnet Cylinder Model Cushion
With cushion in both sides
If a built-in magnet cylinder without auto switch is Nil (Air-hydro type has no cushion.)
C95
required, there is no need to enter the symbol for
∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate them
auto switch. Example) CDS1B125-200 alphabetically. CP95
∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol indicates no
cushion. NCM
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches.
Auto switch model Lead wire length (m) ∗
Indicator light
Load voltage
Electrical Wiring NCA
Type Special function
entry (Output) Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load
DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire
D-
IC
(NPN equivalent) — 5V — Z76 — — — —
circuit
Grommet
-X
Reed switch
100 V Z73 — — Relay,

— 100 V, 200 V A54 — — PLC
20-
Yes
Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

conduit 2-wire 24 V — A34 — — — — —
100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay, Data
Diagnostic indication PLC
Grommet — — A59W — — —
(2-color indication)
3-wire (NPN) Y59A — IC
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
3-wire (PNP) Y7P — circuit
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 — —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —
Solid state switch
Terminal 3-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V — G39 — — — — IC circuit

conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — —
Relay,
Yes
3-wire (NPN) Y7NW — IC

Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V PLC
3-wire (PNP) 24 V — Y7PW — circuit
Y7BW —
Water resistant Grommet 2-wire 12 V —
Y7BA — —
With diagnostic output 4-wire IC
(NPN)
5 V, 12 V F59F —
(2-color indication) circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m··········Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m·········· Z (Example) A54Z
• Since there are other applicable auto switches than listed, refer to page 6-9-20 for details.
• For details about auto switches with pre-wire connector, refer to page 6-16-60.
6-9-7
Series CDS1
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 125, 140, 160 180, 200 125, 140, 160
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa 1.2 MPa 1.57 MPa
Maximum operating pressure 0.97 MPa 0.7 MPa 0.97 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60°C (No freezing), Air-hydro type: 5 to 60°C
Stroke length tolerance (mm) 250 or less st: +1.0
0 , 251 to 1,000 st: +1.4
0 , 1,001 to 1,500 st: +1.8
0
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style,
Mounting
Single clevis style, Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
JIS Symbol Maximum Stroke

Double acting Maximum stroke
Bore size
(mm) Basic style, Head side flange style, Single clevis style,
Foot style, Rod side flange style
Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
125, 140 1000 or less 1400 or less
160 1200 or less 1400 or less
Made to Order Specifications
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.)
ø200: Cylinders of the stroke range of 998 ø200: Cylinders of the stroke range of
Symbol Specifications Note
to 1200 are special products. 998 to 1500 are special products.
-XA Change of rod end shape
-XB5 Oversized rod cylinder Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting n: Quantity
-XC3 Special port location Center trunnion
Auto switch No. of auto Mounting brackets
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper switches mounted other than center trunnion ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C) D-A5/A6 2 (Different sides,
D-A59W 25 125 135 135 150 150
Same side), 1
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel D-F5/J5 (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-F5W/J59W 25 + 55 2 125 + 55 2 135 + 55 150 + 55 2
-XC8 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable extension type D-F5BAL/F59F n (Same side) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2
n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
-XC9 Adjustable stroke cylinder/Adjustable retraction type 2 (Different sides,
35 145 155 170
-XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod type Same side), 1
D-F5NTL (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
-XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod type n (Same side) 35 + 55 2 145 + 55 2 155 + 55 2 170 + 55 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
-XC14 Change of trunnio bracket mounting position
Different sides 35 110 150
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length 2
D-A3 Same side 100 110 150
-XC18 NPT finish piping port D-G39 Different sides 35 + 30 (n – 2) 110 + 30 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· 150 + 100 (n – 2)
n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
Double clevis pin and double knuckle pin made D-K39 n
-XC27 Same side 100 + 100 (n – 2) 110 + 100 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· 150 + 30 (n – 2)
of stainless steel n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
1 15 110 150
-XC30 Front trunnion
Different sides 35 110 150
-XC35 With coil scraper 2
Same side 55 110 150
150 + 30 (n – 2)
D-A44 Different sides 35 + 30 (n – 2) 110 + 30 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
n
150 + 50 (n – 2)
Same side 55 + 55 (n – 2) 110 + 50 (n – 2) n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 2, 4, 6, 8···
1 15 110 150
2 (Different sides,
D-Z7/Z80 Same side), 1
15 105 110 115
D-Y59/Y7P (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
D-Y7W n 15 + 40 2 105 + 40 2 110 + 40 2 115 + 40 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2 (Different sides,
10 90 95 100
D-Y69/Y7PV Same side), 1
D-Y7WV 10 + 30
(n – 2)
90 + 30
(n – 4)
95 + 30
(n – 4)
100 + 30 2
(n – 4)
n 2 2 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
2 (Different sides,
20 115 120 125 130
Same side), 1
D-Y7BAL (n – 2) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4) (n – 4)
n 20 + 45 2 115 + 45 2 120 + 45 125 + 45
2 2 130 + 45 2
n = 2, 4, 6, 8··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16··· n = 4, 8, 12, 16···
6-9-8
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CDS1
Description Material Note
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted
ø125, ø140, ø160
Tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized
ø180, ø200
Lube type NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring ∗
Sliding
part seal Non-lube type NBR PNY, NLP
Air-hydro type NBR SKY, RPS
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated CJ1
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated
∗ Foot style, Rod side flange style: In the case of bore size of ø125 and ø140, the stoke CJP
range is 1001 to 1400.
In the case of ø160, piston seals of the stroke range 1200 to 1400 are NLP.
∗ In the case of bore size ø180 and ø200, piston seals are NLP.
CJ2
CM2
Weight (kg)
CG1
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200
Basic style 13.79 16.64 23.11 27.55 36.11 MB
Foot style 15.42 19.16 25.91 31.75 40.99
Basic Rod side flange style 16.47 21.64 29.50 37.38 48.02 MB1
weight Head side flange style 16.47 21.64 29.50 37.38 48.02
Single clevis style 16.86 20.93 28.60 35.94 46.01
CA2
Double clevis
17.32 21.68 29.45 37.62 48.04
(Clevis pin, Cotter pin)
CS1
Trunnion style 17.92 22.37 30.51 38.71 50.10
Additional weight per each 100 mm of stroke 1.77 1.96 2.39 2.85 3.42 C76
Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90
Accessory
bracket
Double knuckle
(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 C85
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85
C95
CP95
NCM
Weight (kg)
Type of Auto switch Lead wire Auto switch Switch + Switch mounting bracket NCA
auto switch model length unit ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200
D-A5/A6 0.5 m 0.024 0.038 0.038 0.041 0.045 0.048 D-
D-A59W 3m 0.080 0.094 0.094 0.097 0.101 0.104
D-A3 — 0.116 0.156 0.160 0.165 0.168 0.173 -X
D-A44 — 0.114 0.154 0.158 0.163 0.166 0.171
Reed
2-wire 0.009 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.043 0.049
20-
switch
0.5 m
3-wire 0.010 0.037 0.037 0.039 0.044 0.050
D-Z7/Z80 Data
2-wire 0.049 0.076 0.076 0.078 0.083 0.089
3m
3-wire 0.055 0.082 0.082 0.084 0.089 0.095
0.5 m 0.023 0.037 0.037 0.042 0.046 0.049
D-F5/J5
3m 0.081 0.095 0.095 0.098 0.102 0.105
D-G39/K39 — 0.116 0.156 0.160 0.165 0.168 0.173
2-wire 0.009 0.036 0.036 0.038 0.043 0.049
0.5 m
D-Y59/Y69 3-wire 0.010 0.037 0.037 0.039 0.044 0.050
Solid state
D-Y7P/Y7PV 2-wire 0.050 0.077 0.077 0.079 0.084 0.090
3m
switch 3-wire 0.053 0.080 0.080 0.082 0.087 0.093
2-wire 0.011
0.5 m 0.038 0.038 0.040 0.045 0.051
D-Y7W 3-wire 0.011
D-Y7WV 2-wire 0.054
3m
3-wire 0.054 0.081 0.081 0.083 0.088 0.094
D-Y7BAL 3m 2-wire 0.054
6-9-9
Series CDS1
Mounting Bracket Part No.
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200
Foot style ∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 CS1-L18 CS1-L20
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16 CS1-C18 CS1-C20
Double clevis style ∗∗ CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 CS1-D18 CS1-D20
∗∗ When ordering the double clevis, the clevis pin and the cotter pin (2 pcs.) are attached.
Auto Switch Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
160 125180 140
200
D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16 BT-18A BT-20
D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160 BS1-180 BS1-200
D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160 BS4-180 BS4-200
D-Y7BAL
∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment.
(Please order the mounting band separately, since it is not included.)
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5
“D-F5BAL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.
With Auto Switch/Replacement Parts (Seal kit)

When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits) Lube (1)
for Series CDS1 cylinder with auto switches,
Bore size (mm) Kit no. Wiper ring Rod seal Piston seal Valve seal Tube gasket Retaining plate gasket
indicate the order number listed in the table on
the right. 125 CS1-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55
Each set of replacement parts contains the 140 CS1-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
following: wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal, valve 160 CS1-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket (for 1
180 CDS1-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
cylinder).
200 CDS1-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A NLP-200A P7 C195 G65
Non-lube
Lube (2)∗
125 CDS1L125A-PS SDR-36 P36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
∗ Foot style, Rod side flange style: ø125, ø140—1001 to 1400 stroke, ø160—1201 to 1400 stroke
Air-hydro
6-9-10
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CDS1
Construction
Lube
(1) Foot style: Rod side flange style

CJ1
In the case of ø150 to ø140
1001 to 1400 st CJP
In the case of ø160
1201 to 1400 st
Non-lube (2) In the case of ø180, ø200 CJ2
(1), (2): Non-lube type is used.
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160 only
CS1
C76
C85
C95
CP95
NCM
Component Parts Seal List NCA
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 D-
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted Lube (1) (For lube-type 2, refer to page 6-9-5.)
e Cylinder tube Aluminum alloy Hard anodized @8 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 -X
r Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated @9∗ Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated #0 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted #1 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 NLP-180A NLP-200A
20-
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted #2 Valve seal NBR P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
i Valve guide Brass #3 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 Data
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated #4∗ Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated #5 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #6∗ Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except #0 and #1 are the same as lube type.
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated #0 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated NBR
#1 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except #0 and #1 are the same as lube type.
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated
Part no.
!7 Spacer A Rolled steel Zinc chromated No. Description Material
ø125 ø140 ø160
!8 Spacer B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
#0 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
!9 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
#1 Piston seal
NBR
RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
@0 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel
@1 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
@2 Auto switch — • For replacement part no. (seal kits) of cylinder with auto switch Series CDS1,
@3 Set screw Chromium molybdenum steel Zinc chromated refer to page 6-9-10.
@4 Switch mounting bracket Aluminum alloy ∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket because
@5 Switch mounting screw Copper wire Nickel plated those are not replaceable parts.
@6 Magnet —
@7 Wear ring Resin
6-9-11
Series C S1
Basic Style: CS1B
Lube (CS1B), Non-lube type (CS1BN), Air-hydro type (CS1BH)
With rod boot

Width across flats KA
S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke
With auto switch: CDS1B
With rod boot
Width across flats KA ~

=
~
=
~
=
ZZ1 + l + Stroke S + Stroke

ZZ + Stroke
Bore size Stroke range∗

Type
(mm) (mm) A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P S
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106
3
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 35 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 35 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 41.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 51.5 M64 x 2 49 1 146
With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Type Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot
Type Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
S
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 110 235 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 258 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 235 258
Non-lube 140 110 235 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 258 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 235 258
Air-hydro 160 120 256.5 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 277.5 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 256.5 277.5
180 135 281 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 299 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 285 303
Lube 200 135 281 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 299 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 290 308
Non-lube 250 160 342.5 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 358.5 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 175 372.5 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 387.5 type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height,
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. refer to page 6-9-20.
∗∗∗Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
6-9-12
Air Cylinder Series C S1
Foot Style: CS1L
Lube (CS1L), Non-lube (CS1LN), Air-hydro (CS1LH)
Width across S + Stroke
With rod boot flats KA
CJ1
CJP
LS + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
Long stroke Width across S + Stroke
With rod boot flats KA CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
LS + Stroke
CS1
C76
With auto switch: CDS1L
Width across S + Stroke ~
= C85
flats KA
With rod boot C95
CP95
~
=
NCM
~
=
NCA
LS + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke D-
Type Bore size Stroke range∗ Long stroke

A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA LD LH LS LT LX LY MM N P RT
-X
(mm) (mm) range (mm)
Lube 125 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 85 188 8 100 157.5 M30 x 1.5 35 1/2 36 20-
Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 100 188 9 112 180.5 M30 x 1.5 35 1/2 36
Air-hydro160 Up to 1400 1401 to 1600 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 19 106 206 9 118 197 M36 x 1.5 39 3/4 45 Data
180 Up to 1800 1801 to 2000 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 24 125 231 10 132 227 M40 x 1.5 39 3/4 45
Lube 200 Up to 1800 1801 to 2000 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 24 132 231 10 150 245 M45 x 1.5 39 3/4 45
Non-lube 250 Up to 2000 2001 to 2400 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 29 160 301 12 180 298.5 M56 x 2 49 1 55
300 Up to 2000 2001 to 2400 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 33 200 326 15 212 365 M64 x 2 49 1 55
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type RY S X Y Type S LS
Lube 125 164 98 45 20 110 273 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 Lube 125 Up to 1400 98 188 273 296
Non-lube 140 184 98 45 30 110 283 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 98 188 283 306
Air-hydro160 204 106 50 25 120 301 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 322 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 106 206 301 322
180 228 111 60 30 135 336 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 Lube 180 Up to 1500 115 235 340 358
Lube 200 257 111 60 30 135 336 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 240 345 363
Non-lube 250 325 141 80 40 160 421 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 437 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as
300 390 146 90 40 175 451 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 standard type.
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page
6-9-8.
6-9-13
Series C S1
Rod Side Flange Style: CS1F
Lube (CS1F), Non-lube (CS1FN), Air-hydro (CS1FH)
Width across
flats KA
With rod boot
S + Stroke
Long stroke
Width across
flats KA
With rod boot
S + Stroke
With auto switch: CDS1F

~
=
Width across
~
=
~
=
S + Stroke
Stroke∗ Without rod boot With rod boot

Type Bore size range A AL B B C D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J K KA M S N P MM
(mm) (mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ1
Lube 125 Up to 1400 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 30 98 35 1
/2 M30 x 1.5 110 238 75 40 133 261
Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 24 98 35 1
/2 M30 x 1.5 110 232 75 40 133 255
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 26 106 39 0.2 x
3
/4 M36 x 1.5 120 252 75 40 141 273
Stroke
180 Up to 1800 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 31 111 39 3
/4 M40 x 1.5 135 277 85 45 153 295
Lube 200 Up to 1800 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 31 111 39 3
/4 M45 x 1.5 135 277 90 45 153 295
Non-lube 250 Up to 2000 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 35 141 49 1 M56 x 2 160 336 105 55 176 0.17 x 352
300 Up to 2000 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 48 146 49 1 M64 x 2 175 369 115 55 190 Stroke 384
Long Stroke With Auto Switch: ø125 to ø200 Only
Bore size Long stroke Without rod boot With rod boot Bore size Stroke range Without rod boot With rod boot
Type M1 M2 RT RY Type S
(mm) range (mm) ZZ ZZ1 (mm) (mm) ZZ ZZ1
Lube 125 1401 to 1600 22 22 36 164 230 253 Lube 125 Up to 1400 98 238 261
Non-lube 140 1401 to 1600 19 19 36 184 227 250 Non-lube 140 Up to 1400 98 232 255
Air-hydro 160 1401 to 1600 22 22 45 204 248 269 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1400 106 252 273
180 1801 to 2000 26 26 45 228 272 290 Lube 180 Up to 1500 115 281
299
Lube 200 1801 to 2000 26 26 45 257 272 290 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 286 304
Non-lube 250 2001 to 2400 30 30 55 325 331 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 2001 to 2400 36 36 55 390 357 372 type.
∗∗∗Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
6-9-14
Head Side Flange Style: CS1G
Lube (CS1G), Non-lube (CS1GN), Air-hydro (CS1GH)
Width across
CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With auto switch: CDS1G CG1
Width across ~
=
flats KA MB
With rod boot
MB1
~
=
CA2
~
=
CS1
ZZ1 + l + Stroke
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
C76
C85
C95
CP95
NCM
NCA
Type
(mm) (mm) A AL B B C D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J K KA MM N P D-
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 M30 x 1.5 35 /2
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2
-X
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4
180 Up to 1200 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 M40 x 1.5 39 3
/4
20-
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 M45 x 1.5 39 /4
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 M56 x 2 49 1
Data
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 M64 x 2 49 1
Type S Type S
Lube 125 98 110 222 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 245 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 222 245
Non-lube 140 98 110 228 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 251 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 228 251
Air-hydro 160 106 120 246 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 267 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 246 267
180 111 135 271 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 289 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 275 293
Lube 200 111 135 271 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 289 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 280 298
Non-lube 250 141 160 331 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer to page 6-
146 175 351 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 366
9-20.
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
6-9-15
Series C S1
Single Clevis Style: CS1C
Lube (CS1C), Non-lube (CS1CN), Air-hydro (CS1CH)
Width across
S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke Z + Stroke
With auto switch: CDS1C
Width across ~
=
~
=
~
=
S + Stroke

Type A AL B C CDH10 CT CX D E EA F FA G J K KA L MM N P RR
(mm) (mm)
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 25 +0.084
0 17 32 –0.1
–0.3 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 65 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 29
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 28 +0.084
0 17 36 –0.1
–0.3 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 75 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 32
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 32 +0.100
0 20 40 –0.1
–0.3 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 80 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 36
3
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 40 +0.100
0 23 50 –0.1
–0.3 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 90 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 44
+0.100 –0.1 3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 40 0 25 50 –0.3 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 90 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 44
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 50
+0.100
0 30 –0.1
63 –0.3 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 110 M56 x 2 49 1 55
+0.120 –0.1
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 63 0 37 80 –0.3 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 130 M64 x 2 49 1 68
Type S U Type S
(mm) H Z ZZ e f h l Z1 ZZ1 (mm) (mm) Z ZZ Z1 ZZ1
Lube 125 98 35 110 273 302 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 325 Lube 125 UP to 1000 98 273 302 296 325
Non-lube 140 98 40 110 283 315 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 338 Non-lube 140 UP to 1000 98 283 315 306 338
Air-hydro 160 106 45 120 306 342 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 327 363 Air-hydro 160 UP to 1200 106 306 342 327 363
180 111 50 135 336 380 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Lube 180 UP to 1200 115 340 384 358 402
Lube 200 111 50 135 336 380 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Non-lube 200 UP to 998 120 345 389 363 407
Non-lube 250 141 65 160 411 466 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 427 482 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 146 80 175 451 519 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 534 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
to page 6-9-20.
6-9-16
Double Clevis Style: CS1D
Lube (CS1D), Non-lube (CS1DN), Air-hydro (CS1DH)
Width across øCD hole H10

With rod boot flats KA Shaft d9
CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke
Z1 + l + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke
Z + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
CJ2
CM2
With auto switch: CDS1D CG1
~
=
MB
Width across øCD hole H10
With rod boot flats KA Shaft d9
MB1
CA2
~
=
CS1
~
=
C76
S + Stroke
ZZ1 + l + Stroke ZZ + Stroke C85
Note) Clevis pin and cotter pin are shipped together.
C95
CP95
NCM
Type A AL B C CDH10 CT CX CZ D E EA F FA G J K KA L MM N P RR NCA
(mm) (mm)
1
Lube 125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 25 +0.084
0 17 32 +0.3
+0.1
0
64 –0.2 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 65 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 29
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 28 +0.084
0 17 36 +0.3
+0.1
0
72 –0.2 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 75 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2 32 D-
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 32 +0.100
0 20 40 +0.3
+0.1
0
80 –0.2 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 80 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 36
180 Up to 1200 63 60 204 162 40 +0.100
0 23 50 +0.3
+0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 90 M40 x 1.5 39 3
/4 44 -X
+0.100 +0.3 –0.1 3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 63 60 226 182 40 0 25 50 +0.1 100 –0.3 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 90 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 44
Non-lube 250 +0.100
Up to 1200 71 67 277 225 50 0 30 +0.3
63 +0.1
–0.1
126 –0.3 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 110 M56 x 2 49 1 55 20-
+0.120 +0.3 –0.1
300 Up to 1200 80 76 330 270 63 0 37 80 +0.1 160 –0.3 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 130 M64 x 2 49 1 68
Data
Type S U Type S
Lube 125 98 35 110 273 302 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 296 325 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 273 302 296 325
Non-lube 140 98 40 110 283 315 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 306 338 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 283 315 306 338
Air-hydro 160 106 45 120 306 342 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 327 363 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 306 342 327 363
180 111 50 135 336 380 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 340 384 358 402
Lube 200 111 50 135 336 380 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 354 398 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 345 389 363 407
Non-lube 250 141 65 160 411 466 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 427 482 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard type.
300 146 80 175 451 519 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 466 534 ∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
to page 6-9-20.
6-9-17
Series C S1
Center Trunnion Style: CS1T
Lube (CS1T), Non-lube (CS1TN), Air-hydro (CS1TH)
With rod boot

Z1 + l + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke
Width across
flats KA
S + Stroke
With auto switch: CDS1T
With rod boot

Z1 + l + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke ~
=
Width across
flats KA
~
=~
=
S + Stroke

Type
(mm) A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P R S TDe8 TT TX
(mm)
1
125 25 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1 98 32 –0.050
–0.089 50 170
Lube 1
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1.5 98 36 –0.050
–0.089 55 190
3
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 22 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 1.5 106 40 –0.050
–0.089 60 212
3
180 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 26 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 236
3 –0.050
Lube 200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 26 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111 45 –0.089 59 265
–0.060
Non-lube 250 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 30 M56 x 2 49 1 3 141 56 –0.106 69 335
–0.060
300 35 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 36 M64 x 2 49 1 4 146 67 –0.106 79 400
Type TY TZ Type S
125 164 234 110 159 227 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 250 Lube 125 Up to 1000 98 159 227 182 250
Lube
Non-lube 140 184 262 110 159 227 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 250 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 98 159 227 182 250
Air-hydro 160 204 292 120 173 248 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 194 269 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 106 173 248 194 269
180 228 326 135 190.5 272 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 290 Lube 180 Up to 1200 115 192.5 276 210.5 294
Lube 200 257 355 135 190.5 272 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 290 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 120 195 281 213 299
Non-lube 250 325 447 160 230.5 331 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 246.5 347 ∗ Dimensions except mentioned above are the same as standard
300 390 534 175 248 357 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 263 372 type.
∗∗ For the auto switch mounting position and its mounting height, refer
∗ The minimum stroke with rod boot is 30 mm or more. to page 6-9-20.
(The minimum stroke with rod boot, but for bore size ø160 and ø300 is 35 ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
mm or more.)
6-9-18
Series CS1
Accessory Bracket Dimensions
I Type Single Knuckle Joint∗ Knuckle Pin, Clevis Pin
l
ø CJ1
CJP
ø
Material: Cast iron
ø
ø
Applicable
Part no. bore size A1 A2 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX RR1 U1
(mm) Material: Carbon steel CJ2
I-12 125 8 54 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 +0.084
0 32 –0.1
–0.3 27 33 Part no. Applicable bore
size (mm) Dd9 L l m d Applicable
(Drill through) cotter pin
I-14 140 8 54 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 +0.084
0
+0.1
36 –0.1
–0.3
–0.1
30 39 IY-12 125 25 –0.065
–0.117 79.5 69.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 CM2
I-16 160 8 60 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 0 40 –0.3 34 39 IY-14 140 28 –0.065
–0.117 86.5 76.5 5 4 ø4 x 40
I-18 180 8 67 70 125 M40 x 1.5 40 +0.1
0
+0.1
50 –0.1
–0.3
–0.1
42.5 44 IY-16 160 32 –0.080
–0.142 94.5 84.5 5 4 ø4 x 40 CG1
I-20 200 8 67 70 125 M45 x 1.5 40 0 50 –0.3 42.5 44 IY-18 180, 200 40 –0.080
–0.142 115 105 5 4 ø4 x 55
I-25 250 9 75.5 86 160 M56 x 2 50
+0.1
0
+0.12
–0.1
63 –0.3
–0.1
53 66 IY-25 250 50 –0.080
–0.142 144
–0.100
132 6 5 ø5 x 65 MB
I-30 300 9 84.5 105 175 M64 x 2 63 0 80 –0.3 66 71 IY-30 300 63 –0.174 178 166 6 5 ø5 x 80
MB1
Y Type Double Knuckle Joint∗ Rod End Nut
CA2
øND hole H10
Shaft d9 CS1
Material: Cast iron
Applicable
Part no. bore size A1 E1 L1 MM NDH10 NX NZ RR1 U1
C76
ø
(mm) Material: Rolled steel

Y-12 125 8 46 100 M30 x 1.5 25 +0.084
0 32 +0.3
+0.1 64 –0.1
–0.3 27 42 Part no.
Applicable bore
size (mm) d H B C D C85
+0.084 +0.3 –0.1
Y-14 140 8 48 105 M30 x 1.5 28 0 36 +0.1 72 –0.3 30 47 NT-12 125, 140 M30 x 1.5 18 46 53.1 44
Y-16 160 8 55 110 M36 x 1.5 32 +0.1
0 40 +0.3
+0.1 80 –0.1
–0.3 34 46 NT-16 160 M36 x 1.5 21 55 63.5 53 C95
+0.1 +0.3
Y-18 180 8 70 125 M40 x 1.5 40 0 50 +0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 42.5 54 NT-18 180 M40 x 1.5 23 60 69.3 57
Y-20 200 8 70 125 M45 x 1.5 40 +0.1
0 50 +0.3
+0.1 100 –0.1
–0.3 42.5 54 NT-20 200 M45 x 1.5 27 70 80.8 67 CP95
+0.1 +0.3 –0.1
Y-25 250 9 86 160 M56 x 2 50 0 63 +0.1 126 –0.3 53 81 NT-25 250 M56 x 2 34 85 98.1 82
Y-30 300 9 105 175 M64 x 2 63
+0.12
0
+0.3 –0.1
80 +0.1 160 –0.3 66 87 NT-30 300 M64 x 2 38 95 110.0 92 NCM
∗ Use a single knuckle joint or a double knuckle joint individually.
(Screw it entirely over the rod end threads and tighten it.)
∗ Extend the dimensions of A, H. when using a single/double knuckle joint together with a rod end nut.
NCA
(To extend dimensions A/H, refer to the table below, and specify the product as Made-to-order -XAO.)
∗ Pin and cotter pin are attached for double knuckle joint. D-
Single/Double Knuckle Joint -X

20-
Data
A, H Dimensions when Mounting

a Single/Double Knuckle Joint
together with a Rod End Nut
Symbol Applicable knuckle joint part number Bore size (mm) A H
H A 움 L1 H1
Bore size (mm) I type single knuckle Y type double knuckle 125 65 125
125 110 50 3.5 100 156.5 I-12 Y-12 140 65 125
140 110 50 3.5 105 161.5 I-14 Y-14 160 76 140
160 120 56 3.5 110 170.5 I-16 Y-16 180 83 155
180, 200 135 63 3.5 125 193.5 I-18, I-20 Y-18, Y-20 200 88 160
250 160 71 3.5 160 245.5 I-25 Y-25 250 106 195
300 175 80 3.5 175 266.5 I-30 Y-30 300 115 210
6-9-19
Series CDS1
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position (Detection at stroke end) and Its Mounting Height
<Band mounting style> <Tie-rod mounting style>
D-A3/G3/K3 Applicable cable O.D.
ø6.8 to ø9.6
D-A5/A6 Auto swtich ~
=
~
=
~
=
Auto swtich
D-F5/J5/F5NTL
D-A44 Applicable cable O.D.
~
D-F5BAL/F59F Auto swtich ~
=
ø6.8 to ø11.5 =
D-F5W/J59W
~
=
~
=
Auto swtich
( ): Denotes the values of D-F5LF

Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-A5 D-F5 D-F5, D-J5
model D-A6 D-J5 D-F5W, D-J59W
D-A3 D-F5W D-A3 D-A5
D-A44 D-A59W D-J59W D-F5NTL D-G39 D-A44 D-A6 D-F5BAL
D-G39 D-F5BAL D-K39 D-A59W D-F59F
D-K39 D-F59F D-F5NTL
Bore size (mm) A B A B A B B B Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 116 126 75.5 69.5 74.5 70
140 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 124 134 81 76.5 80 76.5
160 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 134.5 144.5 89 87.5 88 87.5
180 3.5 1.5 7.5 5.5 10 8 15 13 144 154 97 97.5 96 97.5
200 6 4 10 8 12.5 10.5 17.5 15.5 154 164 107 108 107.5 108
<Tie-rod mounting style> Operating Range

D-Z7/Z80 Bore size (mm)
D-Y59/Y69/Y7P/Y7PV Auto switch model
125 140 160 180 200
D-Y7W/Y7WV D-Z7/Z80 14 14.5 13 14 14.5
D-Y7BAL D-A3/A44/A5/A6 10 10 10 10 10
~ D-A59W 17 17 17 17 17
" Hs
=
A D-Y59/Y69/Y7P/Y7PV
12 13 7 7.5 8
D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-Y7BAL 6 6 7 7 7
=" Ht
D-F5/J5/F5W/J59W 5 5 5.5 6 6
~
D-F5BAL/F5NTL/F59F
D-G39/K39 11 11 10 10 10
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to
be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately 30% dispersion.)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending
B on an ambient environment.
Proper Auto Switch
Mounting Position Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How
Auto Switch Mounting Height to Order”, the following auto switches can be mounted.
Auto switch D-Z7/Z80 For detailed specifications, refer to page 6-16-1.
model D-Y59/Y69 D-Z7/Z80
D-Y59/Y69 Type Part no.
Electrical
Features
D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7BAL entry
D-Y7W D-Y7W —
D-A53/A56
D-Y7WV D-Y7WV Grommet
D-Y7BAL Reed D-A64/A67 Without indicator
switch D-Z80 (In-line)
light
Bore size (mm) A B Hs Ht Hs Ht
D-F59/F5P/J59 —
125 1.5 1.5 69 69.5 71 69.5
D-F59W/F5PW/J59W Grommet 2-color indication
140 1.5 1.5 76 76 77 76
Solid (In-line) 2-color indication,
160 1.5 1.5 85 85 88.5 85 state D-F5BAL Water resistant
180 7 5 95 95 97.5 95 switch
D-F5NTL With timer
200 9.5 7.5 106 106 108 106
D-Y69A/Y69B/Y7PV Grommet —
D-Y7NWV/Y7PWV/Y7BWV (Perpendicular) 2-color indication
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid state
switches, too. For details, refer to page 6-16-60.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-
Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to
page 6-16-39.
6-9-20
Double Acting, Double Rod
Series CS1W
Lube, Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160, ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Air-hydro: ø125, ø140, ø160
How to Order CJ1

Without auto switch CS1W L 125 100 JJ CJP
CJ2
With auto switch CDS1W L 125 100 JJ Y7BW
CM2
Number of
auto swithes
Built in magnet
Nil 2 pcs.
(ø125 to ø200)
3 3 pcs.
CG1
Double rod type S 1 pc.
Mounting style n “n” pcs. MB
Auto switch
B Basic style Tubing material
L Foot style Symbol Bore size (mm) Tubing material
Nil Without auto switch MB1
∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the
F Rod side flange style 125 to 160 Aluminum tube table below.
Nil
180 to 300 Steel tube ∗ D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7 types are shipped CA2
F 125 to 160 Steel tube together, (but not assembled).
Type
(But, only the mounting bracket for the above models CS1
is assembled at the time of shipment.)
Nil Lube Bore size Suffix for cylinder C76
N Non-lube Air-hydro
Lube, Non-lube Rod boot J Nylon tarpaulin
H Air-hydro
125 125 mm 125 125 mm in one side K Heat resistant tarpaulin
140 140 mm 140 140 mm Rod boot JJ Nylon tarpaulin
C85
Built-in magnet 160 160 mm 160 160 mm in both sides KK Heat resistant tarpaulin
cylinder model 180 180 mm N Without cushion C95
200 200 mm R With cushion in rod side
If a built-in magnet cylinder without Cylinder stroke (mm)
auto switch is required, there is no
250∗ 250 mm Cushion H With cushion in head side CP95
need to enter the symbol for auto 300∗ 300 mm With cushion in both sides
∗ It is not available with auto switch. Nil
switch. (Air-hydro type has no cushion.) NCM
(Example) CDS1WB125-100 ∗ If specifying more than one symbol,
indicate them in alphabetically.
∗∗ Air-hydro type has no cushion. No symbol NCA
indicates no cushion.
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches. D-
Auto switch model Lead wire length (m)∗
Indicator light
Load voltage
Type Special function Electrical Wiring
(Output) Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load -X
entry DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
3-wire
(NPN equivalent) — 5V — Z76 — — — IC — 20-
circuit
Grommet
Reed switch
100 V Z73 — —
100 V, 200 V A54 — —
Relay, PLC Data
—
Yes
Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

2-wire 24 V —
conduit — A34 — — — —
100 V, 200 V
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay, PLC
Diagnostic indication (2-color indication) Grommet — — A59W — — —
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 — —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —
Solid state switch

Yes
conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — — Relay, PLC

Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V
(2-color indication) 3-wire (PNP) 24 V — Y7PW — circuit
Grommet Y7BW —
2-wire 12 V —
Water resistant (2-color indication) Y7BA — —
With diagnostic output
(2-color indication) 4-wire (NPN) 5 V, 12 V F59F — IC circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m ·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m ·········· Z (Example) A54Z
6-9-21
Series CS1W
Specifications
Proof pressure 1.57 MPa Note)
Max. operating pressure 0.97 MPa 0.97 MPa
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.06 MPa
Ambient and fluid Without switch 0 to 70°C (No freezing) Air-hydro
temperature With switch 0 to 60°C (No freezing) 5 to 60°C
JIS Symbol Thread tolerance JIS Class 2
Stroke length tolerance 250 st or less: +1.0 st +1.4 st +1.8
0 251 to 1,000 : 0 1,001 to 1,200 : 0
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style,
Mounting Center trunnion style
Note) Item corresponding to Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act is 1.46 MPa.
Weight/Aluminum Tube: Lube Type

(Non-lube, Air-hydro) (kg)
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160
16.51 19.62 26.65
Basic style
(15.28) (18.12) (24.79)
Basic weight
18.14 22.14 29.45
Foot style
(16.91) (20.64) (27.59)
Rod side 19.19 24.62 33.04
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) flange style (17.96) (23.12) (31.18)
Symbol Specifications
20.64 25.35 34.05
-XC4 With heavy duty scraper Trunnion style
(19.41) (23.85) (32.19)
-XC5 Heat resistant cylinder (110°C)
Add’l weight per each 100 mm stroke 2.57 2.76 3.38
-XC6 Piston rod and rod end nut made of stainless steel
Accessory bracket
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length
-XC30 Front trunnion Double knuckle
(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin)
1.37 1.81 2.48
-XC35 With coil scraper
Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23
∗ ( ): Denotes the non-lube and air-hydro type.

Calculation: (Example) CS1WL125-500
• Basic weight ················18.14 (Foot style, ø125)
• Additional weight··········2.57/100 stroke
• Cylinder stroke·············500 stroke
18.14 + 2.57 x 500/100 = 30.99 kg
Class 2 Pressure Vessel

In the case of exceeding the following strokes, the cylinder is subject to
Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act.
Bore size (mm) Cylinder stroke (mm)
Description Material Note
200 998
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted 250 813
ø125, ø140, Aluminum alloy Hard anodized 300 564
Tube∗ ø160 Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated Weight/Steel Tube (kg)
ø180, ø200, ø250, ø300 Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
Lube NBR JIS B 2401 O-ring ∗ Basic style 16.85 20.03 27.12 36.90 45.79 85.36 122.39
Sliding
Basic weight
Non-lube NBR PNY, NLP Foot style 18.48 22.55 29.92 41.10 50.67 94.86 139.67
seal
Air-hydro NBR SKY, RPS Rod side
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated flange style 19.53 25.03 33.51 46.73 57.70 107.20 152.59
Cast iron Chromated
Lube (With auto switch:
Trunnion style 20.98 25.76 34.52 47.52 59.78 113.20 162.82
(In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Aluminum alloy casted) Additional weight per
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated 3.46 3.81 4.57 6.20 7.29 11.30 15.17
Non-lube each 100 mm stroke
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted)
Accessory bracket
Aluminum alloy casted Chromated Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 3.07 2.90 5.38 10.82
Air-hydro
(Iron tube: Cast iron) (In the case of aluminum alloy casted) Double knuckle
∗ In the case of an auto switch with bore sizes ø180 and ø200, (Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48 4.74 4.59 9.22 17.17
tubing material is aluminum alloy (hard anodized). Piston seal is
NLP. Rod end nut 0.16 0.16 0.23 0.32 0.85 1.26 1.43
6-9-22
Double Acting, Double Rod Series CS1W
Rod Boot Material Mounting Bracket Part No.
Symbol Material Maximum ambient temperature Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 180 200 250 300
J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C Foot style ∗ CS1W-L12 CS1W-L14 CS1W-L16 CS1W-L18 CS1W-L20 CS1W-L25 CS1W-L30
K
Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗ Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F12 CS1-F16 CS1-F18 CS1-F20 CS1-F25 CS1-F30
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot ∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
itself.
Accessory Bore size (mm)
Center Auto switch model
Mounting Basic Foot Rod side trunnion 160
125 180 140
200
style style flange style style
D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
Rod end nut D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16 BT-18A BT-20 CJ1

Option
Single knuckle joint D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160 BS1-180 BS1-200

Double knuckle joint
(With knuckle pin/cotter pin) D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
CJP
Rod boot D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160 BS4-180 BS4-200
D-Y7BAL
CJ2
Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting
∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in CM2
on page 6-9-8. accordance with the operating environment.
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5 CG1
“D-F5BA” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.
When only a switch is shipped independently, “BBA1” screws are attached.
MB
Double Acting, Double Rod/Replacement Parts (Seal kit) MB1
When ordering the replacement parts (seal kits)
for Series CS1W double rod type cylinder,
Lube CA2
indicate the order number listed in the table at
right. 125 CS1W-125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55 CS1
Each set of replacement parts contains the 140 CS1W-140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
following: wiper ring, rod seal, piston seal, valve
seal, tube gasket, and push plate gasket (for 1
160 CS1W-160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55 C76
cylinder). 180 CS1W-180A-PS SDR-45 P45 P165 P7 C175 G65
200 CS1W-200A-PS SDR-50 P50A P185 P7 C195 G65 C85
250 CS1W-250A-PS SDR-60 P60 P235 P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300 CS1W-300A-PS SDR-70 P70 P285 P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90 C95
Non-lube with Auto Switch
CP95
125 CS1WN125A-PS SDR-36 PNY-36 NLP-125A P7 C120 G55
NCM
NCA
D-
250∗ CS1WN250A-PS SDR-60 PNY-60 NLP-250A P7 CS160-1618-G4 G80
300∗ CS1WN300A-PS SDR-70 PNY-70 NLP-300A P7 CS160-1618-G5 G90
∗ It is not available with auto switch.
-X
Lube with Auto Switch 20-
125 CS1W125A-PS SDR-36 P36 P115 P7 C120 G55 Data
140 CS1W140A-PS SDR-36 P36 P130 P7 C135 G55
160 CS1W160A-PS SDR-40 P40 P150 P7 C155 G55
180 CDS1W180A-PS SDR-45 P45 NLP-180A P7 C175 G65
200 CDS1W200A-PS SDR-50 P50A NLP-200A P7 C195 G65
Air-hydro
125 CS1WH125A-PS SDR-36 SKY-36 RPS-125 P7 C120 G55
6-9-23
Series CS1W
Construction
Lube, Non-lube
With auto switch
Non-lube type With auto switch
Aluminum tube Steel tube ø125 to 160 ø180, ø200
Air-hydro
Aluminum tube Auto switch

Component Parts Seal List
q Rod cover Rolled steel Black painted ø125 ø140 ø160 ø180 ø200 ø250 ø300
ø125 to Aluminum Lube
alloy Hard anodized
ø160
w Cylinder tube @0 Wiper ring SDR-36 SDR-36 SDR-40 SDR-45 SDR-50 SDR-60 SDR-70
ø125 to Carbon steel
tube Inside: Hard chrome plated @1∗ Cushion seal DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-60S DSM-60S DSM-75S PCS-85
ø300 ∗
e Piston Cast iron∗ @2 Rod seal P36 P36 P40 P45 P50A P60 P70
r Piston rod A Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @3 Piston seal P115 P130 P150 P165 P185 P235 P285
t Piston rod B Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @4 Valve seal P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7
NBR CS160- CS160-
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @5 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155 C175 C195 1618-G4 1618-G5
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @6∗ Piston gasket G25 G25 G25 G35 G35 G45 G45
i Valve guide Brass @7 Retaining plate gasket G55 G55 G55 G65 G65 G80 G90
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated @8∗ Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5 N-12.5-1.5
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated Non-lube Seals except @2 and @3 are the same as lube type.
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated @2 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40 PNY-45 PNY-50 PNY-60 PNY-70
NBR
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated @3 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A NLP-180A NLP-200A NLP-250A NLP-300A
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated Air-hydro Seals except @2 and @3 are the same as lube type.
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated Part no.
!5 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated ø125 ø140 ø160
!6 Spacer A Rolled steel @2 Rod seal SKY-36 SKY-36 SKY-40
NBR
!7 Air releasing B Rolled steel Zinc chromated @3 Piston seal RPS-125 RPS-140 RPS-160
!8 Air releasing A Chromium molybdenum steel Lube (With switch) Seals except #1 are the same as lube type.
@9 Check ball Chrome bearing steel Part no.
#0 Magnet — ø180 ø200
∗ In the case of the aluminum tube of non-lube and air- #1 Piston seal NBR NLP-180A NLP-200A
hydro type, piston material is an aluminum alloy casted.
In the case of auto switch bore size ø180 and ø200, Replacement Parts (Seal kit)
piston material is aluminum alloy casted and tubing
material is aluminum alloy (hard anodized). • For replacement parts no. (seal kits) of double rod style cylinder for Series CS1W, refer to
page 6-9-23.
∗ • Seal kits does not include cushion seal, piston seal and guide gasket because those are not
replaceable parts.
6-9-24
Basic Style: CS1WB
Lube (CS1WB), Non-lube (CS1WBN), Air-hydro (CS1WBH)
Width across
flats KA
Width across
flats KA
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
CJ1
CJP
S + Stroke H + Stroke
ZZ + 2 stroke CJ2
With rod boot (One side) CM2
ZZ + l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on one side)
CG1
MB
ø
MB1
l
CA2
l
CS1
C76
With rod boot (Both sides)
Width across
C85
flats KA Width across
flats KA
C95
CP95
øE
øe
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
NCM
l l + Stroke
l S + Stroke h + l + Stroke
NCA
ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke
D-
Bore size Stroke range (mm) -X

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 1
/2 98 20-
1
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106 Data
3
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 35 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111
3
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 35 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 41.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 51.5 M64 x 2 49 1 146

Without With rod boot With rod boot
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides) Bore size Stroke range (mm) rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type Type S
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364 Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364 Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388 Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 346 388 367
180 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417 Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 385 403 421
Lube 200 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417 Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 390 408 426
Non-lube 250 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493 ∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
300 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526
6-9-25
Series CS1W
Foot Style: CS1WL
Lube (CS1WL), Non-lube (CS1WLN), Air-hydro (CS1WLH)
ZZ + 2 stroke
Width across
flats KA
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
Width across
ø flats KA
LS + Stroke
With rod boot

ZZ + l + 2 stroke
(With rod boot on one side)
l
l
ø
ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke
(With rod boot on both sides)
Bore size Stroke range (mm)

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA LD LH LS LT
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 85 188 8
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 100 188 9
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 19 106 206 9
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 24 125 231 10
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 24 132 231 10
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 29 160 301 12
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 33 200 326 15
Bore size Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) (Both sides)
Type LX LY MM N P S X Y
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ
1
Lube 125 100 157.5 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 45 20 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
1
Non-lube 140 112 180.5 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 45 30 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Air-hydro 160 118 197 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 106 50 25 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388
3
180 132 227 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111 60 30 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
3
Lube 200 150 245 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111 60 30 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
Non-lube 250 180 298.5 M56 x 2 49 1 141 80 40 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493
300 212 365 M64 x 2 49 1 146 90 40 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526

Bore size Stroke range (mm) Without rod boot With rod boot (Single side) With rod boot (Both sides)
Type S LS
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 188 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 188 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 206 346 367 388
Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 235 385 403 421
Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 240 390 408 426
∗∗∗ Refer to “Minimum Stroke for Auto Switch Mounting” on page 6-9-8.
6-9-26
Rod Side Flange Style: CS1WF
Lube (CS1WF), Non-lube (CS1WFN), Air-hydro (CS1WFH)
Width across
ø flats KA Width across
flats KA
CJ1
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
CJP
S + Stroke H + Stroke CJ2

ZZ + Stroke
CM2
With rod boot

CG1
MB
MB1
CA2
ø
CS1
l C76
l
ZZ + 2 l + 2 stroke C85
(With rod boot on both sides)
C95
Type
A AL B B C D E EA F FA FD FT FX FY FZ G J CP95
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 19 14 190 100 230 16 M14 x 1.5
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 160 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 19 20 212 112 255 16 M14 x 1.5
NCM
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 56 53 180 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 19 20 236 118 275 18.5 M16 x 1.5
180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 200 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 24 25 265 132 320 18.5 M18 x 1.5
NCA
Lube 200 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 225 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 24 25 280 150 335 18.5 M20 x 1.5
Non-lube 250 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 275 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 29 30 355 180 420 23 M24 x 1.5
D-
300 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 80 76 330 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 33 30 400 212 475 23 M30 x 1.5
-X
Type K KA M MM N P S 20-
(mm) H ZZ e f h l ZZ ZZ
1
125 15 31 30 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Lube
1
Data
Non-lube 140 15 31 24 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 341 364
Air-hydro 3
160 17 36 26 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 106 120 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 367 388
3
180 20 41 31 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 111 135 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
3
Lube 200 20 46 31 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 111 135 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 399 417
Non-lube 250 25 56 35 M56 x 2 49 1 141 160 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 477 493
300 30 65 48 M64 x 2 49 1 146 175 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 511 526

Type S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot ZZ ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Non-lube 140 Up to 1000 30 to 1000 98 318 341 364
Air-hydro 160 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 106 346 367 388
Lube 180 Up to 1200 30 to 1200 115 385 403 421
Non-lube 200 Up to 998 30 to 998 120 390 408 426
6-9-27
Series CS1W
Center Trunnion Style: CS1WT
Lube (CS1WT), Non-lube (CS1WTN), Air-hydro (CS1WTH)
Width across
flats KA Z + 1/2 stroke Z + 1/2 stroke
Width across
flats KA
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ø
ZZ + 2 Stroke
With rod boot

Z + l + 1/2 stroke
ø
l
l
ZZ + 2l + 2 stroke (With rod boot on both sides)

Type A AL B C D E EA F FA G J K KA M MM N P R S
1
Lube 125 25 to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1 98
1
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 30 to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 14 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 19 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 1.5 98
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 14 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 22 M36 x 1.5 39 3
/4 1.5 106
3
180 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 204 162 45 115 70 48 17 18.5 M18 x 1.5 20 41 26 M40 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111
3
Lube 200 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 63 60 226 182 50 115 74 48 17 18.5 M20 x 1.5 20 46 26 M45 x 1.5 39 /4 2 111
Non-lube 250 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 71 67 277 225 60 140 86 60 20 23 M24 x 1.5 25 56 30 M56 x 2 49 1 3 141
300 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 80 76 330 270 70 140 96 60 20 23 M30 x 1.5 30 65 36 M64 x 2 49 1 4 146
Type TDe8 TT TX TY TZ H
(mm) Z ZZ e f h l Z ZZ Z ZZ
Lube 125 32 –0.050
–0.089 50 170 164 234 110 159 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 341 182 364
Non-lube 140 36 –0.050
–0.089 55 190 184 262 110 159 318 75 40 133 0.2 stroke 182 341 182 364
Air-hydro 160 40 –0.050
–0.089 60 212 204 292 120 173 346 75 40 141 0.2 stroke 194 367 194 388
180 45 –0.050
–0.089 59 236 228 326 135 190.5 381 85 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 399 208.5 417
Lube 200 –0.050
45 –0.089 59 265 257 355 135 190.5 381 90 45 153 0.2 stroke 208.5 399 208.5 417
Non-lube 250 –0.060
56 –0.106 69 335 325 447 160 230.5 461 105 55 176 0.17 stroke 246.5 477 246.5 493
–0.060
300 67 –0.106 79 400 390 534 175 248 496 115 55 190 0.17 stroke 263 511 263 526

Type S
(mm) Without rod boot With rod boot Z ZZ Z ZZ ZZ
Lube 125 25 to 1000 30 to 1000 98 159 318 182 341 364
Non-lube 140 30 to 1000 30 to 1000 98 159 318 182 341 364
Air-hydro 160 35 to 1200 35 to 1200 106 173 346 194 367 388
Lube 180 30 to 1200 30 to 1200 115 192.5 385 210.5 403 421
Non-lube 200 30 to 998 30 to 998 120 195 390 213 408 426
6-9-28
Air Cylinder: With Auto Switch Series CDS1W
<Band mounting style>
D-A3 Applicable cable O.D.
D-G39/K39 G 1/2 ø6.8 to ø9.6
A 49 B ~
=
CJ1
CJP
Applicable cable O.D.
G 1/2 ø6.8 to ø11.5 CJ2
D-A44 ~
=
CM2
CG1
MB
MB1
<Tie-rod mounting style>
~
= CA2
D-A5/A6
CS1
~
=
C76
C85
~
=
C95
D-F5/J5/F5NTL ~
= CP95
D-F5BAL/F59F
D-F5W/J59W
NCM
~
=
NCA
D-
~
=
-X
20-
Proper Auto Switch Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-A5 D-F5 D-F5
Data
model D-A6 D-J5 D-J5
D-A3 D-F5W D-A3 D-A5 D-F5W
D-A44 D-A59W D-J59W D-F5NTL D-G39 D-A44 D-A6 D-J59W

D-F5BAL
D-G39 D-F5BAL D-K39 D-A59W D-F59F
D-K39 D-F59F D-F5NTL
Bore size
(mm) A B A B A B A B Hs Hs Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 116 126 75.5 69.5 74.5 70
140 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 124 134 81 76.5 80 76.5
160 0 0 2 2 4.5 4.5 9.5 9.5 134.5 144.5 89 87.5 88 87.5
180 3.5 1.5 7.5 5.5 10 8 15 13 144 154 97 97.5 96 97.5
200 6 4 10 8 12.5 10.5 17.5 15.5 154 164 107 108 107.5 108
6-9-29
Series CDS1
~
= Hs
A
<Tie-rod mounting style>
= Ht
D-Z7/Z80
~
D-Y59/Y69/Y7P/Y7PV
D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-Y7BAL
Proper Auto Switch

Mounting Position Auto Switch Mounting Height
Auto switch D-Z7/Z80 D-Z7/Z80
model D-Y59/Y69 D-Y59/Y69
D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7P/Y7PV D-Y7BAL
D-Y7W D-Y7W
D-Y7WV D-Y7WV
D-Y7BAL
Bore size (mm) A B Hs Ht Hs Ht
125 1.5 1.5 69 69.5 71 69.5
140 1.5 1.5 76 76 77 76
160 1.5 1.5 85 85 88.5 85
180 7 5 95 95 97.5 95
200 9.5 7.5 106 106 108 106
Operating Range
Bore size (mm)
Auto switch model
125 140 160 180 200
D-Z7/Z80 14 14.5 13 14 14.5
D-A3/A44/A5/A6 10 10 10 10 10
D-A59W 17 17 17 17 17
D-Y59/Y69/Y7P/Y7PV
12 13 7 7.5 8
D-Y7W/Y7WV
D-Y7BAL 6 6 7 7 7
D-F5/J5/F5W/J59W 6 6
5 5 5.5
D-F5BAL/F5NTL/F59F
D-G39/K39 11 11 10 10 10
∗ Since this is a guideline including hysteresis, not meant to
be guaranteed. (Assuming approximately ±30% dispersion.)
There may be the case it will vary substantially depending
on an ambient environment.
Other than the applicable auto switches listed in “How to Order”, the following auto switches can be
mounted. For detailed specifications, refer to page 6-16-1.
Type Part no. Electrical entry Features

D-A53/A56 —
Reed switch D-A64/A67 Grommet (In-line)
Without indicator light
D-Z80
D-F59/F5P/J59 —
D-F59W/F5PW/J59W 2-color indication
Grommet (In-line)
D-F5BAL Water resistant (2-color indication)
Solid state switch
D-F5NTL With timer
D-Y69A/Y69B/Y7PV —
D-Y7NWV/Y7PWV/Y7BWV Grommet (Perpendicular) 2-color indication
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid state auto switches. For details, refer to page 6-16-60.
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state switch (D-Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. For details, refer to page 6-16-39.
6-9-30
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type
Double Acting, Single Rod
Series CS1
Non-lube: ø125, ø140, ø160
Q
How to Order CJ1
Without auto switch CS1 L Q 160 300 JR CJP
CJ2
With auto switch CDS1 L Q 160 300 JR Y7BW
CM2
Number of
auto switches
Built in magnet Nil 2 pcs. CG1
S 1 pc.
3 3 pcs. MB
Mounting style n “n” pcs.
B Basic style Auto switch MB1
L Foot style Nil Without auto switch
Low friction type
F Rod side flange style ∗ For the applicable auto switch model, refer to the
table below.
CA2
G Head side flange style
Single clevis style ∗ D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7 types are shipped
C
D Double clevis style
Bore size together, (but not assembled). CS1
125 125 mm (But, only the mounting bracket for the above
T Center trunnion style models is assembled at the time of shipment.)
140 140 mm C76
160 160 mm Suffix for cylinder
J Nylon tarpaulin
Rod boot
K Heat resistant tarpaulin
C85
A With cushion in both sides
Cylinder stroke (mm) R With cushion in rod side C95
Cushion
Refer to “Standard Stroke” on page 6-9-32. H With cushion in head side
Nil Without cushion CP95
∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate them
alphabetically. NCM
Applicable Auto Switch/Refer to page 6-16-1 for further information on auto switches.
NCA
Indicator light
Load voltage Auto switch model. Lead wire length (m) ∗

Wiring
Type Special function Electrical Tie-rod Band 0.5 3 5 Pre-wire Applicable load
entry (Output) DC AC mounting mounting (Nil) (L) (Z) connector
D-
3-wire IC
— 5V — Z76 — — — — -X
(NPN equivalent) circuit
Grommet
100 V Z73 — — Relay,
Reed switch
— 100 V, 200 V A54 — — PLC 20-

Yes
Terminal 12 V — — A33 — — — — PLC

conduit 2-wire 24 V
100 V, 200 V
— A34 — — — — — Data
DIN terminal — A44 — — — — Relay,
Diagnostic indication PLC
Grommet — — A59W — — —
24 V 5 V, 12 V —
Grommet
— — 100 V, 200 V J51 — —
— 2-wire —
12 V Y59B —
Solid state switch

conduit 2-wire 12 V — K39 — — — — —
Yes
Relay,
Diagnostic indication 5 V, 12 V PLC
3-wire (PNP) Y7PW — circuit
(2-color indication) 24 V —
Y7BW —
Water resistant Grommet 2-wire 12 V —
Y7BA — —
With diagnostic output 4-wire IC
5 V, 12 V F59F —
(2-color indication) (NPN) circuit
∗ Lead wire length symbols: 0.5 m ·········· Nil (Example) A54 ∗ Solid state switches marked with “” are produced upon receipt of order.
3 m ·········· L (Example) A54L
5 m ·········· Z (Example) A54Z
6-9-31
Series CS1Q
Application Example
Designed with a low sliding Low friction cylinder is used in combination with precision regulator (Series IR).
resistance of the piston, this
air cylinder is ideal for
applications such as contact Driving roller Widing roller
pressure control, which Precision regulator

Precision regulator
requires smooth movements
at low pressures.
(Moving object)
Low sliding resistance

Min. operating pressure –0.005 MPa
Specifications
Auto switch mounting Action Double acting, Single rod
is possible. Direction of low friction Both directions
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.05 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.005 MPa ∗
Without auto switch: 0 to 70°C (No freezing)
Ambient and fluid temperature
With auto switch: 0 to 60°C (No freezing)
Allowable leakage 0.5 l/min (ANR) or less

Cushion None (With cushion is available.)
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Bore size (mm) 125, 140, 160
Basic style, Foot style, Rod side flange style, Head side flange style,
Mounting
Single clevis style, Double clevis style, Center trunnion style
∗ In the case of w/ cushion, pressure inside cushion stroke is not included.
Maximum Stroke
JIS Symbol
Tubing material Aluminum alloy Carbon steel tube
Double acting
Mounting Basic style, Head side flange style Basic style, Head side flange style
bracket Single clevis style, Double clevis style Single clevis style Foot style
Bore size Center trunnion style Double clevis style Rod side flange style
(mm) Rod side flange style Center trunnion style

Bore size (mm)
(For details, refer to page 6-17-1.) Auto switch model
125 140 160
Symbol Specifications D-A5/A6/A59W/F5/J5/F5NTL
BT-12 BT-12 BT-16
-XA Change of rod end shape D-F5W/J59W/F5BAL/F59F
-XC3 Special port location D-A3/A44/G39/K39 BS1-125 BS1-140 BS1-160
Tie-rod, cushion valve, and tie-rod D-Z7/Z80/Y59/Y69/Y7P
-XC7 nut and similar parts made of stainless steel
D-Y7PV/Y7W/Y7WV BS4-125 BS4-125 BS4-160
-XC14 Change of trunnion bracket mounting position D-Y7BAL
-XC15 Change of tie-rod length ∗ Mounting screws set made of stainless steel
The following set of mounting screws made of stainless steel is also available. Use it in
accordance with the operating environment.
BBA1: For D-A5/A6/F5/J5
“D-F5BAL” switch is set on the cylinder with the stainless steel screws above when
shipped.
6-9-32
Air Cylinder: Low Friction Type
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CS1Q
Mounting Bracket Part No. Rod Boot Material
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 Symbol Material Max. ambient temperature
Foot style ∗ CS1-L12 CS1-L14 CS1-L16 J Nylon tarpaulin 70°C
Flange style CS1-F12 CS1-F14 CS1-F16 K Heat resistant tarpaulin 110°C ∗
Single clevis style CS1-C12 CS1-C14 CS1-C16
∗ Maximum ambient temperature for the rod boot
Double clevis style CS1-D12 CS1-D14 CS1-D16 itself.
Cylinder with Auto Switch
Accessory For auto switch specifications of low friction
Basic Foot Rod side model Single Double Center style, refer to the standard double acting
Mounting style
style style flange style flange style clevis style clevis style trunnion style single rod series rod (Series CS1) on page 6- CJ1
9-8.
— — — — — —
Standard equipment Clevis pin CJP
Rod end nut
Other than the applicable auto switches
Single knuckle joint
listed in “How to Order”, following auto CJ2
Option Double knuckle joint switches can be mounted. For details,

(Knuckle pin, Cotter pin) refer to page 6-16-1. CM2
Rod boot
Type Model Electrical
entry
Features CG1
Description Material Note D-A53/A56
Reed D-A64/A67 Grommet
—
MB
Without
Cover Rolled steel plate Black painted switch (In-line) indicator light
D-Z80
Aluminum alloy ∗ Hard anodized D-F59/F5P/
MB1
Tube —
Carbon steel tube Inside: Hard chrome plated J59
Sliding part seal NBR PNY, NLP D-F59W/ 2-color indication
CA2
F5PW/J59W Grommet
Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated
D-F5BAL
(In-line) 2-color indication, CS1
Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated Solid Water resistant
state With timer
D-F5NTL
∗ With auto switch switch
D-Y69A/
C76
Weight/Steel Tube (For aluminum tube [with auto switch], refer to page 6-9-4.) (kg) —
Y69B/Y7PV Grommet
Bore size (mm) 125 140 160 D-Y7NWV/ (Perpendicular) C85
2-color
Basic style 15.20 18.38 25.24 Y7PWV/ indication
Foot style 16.83 20.90 28.04 Y7BWV C95
∗ With pre-wire connector is available for solid
Rod side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63 state switches, too.
Basic
For specifications, refer to page 6-16-60.
CP95
weight Head side flange style 17.88 23.38 31.63
∗ Normally closed (NC = b contact), solid state
Single clevis style 18.27 22.67 30.73 switch (D-Y7G/Y7H type) are also available. NCM
Double clevis style 18.73 23.42 31.58 For details, refer to page 6-16-39.
Trunnion style 19.33 24.11 32.64 NCA
Additional weight per each 100 mm of stroke 2.66 3.01 3.58
Accessory Single knuckle 0.91 1.16 1.56 D-

bracket Double knuckle (With pin) 1.37 1.81 2.48
Calculation: (Example) CS1LQ160, 500 (Foot style, ø160)
-X
• Basic weight················· 28.04
• Additional weight·········· 3.58/100 stroke 20-
• Cylinder stroke············· 500 stroke, 28.04 + 3.58 x 500/100 = 45.94 kg
Sliding Resistance Data

(Converted into cylinder operating pressure)
ø125
ø140
0.010
Sliding resistance (MPa)
ø160
0.005
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7

Pressure (MPa)
6-9-33
Series CS1Q
Construction
Non-lube
Component Parts Seal List

Part no.
No. Description Material Note No. Description Material
ø125 ø140 ø160
q Rod cover Rolled steel plate Black painted !8 Wiper ring SFR-36K SFR-36K SFR-40K
w Head cover Rolled steel plate Black painted !9 Cushion seal ∗ DSM-50S DSM-50S DSM-50S
Aluminum alloy ∗ Hard anodized @00 Rod seal PNY-36 PNY-36 PNY-40
e Cylinder tube
Carbon steel tube Hard chrome plated @1 Piston seal NLP-125A NLP-140A NLP-160A
r Piston Aluminum alloy casted Chromated @2 Valve seal NBR P7 P7 P7
t Piston rod Carbon steel Hard chrome plated @33 Tube gasket C120 C135 C155
y Retaining plate Cast iron Black painted @4 Piston gasket G25
u Bushing Lead-bronze casted @5 Retaining plate gasket G55
i Valve guide Brass @6 Guide gasket N-12.5-1.5
o Tie-rod Carbon steel Chromated ∗ 7 It is used only in the case of w/ cushion type.
!0 Tie-rod nut Rolled steel Black zinc chromated
!1 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated
!2 Retaining plate bolt Chromium molybdenum steel Black zinc chromated Dimensions: According to Mounting Brackets
!3 Spring washer Steel wire Black zinc chromated External dimensions for each mounting bracket other than basic style
!4 Cushion ring A Rolled steel Zinc chromated are the same as standard type. Refer to pages 6-9-12 to 6-9-18.
!5 Cushion ring B Rolled steel Zinc chromated
!6 Cushion valve Rolled steel Electroless nickel plated
!7 Wear ring Resin
∗ With auto switch
Basic Style: CS1BQ
Width across
flats KA
øEA
ø
ø
S + Stroke
ZZ + Stroke
Bore size Stroke range

(mm) (mm) A AL B C D E EA F G J K KA M MM N P S H ZZ
1
125 Up to 1000 50 47 145 115 36 90 59 43 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 235
1
140 Up to 1000 50 47 161 128 36 90 59 43 16 M14 x 1.5 15 31 27 M30 x 1.5 35 /2 98 110 235
3
160 Up to 1200 56 53 182 144 40 90 59 43 18.5 M16 x 1.5 17 36 30.5 M36 x 1.5 39 /4 106 120 256.5
6-9-34
AW1000 SERIES MANUAL
Best Pneumatics Vol. 14
Air Line Equipment

앬 Modular F.R.L. Unit
F.R.L.
Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator: AC10 to 60 ······················ P. 14-2-5
Filter Regulator + Lubricator: AC10A to 40A ·························· P. 14-2-16 AV
Air Filter + Regulator: AC10B to 60B ····································· P. 14-2-18 AU
Air Filter + Mist Seperator + Regulator: AC20C to 40C ·········· P. 14-2-20 AF
Filter Regulator + Mist Seperator: AC20D to 40D ·················· P. 14-2-22 AR
Attachment Specifications ······················································· P. 14-2-24
IR
Accessory ················································································ P. 14-2-29
VEX
Made to Order Specifications ·················································· P. 14-2-31
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE
VY1
G
PPA
AL
Soft Start-up Valve: AV2000/3000/4000/5000 ························ P. 14-3-1

Lube Unit: AU ········································································· P. 14-3-11
Large Flow Air Filter: AF800/900 ············································ P. 14-3-13
14-2-1
F.R.L. (Filter/Regulator/Lubricator)
Precautions 1
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety
Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this
catalog, and refer to main text for more detailed precautions on every series.
Design Selection
Warning Warning
1. The standard bowl for the air filter, filter regulator, and 1. The mineral grease used on internal sliding parts and seals
lubricator, as well as the sight dome for the lubricator are made may run down to outlet side components. Please consult with
of polycarbonate. Do not use in an environment where they are SMC if this is not desirable.
exposed to or come in contact with organic solvents, chemicals, 2. Regulator and filter regulator
cutting oil, synthetic oil, alkali, and thread lock solutions. 1) Residual pressure release (outlet pressure release) is not
2. Avoid applications where pressurized air is frequently complete by releasing the inlet pressure. To release residual
introduced to and released from the standard bowl of an air pressure, select a model with a back flow mechanism. Using
filter, filter regulator, or lubricator. It may cause the bowl to be a model without a back flow mechanism makes for
damaged. Use of a metal bowl is recommended for such inconsistent residual pressure release (i.e., residual pressure
applications. may or may not be released) depending upon the operating
3. Please consult with SMC if the intended application calls for conditions.
absolutely zero leakage due to special atmospheric 2) Please contact SMC if air will not be consumed in the system
requirements, or if the use of a fluid other than air is required. for a long period of time, or if the outlet side will be used with
a sealed circuit and a balanced circuit, as this may cause the
4. Regulator and filter regulator set pressure of the outlet side to fluctuate.
Be sure to install a safety device to prevent damage or 3) Set the regulating pressure range for the outlet pressure of
malfunction of the outlet side components when the output the regulator in a range that is 85% or less of the inlet
pressure exceeds the set pressure value. pressure. If set to above 85%, the outlet pressure will be
easily affected by fluctuations in the flow rate and inlet
Caution pressure, and become unstable.
1. Select a model that is suitable for the desired purity by referring 4) A safety margin is calculated into the maximum regulating
to the SMC’s Best Pneumatics catalog. pressure range appearing in the catalog's specification table.
However, the outlet pressure may exceed the set pressure
2. Components cannot be used for applications that are outside due to a delay in the valve’s closing.
the range of specifications. Please consult with SMC when you 5) Please contact SMC when a circuit requires the use of a
anticipate using the component outside the range of its regulator having relief sensitivity with high precision and
specifications (such as temperature and pressure). setting accuracy.
3. Mist separator and micro-mist separator 3. Lubricator
Design the system so that the mist separator and micro-mist 1) Please contact SMC when the lubricator is used in high
separator are installed where there is less pulsation. A pressure frequency operations, such as in a press.
difference between internal and external pressure inside the 2) Lubrication cannot be properly performed if the operating
element should be kept within 0.1 MPa, as exceeding this value flow rate is too low. Select proper size lubricator by referring
can cause damage. the minimum dripping flow rate provided in this catalog.
4. Regulator and filter regulator 3) Avoid the use of a lubricator that causes back flow as this
Air consumption is 0.1 L/min (ANR) or less under standard may cause damage to internal parts.
specifications. Please consult with SMC, if this value is not 4) Use a check valve (Series AKM) to prevent the lubricant
allowable. from back flowing when redirecting the piping on the inlet
5. F.R.L. side.
1) When using a 2-unit combination such as AC0A, AC0B, 4. Float-type auto drain
and AC0D, secure the top and bottom of the bracket. For Use auto drain under the following conditions to avoid
3-unit, securing the bottom side of the bracket is malfunction.
recommended. <N.O. type>
2) The bracket position varies depending on the attachment (T- • Operating compressor: 0.75 kW (100 L/min (ANR)) or more
interface or pressure switch) mounting. When using 2 or more auto drains, multiply the above value
3) The standard mounting position for bracket is OUT side of by the number of auto drains to find the capacity of the
each component (AF, AR, AL, AW, AFM, and AKM). Refer to compressors you will need.
the table on page 14-2-30 for pitches and dimensions of the For example, when using 2 auto drains, 1.5 kW (200 L/min
bracket when mounting the attachment. (ANR)) of the compressor capacity is required.
4) Brackets cannot be mounted on both sides of a T-interface or • Operating pressure: 0.1 MPa or more
pressure switch. <N.C. type>
5) Please contact SMC if your wish to change the bracket • Operating pressure for AD17, AD27: 0.1 MPa or more
mounting position. • Operating pressure for AD37, AD47: 0.15 MPa or more
14-2-2
Precautions 2
Mounting Piping F.R.L.

Caution Warning AV
1. To avoid reversed connections of the air inlet/outlet, make 1. To screw piping materials into components, tighten with a
connections after confirming the “IN/OUT” mark or arrows that recommended tightening torque while holding the female
indicate the direction of air flow. Reversed connections can thread side. If the minimum tightening torque is not observed,
AU
cause malfunction. this can cause a looseness and seal failure. On the other
2. Components with a bowl, e.g., air filter, filter regulator, lubricator, hand, excess tightening torque can cause damage to the AF
threads. Furthermore, tightening without holding the female
must be installed vertically with the bowl downward so that
faulty drain discharge and dripping can be verified.
thread side can cause damage due to the excess force that is AR
applied directly to the piping bracket.
3. Ensure sufficient top, bottom, and front clearance for
maintenance and operation of each component. Refer to the Recommended Tightening Torque (N⋅m)
IR
dimensions section for the minimum clearance for each Connection
M5 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
component.
thread
VEX
Torque ∗ 7 to 9 12 to 14 22 to 24 28 to 30 28 to 30 36 to 38
4. Regulator and filter regulator
∗ After tightening by hand, tighten further approximately 1/6 turn AMR
Be sure to unlock the knob before adjusting the pressure and to
using a tightening tool.
lock it after the pressure is set.
ITV
Adjustment IC
Warning VBA
1) Set the regulator while verifying the displayed values of the VE
inlet and outlet pressure gauges. Turning the knob excessively
can cause damage to the internal parts. VY1
2) Do not use a tool on the pressure regulator knob as this can
cause damage. It must be operated manually.
G
2. Avoid excessive torsional moment or bending moment other
Caution than those caused by the equipment’s own weight as this can PPA
1. Regulator and filter regulator cause damage. Support external piping separately.
1) Be sure to check the inlet pressure before setting the outlet AL
pressure.
2) The pressure gauge included with regulators for 0.02 to 0.2
MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only. Do not apply pressure
exceeding 0.2 MPa. It can damage the pressure gauge.
3) To set the pressure using the knob, turn the knob in the
direction that increases pressure and lock the knob after the
pressure is set. If this is done in the direction that decreases
pressure, the pressure may drop from the original set pressure.
Turning the knob clockwise increases the outlet pressure, and
turning it counterclockwise reduces the pressure.
3. Piping materials without flexibility such as steel tube piping are

prone to be affected by excess moment load and vibration
from the piping side. Use flexible tubing in between to avoid
such an effect.
14-2-3
Precautions 3
Piping Maintenance
Caution Warning
1. Lubricator 5. Mist separator, Micro mist separator
Try to avoid riser piping and branch lines as much as possible 1) Replace the element every 2 years or when the pressure
on the outlet side, otherwise proper lubrication will be drop becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
compromised. damage to the element.
2. Float type auto-drain 2) Release accumulated condensate periodically before it
Drain piping should be performed under the following reaches the maximum capacity. Condensate that flows out
conditions to avoid malfunction. to the outlet side can cause malfunctions.
<N.O. type>
• Use piping whose I.D. is ø6.5 or larger, and whose length is 5
6. Lubricator
m or less. Avoid riser piping. 1) Use class 1 turbine oil (without additives) ISO VG32. Using
<N.C. type> other lubricant can cause damage to devices and result in
• AD17/27: Use piping whose I.D. is ø2.5 or larger malfunctions.
AD37/47: Use piping whose I.D. is ø4 or larger 2) For AL10 and AL20 type, replenish the lubricant after
Length is 5 m or less. Avoid riser piping. releasing the inlet pressure as lubricant cannot be properly
applied in a pressurized condition.
Caution
Air Supply 1. Perform periodical inspections of the filter element and replace
it as necessary. Check the element whenever the outlet
pressure drops below normal or air does not flow smoothly
Caution during operation.
1. When there is excessive condensate, install a device that
eliminates water such as a dryer or water separator (Drain
Check the sliding part or seat of the internal valve when a
Catch) on the inlet side of the air filter.
setting malfunction or relief leakage occur and temporary or
emergency repairs need to be made.
3. Lubricator
Check the dripping amount once a day. Drip failure can cause
Maintenance damage to the components being lubricated.
Warning 4. Float type auto drain

1) Turn the knob counterclockwise to release the drain
1. When disassembly or installation is required during the
manually. Avoid applying excessive torque to the knob, such
maintenance, repair, or replacement of a device, be sure to
as by using a tool, as this can damage an auto drain.
follow the instructions provided in the instruction manual or
After releasing the condensate, turn the knob clockwise until
safety instructions in this catalog.
it stops.
2. Perform periodical inspections to detect any cracks, scratches,
or other deterioration of the transparent resin bowl of the air 2) Air leakage or other performance malfunctions can occur if
filter, filter regulator, and lubricator or the sight dome of the premature clogging of the element or pressure drop causes
lubricator. the pressure inside the bowl to get outside the specified
Replace with a new bowl, sight dome, or metal bowl when any pressure range parameters. Check the pressure whenever
kind of deterioration is found, otherwise this can cause such an irregularity occurs.
damage.
3. Perform periodical inspections to detect dirt on the transparent
resin bowl of the air filter, filter regulator, and lubricator or the
sight dome of the lubricator. When you find dirt on any of the
above devices, clean with a mild household cleanser. Do not
use other cleaning agents, otherwise this can cause damage.
4. Air filter
1) Replace the element every 2 years or when the pressure
drop becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
damage to the element.
2) Release accumulated condensate periodically before it
reaches the maximum capacity. Condensate that flows out
to the outlet side can cause malfunctions.
14-2-4
Modular F.R.L. Unit
Series AC
F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE
VY1
G
PPA
AL
Introducing our latest F.R.L. units
14-2-5
Space-saving design Reduction
The use of compact spacer with bracket
New
reduces the total assembling space.
Model Reduction
New Old (mm)
AC10 AC1000 4 Improved visibility
AC20 AC2000 14 for lubricant drip
AC25 AC2500 14 with graduation for lubricant
control
AC30 AC3000 14
Old
AC40 AC4000 18 Graduation
AC40-06 AC4000-06 18
AC50 AC5000 18
5
6
AC55 AC5500 18
4
SMC
8
2
AC60 AC6000 18 Spacer with
9 1
bracket
Embedded pressure gauge

is a standard feature.
Ozone resistant rubber material (HNBR)
Improved relief sensitivity
Float type auto-drain with excellent

operability is used for compact
models (AF10/20).
Drain cock is easy-to-use rotary type. Improved installation
Bracket with spacer
Retainer
Knob cover
Prevents careless knob operation.
Lock cover
Lever pin
Keyhole dia.: ø8 1. Attach the component into the fitting of the spacer with
bracket.
2. Lock the lever pin into the retainer. (Temporary installation)
Lock Bolt
(provided by customers)
Part no. Model
AC20, AR20, AR20K, AW20,
AR20P-580AS
AW20K, AWM20, AWD20
AR25P-580AS AC25, AR25, AR25K
AC30, AR30, AR30K, AW30,
AR30P-580AS
AW30K, AWM30, AWD30
AC40(-06), AR40(-06),
AR40P-580AS AR40K(-06), AW40(-06),
AW40K(-06), AWM40, AWD40 3. Tighten the bolt.
14-2-6
Standard Combination
Component
Combination Model Port
size Air filter Regulator Lubricator Filter regulator Mist separator
AF AR AL AW AFM
AF + AR + AL AC10 M5 x 0.8 AF10 AR10 AL10

AC20 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20 AL20
AC25 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 AL30
F.R.L.
AC30 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30 AL30
AC40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40 AL40 AV
AC40-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 AL40-06
AU
AC50 3/4, 1 AF50 AR50 AL50
AC55 1 AF60 AR50 AL60 AF
AC60 1 AF60 AR60 AL60
AR
AW + AL AC10A M5 x 0.8 AL10 AW10
AC20A 1/8, 1/4 AL20 AW20 IR
AC30A 1/4, 3/8 AL30 AW30
VEX
AC40A 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AL40 AW40
AC40A-06 3/4 AL40-06 AW40-06 AMR
AF + AR AC10B M5 x 0.8 AF10 AR10
ITV
AC20B 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20
AC25B 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 IC
AC30B 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30
VBA
AC40B 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40
AC40B-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 VE
AC50B 3/4, 1 AF50 AR50
VY1
AC55B 1 AF60 AR50
AC60B 1 AF60 AR60 G
AF + AFM + AR AC20C 1/8, 1/4 AF20 AR20 AFM20
PPA
AC25C 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR25 AFM30
AC30C 1/4, 3/8 AF30 AR30 AFM30 AL
AC40C 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AF40 AR40 AFM40
AC40C-06 3/4 AF40-06 AR40-06 AFM40-06
AW + AFM AC20D 1/8, 1/4 AW20 AFM20
AC30D 1/4, 3/8 AW30 AFM30
AC40D 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 AW40 AFM40
AC40D-06 3/4 AW40-06 AFM40-06
Table of Contents
F.R.L. Unit Modular Style Air Filter Modular Style Lubricator
Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator Air Filter Lubricator
AC10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-5 AF10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-34 AL10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-61
Filter Regulator + Lubricator Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-39
AC10A to 40A····························· Page 14-2-16 Mist Separator Modular Style Filter Regulator
Air Filter + Regulator AFM20 to 40······························· Page 14-2-40 Filter Regulator
AC10B to 60B····························· Page 14-2-18 Micro Mist Separator AW10 to 40································· Page 14-2-67
Air Filter + Mist Separator + Regulator AFD20 to 40································ Page 14-2-43 Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-72
AC20C to 40C····························· Page 14-2-20 Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
Filter Regulator + Mist separator Modular Style Regulator AW20K to 40K···························· Page 14-2-74
AC20D to 40D····························· Page 14-2-22 Regulator Mist Separator Regulator
Attachment Specifications············· Page 14-2-24 AR10 to 60·································· Page 14-2-47 AWM20 to 40······························ Page 14-2-78
Spacers and Brackets: Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-53 Micro Mist Separator Regulator
Accessory··································· Page 14-2-29 Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism AWD20 to 40······························ Page 14-2-82
Made to Order Specifications········ Page 14-2-31 AR20K to 60K····························· Page 14-2-54
14-2-7
Simple Specials System
A system designed to respond quickly and
easily to your special ordering needs.
Simple Specials Order Specifications

1. Modular/Attachment combination & Combination order
Attachment symbols:
Piping adapter: E0
Pressure switch: IS1000
Check valve: AKM
Cross interface: Y4
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve: VHS
2. Modular products, Combination of special order
numbers & Combination order
Special orders for AF, AR, AL, AW, AF, AW
Short lead times

This system enables us to respond
to your special needs, such as
additional machining, accessory
assembly, or modular unit, and
deliver such special products as
quickly as standard products.
Repeat orders
As soon as we receive a Simple Special part
number from your previous order, we will
process the order, manufacture the product, and
deliver it to you.
Please contact SMC for further details on the Simple Specials System.
14-2-8
F.R.L. Unit Series AC
How to Order
AC 30 A F 03 DE KV 12R
Option
F.R.L. unit Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (11) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AC10 to 60
Body size
2 Metal bowl AC10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 55 60
3 Lubricator with drain cock AC10 to 60
6 Nylon bowl AC10 to 60
F.R.L.
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AC25 to 60
C With bowl guard AC25 to 60
AV
J (12) Drain guide 1/4 AC10 to 60
Model combination
N Non-relieving type AC10 to 60
Combination AU
Symbol Filter Mist R Flow direction: Right Left AC10 to 60
Air filter Regulator Lubricator regulator separator
Nil (1) (2) (3) — — W Drain cock with barb fitting:
ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
AC25 to 60 AF
A — — (2) (1) —
(13)
B (1) (2) — — — Z
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
AC10 to 60 AR
C (1) (3) — — (2)
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate
D — — — (1) (2) in ascending alphanumeric order.
IR
Note 1) The number inside ( ) indicates the Note 11) The only difference from the standard
combination order counted from the specifications is the adjusting spring for VEX
inlet side. the regulator. It does not restrict the
setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
Note 12) Without a valve function. AMR
Note 13) For thread types M5 and NPT.
This product is for overseas use only
Thread type according to the new Measurement Law.
ITV
(The SI unit type is provided for use in
Metric system thread (M5)
Nil Japan.) IC
Rc Pressure switch comes with a dual unit
N (2) NPT scale in SI (MPa) and imperial (PSI)
units. VBA
F (3) G Attachment
Note 2) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to AC25 Port size for
to 60), and the exhaust port for auto-drain Symbol Description Attachment
mounting position
Applicable
model
intermediate
air release
VE
comes with ø3/8" One-touch fitting Nil None — — —
(applicable to AC25 to 60).
AF + AR + [K] + AL AC20 to 40 AC20: 1/8 VY1
Note 3) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to AC25 to AC25: 1/4
60). K Check valve
AC30: 1/4
AW + [K] + AL AC20A to 40A AC40: 3/8 G
AF + AR + [S] + AL AC20 to 60
Port size
AW + [S] + AL AC20A to 40A PPA
Port Body size Pressure
Symbol size S switch AF + [S] + AR AC20B to 60B —
10 20 25 30 40 50 55 60
AF + AFM + [S] + AR AC20C to 40C AL
M5 M5 ● — — — — — — —
AW + [S] + AFM AC20D to 40D
01 1/8 — ● — — — — — —
AC10: M5 x 0.8
02 1/4 — ● ● ● ● — — — AF + [T] + AR + AL AC10 to 60AC20: 1/8
03 3/8 — — ● ● ● — — — AC25: 1/4
T T-interface AC30: 1/4
AF + [T] + AR AC10B to 60B AC40: 3/8
04 1/2 — — — — ● — — —
AC50: 3/8
06 3/4 — — — — ● ● — —
AF + AFM + [T] + AR AC20C to 40C AC55: 1/2
10 1 — — — — — ● ● ● AC60: 1/2
AF + AR + AL + [V] AC20 to 50
AW + AL + [V] AC20A to 40A
Residual
V pressure relief AF + AR + [V] AC20B to 50B —
3 port valve
Accessory AF + AFM + AR + [V] AC20C to 40C
Symbol Description Applicable model AW + AFM + [V] AC20D to 40D
Nil — — [V] + AF + ARK AC20B to 50B
Residual
C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AC10 to 60 V1 pressure relief [V] + AF + AFM + ARK AC20C to 40C —
3 port valve
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AC25 to 60 [V] + AWK + AFM AC20D to 40D
E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AC20 to 60 Note 6) When more than one attachment is required, order in
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator)
alphabetical order.
(5) AC10
G Note 7) Piping adapter, pressure switch with piping adapter,
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AC20 to 60 and cross interface need to be ordered separately.
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be Note 8) Please contact SMC when using a pressure switch
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen. and T-interface together for ACB.
Note 5) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: Note 9) The bracket position varies depending on the T-
1/16 for AC10; 1/8 for AC20 to 30; 1/4 for AC40 to 60 interface or pressure switch mounting. Refer to the
Pressure gauge is not mounted and is supplied loose at the table on page 14-2-30 for standard bracket position.
time of shipment. Note 10) With this combination, regulators and filter regulators
will be “with back flow function” type.
For safety, check that the outlet pressure is exhausted
and is atmospheric pressure by pressure gauge.
14-2-9
Series AC
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combination
: Combination available : Combination not available : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
F.R.L. unit applicable model
Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications
Accessory/ AC10 AC20 AC20B AC25B AC30 AC30A AC30B AC30C AC30D
AC10B AC20C AC25 to to
Optional specifications C D E G 1 2 3 6 8 C J N R WZ AC10A AC20A AC20D AC25C AC60 AC40A AC60B AC40C AC40D
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C

Accessory
Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D

Square embedded type
pressure gauge E
Round pressure gauge G
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting -1
Metal bowl -2
Lubricator with drain cock -3
Optional specifications
Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8
With bowl guard -C

Drain guide 1/4 -J
Non-relieving type -N
Flow direction: Right Left -R
Drain cock with barb fitting:
ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
Attachment
Port size Function
M5 x 0.8 Allows installation/removal of the component P. 14-2-24

Piping adapter 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 without removing the piping.
M5 x 0.8 P. 14-2-24
T-interface 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Redirects the air flow.
Pressure switch 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4

Compact switch and piping adapter P. 14-2-25
with piping adapter integrated into one piece.
Check valve 1/8, 1/4, 3/8 Prevents back flow from lubricator. P. 14-2-26
Pressure switch — Compact switch P. 14-2-27
M5 x 0.8 P. 14-2-27
Cross interface 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Allows piping in all 4 directions.
Residual pressure relief 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1 Releases residual pressure in lines. P. 14-2-28
3 port valve
Attachment Accessory Made to Order Specifications

Refer to pages 14-2-29 to 30 for interfaces and brackets. Refer to page 14-2-31 for details.
14-2-10
F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
VE
VY1
G
PPA
AL
14-2-11
F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Regulator + Lubricator
Series AC10 to 60
P. 14-2-31
JIS Symbol
AC20 AC40 Air filter Regulator Lubricator
Standard Specifications
Model AC10 AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60
Air filter AF10 AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 AF60
Component Regulator AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR50 AR60
Lubricator AL10 AL20 AL30 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60 AL60
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1
(1)
Pressure gauge port size 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.7 MPa 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (2) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l /min (ANR))
Ambient and –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
fluid temperature
Nominal filtration rating 5 µm
Recommended lubricant Class 1 turbine oil (ISO VG32)
Bowl material Polycarbonate
Bowl guard — Option Standard
Regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.27 0.73 0.91 1.00 1.74 1.95 4.17 4.25 4.34
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20 to AC60).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10.
Attachment/Accessory Part No.

Part no.
Description Model
AC10 AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60
(1)
G-27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02

Pressure gauge
Round type
1.0 MPa Square (2)
embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory
(3)
Round type G-27-10-R1 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (2)
(4)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD37 AD37N ( 7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600 Y600 Y600
Check valve (5) (6) — AKM2000-(0201) AKM3000-(0102) AKM3000-(0102) AKM4000-(0203) — — — —
Pressure switch (6) — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60
01 03
T-interface (5) Y110-M5 Y210- (02) Y310- (01) Y310-(01) Y410-(02) Y510-(02) Y610-(04) Y610-(03) Y610-(03)
Attachment
(6) 02 02 03 03 04 04

02
06
Residual pressure (6)
relief 3 port valve — VHS20- 01 02
02 VHS30- 03 VHS30- 03
02
VHS40- VHS40-06 VHS50-(10)
03
04 — —
(6) 01 02 02 02
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E300- 03
04
E400- 03
04 E500-06 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10
06
(6)
01 02 02 02
Pressure switch 03
with piping adapter — IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-3003 IS1000E-40 04 — — — —
03 04 04
06
(6)
Cross interface Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04 — — —
Note 1) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
Note 2) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.15 MPa (AD17/27).
Note 5) For F.R.L. units, port sizes not in ( ) are for standard application.
Note 6) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
Note 7) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".
14-2-12
F.R.L. Unit Series AC10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
AC10 M5 x 0.8 AC40-06 Rc 3/4 Selection

0.6 0.6
Warning
Outlet pressure (MPa)

0.5 0.5 1. Float type auto-drain
0.4 0.4 Operate under the following conditions to
avoid malfunction.
0.3 0.3
<N.O. type>
0.2 0.2 • Operating compressor: 0.75 kW (100 l/min
(ANR)) or more. F.R.L.
0.1 0.1
When using 2 or more auto drains, multiply
the value above by the number of auto-
00 25 50 75 100 125 150 00 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
drains to find the capacity of the
AV
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
compressors you will need.
AC20 Rc 1/4 AC50 Rc 1 For example, when using 2 auto-drains, AU
0.6 0.6 1.5 kW (200 l/min (ANR)) of the
compressor capacity is required. AF
0.5 0.5
• Operating pressure: 0.1 MPa or more.
0.4 0.4 <N.C. type> AR
0.3 0.3
• Operating pressure for AD17, AD27:
0.1 MPa or more.
0.2 0.2
IR
• Operating pressure for AD37, AD47:
0.15 MPa or more.
0.1 0.1
2. Use a regulator or filter regulator with a
VEX
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 back flow mechanism when mounting a 3
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) port valve for residual pressure release on AMR
AC25 Rc 3/8 AC55 Rc 1 the IN side to ensure the release of the
0.6 0.6
residual pressure. Otherwise, residual ITV
pressure will not be fully released.
0.5 0.5
Caution IC
0.4 0.4
1. When releasing air at the intermediate
0.3 0.3 position using a T-interface on the inlet side
VBA
0.2 of the lubricator, lubricant may back flow.
0.2
Therefore, releasing air that does not VE
0.1 0.1 contain traces of lubricant is not possible.
0 0
To release air that does not contain traces VY1
0 500 1000 1500 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 of lubricant, use a check valve (Series
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) AKM) on the inlet side of the lubricator to
prevent a back flow of the lubricant.
G
AC30 Rc 3/8 AC60 Rc 1
2. Mounting a 3 port valve for residual
0.6 0.6
pressure release on the IN side of the PPA
0.5 0.5 lubricator can cause lubricant to back flow.

0.4 0.4
Take measures to prevent lubricant from AL
splashing by installing a filter on the EXH
0.3 0.3 port.
0.2
3. An F.R.L. unit shipped from the plant has
0.2
its model number labeled. However,
0.1 0.1 components that are combined together
during the distribution process do not have
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 a label on them.
4. Please contact SMC when mounting a
AC40 Rc 1/2 pressure switch, T-interface, or filter
regulator on the OUT side of the 3 port
0.6
Precautions valve for residual pressure release.
0.5
0.4
Mounting and Adjustment Air Supply
0.3 Caution Caution
0.2 1. A knob cover is available to prevent 1. Use an air filter with 5 µm or less filtration
careless operation of the knob. Refer to rating on the inlet side of the valve to avoid
0.1 page 14-2-6 for details. any damage to the seat caused by dust
0
0 1000 2000 3000 Piping when mounting a 3 port valve for residual
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) pressure release on the inlet side.
Warning
1. When mounting a check valve, make
sure the arrow (IN side) points in the
correct direction of air flow.
14-2-13
Series AC10 to 60
Conditions:
Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)
AC10 AC40-06
0.3
0.25

Set point
0.25
Set point
0.2
0.2
0.15
0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)
AC20 AC50
0.25 0.25
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
AC25 AC55
0.25 0.25
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
AC30 AC60
0.25 0.25
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
AC40
0.25
Set point
0.2
0.15
0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Inlet pressure (MPa)
14-2-14
Dimensions
Pressure gauge port size
AC10/20 A P G
E F Q
øL
H
IN OUT
H
L
J
OUT
Pressure gauge
B
(Option)
K Square embedded type M F.R.L.
pressure gauge
(Option)
AV
Drain
Port size N
Air filter Regulator Lubricator Min. clearance AU
D
for maintenance
AC25/30/40/50/55/60 Pressure gauge port size
A P G AF
E F Q
øL
AR
H
C
IN OUT
IR
H
L
OUT
B Pressure gauge
VEX
(Option)
K M
AMR
pressure gauge
(Option) ITV
Port size
Drain N IC
Min. clearance
D
Air filter Regulator Lubricator for maintenance
VBA
Applicable model AC10, AC20 AC25, AC30, AC40, AC40-06, AC50, AC55, AC60
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting
VE
Optional VY1
B
B
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
G
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 One-touch 1/4 Barb fitting
fitting Width across flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604
PPA
(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications
AL
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge With auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K L øL M N P Q T B
AC10 M5 x 0.8 87 85 26 35 28 31 25 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 26 — 0 104
AC20 1/8, 1/4 126 123 36 60 41.5 43 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 65 29.5 2 (1) 141
AC25 1/4, 3/8 167 153 38 80 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 64 28.5 0 194
AC30 1/4, 3/8 167 153 38 80 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 194
AC40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 220 187 40 110 72.5 75 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 74 35 3.5 226
AC40-06 3/4 235 187 38 110 77.5 80 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 74 35 3 226
AC50 3/4, 1 282 264 43 110 93 96 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 115 84 44.5 3.3 303
AC55 1 292 279 45 110 98 96 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 84 44.5 3.3 318
AC60 1 297 280 46 110 98 101 70 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 84 44.5 3.3 318
Optional specifications (2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure
gauge is above the center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting,
B B B B with drain guide, with metal bowl, or with level
AC10 gauge), the total length (dimension for B) will
— — 85 —
vary.
AC20 — — 123 —
AC25 161 160 166 186
AC30 161 160 166 186
AC40 195 194 200 220
AC40-06 195 194 200 220
AC50 272 271 276 296
AC55 287 286 292 312
AC60 288 287 293 313
14-2-15
F.R.L. Unit Filter Regulator + Lubricator
Series AC10A to 40A

P. 14-2-31
JIS Symbol
AC20A Filter regulator Lubricator

Standard Specifications AC40A
Model AC10A AC20A AC30A AC40A AC40A-06
Filter regulator AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Component
Lubricator AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 1/2
Pressure gauge port size (1) 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (2) (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Filter regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.20 0.59 0.75 1.41 1.46
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20A to AC40A).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10A.
Part no.
Description Model AC10A AC20A AC30A AC40A AC40A-06
Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(1) 1.0 MPa (2)
Pressure
Square embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory
(3)
gauge Round type G27-10-R1 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa (2)
(4) N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
Float type auto-drain
N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500
(5) 01
Check valve (6) — AKM2000- (02) AKM3000- (01)
02 AKM4000- (02)
03
—
(6)
Pressure switch — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(5) 01 (01) (02)
T-interface Y110-M5 Y210- Y310- Y410- Y510- (02)
Attachment
(6) (02) 02 03 03
(6) 02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve — VHS20- 01
02 VHS30- 02
03 VHS40- 03
04
VHS40-06
01 02 02
(6) 03
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E400- 04 E500-06
06
(6) 02 02
01
Pressure switch with piping adapter — IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03
04
IS1000E-40 03
04 —
03 06
Cross interface (6)

Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04
for NPT.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27); N.C. type–0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
14-2-16
F.R.L. Unit Series AC10A to 40A
Dimensions
AC10A/20A
A N F
E P
øK
G
IN OUT
Q
F.R.L.
B
G
K
Pressure gauge
H
OUT
(Option)
J
Square embedded type AV
pressure gauge L
(Option)
Port size
AU
Lubricator
Drain Min. clearance M AF
Filter regulator for maintenance
D
AR
AC30A/40A A N F
E P IR
VEX
øK
C
AMR
G
IN OUT
Q
ITV
B
G
K
Pressure gauge OUT

(Option) IC
J Square embedded type L
pressure gauge VBA
(Option)
Port size VE

Drain
Lubricator
Min. clearance M VY1
for maintenance
D
Filter regulator
G
Applicable model AC10A, AC20A AC30A, AC40A, AC40A-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
(mm)
A B C D
E F G H J K øK L M N P Q B
AC10A M5 x 0.8 56 108 48 35 28 25 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 26 — 0 126
AC20A 1/8, 1/4 83 160 73 60 41.5 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 63 27 5 177
AC30A 1/4, 3/8 110 201 86 80 55 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 242
AC40A 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 239 92 110 72.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 76 38.5 1.5 278
AC40A-06 3/4 155 242 93 110 77.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 76 38.5 1.2 278
Optional specifications Note) Note) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain
guide, with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge length (dimension for B) will vary.
B B B B
AC10A — — 107 —
AC20A — — 160 —
AC30A 209 208 214 234
AC40A 247 246 251 272
AC40A-06 250 249 255 275
14-2-17
F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Regulator
Series AC10B to 60B

P. 14-2-31
JIS Symbol
AC20B AC40B
Air filter Regulator
Model AC10B AC20B AC25B AC30B AC40B AC40B-06 AC50B AC55B AC60B
Air filter AF10 AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 AF60
Component
Regulator AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR50 AR60
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size M5 x 0.8 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1
(1)
Pressure gauge port size 1/16 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Ambient and –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
fluid temperature
Regulator construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.16 0.51 0.55 0.63 1.12 1.16 2.44 2.45 2.54
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20B to AC60B).
Note 2) Not applicable to AC10B.

Part no.
Description Model
AC10B AC20B AC25B AC30B AC40B AC40B-06 AC50B AC55B AC60B
(1)
Pressure gauge
Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
1.0 MPa Square (2)
Accessory
Round type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (2)
— GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
embedded type
(4)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (7) AD38 AD38N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7) AD48 AD48N (7)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (7) AD37 AD37N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7) AD47 AD47N (7)
Spacer Y100 Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600 Y600 Y600
Pressure switch (6) — IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60 IS1000M-60
(5) 01 03
T-interface (6) Y110-M5 Y210- (02) Y310-(01)
02 Y310- (01)
02 Y410- (02)
03 Y510- (02)
03 Y610- (04) Y610- (03)
04 Y610- (03)
04
Attachment
(6) 02
02 02
Residual pressure
relief 3 port valve
— VHS20- 01 06
02 VHS30- 03 VHS30- 03 VHS40- 03 VHS40-06 VHS50- 10 — —
04
02
(6) 01 02 02
Piping adapter E100-M5 E200- 02 E300- 03 E300- 03 E400- 03
04 E500-06 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10 E600- 06
10
03 04 04 06
02
Pressure switch (6) 01 02 02 03
— IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-40 04 — — — —
with piping adapter 03 04 04 06
(6)
Cross interface Y14-M5 Y24- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y34- 01
02 Y44- 02
03 Y54- 03
04 — — —
for NPT.
Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
14-2-18
F.R.L. Unit Series AC10B to 60B
Dimensions
AC10B/20B A Pressure gauge port size
F P E
øK
N
Q
G
IN OUT
T
K
G
H
Pressure gauge
B
(Option)
pressure gauge F.R.L.
(Option)
Port size AV
Min. clearance M
Drain
D
Air filter Regulator for maintenance AU
AC25B/30B/40B/50B/55B/60B
F ø
A
Pressure gauge port size AF
P E
K
N
Q
AR
G
C
IN OUT IR
T
VEX
G
K
Pressure gauge
B
(Option)
J L AMR
pressure gauge
(Option) ITV
Port size
IC
Drain Min. clearance
M
D
Air filter Regulator for maintenance

VBA
Applicable model AC10B, AC20B AC25B, AC30B, AC40B, AC40B-06, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting VE
Optional VY1
B
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
G
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
PPA
(mm)
Standard specifications Accessory specifications AL
A B C D
E F G H J K ØK L M N P Q T B
AC10B M5 x 0.8 56 71 11 25 25 28 20 27 7 4.5 4.5 2.8 40 13.5 26 — 0 89
AC20B 1/8, 1/4 83 114 26.5 40 30 41.5 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 2.5 65 29.5 2 (1) 132
AC25B 1/4, 3/8 110 143 28 50 41 55 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 13 64 28.5 0 184
AC30B 1/4, 3/8 110 146 31 50 41 55 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 10 66 30.5 3.5 187
AC40B 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 183 36 75 50 72.5 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 12 74 35 3.5 222
AC40B-06 3/4 155 185 36 75 50 77.5 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 12 74 35 3 224
AC50B 3/4, 1 186 264 43 20 70 93 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 115 16 84 44.5 3.3 303
AC55B 1 191 277 43 20 70 98 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 16 84 44.5 3.3 316
AC60B 1 196 280 46 20 70 98 50 — 20 11 11 6.4 117.5 13 84 44.5 3.3 319
Optional specifications (2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the
center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain guide,
B B B B with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total length
AC10B — — 70 — (dimension for B) will vary.
AC20B — — 114 —
AC25B 151 150 156 176
AC30B 154 153 159 179
AC40B 191 190 196 216
AC40B-06 193 192 198 218
AC50B 272 271 277 297
AC55B 285 284 290 310
AC60B 288 287 293 313
14-2-19
F.R.L. Unit Air Filter + Mist Separator + Regulator
Series AC20C to 40C

P. 14-2-31
JIS Symbol
Standard Specifications AC20C AC40C
Model AC20C AC25C AC30C AC40C AC40C-06

Air filter AF20 AF30 AF30 AF40 AF40-06
Component Mist separator AFM20 AFM30 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
Regulator AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06
1/8 1/4 1/4
1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2
(1) 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (2) 200 450 450 1100 1100
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1 l/min (ANR))
Nominal filtration rating AF: 5 µm; AFM: 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Maximum 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (3)
Bowl guard Option Standard
Weight (kg) 0.74 0.88 0.95 1.76 1.83
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20C to AC40C).
Note 2) Conditions: Inlet pressure: 0.7 MPa; Set pressure: 0.5 MPa. The rated flow varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 3) At compressor discharge 30 mg/Nm3.
Part no.
Description Model AC20C AC25C AC30C AC40C AC40C-06
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(1) 1.0 MPa Square (2)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02

0.2 MPa Square (2)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Float type
(3) N.O. — AD38 AD38N (6) AD38 AD38N (6) AD48 AD48N (6) AD48 AD48N (6)
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N (6) AD37 AD37N (6) AD47 AD47N (6) AD47 AD47N (6)
Spacer Y200 Y300 Y300 Y400 Y500
Pressure switch (5) IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(4) 01
T-interface (5) Y210- (02) Y310-(01)
02 Y310- (01)
02 Y410- (02)
03 Y510-(02)
03
Attachment
(5) 02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve VHS20- 01
02 VHS30- 02
03 VHS30- 02
03 VHS40- 03
04
VHS40-06
02
01 02 02 03
(5)
Piping adapter E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E300- 03
04
E400- 04 E500-06
06
(5) 02
01 02 02 03
Pressure switch with piping adapter IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-40 04 —
03 04 04 06
01 01 01 02
Cross interface (5)
Y24- 02 Y34- 02 Y34- 02 Y44- 03 Y54- 03
04
Note 1) in part number for the round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Note 3) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
14-2-20
F.R.L. Unit Series AC20C to 40C
Dimensions
AC20C A Pressure gauge port size
Q G
E F
Ø
L T
P
C
H
IN OUT
H
L
J
Pressure gauge
B
(Option)
F.R.L.
K Square embedded type M
pressure gauge (Option)
Port size
AV
Min. clearance N AU
Drain Drain
D
for maintenance
Air filter Mist separator Regulator AF
AC25C/30C/40C AR
A Q G
E F Ø
L
Pressure gauge port size T IR
P
VEX
H
C
IN OUT
AMR
H
L
Pressure gauge ITV

B
(Option)
K
M IC
VBA
Port size
VE
N
Drain Drain Min. clearance
VY1
D
for maintenance
Air filter Mist separator Regulator
G
Applicable model AC20C AC25C, AC30C, AC40C, AC40C-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B
B
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
(mm)
Bracket mounting size With
Model Port size With pressure gauge auto drain
A B C D
E F G H J K L ØL M N P Q T U B
AC20C 1/8, 1/4 126 114 26.5 45 41.5 43 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 2.5 65 29.5 2 (1) 132
AC25C 1/4, 3/8 167 143 28 50 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 13 64 28.5 0 184
AC30C 1/4, 3/8 167 146 31 50 55 57 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 10 66 30.5 3.5 187
AC40C 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 220 183 36 75 72.5 75 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 12 74 35 3.5 222
AC40C-06 3/4 235 185 36 75 77.5 80 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 12 74 35 3 224
Optional specifications ( 2) Note 1) For AC20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is
above the center of the piping.
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge Note 2) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain
B B B B guide, with metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total
length (dimension for B) will vary.
AC20C — — 114 —
AC25C 151 150 156 176
AC30C 154 153 159 179
AC40C 191 190 196 216
AC40C-06 193 192 198 218
14-2-21
F.R.L. Unit Filter Regulator + Mist Separator
Series AC20D to 40D

P. 14-2-31
JIS Symbol
AC20D AC40D
Model AC20D AC30D AC40D AC40D-06
Filter regulator AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06

Component
Mist separator AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
1/8 1/4 1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8 1/2
Pressure gauge port size (1) 1/8 1/8 1/4 1/4
Fluid Air
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (2) 150 330 800 800
Nominal filtration rating AW: 5 µm; AFM: 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Weight (kg) 0.57 0.74 1.38 1.43
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for F.R.L. unit with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AC20D to AC40D).
Note 2) Conditions: Inlet pressure: 0.7 MPa; Set pressure: 0.5 MPa. The rated flow varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 3) At compressor discharge of 30 mg/Nm3.

Part no.
Description Model AC20D AC30D AC40D AC40D-06
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
Accessory
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02

0.2 MPa Square (2)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
(3) N.O. — AD38 AD38N (6) AD48 AD48N (6) AD48 AD48N (6)
Float type
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N (6) AD47 AD47N (6) AD47 AD47N (6)
Spacer Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500
Pressure switch (5) IS1000M-20 IS1000M-30 IS1000M-40 IS1000M-50
(4) 01
T-Interface (5) Y210-(02) Y310-(01)
02 Y410-(02)
03 Y510-(02)
03
Attachment
02
Residual pressure relief 3 port valve (5) VHS20- 01
02 VHS30- 02
03 VHS40- 03
04
VHS40-06
02
01 02
Piping adapter (5)
E200- 02
03
E300- 03
04
E400- 03
04 E500-06
06
02
(5) 01 02 03
Pressure switch with piping adapter IS1000E-20 02 IS1000E-30 03 IS1000E-40 04 —
03 04 06
01 01 02
Cross interface (5)
Y24- 02 Y34- 02 Y44- 03 Y54- 03
04
Note 1) in part number for the round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT.
Note 3) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27), 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
14-2-22
F.R.L. Unit Series AC20D to 40D
Dimensions
AC20D A N F
E P
øK
G
IN OUT
Q
B
F.R.L.
G
H
OUT
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge (Option)
port size
J Square embedded type L AV
Port size
AU
Drain Drain M
Min. clearance AF
D
Filter Mist for maintenance
regulator separator
AR
A N F IR
AC30D/40D E P
VEX
AMR
øK
C
ITV
G
IN OUT Q
IC
B
G
Pressure gauge
K
OUT

port size
VBA
VE
Port size
VY1
Min. clearance M
Drain Drain G
D
for maintenance
Filter Mist
regulator separator
PPA
Applicable model AC20D AC30D, AC40D, AC40D-06
With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting AL
Optional
B
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
(mm)
With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size With pressure gauge auto-drain
A B C D
E F G H J K øK L M N P Q B
AC20D 1/8, 1/4 83 160 73 45 41.5 30 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 3.2 50 63 27 5 177
AC30D 1/4, 3/8 110 201 86 55 55 41 35 — 14 7 7 4 71 66 30.5 3.5 242
AC40D 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 145 239 92 80 72.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4 88 76 38.5 1.5 278
AC40D-06 3/4 155 242 93 80 77.5 50 40 — 18 9 9 4.6 88 76 38.5 1.2 278
Optional specifications Note) Note) For optional specifications (with barb fitting, with drain guide, with
Model With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge metal bowl, or with level gauge), the total length (dimension for
B) will vary.
B B B B
AC20D — — 160 —
AC30D 209 208 214 234
AC40D 247 246 251 272
AC40D-06 250 249 255 275
14-2-23
F.R.L. Unit Series AC
Attachment Specifications
Piping Adapter (E): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1
A piping adapter allows installation/removal of the component Port size
without removing the piping and thus makes maintenance easier.
B
Center of
F.R.L. body
A D
(mm)
Model Note) Port size A B D Applicable model
E100-M5 M5 x 0.8 10 14 14 AC10, AW10, AF10, AR10, AL10
E200-01 1/8 AC20
E200-02 1/4 30 23.5 28 AF20, AR20, AW20
E200-03 3/8 AL20, AFM20, AFD20, AWM20, AWD20
Piping adapter E300-02 1/4 AC25, AC30
E300-03 3/8 32 30 30 AF30, AR30, AW30
E300-04 1/2 AL30, AFM30, AFD30, AWM30, AWD30
E400-02 1/4 AC40
E400-03 3/8 AF40, AR40, AW40
32 36 36 AL40, AFM40, AFD40
E400-04 1/2
AWM40, AWD40
E400-06 3/4
AC40-06, AF40-06, AR40-06, AW40-06
E500-06 3/4 32 40 44
AL40-06, AFM40-06, AFD40-06
E600-06 3/4 AC50, AC55, AC60, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
35 48 53
E600-10 1 AF50, AR50, AL50, AF60, AR60, AL60
Note) • in model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
• Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
∗ Factory mounting of a piping adapter on the AC models is available as a
special order.
T-interface (T): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2

Using a T-interface facilitates the redirection of air flow. E
Octagon Port size
C
B
T-interface
Center of
F.R.L. body
A D
(mm)
Model Port size A B C D E Applicable model
Y110-M5 M5 x 0.8 11 19 12 14 8 AC10, AC10B
Y210-01 1/8 AC20, AC20B
15 42 32 28 19
Y210-02 1/4 AC20C
Y310-01 1/8 AC25, AC25B
15 53 39 30 19 AC25C, AC30
Y310-02 1/4 AC30B, AC30C
Y410-02 1/4 AC40, AC40B
19 62 44 36 24
Y410-03 3/8 AC40C
Y510-02 1/4 AC40-06, AC40B-06
19 66 46 44 24
Y510-03 3/8 AC40C-06
Caution on Mounting AC50, AC55
Y610-03 3/8
• If a T-interface is used on the IN side of the lubricator, lubricant 22 81 57 53 30
AC60, AC50B
Y610-04 1/2 AC55B, AC60B
may be mixed. Use the Series AKM check valve to avoid such
possibility. Note) • in model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
• Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
∗ Refer to the attachment table on “Front matter 2” for standard port sizes
when using with AC.
14-2-24
Attachment Specifications Series AC
Pressure Switch with Piping Adapter (P)
Approx. 500
Pressure switch with piping adapter
A D
E 23
JIS Symbol
Port size F.R.L.
C
AV
B
AU
Specifications
Fluid Air AF
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa Center of
F.R.L. body
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa AR
Set pressure range (mm)
(When OFF) 0.1 to 0.4 MPa
Differential 0.08 MPa
Model (1) Port size A B C D E Applicable model IR
IS1000E-2001 1/8 AC20
IS1000E-2002 1/4 30 68 57 28 16 AR20, AW20 VEX
IS1000E-2003 3/8 AWM20, AWD20
Switch characteristics
Contact point configuration 1a
IS1000E-3002 1/4 AC25, AC30 AMR
IS1000E-3003 3/8 32 74.5 60.5 30 13 AR25, AR30, AW30
Maximum contact point capacity 2 VA(AC), 2 W(DC)
Operating voltage: AC, DC 100 V or less
IS1000E-3004 1/2 AWM30, AWD30 ITV
IS1000E-4002 1/4
12 V to 24 VAC, DC: 50 mA
Maximum operating current 48 VAC, DC: 40 mA IS1000E-4003 3/8
32 80.5 62.5 37 12.5
AC40 (2) IC
100 VAC, DC: 20 mA IS1000E-4004 1/2 AR40, AW40
AWM40, AWD40
IS1000E-4006 3/4 VBA
Note 1) in the model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication
is necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
Note 2) A pressure switch cannot be mounted on AC40-06 and VE
AW40-06.
∗ Separate interfaces are required for modular unit. VY1
∗∗ The pressure switch on AC40-06 and above and AW40-06 can
be mounted by screwing IS1000-01 into the piping adapter E500-
06-X501 or E600-06-X501 to E600-06 to 10-X501 (with top- G
face thread Rc 1/8). Products with a premounted switch are
available as a special order. Please contact SMC regarding their
availability.
PPA
How to Order AL
IS1000E 30 03
Option
Pressure switch X201 Lead wire length: 3 m
with piping X202 Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
adapter X207 MPa/PSI Dual scale
Body size X215 Lead wire length: 3 m; Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
20 For AC20 X250 Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)
30 For AC25, AC30 X251 Lead wire length: 3 m; Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)
Set pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa; Opposite-side mounting
40 For AC40-02 to 04 X252 (Left-side mounting style)
Lead wire length: 3 m; Regulating pressure range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa;
Thread type X253
Opposite-side mounting (Left-side mounting style)
Nil Rc
This product is for overseas use only according to the new Measurement Law.
N NPT (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
F G
Piping adapter port size
Port Body size
Symbol
size 20 30 40
01 1/8 ● — —
02 1/4 ● ● ●
03 3/8 ● ● ●
04 1/2 — ● ●
06 3/4 — — ●
14-2-25
Series AC
Check Valve (K): Rc1/8, 1/4, 3/8
A check valve with intermediate air release port can be easily A
installed to prevent a back flow of lubricant when redirecting the
air flow and releasing the air on the outlet side of the regulator.
B
Check valve
Bypass port size for

E redirecting air flow
JIS Symbol
C
IN OUT
Specifications
D
Model Effective area (mm2)
AKM2000 28
(mm)
AKM3000 55
Bypass
AKM4000 111 Model port size A B C D E Applicable model
Be sure to use above check valves
AKM2000 1/8, 1/4 40 40 28 11 11 AC20, AC20A
when redirecting the air flow on the
inlet side of the lubricator. Threads for AC25, AC25A
AKM3000 1/8, 1/4 53 48 34 14 13
IN and OUT ports are not machined. AC30, AC30A
AKM4000 1/4, 3/8 70 54 42 18 15 AC40, AC40A Note)
How to Order Note) Not applicable to AC40-06.
∗ Refer to the attachment table on page 14-2-12 or 14-2-16 for standard
bypass port sizes applicable to AC.
AKM 30 00 01
Check valve
Bypass port size for
Body size redirecting air flow
20 30 40 Port Body size
Symbol
size 20 30 40
01 1/8 앬 앬 —
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬
03 3/8 — — 앬
Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT
F G
14-2-26
Attachment Specifications Series AC
Pressure Switch (S)
Approx. 500
A compact integrated pressure switch can be easily installed and
facilitates the pressure detection of the line.
15 23
Pressure switch
F.R.L.
C
B
JIS Symbol
AV
AU
Center of
F.R.L. body AF
A D
Specifications (mm) AR
Fluid Air Model A B C D Applicable model
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa IS1000M-20 11 76 66 28 AC20 IR
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa IS1000M-30 13 86 72 30 AC25, AC30
Set pressure range (Off) 0.1 to 0.4 MPa IS1000M-40 15 95 77 36 AC40 VEX
Differential 0.08 MPa IS1000M-50 17 99 79 44 AC40-06
Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) IS1000M-60 22 92.5 68.5 53 AC50, AC55B, AC60 AMR
Note) Separate interfaces are required for modular unit.
ITV
Switch Characteristics How to Order
Contact point configuration 1a IC
Maximum contact point capacity
Operating voltage: AC, DC
2 VA(AC), 2 W(DC)
100 V or less
IS1000M 30 VBA
12 V to 24 VAC, DC : 50 mA
Pressure switch Accessory
Maximum operating current 48 VAC, DC : 40 mA X201 Lead wire length: 3 m VE
100 VAC, DC : 20 mA
Body size
Regulating pressure
20 For AC20 X202 range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
30 For AC25, AC30 VY1
X207 MPa/PSI dual scale
40 For AC40-02 to 04 Lead wire length: 3 m;
50 For AC40-06 X215 Regulating pressure
G
60 For AC50, AC55, AC60 range: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
This product is for overseas use PPA
only according to the new
Measurement Law. (The SI unit
type is provided for use in Japan.)
AL
Cross Interface (C): M5 x 0.8, 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Center of
Pipings are possible in all 4 directions. F.R.L. body Port size
E
IN/OUT ports are not machined for threads. Please
contact SMC if threaded (machined) ports are required.
F
B
C
F E E
Cross interface
E: 4-Rc
A E
F: Without thread D
(mm)
Model Port size A B C D Applicable model
Y14-M5 M5 23 16 14 25 AC10
Y24-01 1/8
40 40 22 40 AC20
Y24-02 1/4
Y34-01 1/8
49 43 28 48 AC25, AC30
Y34-02 1/4
Y44-02 1/4
Caution on Mounting 60 48 36 54 AC40
Y44-03 3/8
• When mounting a cross interface directly on the IN side of the Y54-03 3/8
lubricator, be sure to use a Series AKM check valve between the 72 62 40 62 AC40-06
Y54-04 1/2
lubricator and cross interface.
Note) • in the model numbers indicates a thread type. No indication is
• Factory mounting of a cross interface on the AC model is necessary for Rc; however, indicate N for NPT, and F for G.
available as a special order. • If threaded ports are required, they are available as a special order.
Please contact SMC.
14-2-27
Series AC
Residual Pressure Relief 3 Port Valve (V)
With the use of a 3 port valve for residual pressure release,
0
pressure left in the line can be easily exhausted.
ø1
øI
2-
3 port valve for
residual pressure release
G
H
F
E Lockable at the time of exhaust
JIS Symbol
(A) C
2
D
1 3
Specifications (P) (R)
Port size Effective area (mm2) ( ): Effective Area mm2 (Cv)
Model SUP
IN, OUT EXH IN to OUT OUT to EXH
1/8 10 (0.54) 11 (0.60)
A
VHS20 1/8
1/4 14 (0.76) 16 (0.87) IN OUT
1/4 16 (0.87) 14 (0.76)
VHS30 1/4
3/8 31 (1.68) 29 (1.57)
B
1/4 27 (1.46) 36 (1.95)
VHS40 3/8 3/8 38 (2.06) 40 (2.17)
1/2 55 (2.98) 42 (2.28) EXH
VHS40-06 3/4 1/2 77 (1.73) 49 (2.66)
3/4 82 (4.44) 50 (2.71)
VHS50 1/2 (mm)
1 125 (6.78) 53 (2.87)
∗ Paint color (Standard) Handle: Red, Body: Platinum silver Model A B C D E F G H I
∗∗ Use an air filter on the IN side for operating protection.
VHS20 59 20 40 34 — 45 33 28 45
How to Order VHS30 78 29 53 46 — 55 42 30 55
VHS40 107 39 70 63 22 58 44 36 63
VHS 30 F 03 RZ VHS40-06
VHS50
110
134
42
53
75
90
67
78
21
26
65
76
50
61
44
54
69
81
Residual pressure Caution
relief 3 port valve
1. Pleae consult with SMC when a pressure switch and T type
spacer are installed on the outlet of pressure release valve.
Body size 2. If a stop valve or a silencer is connected to the exhaust port of
Symbol Applicable model VHS20/30, the effective sectional area should be larger than
20 AC20 the figure indicated in the following table, to prevent
30 AC25/30 malfunction caused by back pressure. (This is not applicable to
40 AC40 VHS40 and VHS50)
50 AC50, AC60 Note) Model Effective area (mm2)
Note) When the valve is mounted VHS20 5
on AC60, the flow rate may 5
VHS30
decrease depending upon
the mounting position.
Thread type
Nil Rc
N NPT
Option
F G
Code Description
Port size R Flow direction: Right Left
Body size Note)
Z Name plate in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Symbol Port size
20 30 40 50 Note) This product is for overseas use only
01 1/8 앬 — — — according to the new Measurement
Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬 — use in Japan.)
03 3/8 — 앬 앬 —
04 1/2 — — 앬 —
06 3/4 — — 앬 앬
10 1 — — — 앬
14-2-28
Spacers and Brackets Series AC
Accessory Dimensions
Spacer (X)
D
Center of
F.R.L. body
F.R.L.
C
1
X-X AV
B
RELEASE
X
2
Y200 Y400 AU
(mm)
X
Model A B C D Applicable model
AF
Seal
Y100 6 27 15 33 AC10, AC10A, AC10B
Y200 3 35.5 18.5 48 AC20 AR
Y300 4 47 26 59 AC25, AC30
Y400 5 57 31 65 AC40 A IR
Y500 5 61 33 70 AC40-06 Spacer width
Y600 6 75.5 41 86
AC50, AC55, AC60 VEX
AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
Replacement Parts AMR

Part no.
Y100 Y200 Y300 Y400 Y500 Y600
ITV
Seal HNBR (2)
Y100P-060AS (1) Y200P-060S Y300P-060S Y400P-060S Y500P-060S Y600P-060S
Note 1) Y-100 comes with 2 O-rings.
IC
Note 2) NBR seal is used for Y100 spacer because of no direct contact with fluid.
VBA
Spacer with Bracket (Z)
VE
øG
VY1
Center of
F.R.L. body
G
C
BB (Y100T, Y200T only)

E
1
X-X PPA
EE (Y100T, Y200T only)
RELEASE
X
2
AL
E
X
G
Seal
Y200T Y400T
F J
A
H K
Spacer width
D
(mm)
Model A B BB C D E EE F G øG H J K Applicable model
Y100T 6 — 56 24.5 40.5 20 27 6.8 4.5 4.5 14 2.8 25 AC10
Y200T 3 — 67 29 53 24 33 12 5.5 5.5 19 3.2 30 AC20
Y300T 4 82 — 41 68 35 — 14 7 7 21 4 41 AC25, AC30
Y400T 5 96 — 48 81.5 40 — 18 9 9 26 4 50 AC40
Y500T 5 96 — 48 86 40 — 18 9 9 27 4.6 50 AC40-06
Y600T 6 120 — 60 112 50 — 20 11 11 31 6.4 70 AC50, AC55, AC60, AC50B, AC55B, AC60B
Replacement Parts
Part no.
Y100T Y200T Y300T Y400T Y500T Y600T
Seal HNBR (2) Y100P-060AS (1) Y200P-060S Y300P-060S Y400P-060S Y500P-060S Y600P-060S
Note 1) Y-100T comes with 2 O-rings.
Note 2) NBR seal is used for Y100T spacer because of no direct contact with fluid.
14-2-29
Series AC
Mounting Position for Spacer with Bracket
Bracket
Pressure switch: S Residual pressure
T-interface: T Check valve: K relief 3 port valve: V
SUP
SUP.
A
A
IN OUT IN OUT
A
A
Bracket
L1 L2 L3 L4 L1
(mm)
Attachment K S T V KS KT KV KST
Model L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3
AC10 — — — — — 28 48 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC20 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 41.5 61 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 57 41.5 61 43 41.5 43 43 43 41.5 61 57
AC25 55 57 57 55 57 55 76 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 76 57 55 57 57 57 55 76 74
AC30 55 57 57 55 57 55 76 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 76 57 55 57 57 57 55 76 74
AC40 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 72.5 99 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 95 72.5 99 75 72.5 75 75 75 72.5 99 95
AC40-06 — — — 77.5 80 77.5 104 77.5 80 80 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC50 — — — 93 96 93 124 93 96 96 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC55 — — — 98 96 98 124 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC60 — — — 98 101 98 129 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Attachment KSV KTV KSTV ST SV STV TV
Model L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
AC10 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
AC20 41.5 43 57 43 41.5 61 43 43 41.5 61 57 43 41.5 61 41.5 43 57 41.5 61 57 41.5 61 43
AC25 55 57 74 57 55 76 57 57 55 76 74 57 55 76 55 57 74 55 76 74 55 76 57
AC30 55 57 74 57 55 76 57 57 55 76 74 57 55 76 55 57 74 55 76 74 55 76 57
AC40 72.5 75 95 75 72.5 99 75 75 72.5 99 95 75 72.5 99 72.5 75 95 72.5 99 95 72.5 99 75
AC40-06 — — — — — — — — — — — — 77.5 104 77.5 80 102 77.5 104 102 77.5 104 80
AC50 — — — — — — — — — — — — 93 124 93 96 124 93 124 124 93 124 96
AC55 — — — — — — — — — — — — 98 124 — — — — — — — — —
AC60 — — — — — — — — — — — — 98 129 — — — — — — — — —
Attachment
K S V KS KV KSV SV
Model L1 L2 L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2
AC20A 41.5 43 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 41.5 43 43 41.5 57 43 41.5 57
AC30A 55 57 55 55 57 55 74 55 57 57 55 74 57 55 74
AC40A 72.5 75 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 72.5 75 75 72.5 95 75 72.5 95
AC40A-06 — — 77.5 77.5 80 — — — — — — — — 77.5 102
S
Attachment T V SV TV
Model L1 L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2
AC10B — 28 — — — — — —
AC20B 41.5 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 41.5 61
AC25B 55 55 55 57 55 74 55 76
AC30B 55 55 55 57 55 74 55 76
AC40B 72.5 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 72.5 99
AC40B-06 77.5 77.5 77.5 80 77.5 102 77.5 104
AC50B 93 93 93 96 93 124 93 124
AC55B 98 98 — — — — — —
AC60B 98 98 — — — — — —
S
Attachment T V SV TV
Model L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
AC20C 41.5 43 41.5 43 41.5 43 43 41.5 43 57 41.5 43 61
AC25C 55 57 55 57 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 57 76
AC30C 55 57 55 57 55 57 57 55 57 74 55 57 76
AC40C 72.5 75 72.5 75 72.5 75 75 72.5 75 95 72.5 75 99
AC40C-06 77.5 80 77.5 80 77.5 80 80 77.5 80 102 77.5 80 104
Attachment
S V SV L1: Dimensions from the end of the IN side to the center of the mounting hole for the first bracket.
Model L1 L1 L2 L1 L2 L2: Mounting hole pitch between the first and the second bracket.
AC20D 41.5 41.5 43 41.5 57 L3: Mounting hole pitch between the second and the third bracket.
AC30D 55 55 57 55 74 L4: Mounting hole pitch between the third and the fourth bracket.
AC40D 72.5 72.5 75 72.5 95 Refer to dimensions pages for dimension A from the center of the piping and the mounting hole.
AC40D-06 77.5 77.5 80 77.5 102
14-2-30
Made to Order Specifications:
Please contact SMC for detailed dimensions, specifications, and lead times.
With Digital Pressure Switch

AC20 to 60 with a digital pressure switch (Model: ISE30---L) can be ordered. A digital pressure switch is mounted on the
connection threads for the pressure gauge of the regulator or the filter regulator.
F.R.L.
AV
AU
AF
AR
IR
Specifications VEX
Part no. -X465
Model ISE30---L AMR
Set pressure range –0.1 to 1 MPa
Pressure
Set/Display resolution 0.001 MPa ITV
switch
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, Ripple (p-p) 10% or less (With reverse connection protection)
Current consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less during current output)
IC
∗ Pressure gauge port size: Rc 1/8
VBA
Applicable Model VE
Model AC20 AC25 AC30 AC40 AC40-06 AC50 AC55 AC60
1/8 1/4 1/4 1/4 3/4

VY1
Port size 3/8 3/4 1 1
1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1 G
PPA
How to Order Refer to the next page.
AL
14-2-31
Series AC
How to Order
AC 30 A F 03 D KV 12R X465 A
Switch specifications
F.R.L. unit
Symbol Output specifications
Body size A NPN output
20 25 30 40 50 55 60 B PNP output
C 1 to 5 V output
Model combination D 4 to 20 mA output
Combination With digital pressure switch
Symbol Filter Mist
Air filter Regulator Lubricator Regulator Separator (Series ISE30) (12)
Nil (1) (2) (3) — — Note 12) Digital pressure switch is not
A — — (2) (1) — mounted and is supplied
loose at the time of
B (1) (2) — — — Description shipment.
C (1) (3) — — (2) Symbol Description Applicable model
D — — — (1) (2) 1 (9) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AC20 to 60
Note 1) The circled numbers indicate the 2 Metal bowl AC20 to 60
order in which the units are
assembled. 3 Lubricator with drain cock AC20 to 60
6 Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) AC20 to 60
Thread type
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AC25 to 60
Nil Rc C With bowl guard AC20
N (2) NPT J (10) Drain guide 1/4 AC25 to 60
F (3) G N Non-relieving type AC20 to 60
Note 2) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable R Flow direction: Right Left AC20 to 60
to AC25 to 60), and the exhaust
port for auto-drain comes with ø3/8" Drain cock with barb fitting:
W AC25 to 60
One-touch fitting (applicable to ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
AC25 to 60).
Name plate and caution plate for
Note 3) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Z (11) bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AC20 to 60
AC25 to 60).
Port size ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate
Port Body size in ascending alphanumeric order.
Symbol
size 20 25 30 40 50 55 60 Note 9) The only difference from the standard
01 1/8 ● — — — — — — specifications is the adjusting spring for
the regulator. It does not restrict the
02 1/4 ● ● ● ● — — — setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
03 3/8 — ● ● ● — — — Note 10) Without a valve function.
04 1/2 — — — ● — — — Note 11) For thread type NPT.
06 3/4 — — — ● ● — — This product is for overseas use only
10 1 — — — — ● ● ● according to the new Measurement Law.
(The SI unit type is provided for use in
Japan.)
Accessory Attachment
Symbol Description Applicable model Attachment Port size for
Symbol Description Applicable model intermediate
Nil — — mounting position air release
C With float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AC20 to 60 Nil None — — —
D With float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AC25 to 60 AF + AR + [K] + AL AC20: 1/8
AC20 to 40
K Check valve AC25: 1/4
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be AW + [K] + AL AC20A to 40A AC30: 1/4
AC40: 3/8
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
AC20: 1/8
AF + [T] + AR + AL AC20 to 60 AC25: 1/4
AC30: 1/4
T T-interface AF + [T] + AR AC20B to 60B AC40: 3/8
AC50: 3/8
AF + AFM + [T] + AR AC20C to 40C AC55: 1/2
AC60: 1/2
AF + AR + AL + [V] AC20 to 50
Note 13) Please consult with SMC for detailed AW + AL + [V] AC20A to 40A
dimensions and available attachments and Residual
V pressure relief
AF + AR + [V] AC20B to 50B —
options.
Note 14) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for 3 port valve AF + AFM + AR + [V] AC20C to 40C
detailed specifications and instructions of AW + AFM + [V] AC20D to 40D
digital pressure switch. [V] + AF + ARK AC20B to 50B
Residual
V1 (8) pressure relief [V] + AF + AFM + ARK AC20C to 40C —
3 port valve
[V] + AWK+ AFM AC20D to 40D
Note 5) When more than one attachment is required, order in alphabetical order.
Note 6) Piping adapter, pressure switch with piping adapter, and cross interface need to be
ordered separately.
Note 7) The bracket position varies depending on the T-interface mounting.
Refer to the table on page 14-2-30 for standard bracket position.
Note 8) With this combination, requlators and filter requlators will be “With back flow function” type.
For safety, check that the ezhausted and is atmospheric pressure by pressure gauge.
14-2-32
Modular Style
Air Filter
Series AF
Air filter Model Port size Filtration Accessory F.R.L.
(µm)
Series AF
AF10 M5 x 0.8 AV
AF20 1/8, 1/4 AU
AF30 1/4, 3/8 AF
Bracket
AF40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 5 AR
AF40-06 3/4 IR
AF50 3/4, 1 VEX
Pages 14-2-34 to 14-2-39 AF60 1 AMR

Mist separator AFM20 1/8, 1/4
ITV
Series AFM
IC
AFM30 1/4, 3/8 Bracket
0.3 VBA
AFM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Float type auto-drain
VE
Pages 14-2-40 to 14-2-42
AFM40-06 3/4 VY1
Micro mist separator
AFD20 G
Series AFD 1/8, 1/4
PPA
AFD30 1/4, 3/8 Bracket
0.01 AL
AFD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Float type auto-drain
Pages 14-2-43 to 14-2-45 AFD40-06 3/4
14-2-33
Air Filter
Series AF10 to 60
How to Order
Option
AF 30 F 03 BD 2R Symbol Description Applicable
model
Air filter Accessory 2 Metal bowl AF10 to 60
Body size
Applicable 6 Nylon bowl AF10 to 60
10 20 30 40 50 60 Symbol Description model
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AF30 to 60
Nil — —
Thread type C With bowl guard AF20
Port size B ( 3) With bracket AF20 to 60
Metric thread (M5) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AF30 to 60
Nil Float type (4)
Rc Symbol
Port Body size C auto-drain (N.C.) AF10 to 60 R Flow direction: Right Left AF10 to 60
size 10 20 30 40 50 60
N (1) NPT Drain cock with barb fitting:
Float type (4) W
M5 M5 앬 — — — — — D AF30 to 60
F (2) G auto-drain (N.O.) AF30 to 60 ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
01 1/8 — 앬 — — — —
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 Note 3) Bracket is not assembled Name plate and caution plate for
02 1/4 — 앬 앬 앬 — — Z (6) bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AF10 to 60
(applicable to AF30 to and is supplied loose at the
60), and the exhaust 03 3/8 — — 앬 앬 — — time of shipment. ∗ When more than one specification is
port for auto-drain 04 1/2 — — — 앬 — — Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for required, indicate in ascending
comes with ø3/8" One- 06 3/4 — — — 앬 앬 — auto-drain connection alphanumeric order.
touch fitting (applicable should be ø3/8" in case Note 5) Without a valve function.
10 1 — — — — 앬 앬
to AF30 to 60). NPT thread port is chosen. Note 6) This product is for overseas use only
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 according to the new Measurement
(applicable to AF30 to Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
60). use in Japan.)
: Combination available : Combination not available

Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable filter

Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z AF10 AF20 AF30 to 60
Optional specifications Accessory
AF10 With bracket B

AF20 Float type auto-drain (N.O.) D
Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
With bowl guard -C
AF30 Drain guide 1/4 -J
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W
AF40 Name plate and caution plate for bowl in
imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
JIS Symbol
Model AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60
Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Drain capacity (cm3) 2.5 8 25 45 45 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.18 0.22 0.45 0.49 0.99 1.05
Accessory Part No.
With auto-drain Applicable model
AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60
Accessory
JIS Symbol
Bracket assembly (1) — AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS AF50P-050AS AF50P-050AS
Float type (2) N.O. — — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
P. 14-2-39
14-2-34
Air Filter Series AF10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values)
AF10
0.10
M5 AF40-06
0.10
Rc 3/4 Precautions
Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for
a
0.08 0.08
a
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)

MP
= 0 Pa
MP
a
Safety Instructions and Common
MP
MPa
M
0.7
.7
P1 a Precautions.
.5
.3
0.06 0.06
MP
Pa
=0
=0
0.1
a
M
MP
P1
0.5
P1
P1
Maintenance
P1 =
0.1
0.04
=
.3
0.04
F.R.L.
P1
=0
P1 =
Warning
P1
0.02 0.02
1. Replace the element every 2 years or when AV
the pressure drop becomes 0.1 MPa,
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 0 2000 4000 6000 whichever comes first, to prevent damage AU
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) to the element.
AF
AF20 Rc 1/4 AF50 Rc 1
0.10 0.10
AR
Pa
= 0 MPa
M
a
a
0.08 0.08
IR
MP
MP
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pa
.7
=0
a
5
.7
.3 M
a
.5
MP
.
MP
=0
=0
VEX
P1
0.06 0.06
=0
.3
a
P1
P1
0.1
MP
P1
=0
P1
AMR
P1 =
0.1
0.04 0.04
P1
P1 =
0.02 0.02
ITV
0
0 500 1000 1500
0
0 5000 10000 15000 IC
VBA
AF30 Rc 3/8 AF60 Rc 1
0.10 0.10 VE
a
MP
Pa
VY1
Pa
.7
.5 M
0.08 0.08
a
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)
a
=0
MP
0.1 M
MP
= 0 Pa
=0
P1
M
.7
0.3
G
Pa
.5
0.06 0.06
P1
P1 =
=0
a
.3 M
P1 =
MP
P1
P1
PPA
=0
0.04 0.04
0.1
P1
P1 =
0.02 0.02 AL
0 0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 5000 10000 15000
AF40 Rc 1/2
0.10
a
MP
P1 MPa
Pa
.7
0.08
Pressure drop (MPa)
=0
.3 M
.5
Pa
=0
0.1 M
=0
0.06
P1
P1
P1 =
0.04
0.02
0
0 2000 4000 6000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
14-2-35
Series AF10 to 60
Working Principle: Float Type Auto Drain
N.O. type: AD38/48 N.C. type: AD37/47 Compact auto-drain
N.C. type: AD17/27
q Bowl q Bowl
r Valve r Valve
e Lever e Lever q Bowl
w Float w Float
w Float
t Valve seat t Valve seat
e Lever
i Chamber i Chamber
y Spring u Piston r Valve
u Piston y Spring t Valve seat
o Housing o Housing y Knob
!0 Seal !0 Seal
!1 Drain cock !1 Drain cock Drain
Drain Drain
• When the pressure inside the bowl • When the pressure inside the bowl is • When the pressure inside the bowl
is released: released: is released:
When pressure is released from the bowl Even when pressure inside the bowl q, is Even when pressure inside the bowl q, is
q, piston u is lowered by spring y. released, spring y keeps piston u in its released, the weight of the float w causes
upward position. valve r, which is connected to lever e, to
The sealing action of seal !0 is interrupted,
and the outside air flows inside the bowl This keeps the seal created by the seal !0, seal valve seat t. As a result, the inside of
q, through housing hole o and drain in place, thus shutting the outside air from the bowl q, is shut off from the outside air.
cock !1. inside the bowl q.
Therefore, even if there is an accumulation
Therefore, if there is an accumulation of Therefore, even if there should be some of condensate in the bowl q, it will not drain
condensate in the bowl q, it will drain out condensate accumulation inside the bowl q, out.
through the drain cock. it will not drain out.
• When pressure is applied inside the
• When pressure is applied inside • When pressure is applied inside the
bowl: bowl:
the bowl: Even when pressure is applied inside the
When the pressure exceeds 0.1 MPa, the Even when pressure is applied inside the
bowl q, the combined force of spring y and bowl q, the weight of the float w, and the
force of piston u surpasses the force of differential pressure that is applied to valve
spring y, and the piston goes up. the pressure inside the bowl q, keeps
piston u in its upward position. r cause valve r to seal valve seat t, and
This pushes seal !0 up so that the it
creates a seal and the inside of the bowl This maintains the seal created by the seal the outside air is shut off from the inside of
q, is shut off from the outside air. !0, in place, thus shutting the outside air the bowl q.
If there is no accumulation of condensate from inside the bowl q. • When the drain is accumulated in
in the bowl q, at this time float w will be If there is no accumulation of condensate in the bowl:
pulled down by its own weight, causing the bowl q, at this time float w will be
valve r, which is connected to lever e, to Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and
pulled down by its own weight, causing valve
seal valve seat t. the seal at valve seat t is interrupted.
r, which is connected to lever e, to seal
valve seat t. The condensate inside the bowl q drains
• When there is an accumulation of out through the knob, y.
condensate in the bowl: • When there is an accumulation of
Turning knob y manually counterclockwise
Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and condensate in the bowl: lowers it and causes the sealing action of
pushes open the seal created by the valve Float w rises due to its own buoyancy and valve seat t to be interrupted, thus allowing
seat, t. pushes open the seal created by the valve the condensate to drain out.
This allows the pressure inside the bowl seat t. Pressure passes from the bowl to
q, to enter the chamber i. The result is chamber i.
that the combined pressure inside The result is that the pressure inside
chamber i and the force of the spring y, chamber i surpasses the force of the
lower the piston u. spring y, and pushes piston u
This causes the sealing action of seal !0 to downwards.
be interrupted, and the accumulated This causes the sealing action of seal !0 to
condensate in the bowl q, drains out be interrupted and the accumulated
through the drain cock !1. condensate in the bowl q, drains out
Turning drain cock !1 manually through the drain cock !1.
counterclockwise lowers piston u, which Turning drain cock !1 manually
pushes open the seal created by seal !0, counterclockwise lowers piston u, which
thus allowing the condensate to drain out. pushes open the seal created by seal !0,
thus allowing the condensate to drain out.
14-2-36
Construction
AF10/20 AF30/40 AF50/60
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
q q F.R.L.
r r q
AV
w w
e e y AU
t t AF
w
AR
r
IR
e
Drain VEX
t AMR
Drain ITV
IC
VBA
VE
VY1
G
PPA
Drain AL
Component Parts
Material
No. Description Color
AF10/20 AF30/40/40-06 AF50/60
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
y Housing — Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
Air Filter Replacement Parts

Part no.
AF10 AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60
w Filter element Non-woven fabric AF10P-060S AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S AF50P-060S AF60P-060S
e Baffle PBT AF10P-040S (1) AF20P-040S AF30P-040S AF40P-040S AF40P-040S AF50P-040S AF60P-040S
r Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
t Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SF C2SF C3SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3)
Note 1) The material of the baffle for AF10 (AF10P-040S) only is POM.
Note 2) Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly for AF30 to 60 models comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).
14-2-37
Series AF10 to 60
Dimensions
L
AF10/20 L Bracket
AF50/60 A Bracket
(Option)
D
(Option) D G F
G F K M
J
K M
E
E
H
IN OUT
C
H IN OUT
C
OUT
B Port size OUT
Port size
o s
AF10: 25
AF20: 40
Drain
B
A P
Min. clearance
for maintenance
AF30/40/40-06
L
A Bracket
(Option) D
G F
K M
J
Drain Min. clearance

H
20
C
IN OUT for maintenance

OUT
Port size
B
AF30: 50
AF40: 75
Min. clearance
Drain P
for maintenance
Applicable model AF10, AF20 AF30, AF40, AF40-06, AF50, AF60

With auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl With auto-drain (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge With drain guide Drain cock with barb fitting
Optional
B
B
B
B
B
specifications
B
N.O.: Black
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
(mm)
Accessory specifications
Standard specifications With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size auto-drain
A B C D P E F G H J K L M B
AF10 M5 x 0.8 25 67 7 25 28 — — — — — — — — 85
AF20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AF30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AF40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AF40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208
AF50 3/4, 1 90 245 24 90 — 23 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2 284
AF60 1 95 258 24 95 — 23 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2 297
Model With drain guide With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AF10 — — 66 —
AF20 — — 97 —
AF30 136 137 142 162
AF40 172 173 178 198
AF40-06 176 177 182 202
AF50 252 253 258 278
AF60 265 266 271 291
14-2-38
1. Special Temperature Environment 2. High Pressure

Special materials are used in the manufacturing of seals and Strong materials are used in the manufacturing of air filters
resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation.
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) climates.
Specifications Specifications F.R.L.
Part no. -X430 -X440 Part no. -X425
AV
Environment Low temperature High temperature Proof pressure 3.0 MPa
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80°C Maximum operating pressure 2.0 MPa AU
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Material
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM AF
Main parts Metal (Aluminum die-casted)
AR
Applicable Model Applicable Model
Model AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 Model AF20 AF30 AF40 AF40-06 AF50 AF60 IR
1/4 1/4 3/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/4
Port size Port sizes
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1/4 3/8
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1 VEX
AMR
How to Order How to Order ITV
AF 30 F 03 B 2 R X430 AF 30 F 03 B 2 R X425 IC
Air filter For high/low Air filter
temperature For high VBA
Body size Body size pressure
X430 Low temperature Optional
30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 60
X440 High temperature Symbol Description Applicable model VE
Thread type Option Thread type J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AF30 to 60
Nil Rc Symbol Description Applicable model
AF30 to 60
Nil Rc R
Flow direction:
Right Left
AF20 to 60 VY1
N (2) NPT J (5) Drain guide 1/4 N (1) NPT Name plate and
F (3) G Flow direction:
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT
R Rightt Left
AF30 to 60 F (2) G Z (6) caution plate for
bowl in imperial
AF20 to 60 G
Name plate and Note 1) Drain guide is NPT units (PSI, °F)
1/4 (applicable to caution plate for AF30 to 60 1/4 (applicable to
AC30 to 60) Z (6)
bowl in imperial
∗ When more than one PPA
AF30 to 60)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 units (PSI, °F) specification is required,
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4
(applicable to AF30 indicate in ascending
∗ When more than one (applicable to AF30 to
to 60). specification is required, 60).
alphanumeric order. AL
Note 5) Without a valve function.
indicate in ascending
Note 6) For thread type NPT.
alphanumeric order.
This product is for overseas
use only according to the new
Note 6) For thread type NPT.
Measurement Law. (The SI
This product is for overseas
unit type is provided for use in
use only according to the
Japan.)
new Measurement Law.
Port size (The SI unit type is provided
Port size
Port Body size for use in Japan.) Port Body size
Symbol
size 30 40 50 60
Symbol
size 20 30 40 50 60
Bowl
02 1/4 — — Bowl 01 1/8 — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model
03 3/8 — — Symbol Description Applicable model 02 1/4 — — 2 (4) Metal bowl AF20 to 60
04 1/2 — — 2 (4) Metal bowl AF30 to 60 03 3/8 — — — Metal bowl
AF30 to 60
8 (3)
06 3/4 — — Note 4) Only metal bowl available. 04 1/2 — — — — with level gauge
10 1 — — 06 3/4 — — — Note 4) Only metal bowl or metal bowl
Option 10 1 — — — with level gauge available.
Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — —
Option
B (3) With bracket AF30 to 60
Nil — —
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and
is supplied loose at the time B (3) With bracket AF20 to 60
of shipment. Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is
supplied loose at the time of
shipment.
Note) Please contact SMC regarding the detailed dimensions and optional availability.
14-2-39
Mist Separator
Series AFM20/30/40
How to Order
Option
AFM 30 F 03 BD 2R Symbol Description Applicable model
Mist separator Accessory 2 Metal bowl AFM20 to 40
Body size Symbol Description Applicable model 6 Nylon bowl AFM20 to 40
20 30 40 Port size Nil — — 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AFM30/40
(3)
Port Body size B With bracket AFM20 to 40 C With bowl guard AFM20
Thread type Symbol
size 20 30 40
Float type (4) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AFM30/40
Nil Rc 1/8 — —
01 C auto-drain (N.C.) AFM20 to 40 R Flow direction: Right Left AFM20 to 40
N (1) NPT 02 1/4
F (2) G 03 3/8 — Float type (4) W
Drain cock with barb fitting:
AFM30/40
D AFM30/40 ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing
04 1/2 — — auto-drain (N.O.)
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4
(applicable to AFM30
06 3/4 — — Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto- Name plate and caution plate
Z (6) for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AFM20 to 40
and 40), and the exhaust Note 3) Bracket is not drain connection should be
port for auto-drain assembled and ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is ∗ When more than one specification is required,
comes with ø3/8" One- is supplied loose chosen. indicate in ascending alphanumeric order.
touch fitting (applicable at the time of Note 5) Without a valve function.
to AFM30 and 40). shipment. Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for
overseas use only according to the new
Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is
(applicable to AFM30
provided for use in Japan.)
and 40).
Applicable mist separator
Symbol

AFM20 AFM30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z
With bracket B
Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in
imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
Model AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size 3/8 3/4
1/4 3/8
1/2
Fluid Air
AFM20 Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Nominal filtration rating 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size)
AFM30
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.22 0.44 0.49
Note 1) When the inlet pressure is 0.7 MPa. Flow rate varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 2) When the compressor oil mist discharge concentration is 30 mgf/m3 (ANR).
Accessory Part No.

AFM40 Applicable model
AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06
Accessory
JIS Symbol Bracket assembly (1) AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS
Float type (2) N.O. — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
Note 3) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubeing O.D should be ø3/8".
14-2-40
Mist Separator Series AFM20/30/40
: When saturated with oil
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) : Initial state
AFM20 AFM30 AFM40

Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)
F.R.L.
AV
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) AU
AF
Construction
AFM20 Precautions AR
IN OUT Float type auto-drain (N.C.)
Be sure to read before handling. IR
q Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4
for Safety Instructions and VEX
e Common Precautions.
w AMR
Air Supply
r
ITV
Caution
1. Install an air filter (Series AF) as a IC
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the
mist separator to prevent premature
Drain clogging. VBA
M5 x 0.8 2. Do not install on the inlet side of the
AFM30/40 dryer as this can cause premature VE
clogging of the element.
IN OUT Float type auto-drain
N.C. N.O. Maintenance VY1
q
e
Warning G
1. Replace the element every 2 years or
w when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 PPA
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
r damage to the element.
AL
Design
Caution
1. Design the system so that the mist
separator is installed in a pulsation-free
location. The difference between
internal and external pressure inside
Drain the element should be kept within 0.1
MPa, as exceeding this value could
cause damage.
ø10 One-touch fitting ø10 One-touch fitting Selection

Component Parts Caution
Material 1. Do not allow air flow that exceeds the
No. Description Note
AFM20 AFM30, AFM40, AFM40-06 rated flow. If the air flow is allowed
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver outside the range of the rated flow even
momentarily, drainage and lubricant
Replacement Parts may splash at the outlet side or cause
damage to the component.
Part no.
No. Description Material 2. Do not use in a low pressure
AFM20 AFM30 AFM40 AFM40-06 application (such as a blower). F.R.L.
w Element assembly — AFM20P-060AS AFM30P-060AS AFM40P-060AS AFM40P-060AS unit has its own minimum operating
e Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S pressure depending on the equipment
and is designed specifically to function
r Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2) with compressed air. If used below the
Note 1) Including O-Ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications. minimum operating pressure, a loss of
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AFM30 to AFM40-06 includes a bowl guard (steel band material). performance and malfunction can
occur. Please contact SMC if an
application under such conditions
cannot be avoided.
14-2-41
Series AFM20/30/40
Dimensions
AFM20 Bracket
L (Option) D
G
F
K M
E
H
IN OUT
C
OUT
Port size
B
o s
Min. clearance
Drain
45
for maintenance
A
L
AFM30/40/40-06 A Bracket
D
(Option)
G F
K M
J
E
H
IN OUT
C
OUT
Port size
B
Min. clearance
AFM30: 50
AFM40: 75
Drain for maintenance

P
Applicable model AFM20 AFM30, AFM40, AFM40-06

With auto-drain With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting
Optional
B
B
specifications
B
B
N.O.: Black
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
S
M5 x 0.8 ø10 1/4 Barb fitting
One-touch Width across Applicable tubing:
fitting flats 17 T0604
(mm)
Standard specifications
Model Port size With bracket With auto-drain
AFM20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AFM30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AFM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AFM40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208
B B B B
AFM20 — — 97 —
AFM30 136 137 142 162
AFM40 172 173 178 198
AFM40-06 176 177 182 202
14-2-42
Micro Mist Separator
Series AFD20/30/40
How to Order
AFD 30 F 03 BD 2R Option
Micro mist
separator Accessory 2 Metal bowl AFD20 to 40
Port size
Body size Port Body size
Symbol Description Applicable model 6 Nylon bowl AFD20 to 40 F.R.L.
Symbol Nil — — 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AFD30/40
size 20 30 40
20 30 40 Thread type 01 1/8 — — B (3) With bracket AFD20 to 40 C With bowl guard AFD20 AV
02 1/4 C Float type (4) AFD20 to 40
Nil Rc auto-drain (N.C.) J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AFD30/40
03 3/8 —
N (1) NPT
04 1/2 — — D Float type (4) AFD30/40
R Flow direction: Right Left AFD20 to 40 AU
auto-drain (N.O.) Drain cock with barb fitting:
F (2) G 06 3/4 — — W
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AFD30/40
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 (applicable to AFD30 and
supplied loose at the time of shipment.
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain Name plate and caution plate
AF
40), and the exhaust port for auto drain comes with connection should be ø3/8" in case Z (6) for bowl in imperial units AFD20 to 40
NPT thread port is chosen. (PSI, °F)
ø3/8" One-touch fitting (applicable to AFD30 and
40). ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending alphanumerical order.
AR
Note 5) Without a valve function. Note 6) For NPT thread type.
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to AFD30 and 40).
: Combination available : Combination not available IR
Applicable micro mist separator VEX
Symbol

AFD20 AFD30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D 2 6 8 C J R W Z AMR
With bracket B
Float type auto-drain (N.C.) C ITV
Metal bowl -2 IC
Nylon bowl -6
Metal bowl with level gauge -8 VBA
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J VE
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -W VY1
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
G
Model AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06 PPA
1/4
1/8 1/4
Port size
1/4 3/8
3/8 3/4 AL
1/2
Fluid Air
AFD20 Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Nominal filtration rating 0.01 µm (95% filtered particle size)
Outlet side oil mist concentration Max. 0.1 mg/m3 (ANR) (Before saturated with oil: 0.01 mg/m3 (ANR) or less, approx. 0.008 ppm) (2)
AFD30 Bowl material Polycarbonate
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.18 0.22 0.44 0.49
Note 1) When the inlet pressure is 0.7 MPa. The flow rate varies depending on the inlet pressure.
Note 2) When the compressor oil mist discharge concentration is 30 mg/m3 (ANR).
Accessory Part No.

Applicable model
AFD40 AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06
Accessory
JIS Symbol Bracket assembly (1) AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS
N.O. — AD38 AD38N(3) AD48 AD48N(3) AD48 AD48N(3)
Float type auto-drain (2)
N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(3) AD47 AD47N(3) AD47 AD47N(3)
Note 2) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
14-2-43
Series AFD20/30/40
: When saturated with oil
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) : Initial state
AFD20 AFD30 AFD40
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)

Pressure drop (MPa)
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
Construction
AFD20 Precautions
Float type auto drain (N.C.)
IN OUT Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for
q Safety Instructions and Common
Precautions.
r
w Air Supply
e Caution
1. Install a mist separator (Series AFM) as a
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the micro
mist separator to prevent premature clogging.
2. Do not install on the inlet side of the dryer as
Drain M5 x 0.8 this can cause premature clogging of the
element.
AFD30/40
Maintenance
IN OUT N.C. N.O. Warning
q 1. Replace the element every 2 years or when the
pressure drops becomes 0.1 MPa, whichever
r comes first, to prevent damage to the element.
w Design
e
Caution
1. Design the system so that the mist separator is
installed in a pulsation-free location. The
difference between internal and external
pressure inside the element should be kept
within 0.1 MPa, as exceeding this value could
cause damage.
Drain Selection
ø10 One-touch fitting ø10 One-touch fitting

Caution
Component Parts 1. Do not allow air flow that exceeds the rated
Material
flow. If the air flow is allowed outside the range
No. Description Note of the rated flow even momentarily, drainage
AFD20 AFD30, AFD40, AFD40-06 and lubricant may splash at the outlet side or
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver cause damage to the component.
Replacement Parts 2. Do not use in a low pressure application (such
Part no. as a blower). F.R.L. unit has its own minimum
No. Description Material operating pressure depending on the
AFD20 AFD30 AFD40 AFD40-06
equipment and is designed specifically to
w Element assembly AFD20P-060AS AFD30P-060AS AFD40P-060AS AFD40P-060AS function with compressed air. If used below the
e Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2) minimum operating pressure, a loss of
r Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S performance and malfunction can occur.
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for Please contact SMC if an application under
PSI and °F unit specifications. such conditions cannot be avoided.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AFD30 to AFD40-06 includes a bowl guard (steel band material).
14-2-44
Micro Mist Separator Series AFD20/30/40
Dimensions
AFD20 Bracket
L (Option) D
G F
K
M
E
H
IN OUT
C
OUT
Port size F.R.L.
B
AV
o s
Min. clearance
AU
Drain
45
for maintenance
A AF
AFD30/40/40-06 L
Bracket
AR
A (Option) D
G
K
F IR
M
J
VEX
E
IN OUT
AMR
C
H
OUT
Port size
ITV
B
IC
VBA
Min. clearance P
AFD30: 50
AFD40: 75
Drain for maintenance VE

VY1
G
Applicable model AFD20 AFD30, AFD40, AFD40-06
With compact With auto-drain Metal bowl with Drain cock with
PPA
auto-drain (N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting
AL
Optional
B
specifications B
B
B
B
N.O.: Black
B
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4 Barb fitting
One-touch Width across Applicable tubing:
(mm)
Model Port size With bracket With auto-drain
AFD20 1/8, 1/4 40 97 10 40 — 18 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3 115
AFD30 1/4, 3/8 53 129 14 53 57 16 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3 170
AFD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 165 18 70 73 17 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 204
AFD40-06 3/4 75 169 20 70 73 14 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 208
B B B B
AFD20 — — 97 —
AFD30 136 137 142 162
AFD40 172 173 178 198
AFD40-06 176 177 182 202
14-2-45
Modular Style
Regulator
Series AR
Regulator Model Port size Accessory
Series AR
AR10 M5 x 0.8
AR20 1/8, 1/4
AR25 1/4, 3/8
AR30 1/4, 3/8
AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
AR40-06 3/4 Bracket

Square
AR50 3/4, 1 embedded type
pressure gauge
Pages 14-2-47 to 14-2-53 AR60 1 (Except AR10)
Round pressure
Regulator with back flow mechanism AR20K 1/8, 1/4 gauge
Series ARK
Panel mount
AR25K 1/4, 3/8
AR30K 1/4, 3/8
AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
AR40K-06 3/4
AR50K 3/4, 1
Pages 14-2-54 to 14-2-59 AR60K 1
14-2-46
Regulator
Series AR10 How to Order

to 60
AR 30 F 03 BE 1N
Option
Regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR10 to 60
Body size N Non-relieving AR10 to 60
R Flow direction: Right Left AR10 to 60
10 20 25 30 40 50 60 Y Upward handle AR10 to 60 F.R.L.
AR20 Thread type Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
AR10 to 60
Metric thread (M5)

∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
alphanumeric order.
AV
Nil
Rc Note 1) This product is for overseas use only according to the new
N NPT Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in AU
F G Japan.)
Port size Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
Port Body size adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting AF
Symbol
size 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 Accessory of 0.2 MPa or more.
M5 M5 — — — — — — Symbol Description Applicable model AR
01 1/8 — — — — — — Nil — —
02 1/4 — — —
03 3/8 — — — —
B With bracket AR10 to 60 IR
04 1/2 — — — — — —
E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AR10
06 3/4 — — — — — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
VEX
AR40 10 1 — — — — —
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR10 to 40
Note) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of AMR
shipment (except option E).
: Combination available : Combination not available ITV
JIS Symbol Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Combination
Symbol
Accessory Optional specifications Applicable regulator IC
Accessory/Optional specifications B E G H 1 N R Y Z AR10 AR20 to 40 AR50 to 60
With bracket (With set nut) B VBA
Accessory
Square embedded type pressure gauge E

Round pressure gauge G VE
With set nut (For panel mount) H
P. 14-2-52/53
0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting -1 VY1
specifications
-N
Optional
Non-relieving type
Flow direction: Right Left -R G
Upward handle -Y
Name plate and pressure gauge
in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z PPA
Model AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60 AL
Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc 1/16 (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Construction Relieving type
Weight (kg) 0.06 0.26 0.21 0.29 0.44 0.47 1.17 1.22
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulator with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20 to AR60).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting the R 1/8 pressure gauge to the R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Except AR10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1) AR10P-270AS AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS (5) AR50P-270AS (5)
Set nut AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — (6) — (6)
Round type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(2) 1 MPa Square (4)
Pressure embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (4)
embedded type — GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) For 1.0 MPa.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, Note 5) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
indicate N for NPT. Note 6) Please contact SMC regarding the set nuts for AR50 and AR60.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and
pressure gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
14-2-47
Series AR10 to 60
Precautions AR10 M5 AR40 Rc 1/2

0.6 0.6
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 0.5 0.5
for Safety Instructions and Com-

mon Precautions. 0.4 0.4
Mounting & Adjustment 0.3 0.3
Warning 0.2 0.2

1. Set the regulator while verifying the
displayed values of the inlet and outlet 0.1 0.1
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
excessively can cause damage to the 00 00
25 50 75 100 125 150 1000 2000 3000
internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge included with
regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is for AR20 Rc 1/4 AR40-06 Rc 3/8
up to 0.2 MPa use only. Exceeding 0.2
0.6 0.6
MPa of pressure can damage the gauge.
Nevertheless, the gauge for the AR10 0.5
0.5
regulator with 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is

for up to 1.0 MPa use.
0.4 0.4
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
knob as this may cause damage. It must 0.3 0.3
be operated manually.
0.2 0.2
Caution 0.1 0.1

1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
adjusting the pressure and lock it after
0 0
setting the pressure. 0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Failure to follow this procedure can cause Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
damage to the knob and the outlet AR25 Rc 3/8 AR50 Rc 1
pressure may fluctuate.
0.6 0.6
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to
unlock. (You can visually verify this with
0.5 0.5
the “orange mark” that appears in the
gap.)
0.4 0.4
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
0.3 0.3
left and right a little and then push it
(when the knob is locked, the “orange
mark”, i.e., the gap will disappear). 0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
Orange mark Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR))
AR30 Rc 3/8 AR60 Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
2. A knob cover is available to prevent 0.4 0.4

careless operation of the knob. Refer to
page 14-2-6 for details. 0.3 0.3
3. Please contact SMC when using the
regulator between a solenoid valve and an 0.2 0.2
actuator.
0.1 0.1
0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
14-2-48
Regulator Series AR10 to 60
Conditions:
AR10 AR40
0.3
0.25
0.25 Set point


Set point
0.2
0.2
F.R.L.
0.15
AV
0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0
AU
1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AF
AR20 AR40-06
AR
0.25 0.25
IR
Set point Set point

VEX
0.2 0.2 AMR
ITV
0.15 0.15
IC
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) VBA
AR25 AR50 VE

0.25 0.25 VY1
G
Set point Set point
PPA
0.2 0.2
AL
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR30 AR60
0.25 0.25
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
14-2-49
Series AR10 to 60
Construction
AR10 AR20/25
t
t
q
IN OUT
e
IN OUT
e q
r r
w
w
AR30/40 AR50/60
t t q
q
e e
IN OUT IN OUT
r w
w
r
Component Parts
Material
AR10/20 AR25 to 40(-60) AR50/60
w Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-casted Black
Replacement Parts
Part no.
No. Description Materials
AR10 AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
Stainless steel
e Valve assembly AR10P-090S AR20P-410AS AR25P-410AS AR30P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR50P-410AS AR60P-410AS
Brass, HNBR
r Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR10P-150AS (1) AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
t Valve guide assembly POM 131329 AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
Note 1) AR10 is a piston and gasket (KSYP-13) type assembly.
Note 2) Assembly includes valve, valve spring and stem assembly.
14-2-50
Dimensions
AR10 to 40
Square embedded type Port size Panel fitting dimension
A pressure gauge (Option) D U
C
IN T OUT
IN OUT V
S
Plate thickness F.R.L.
L
Pressure gauge AR10 to AR30: Max. 3.5
B
(Option)
AR40: Max. 5
Pressure gauge AV
M
port
N Q
AU
K F J AF
P E Bracket
(Option)
AR
IR
AR50/60
Square embedded type Port size VEX
A pressure gauge (Option) D
AMR
ITV
C
IN OUT IC
G
Pressure gauge VBA

(Option)
L
VE
B
Pressure gauge
port
VY1
M
N
Bracket
G
(Option)
Q
PPA
K F AL
P E J
(mm)
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A C B D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR10 M5 x 0.8 25 11 58 25 26 — 0 25 28 30 4.5 6.5 40 2 18 18.5 — —
AR20 1/8, 1/4 40 26.5 94 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25 1/4, 3/8 53 28 101 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30 1/4, 3/8 53 31 116 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 36 128 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40-06 3/4 75 36 129 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50 3/4, 1 90 43 169 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60 1 95 46 176 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20 only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.
14-2-51

resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation. Also construction
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) regions. modification allows a wider regulating pressure range.
Specifications Specifications
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80°C Max. operating pressure 2.0 MPa
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Set pressure range 0.1 to 1.6 MPa
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Material
Main metal parts Metal (Aluminum die-casted)
Applicable Model Applicable Model

Model AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60 Model AR20 AR25 AR30 AR40 AR40-06 AR50 AR60
Port size 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1 Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
How to Order How to Order
AR 30 F 03 BG 1N X430 AR 30 F 03 BG N X425
Regulator Regulator
For high/low
Body size temperature Body size For high
25 30 40 50 60 X430 Low temperature 20 25 30 40 50 60 pressure
X440 High temperature
Thread type Thread type
Nil Rc Nil Rc
N NPT N NPT
F G F G
Port size Port size
Port Body size Body size
Symbol Port
size 25 30 40 50 60 Symbol
size 20 25 30 40 50 60
02 1/4 — — 01 1/8 — — — — —
03 3/8 — — 02 1/4 — —
04 1/2 — — — — 03 3/8 — — —
06 3/4 — — — 04 1/2 — — — — —
10 1 — — — 06 3/4 — — — —
Option (1) 10 1 — — — —
Symbol Description Applicable model Option (1)
Nil — — Symbol Description Applicable model
B With bracket AR25 to 60 Nil — —
G (2) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR25 to 60 B With bracket AR20 to 60
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR25 to 40 G (2) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20 to 60
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20 to 40
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are
Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for
AR25 to 30; 1/4 for AR40 to 60
Note 2) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for
Pressure gauge type: G43
Option AR20 to 30; 1/4 for AR40 to 60
1 (3) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR25 to 60 Option
N Non-relieving type AR25 to 60 Symbol Description Applicable model
R Flow direction: Right Left AR25 to 60 N Non-relieving AR20 to 60
Y Upward handle AR25 to 60 R Flow direction: Right Left AR20 to 60
Z (4) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR25 to 60 Y Upward handle AR20 to 60
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20 to 60
alphanumeric order.
Note 3) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the ascending alphanumeric order.
setting of 0.2 MPa or more. Note 3) For thread type NPT.
Note 4) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only according to the
This product is for overseas use only according to the new new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in use in Japan.)
Japan.)
Note 5) Please consult with SMC for detailed dimensions and available attachments and options.
Note 6) Comes with type T handle.
14-2-52
Regulator Series AR20(K) to AR60(K)
3. With Digital Pressure Switch

Digital pressure switch (ISE30---L) is supplied loose for mounting on pressure gauge connection port.
Specifications Applicable Model F.R.L.

Part no. -X465 Model AR20(K) AR25(K) AR30(K) AR40(K) AR40(K)-06 AR50(K) AR60(K)
Model ISE30---L Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1 AV
Set pressure range (MPa) –0.1 to 1
Pressure Set and display resolution (MPa) 0.001
AU
switch 12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, Ripple (p-p) 10%
Power supply voltage
or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Power consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output) AF
∗ Pressure gauge port size: 1/8
AR
IR
VEX
AMR
ITV
How to Order IC
AR 30 K F 03 B 1N X465 A VBA
Regulator Switch specifications
Symbol Output specifications
VE
Body size With digital pressure switch
(4)
A NPN output
20 25 30 40 50 60 (Series ISE30) B PNP output
VY1
Note 4) Digital pressure switch is not assembled C 1 to 5 V output
and are supplied loose at the time of D 4 to 20 mA output G
Back flow mechanism shipment.
Note 5) Please consult with SMC for detailed
Nil Without back flow mechanism PPA
dimensions and available attachments
K With back flow mechanism and options.
Note 6) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for
detailed specifications and instructions AL
Thread type
of digital pressure switch.
Nil Rc
N NPT Option
F G Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR20(K) to 60(K)
N Non-relieving type AR20(K) to 60(K)
Port size
R Flow direction: Right Left AR20(K) to 60(K)
Port Body size Y Upward handle AR20(K) to 60(K)
Symbol size
20 25 30 40 50 60 Z (3) Name plate and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AR20(K) to 60(K)
01 1/8 — — — — — ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
02 1/4 — — alphanumeric order.
Note 2) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting
03 3/8 — — — spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or
04 1/2 — — — — — more.
06 3/4 — — — — Note 3) For thread type NPT.
This product is for overseas use only according to the new
10 1 — — — — Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Option (1)
Nil — —
B With bracket AR20(K) to 60(K)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20(K) to 40(K)
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of
shipment.
14-2-53
Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
Series AR20K to 60K

How to Order
Regulator with a built-in
mechanism that ensures a
quick release of the outlet air
AR 30 K F 03 BE 1N
pressure (built-in check valve Regulator Option
with back flow mechanism). Body size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (2) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AR20K to 60K
20 25 30 40 50 60
N Non-relieving AR20K to 60K
With back flow mechanism R Flow direction: Right Left AR20K to 60K
Note) AR10 comes with a back flow Y Upward handle AR20K to 60K
mechanism as a standard feature. Name plate and pressure
If the set pressure is below 0.15 Z (3) gauge in imperial units AR20K to 60K
MPa, back flow may not occur. (PSI, °F)
When a backflow mechanism is
∗ When more than one specification is
required with a set pressure of less
required, indicate in alphanumeric
than 0.15 MPa, please ccontact
order.
AR20K SMC.
Note 2) The only difference from the
AR40K Thread type standard specifications is the
Example 1) adjusting spring for the
When the pressure in the rear and Nil Rc regulator. It does not restrict
the front of the cylinder differs: N NPT the setting of 0.2 MPa or
Circuit diagram F G more.
Port size Note 3) For NPT thread type.
Port Body size This product is for overseas
Symbol use only according to the new
size 20 25 30 40 50 60
Measurement Law. (The SI
01 1/8 — — — — —
unit type is provided for use in
Example 2) 02 1/4 — — Japan.)
When the air supply is cut off and 03 3/8 — — — Accessory (1)
releasing the inlet pressure to the 04 1/2 — — — — —
atmosphere, the residual pressure Symbol Description Applicable model
06 3/4 — — — —
release of the outlet side can be Nil — —
ensured for a safety purpose. 10 1 — — — —
B With bracket AR20K to 60K
With square embedded type
Circuit diagram JIS Symbol E pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AR20K to 60K
G With round pressure gauge AR20K to 60K
(With limit indicator)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AR20K to 40K
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are

supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
option E).
Model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Set pressure range (1) 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Ambient and fluid temperature –5° to 60°C (With no freezing)
Weight (kg) 0.26 0.21 0.30 0.45 0.48 1.17 1.22
∗ AR10 comes with a back flow mechanism as a standard feature. Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a
square embedded type pressure gauge (AR20K to AR60K).
Accessory Part No.
Accessory Applicable model AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Bracket assembly (1) AR20P-270AS AR25P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR50P-270AS (3) AR50P-270AS (3)
Set nut AR20P-260S AR25P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S — (5) — (5)
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (4)
embedded type GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection Note 4) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for NPT. Note 5) Please contact SMC regarding the set nut for AR50K and 60K.
Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure
gauge supply for PSI unit specifications.
14-2-54
Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AR20K to 60K
Working Principle
Precautions
A-A
A
w Be sure to read before handling.
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4
for Safety Instructions and
OUT
Common Precautions.
1
Mounting & Adjustment

IN
F.R.L.
2
SMC Warning
1. Set the regulator while verifying the AV
displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the regulator AU
A
knob excessively can cause damage to
the internal parts.
2. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator AF
knob as this may cause damage. It must
be operated manually. AR
r Caution IR
adjusting the pressure and lock it after VEX
IN OUT
Figure 1
setting the pressure.
(Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)
w Normal Failure to follow this procedure can cause
damage to the knob and the outlet AMR
pressure may fluctuate.
q ITV
e Inlet pressure Pressure in
(IN) diaphragm chamber IC
Figure 3 VBA
Orange mark
Figure 2 VE
Back flow
VY1
IN OUT • Pull the pressure regulator knob to
unlock. (You can visually verify this with
G
Inlet pressure Pressure in the “orange mark” that appears in the
(IN) diaphragm chamber
gap.) PPA
• Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
When the knob is not easily locked, turn it AL
left and right a little and then push it
(when the knob is locked, the “orange
mark”, i.e., the gap will disappear).
2. A knob cover is available to prevent
When the inlet pressure (P1) is higher than the regulating pressure, the check valve
page 14-2-6 for details.
w closes and operates as a normal regulator (Figure 1).
When the inlet pressure (P1) is shut off and released, the check valve w opens and
the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q is released into the inlet side (Figure 2). Maintenance
This lowers the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q and the force generated by the
pressure regulator spring e lifts the diaphragm. Valve r opens through the stem, Warning
and the outlet pressure is released to the inlet side (Figure 3). 1. When using the regulator between a
solenoid valve and an actuator, check the
pressure gauge periodically.
Sudden pressure fluctuations may shorten
the durability of the pressure gauge. A
digital pressure gauge is recommended
for such situation or as deemed
necessary.
14-2-55
Series AR20K to 60K
AR20K Rc 1/4 AR40K-06 Rc 3/8

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
AR25K Rc 3/8 AR50K Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
0 500 1000 1500 0 5000 10000
AR30K Rc 3/8 AR60K Rc 1

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0 5000 10000
0 500 1000 1500 0
AR40K Rc 1/2
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
00
1000 2000 3000
14-2-56
Conditions:
AR20K AR40K-06
0.25 0.25

Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
F.R.L.
AV
0.15 0.15
0 0
AU
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AF
AR25K AR50K
AR
0.25 0.25
IR
Set point Set point

VEX
0.2 0.2 AMR
ITV
0.15 0.15
IC
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
1
VBA
AR30K AR60K VE

0.25 0.25 VY1
G
Set point Set point
PPA
0.2 0.2
AL
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AR40K
0.25
Set point
0.2
0.15
00 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
14-2-57
Series AR20K to 60K
Construction
AR20K to 60K
A-A
A
OUT
1
IN
SMC
e t
IN OUT
r
q
Component Parts
Material
AR20K AR25K to 40K(-06) AR50K/60K
w Bonnet Polyacetal Aluminum die-casted Black
Replacement Parts
Part no.
AR20K AR25K AR30K AR40K AR40K-06 AR50K AR60K
Stainless steel (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
e Valve assembly AR20P-410AS AR25P-410AS AR30P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR40P-410AS AR50P-410AS AR60P-410AS
Brass, HNBR
Weatherability
r Diaphragm assembly AR20P-150AS AR25P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR50P-150AS AR50P-150AS
NBR
t Valve guide assembly POM AR20P-050AS AR25P-050AS AR30P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR40P-050AS AR50P-050AS AR60P-050AS
(1) —
y Check valve assembly AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS
Note 1) Check valve construction includes a check valve cover and 2 screws.
Note 2) Assembly includes valve, valve spring and stem assembly.
14-2-58
Dimensions
AR20K to 40K
Square embedded type Port size Panel fitting dimension
A pressure gauge (Option) D U
C
IN OUT IN T OUT
V
G
F.R.L.
S
Plate thickness
L
Pressure gauge
B
(Option) AR20K to AR30K: Max. 3.5
AR40K: Max. 5 AV
M
Pressure gauge
port size
Bracket
N Q
(Option) AU
K F J AF
P E
AR
IR
AR50K/60K
VEX
A pressure gauge (Option) D
AMR
ITV
C
IN OUT IC
G
VBA
Pressure gauge
L
(Option)
VE
B
Pressure gauge
VY1
M
port size
N Port size Bracket

(Option)
G
Q
PPA
K F J AL
P E
(mm)
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount
A B C D E F G J K L M N P Q S T U V
AR20K 1/8, 1/4 40 94 26.5 57 65 29.5 2 Note) 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 25 28.5 14 6
AR25K 1/4, 3/8 53 101 28 55 64 28.5 0 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 26 32.5 16 6
AR30K 1/4, 3/8 53 116 31 59 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7
AR40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 128 36 68 74 35 3.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7
AR40K-06 3/4 75 129 36 68 74 35 3 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7
AR50K 3/4, 1 90 169 43 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
AR60K 1 95 176 46 87 84 44.5 3.3 70 66 65.8 11 13 90 3.2 — — — —
Note) For AR20K only, the position of the pressure gauge is above the center of the piping.
14-2-59
Modular Style
Lubricator
Series AL
Lubricator Model Port size Accessory
Series AL
AL10 M5 x 0.8
AL20 1/8, 1/4
AL30 1/4, 3/8
AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 Bracket
AL40-06 3/4
AL50 3/4, 1
Pages 14-2-61 to 14-2-65 AL60 1
14-2-60
Lubricator
Series AL10 to 60
How to Order
AL 30 F 03 B 2R
Lubricator Option
Body size
1 1000 cm3 tank AL30 to 60
F.R.L.
10 20 30 40 50 60 10 1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit ON) AL30 to 60
Thread type 11 1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit OFF) AL30 to 60 AV
2 Metal bowl AL10 to 60
Metric thread
Nil (M5)
3 With drain cock AL10 to 60 AU
Rc
6 Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) AL10 to 60
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AL30 to 60
N NPT
C With bowl guard AL20
AF
AL20 F G
Port size R Flow direction: Right Left AL10 to 60
Port Body size 3W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AL30 to 60 AR
Symbol
size 10 20 30 40 50 60 Z (2) Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) AL10 to 60
M5 M5 — — — — — ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order. IR
Accessory
01 1/8 — — — — — Note 2) For M5 and NPT thread types.
02 1/4 — — — Symbol Description Applicable model This product is for overseas use only
03 3/8 — — — — Nil — — according to the new Measurement
Law. (The SI unit type is provided for
VEX
04 1/2 — — — — — — B (1) With bracket AL20 to AL 60 use in Japan.)
06 3/4 — — — — — Note 1) Bracket is not assembled and is
AMR
10 1 — — — —
Accessory/Optional Specifications Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread ITV
Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable lubricator

Accessory/Optional specifications B 1 10 11 2 3 6 8 C R 3W Z AL10 AL20 AL30 to 60 IC
Accessory With bracket B
AL40 1000 cm3 tank -1 VBA
1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit ON) -10
1000 cm3 tank with level switch (Lowest limit OFF) -11
Metal bowl -2 VE
JIS Symbol
With drain cock -3
Nylon bowl (Including sight dome) -6 VY1
With bowl guard -C G
Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing -3W
Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
PPA
Note) -1, -10, -11 are for a metal bowl with level gauge that comes with drain cock.
AL
Model AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
Port size M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 3/4, 1 1
Fluid Air
Note)
1/4: 30 1/4: 30
Minimum dripping flow rate (l/min (ANR)) 4 15 3/8: 40 50 190 220
3/8: 40 1/2: 50
Oil capacity (cm3) 7 25 55 135 135 135 135
Weight (kg) 0.07 0.20 0.24 0.47 0.52 1.06 1.13
Note 1) • The flow rate is 5 drips/min under the following conditions: Inlet pressure of 0.5 MPa; Class 1
turbine oil (ISO VG32); Temperature at 20°C; Oil adjustment valve fully open.
• Use air consumption flow rate for minimum dripping flow rate.
Accessory Part No.
Accessory Applicable model AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
Bracket assembly Note) — AF20P-050AS AF30P-050AS AF40P-050AS AF40P-070AS AF50P-050AS AF50P-050AS
∗ The part number for bracket assembly for 1000 cm3 is AF50P-050AS (applicable to AL30 to AL60).
Note) Assembly includes a bracket and 2 mounting screws.
14-2-61
Series AL10 to 60
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa Working Principle: Type AL10
AL10 M5 AL40-06 Rc 3/4
0.1
0.1
turn
open
turn
r ns
turns
Pa
Pa
a
MP
5 tu
0.5 M
0.5
0.3 M
n 1.0
Needle fully
n 2.0
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)

0.08
.7
0.08 n 1.
Open
=0
Ope
MPa
Ope
P1 =
Ope
P1 =
P1
P1 = 0.1
0.06 0.06
0.04 0.04
0.02 0.02
Conditions: P1 = 0.5 MPa
Needle: One side fully open
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 0 2000 4000 6000 8000
AL20 Rc 1/4 AL50 Rc 1

0.1 0.1
Pa
Pa
Pa
Pa
M A portion of the air introduced from the IN

Pa
M
.7 M
.3
side pressurizes the lubricant inside the
5
7
.5 M
0.
0.
=0
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)
0.08 0.08
=0
bowl. The remainder of the air passes

=
=
P1
=0
P1
P1
a
Pa
through the needles o, and flows to the

MP
P1
0.1 M
P1
OUT side. The pressure differential between

a
0.06
0.3
0.06
MP
the inside of the bowl and the inside of the

P1 =
P1 =
.1
sight dome w, causes the lubricant inside

=0
0.04 0.04
the bowl into the oil passage !0 . The
P1
lubricant drips from the dripping tube !1, and

0.02 0.02 lubricate the OUT side. The amount of
lubricant is adjusted by the needle o, on the
0
front face. Turning the needle clockwise
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 0 5000 10000 15000 increases the amount of the lubricant, and
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) turning it counterclockwise until fully opened
shuts off the lubricant. The needle on the
side that is not used should be left fully
AL30 Rc 3/8 AL60 Rc 1
opened.
0.1 0.1
Note) The operating principle for AL20 to 60
types is different from that of AL10
Pressure drop (MPa)
Pressure drop (MPa)
0.08 0.08 Pa
Pa
M
Precautions
Pa
a
M
Pa
Pa
7
0.
MP
Pa
5
M
0.
=
3
0.1 M
7
5
.3
0.
P1
=
0.06 0.06
0.
0.
=0
P1
=

=
Pa
=
P1
P1
P1
P1
M
P1 =
Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4

.1
0.04 0.04
=0
for Safety Instructions and

P1
Common Precautions.
0.02 0.02
Selection
0 0
0 2000
4000 6000 0 5000
10000 15000
Warning
Piping
1. Do not introduce air from the outlet side
as this can damage the damper.
AL40 Rc 1/2
0.1 Caution
1. Use a check valve (Series AKM) to
prevent back flow of the lubricant when
Pressure drop (MPa)
0.08
redirecting the air flow before the
a
MPa
MPa
MP
MP
lubricator.
.7
0.5
P1 = 0.1
0.06
0.3
Maintenance
=0
P1 =
P1 =
P1
0.04 Warning
1. For AL 10 and AC20 type, replenish the
0.02 lubricant after releasing the inlet pressure.
Lubrication cannot take place under a
0
pressurized condition.
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Caution
1. Check the dripping amount once a day.
Drip failure can cause damage to the
components that need lubrication.
14-2-62
Lubricator Series AL10 to 60
Construction
AL10 AL20
JIS Symbol
w
w q e
q t
IN OUT IN OUT
F.R.L.
y y
u r AV
u AU
AF
AL30/40 AL50/60 AR
IR
w w
qe qe VEX
t t AMR
IN OUT IN OUT
ITV
y r
r i IC
u
VBA
VE
VY1
y
u
G
PPA
AL
Component Parts
Material
AL10/20 AL30/40/40-06 AL50/60
i Housing — Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver
Replacement Parts
Part no.
AL10 AL20 AL30 AL40 AL40-06 AL50 AL60
w Sight dome assembly PC AL10P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS AL20P-080AS
e Lubrication plug assembly — — AL20P-060AS AL30P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS AL40P-060AS
r Damper retainer assembly (1) — — AL20P-030AS AL30P-030AS AL40P-030AS AL40P-030AS AL50P-030AS AL60P-030AS
t Damper assembly Synthetic resin — AL20P-040S AL30P-040S AL40P-040S AL40P-040S AL50P-040AS AL60P-040AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SL C2SL C3SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3) C4SL (3)
Note 1) Add “-1” at the end of the part number when ordering a damper retainer assembly for 1000 cm3.
Example) AL30P-030AS-1
Note 2) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly for AL30 to AL60 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).
14-2-63
Series AL10 to 60
Dimensions
AL10 L AL20
D
G Bracket
(Option) F
K Port size M
A Port size
C
C
J
H
IN OUT IN
OUT
OUT
B
OUT
B
P Min. clearance
R
for maintenance Min. clearance

A for maintenance
R
AL30/40 AL50/60
L D
L Bracket D Port size
G Bracket F
G (Option) Port size F M
K (Option)
K M
E
J
C
C
H
J
H
IN OUT IN OUT
OUT OUT
B
A P B
R
Min. clearance
for maintenance
A Min. clearance
R
for maintenance
Applicable model AL10, AL20 AL30, AL40, AL40-06, AL50, AL60

Metal bowl with Metal bowl with Metal bowl with Metal bowl with drain Drain cock with
With drain cock drain cock Metal bowl With drain cock level gauge drain cock cock & level gauge barb fitting
Optional
specifications B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Barb fitting
Applicable tubing: T0604
(mm)
Model Port size Bracket mounting size
A B C D P R E F G H J K L M
AL10 M5 x 0.8 25 77 26 25 28 35 — — — — — — — —
AL20 1/8, 1/4 40 115 36 40 — 60 — 30 27 22 5.4 8.4 40 2.3
AL30 1/4, 3/8 53 142 38 53 57 80 — 41 40 23 6.5 8 53 2.3
AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 176 40 70 73 110 — 50 54 26 8.5 10.5 70 2.3
AL40-06 3/4 75 176 38 70 73 110 — 50 54 25 8.5 10.5 70 2.3
AL50 3/4, 1 90 250 41 90 — 110 47 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2
AL60 1 95 268 45 95 — 110 47 70 66 35 11 13 90 3.2
Model With drain cock With barb fitting Metal bowl Metal bowl with drain cock Metal bowl with level gauge Metal bowl with drain cock & level gauge
B B B B B B
AL10 85 — 82 85 — —
AL20 123 — 121 124 — —
AL30 153 161 142 166 162 186
AL40 187 195 176 200 196 220
AL40-06 187 195 176 200 196 220
AL50 261 269 250 274 270 294
AL60 279 287 268 292 288 312
14-2-64
Lubricator Series AL10 to 60
Dimensions
Option: 1000 cm3 tank
106
90
E Bracket Port size 106
66 (Option) 70
13 3.2
F.R.L.
11
P
H
IN OUT AV
OUT AU
AF
AR
IR
With float switch
VEX
B
Specifications
Contact capacity: 15 VA(AC)

15 W(DC)
Contact point: 1a, 1b
AMR
ITV
IC
VBA
B
VE
VY1
for maintenance
Min. clearance
210
Float switch
PPA
G 1/2 Part no: IS400-1 to 2
AL
210
for maintenance
Min. clearance
(mm)
With bracket With float switch
Model Port size B C E
H P B
AL30 1/4, 3/8 324 38 53 25 — 374
AL40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 333 40 70 18 — 383
AL40-06 3/4 333 38 75 16 — 383
AL50 3/4, 1 332 41 90 35 47 382
AL60 1 335 45 95 35 47 385
14-2-65
Modular Style
Filter Regulator
Series AW
Filter regulator Model Port size Filtration Accessory
Series AW
AW10 M5 x 0.8
AW20 1/8, 1/4
AW30 1/4, 3/8
AW40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Pages 14-2-67 to 14-2-73 AW40-06 3/4
Filter regulator with 5 µm

back flow mechanism AW20K 1/8, 1/4
Series AWK
AW30K 1/4, 3/8
AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Bracket
Square embedded
AW40K-06 3/4 type pressure gauge
Pages 14-2-74 to 14-2-77 (Except AR10)
Mist separator Round pressure
regulator gauge
Series AWM AWM20 1/8, 1/4 Panel mount
AWM30 1/4, 3/8

0.3 µm
(95% filtered
particle size)
AWM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Pages 14-2-78 to 14-2-81

Micro mist separator
regulator
Series AWD AWD20 1/8, 1/4
AWD30 1/4, 3/8

0.01 µm
(95% filtered
particle size)
AWD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2
Pages 14-2-82 to 14-2-85
14-2-66
Filter Regulator
Series AW10 to 40
Integrated filter and regulator units save
space and require less piping.
Direct operated, relieving type
JIS Symbol F.R.L.

AV
P. 14-2-72 AW20 AU
How to Order AW40
AF
AR
AW 30 F 03 BE 1N
Filter Option IR
regulator Symbol Description Applicable model
Body size 1 (5) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW10 to 40 VEX
10 20 30 40 2 Metal bowl AW10 to 40
6 Nylon bowl AW10 to 40 AMR
Thread type 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30/40
C With bowl guard AW20
Nil
Metric thread (M5)
J (6) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40
ITV
Rc
N (1) NPT N Non-relieving AW10 to 40
F (2) G R Flow direction: Right Left AW10 to 40 IC

Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30/40
(applicable to AW30 and Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW10 to 40 VBA
40), and the exhaust ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
port for auto- drain Note 5) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
comes with ø3/8" One- the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more. VE
touch fitting (applicable Note 6) Without a valve function.
to AW30 and AW40).
Note 7) For M5 and NPT thread types. This product is for overseas use only according to
the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
VY1
(applicable to AW30 and Accessory (3)
AW40). Symbol Description Applicable model G

Nil — —
Port size
B With bracket AW10 to 40 PPA
Port Body size
Symbol C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AW10 to 40
size 10 20 30 40
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AW30/40
M5 M5 — — — E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
AL
01 1/8 — — — With round pressure gauge (Without limit indicator) AW10
02 1/4 — G
With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20 to 40
03 3/8 — — H With set nut (For panel mount) AW10 to 40
04 1/2 — — — Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
06 3/4 — — — options C, D and E).
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is
chosen.
Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications Applicable filter regulator

Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z AW10 AW20 AW30 to 40
With bracket (With set nut) B
Accessory

Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) -Z
14-2-67
Series AW10 to 40
Model AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Port sizes M5 x 0.8 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc 1/16 (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Drain capacity (cm3) 2.5 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.09 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type pressure gauge (AW20 to AW40).
Note 2) Use a bushing (part no: 131368) when connecting R 1/8 pressure gauge to R 1/16 gauge port.
Note 3) Not applicable to AW10.
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Accessory
Bracket assembly (1) AR10P-270AS AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS
Set nut AR10P-260S AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S
Round Type G27-10-R1 G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
(2) 1.0 MPa (4)
Pressure Square embedded type — GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
gauge Round Type G27-10-R1 (3) G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa (4)
(5)
Float type N.O. — — AD38 AD38N (6)
AD48 AD48N (6)
AD48 AD48N(6)
auto-drain N.C. AD17 AD27 AD37 AD37N (6)
AD47 AD47N (6)
AD47 AD47N(6)
Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; however, indicate N for
NPT. Please contact SMC regarding the connection thread NPT and supply of the pressure gauge for PSI unit specifications.
Note 3) For 1 MPa.
Note 5) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD17/27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Please contact SMC regarding the
specifications for PSI unit and °F.
Precautions
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions.
Selection Mounting & Adjustment
Warning Warning • Pull the pressure regulator knob to

1. Residual pressure release (outlet 1. Set the regulator while checking the unlock. (You can visually verify this
pressure release) is not completed by displayed values of the inlet and outlet with the “orange mark” that appears in
releasing inlet pressure. To release pressure gauges. Turning the knob the gap.)
residual pressure, use a filter regulator excessively can cause damage to the • Push the pressure regulator knob to
with a back flow mechanism. internal parts. lock. When the knob is not easily
2. The pressure gauge indicated with locked, turn it left and right a little and
regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is then push it (when the knob is locked,
for 0.2 MPa use only. Exceeding 0.2 the “orange mark” will disappear).
Maintenance MPa of pressure can damage the
gauge.
Warning 3. Do not use tools on the pressure
Orange mark
1. Replace the element every 2 years or regulator knob as this may cause
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 damage. It must be operated manually.
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent
damage to the element. Caution
adjusting the pressure and lock it after
setting the pressure. 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
Failure to follow this procedure can careless operation of the knob. Refer to
cause damage to the knob and the page 14-2-6 for details.
outlet pressure may fluctuate.
14-2-68
Filter Regulator Series AW10 to 40
AW10 M5 AW30 Rc 3/8 AW40-06 Rc 3/4

0.6 0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5 0.5

0.4 0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3 0.3
F.R.L.
0.2 0.2 0.2
AV
0.1 0.1 0.1
0 0 0
AU
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 0 500 1000 1500 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
AF
AW20 Rc 1/4 AW40 Rc 1/2
0.6 0.6
AR
0.5 0.5
IR
0.4 0.4
VEX
0.3 0.3
AMR
0.2 0.2
ITV
0.1 0.1
0 0
IC
0 200 400 600 800 0 1000 2000 3000
VBA
Pressure Characteristics (Representative value) Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR)
VE
AW10 AW30 AW40-06 VY1
0.25 0.25 G
0.25
PPA
Set point Set point Set point
AL
0.2 0.2 0.2
0.15
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 00 0.2 00 0.2
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa)
AW20 AW40
0.25 0.25
Set point Set point
0.2 0.2
0.15 0.15
00 0.2 00 0.2
0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
14-2-69
Series AW10 to 40
Construction
JIS Symbol
AW10 AW20 AW30/40
w
w w
t
t t
q
e q q
IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT
y y y
r e e
u r r
u u
Drain
Drain
Drain
Component Parts
Material
AW10/20 AW30 AW40/40-06
w Bonnet Polyacetal Black
Replacement Parts
Part no.
AW10 AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Stainless steel (4) (4) (4) (4)
e Valve assembly AR10P-090S AW20P-360AS AW30P-360AS AW40P-360AS AW40P-380AS
Brass, HNBR
r Filter element Non-woven fabric AF10P-060S AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR10P-150AS (1) AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C1SFP-260S C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (2) PC C1SF C2SF C3SF (3) C4SF (3) C4SF (3)
Note 1) AW10 is a piston and a gasket (KSYP-13) type assembly.
Note 2) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit specifications.
Note 3) Bowl assembly includes a bowl guard (steel band material).
Note 4) Assembly includes valve assembly, valve spring and stem assembly.
14-2-70
Filter Regulator Series AW10 to 40
Dimensions
AW10/20 T H M
N D Panel fitting dimension
J Bracket
S Y
U (Option)
W
C
IN OUT
Z
P
V
IN OUT
K
Plate thickness
B
Pressure gauge
port size AW10, AW20: Max. 3.5 F.R.L.
Pressure gauge OUT
(Option)

AV
O S AU
Port size
Drain
E
A Min. clearance AF
G
for maintenance
H M Panel fitting dimension AR
AW30/40 T D Y
N J
Bracket IR
W
S U (Option) IN OUT
Z
VEX
C
Q
P
Plate thickness
AMR
V
AW30: Max. 3.5
IN OUT
K
AW40: 5
ITV
B
Pressure gauge OUT

port size
IC
VBA
Port size
VE
Drain Min. clearance E
G
for maintenance
A VY1
G
Applicable model AW10, AW20 AW30, AW40, AW40-06
(N.C.) Metal bowl (N.O./N.C.) Metal bowl level gauge With drain guide barb fitting PPA
AL
Optional
B
B
B
B
B
specifications N.O.: Black

B
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
One-touch Width across Barb fitting
fitting flats 17 Applicable tubing: T0604
(mm)
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
A B C D E G H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AW10 M5 x 0.8 25 108 48 25 28 25 26 — 0 25 28 30 4.5 6.5 40 2 18 18.5 — — 125
AW20 1/8, 1/4 40 160 73 52 40 40 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 177
AW30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 55 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AW40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
AW40-06 3/4 75 242 93 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.2 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7 281
B B B B
AW10 — — 107 —
AW20 — — 160 —
AW30 209 208 214 234
AW40 247 246 252 272
AW40-06 250 249 255 275
14-2-71
Filter Regulator Series AR20 to 40

resin parts to allow them to withstand various temperature intended for high pressure operation.
conditions in cold or tropical (hot) regions.
Specifications Specifications
Ambient temperature –30 to 60°C –5 to 80C° Max. operating pressure 2.0 MPa
Fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing) Set pressure range 0.1 to 1.6 MPa
Rubber parts Special NBR FPM Ambient and fluid temperature –5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
Material
Main parts Aluminum die-casted
Applicable Model
Applicable Model Model AW20 AW30 AW40 AW40-06
Model AW30 AW40 AW40-06 Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Port size 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
How to Order How to Order
AW 30 F 03 BG 2 N X430 AW 30 F 03 BG 2 N X425
Filter Filter
regulator For high/low regulator For high
temperature pressure
Body size
X430 Low temperature Body size
30 40
X440 High temperature 20 30 40
Port size
Thread type
Nil Rc Thread type Port Body size
Symbol size
N (1) NPT
Port size Nil Rc 20 30 40
F (2) G Port Body size N (1) NPT 01 1/8 — —
Symbol size
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 30 40 F (2) G 02 1/4
1/4 (applicable to 02 1/4 Note 1) Drain guide is 03 3/8 —
AW30 to 40) NPT 1/4
Note 2) Drain guide is G 03 3/8 04 1/2 — —
(applicable to
1/4 (applicable to 04 1/2 — AW30 to 40) 06 3/4 — —
AW30 to 40). Note 2) Drain guide is G
06 3/4 —
1/4 (applicable
Option (3) to AW30 to 40). Option (3)
Symbol Description Applicable model Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil — — Nil — —
B With bracket AW30/40 B With bracket AW20/40
G (4) With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW30/40 G (4) With round pressure gauge (With limit AW20/40
H With set nut (For panel mount) AW30/40 H indicator) AW20/40
Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is supplied loose at the time Note 3) Bracket is not assembled and is supplied loose at the
of shipment. time of shipment.
Note 4) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AW30; 1/4 for Note 4) Mounting thread for pressure gauge: 1/8 for AW20 to
AW40 30; 1/4 for AW40
Pressure gauge type: G43 Pressure gauge type: G46
Bowl Bowl
Symbol Description Applicable model Symbol Description Applicable model
Nil (5) Metal bowl AW30/40 2 (5) Metal bowl AW20 to 40
Note 5) Only metal bowl available 8 (5) Metal bowl with level gauge AW30/40
Note 5) Only metal bowl or metal bowl with level
Option gauge available.
1 (6) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW30/40
J (7) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40 Optional specifications
N Non-relieving type AW30/40 Symbol Description Applicable model
R Flow direction: Right Left AW30/40 J (6) Drain guide 1/4 AW30/40
Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure N Non-relieving type AW20 to 40
Z (8) AW30/40
gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) R Flow direction: Right Left AW20 to 40
∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending Z (7) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure AW20 to 40
alphanumeric order. gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
Note 6) The only difference from the standard specifications is the ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of alphanumeric order.
0.2 MPa or more. Note 6) Without a valve function.
Note 7) Without a valve function. Note 7) For thread type NPT.
Note 8) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only This product is for overseas use only according to the new
according to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
provided for use in Japan.)
Note 10) Comes with type T handle.
14-2-72
Filter Regulator Series AW20(K) to AW40(K)
3. With Digital Pressure Switch

Digital pressure switch (ISE30---L) is supplied loose for mounting on pressure gauge connection port.
Specifications Applicable Model F.R.L.

Part no. suffix -X465 Model AW20(K) AW30(K) AW40(K) AW40(K)-06
Model ISE30---L Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4 AV
Set pressure range (MPa) –0.1 to 1
Pressure Set and display resolution (MPa) 0.001 AU
switch 12 to 24 VDC ± 10%, Ripple (p-p) 10%
Power supply voltage
or less (With power supply polarity protection)
Power consumption 45 mA or less (70 mA or less for current output)
AF
∗ Pressure gauge port size: 1/8
AR
How to Order IR
VEX
AW 30 K F 03 B 1N X465 A
Filter AMR
regulator
Switch specifications ITV
Body size Symbol Output specifications
A NPN output
20 30 40
B PNP output
IC
C 1 to 5 V output
With back flow mechanism D 4 to 20 mA output VBA
Nil ––
K With back flow machanism With digital pressure switch VE
(Series ISE30) (7)
Thread type Note 7) Optional parts are not assembled
Nil Rc and are supplied loose at the VY1
N (1) NPT time of shipment.
Option
F (2) G
G
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 1 (4) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW20(K) to 40(K)
(applicable to AW30 to 40),
2 Metal bowl AW20(K) to 40(K) PPA
and the exhaust port for auto-
drain comes with ø3/8" One- 6 Nylon bowl AW20(K) to 40(K)
touch fitting (applicable to 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30(K)/40(K) AL
AW30 to 40). C With bowl guard AW20(K)
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AW30(K)/40(K)
(applicable to AW30 to 40). Non-relieving type AW20(K) to 40(K)
N
R Flow direction: Right Left AW20(K) to 40(K)
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30(K)/40(K)
Port size Name plate and caution plate for bowl in imperial units
Z (6) AW20(K) to 40(K)
Port Body size (PSI, °F)
Symbol size
20 30 40 ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in ascending
01 1/8 — alphanumeric order.
02 1/4
Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the
adjusting spring for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of
03 3/8 — 0.2 MPa or more.
04 1/2 — — Note 5) Without a valve function.
06 3/4 — — Note 6) For thread type NPT. This product is for overseas use only
according to the new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is
Option (3) provided for use in Japan.)
Nil — —
B With bracket AW20(K) to 40(K)
C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AW20(K) to 40(K)
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AW30(K)/40(K)
H With set nut (For panel mount) AW20(K) to 40(K)
Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at
the time of shipment (except options C and D).
Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be
ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
Note 9) Refer to SMC catalog CAT.ES100-42 for detailed specifications and instructions of digital pressure switch.
14-2-73
Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism
Series AW20K/30K/40K
How to Order
AW 30 K F 03 BE 1N
Filter regulator Option
Body size Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting AW20K to 40K
20 30 40 2 Metal bowl AW20K to 40K
6 Nylon bowl AW20K to 40K
With back flow mechanism 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AW30K/40K
Note) AW10 comes with a back flow With bowl guard
mechanism as a standard feature.
C AW20K
J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AW30K/40K
If the set pressure is not exceeding
0.15 MPa, back flow may not occur. N Non-relieving type AW20K to 40K
When a back flow mechanism is R Flow direction: Right Left AW20K to 40K
required with a set pressure of less W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AW30K/40K
AW40K than 0.15 MPa, please contact SMC. Z (6) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AW20K to 40K
Thread type ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
Nil Rc Port size the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
N (1) NPT Port Body size
Symbol Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the new
size 20 30 40
F (2) G Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
01 1/8 — —
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT Accessory (3)
1/4 (applicable to 02 1/4
AW30K and 40K), 03 3/8 — Symbol Description Applicable model
and the exhaust port 04 1/2 — — Nil — —
for auto-drain comes B With bracket AW20K to 40K
06 3/4 — —
with ø3/8" One-touch C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (2) AW20K to 40K
fitting (applicable to
D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (2) AW30K/40K
AW30K and AW40K).
AW20K Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
(applicable to AW30K G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AW20K to 40K
and AW40K). H With set nut (For panel mount) AW20K to 40K
Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time
of shipment (except options C, D and E).
Note 2) Applicable tubing O.D for auto drain connection should be ø3/8" in
case NPT thread port is chosen.
Model AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Fluid Air
Set pressure range (1) 0.05 to 0.85 MPa
Pressure gauge port size (2) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Relief pressure Set pressure + 0.05 MPa (at relief flow rate of 0.1l/min (ANR))
JIS Symbol Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45 45
Weight (kg) 0.32 0.40 0.72 0.75
Note 1) Set the inlet pressure 0.05 MPa or higher than the set pressure.
Note 2) Pressure gauge connection threads are not required for regulators with a square embedded type
pressure gauge (AW20K to AW40K).
Accessory Part No.
Applicable model
Circuit Diagram AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Accessory
When the air supply is cut off and
releasing the inlet pressure to the Bracket assembly (1) AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AR40P-270AS
atmosphere, the residual pressure Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S AR40P-260S
release of the outlet side can be ensured Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02 G46-10-02
for a safety purpose. (2) 1.0 MPa Square (3)
Pressure embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS
JIS Symbol gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 G46-2-02
0.2 MPa Square (3)
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
embedded type
(4)
Float type N.O. — AD38 AD38N(5) AD48 AD48N(5) AD48 AD48N(5)
With back flow auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37N(5) AD47 AD47N(5) AD47 AD47N(5)
mechanism Filter regulator Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set nuts. Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting screws.
Note 2) in part numbers for a round pressure gauge indicates a Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. type–0.1 MPa;
type of connection thread. No indication is necessary for R; N.C. type–0.1 MPa (AD27) and 0.15 MPa
however, indicate N for NPT. Please contact SMC (AD37/47). Please contact SMC regarding the
regarding the connection thread NPT and pressure gauge specifications for PSI unit and °F.
supply for PSI unit specifications. Note 5) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of
auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be ø3/8".
14-2-74
Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AW20K/30K/40K
Condition:
Flow Characteristics (Representative values) Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
AW20K Rc 1/4 AW30K Rc 3/8 Precautions

0.6 0.6
0.5 0.5 Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4

for Safety Instructions and Com-
0.4 0.4 mon Precautions.
0.3 0.3 Mounting & Adjustment

F.R.L.
0.2 0.2 Warning
1. Set the regulator while checking the AV
0.1 0.1 displayed values of the inlet and outlet
pressure gauges. Turning the knob
0 0 excessively can cause damage to the AU
0 200 400 600 800 0 500 1000 1500
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) internal parts.
2. The pressure gauge included with AF
AW40K Rc 1/2 AW40K-06 Rc 3/4 regulators for 0.02 to 0.2 MPa setting is for
0.6 0.6 up to 0.2 MPa use. Exceeding 0.2 MPa of AR
pressure can damage the gauge.
0.5 0.5 3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator IR

0.4 0.4 be operated manually.
VEX
0.3 0.3
Caution AMR
0.2 0.2 1. Be sure to unlock the knob before
adjusting the pressure and lock it after ITV
0.1 0.1 setting the pressure.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause IC
0
0 1000 2000 3000
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
damage to the knob and the outlet
Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) Flow rate (l/min (ANR)) pressure may fluctuate.
• Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock. VBA
Conditions:
(You can visually verify this with the “orange
Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa mark” that appears in the gap.) VE
Pressure Characteristics (Representative values) Flow rate 20 l/min (ANR) • Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
AW20K AW40K When the knob is not easily locked, turn it VY1
left and right a little and then push it (when
0.25 0.25 the knob is locked, the “orange mark”, i.e.,
the gap will disappear).
G
Set point Set point
PPA
0.2 0.2
Orange mark AL
0.15 0.15
0 0
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
AW30K AW40K-06
0.25 0.25
2. A knob cover is available to prevent
Set point Set point careless operation of the knob. Refer to
0.2 0.2
Maintenance
Warning
0.15 0.15 1. Replace the element every 2 years or
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1
0 0 MPa, whichever comes first to prevent
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Inlet pressure (MPa) Inlet pressure (MPa) damage to the element.
14-2-75
Series AW20K/30K/40K
Working Principle
A-A w
A
Figure 1
Normal
SMC
K
U
P
SH OC
t o L
Pressure in Inlet pressure

diaphragm (IN)
chamber
A Figure 2
Figure 3 Back flow
e
q
Pressure in Inlet pressure
diaphragm (IN)
chamber
IN OUT IN OUT
(Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure) (Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)
When the inlet pressure (P1) is higher than the set pressure, the check valve w closes and operates as a normal regulator (Figure 1).
When the inlet pressure (P1) is shut off and released, the check valve w, opens and the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q is released into
the inlet side (Figure 2).
This lowers the pressure in the diaphragm chamber q, and the force generated by pressure regulator spring e lifts the diaphragm. Valve r
opens through the stem, and the outlet pressure is released to the inlet side (Figure 3).
Construction
AW20K to 40K
A-A i
A
w
SMC
t
q
K
U
P
SH O C
t o L
IN OUT
A (Inlet pressure) (Outlet pressure)
Component Parts
Material y
AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06 e
r
Part no.
u
AW20K AW30K AW40K AW40K-06
Stainless steel (4) (4) (4) (4)
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AW20P-360AS AW30P-360AS AW40P-360AS AW40P-380AS
Non-woven
r Filter element fabric AF20P-060S AF30P-060S AF40P-060S AF40P-060S
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS AR40P-150AS

y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2) C4SF (2)
i Check valve assembly (3) POM, PBT AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS AR20KP-020AS
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit
specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly includes a bowl guard (steel band material).
Note 3) Check valve assembly includes check valve cover, check valve body assembly and screws (2 pcs.).
Note 4) Assembly includes valve assembly, valve spring and stem assembly.
14-2-76
Filter Regulator with Back Flow Mechanism Series AW20K/30K/40K
Dimensions
AW20K/30K/40K
T H M
Panel fitting dimension
N D
Y J
S U
IN OUT Bracket
W
Q
(Option)
F.R.L.
C
Z
Plate thickness AV
P
AW20K, 30K: Max. 3.5
V
AW40K: Max. 5 IN OUT
AU
K
AF
B
Pressure gauge OUT
(Option)
Pressure gauge
port size
AR
pressure gauge (Option) IR
Port size
VEX
Drain E AMR
Min. clearance
G
A for maintenance
ITV
IC
Applicable model AW20K AW30K, AW40K, AC40K-06
With auto-drain
Metal bowl
With auto-drain
Metal bowl
Metal bowl with
With drain guide
Drain cock with VBA
(N.C.) (N.O./N.C.) level gauge barb fitting
VE
Optional
B
VY1
B
B
B

B
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
ø10
S
1/4
M5 x 0.8
One-touch Width across
Barb fitting
Applicable tubing:
G
PPA
AL
(mm)
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount With auto-drain
AW20K 1/8, 1/4 40 160 73 52 40 40 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 177
AW30K 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 55 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
AW40K-06 3/4 75 242 93 75 73 80 76 38.5 1.2 50 54 56 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 37 42.5 21 7 281
Model Port size With barb fitting With drain guide Metal bowl Metal bowl with level gauge
B B B B
AW20K 1/8, 1/4 — — 160 —
AW30K 1/4, 3/8 209 208 214 234
AW40K 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 247 246 252 272
AW40K-06 3/4 250 249 255 275
14-2-77
Mist Separator Regulator
AWM20/30/40
Series AWM is a component
made up of a regulator and a
mist separator that are
integrated to provide optimum
results in applications such as
clean-air blow operations.
JIS Symbol
AWM20
Filtration: 0.3 µm
How to Order AWM40
Option
AWM 30 F 03 BE 1N Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting AWM20 to 40
Mist separator 2 Metal bowl AWM20 to 40
regulator 6 Nylon bowl AWM20 to 40
Body size
8 Metal bowl with level gauge AWM30/40
20 30 40 C With bowl guard AWM20
Thread type J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AWM30/40
N Non-relieving AWM20 to 40
Nil Rc
R Flow direction: Right Left AWM20 to 40
N (1) NPT W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AWM30/40
F (2) G Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and
Z (6) AWM20 to 40
Note 1) Drain guide is NPT 1/4 pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F)
(applicable to AWM30
and 40), and the ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
exhaust port for auto- Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring
drain comes with ø3/8" for the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
One-touch fitting Note 5) Without a valve function.
(applicable to AWM30 Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
and AWM40). new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Accessory (3)
(applicable to AWM30 Symbol Description Applicable model
and AWM40). Nil — —
B With bracket AWM20 to 40
Port size C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (2) AWM20 to 40
Port Body size D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (2) AWM30/40
Symbol
size 20 30 40 E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWM20 to 40
01 1/8 — — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWM20 to 40
02 1/4 H With set nut (For panel mount) AWM20 to 40
03 3/8 — Note 1) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except options C,
D and E).
04 1/2 — —
Note 2) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is chosen.
Applicable mist separator regulator
Symbol

AWM20 AWM30 to 40
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z
Accessory

Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
14-2-78
Mist Separator Regulator Series AWM20/30/40
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads
Model AWM20 AWM30 AWM40 are not required for the regulator
Port sizes 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 with a square embedded type
Fluid Air pressure gauge (AWM20 to 40).
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Note 2) When the compressor oil mist
discharge concentration is 30
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa mg/Nm3 (ANR).
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa Note 3) Bowl O-ring and other O-rings are
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 slightly lubricated.
Note 4) When the outlet pressure is 0.5
MPa. (The rated flow varies
Nominal filtration rating 0.3 µm (95% filtered particle size) depending on the set pressure.) F.R.L.
Outlet side oil mist concentration Max. 1.0 mg/m3 (ANR) (approx. 0.8 ppm) (2) (3) Keep the air flow within the rated
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) (4) flow to prevent and outflow of a
150 330 820
lubricant to the outlet side. AV
Bowl guard Option Standard AU
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45
Construction Relieving type AF
Weight (kg) 0.44 0.59 1.25
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto drain, applicable tubing O.D should be
ø3/8". AR
Accessory Part No. IR
Applicable model Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and
Accessory
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40 set nuts. VEX
Note 2) in part numbers for a round
Bracket assembly (1) AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS pressure gauge indicates a type of
Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S connection thread. No indication is AMR
necessary for R; however, indicate
(2)
Round type G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02
1.0 MPa Square embedded type (3) N for NPT. Please contact SMC
Pressure GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS regarding the NPT connection ITV
gauge Round type G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 thread and pressure gauge supply
0.2 MPa Square embedded type (3) for PSI unit specifications. IC
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting
Float type (4) N.O. — AD38 AD38NNote) AD48 AD48NNote) screws.
auto-drain N.C. AD27 AD37 AD37NNote) AD47 AD47NNote) Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. VBA
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto-drain, applicable tubing O.D should be type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa
(AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47).
ø3/8".
Set the pressure to allow a pressure VE
drop when the fluid flows. Please
contact SMC regarding the VY1
specifications for PSI unit and °F.
G
Precautions PPA
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions.
AL
Warning Warning • Pull the pressure regulator knob to
1. Residual pressure release (outlet 1. Set the regulator while checking the unlock. (You can visually verify this with
pressure release) is not complete by displayed values of the inlet and outlet the “orange mark” that appears in the
releasing inlet pressure. Please contact pressure gauges. Turning the knob gap.)
SMC regarding residual pressure excessively can cause damage to the • Push the pressure regulator knob to
release. internal parts. lock. When the knob is not easily locked,
2. The pressure gauge included with mist turn it left and right a little and then push
Air Supply separator regulators for 0.05 to 0.2 it (when the knob is locked, the “orange
MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only. mark” i.e., the gap, will disappear).
Caution Exceeding 0.2 MPa of pressure can
1. Install an air filter (Series AF) as a pre- damage the gauge.
liminary filter on the inlet side of the 3. Do not use tools on the pressure regu-
mist separator regulator to prevent pre- lator knob as this may cause damage. Orange mark
mature clogging. It must be operated manually.
Maintenance Caution
Warning adjusting the pressure and lock it after
1. Replace the element every 2 years or setting the pressure.
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 Failure to follow this procedure can
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent cause damage to the knob and the
damage to the element. 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
outlet pressure may fluctuate.
14-2-79
Series AWM20/30/40
AWM20 Rc 1/4 AWM30 Rc 3/8 AWM40 Rc 1/2


Pressure Characteristics Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate: 20 l/min (ANR)
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40

0.25 0.25 0.25

0.20 0.20 0.20
0.15 0.15 0.15

0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Construction
JIS Symbol AWM20 AWM30/40
w
t w
q t
IN OUT q
IN OUT
e
y y
r e
u r
Component Parts
u
Material
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40
Drain
Drain
Replacement Parts
Part no.
AWM20 AWM30 AWM40
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AWM20P-090AS AWM30P-090AS AWM40P-090AS
r Element assembly — AFM20P-060AS AFM30P-060AS AF40P-060AS
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2)
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F
unit specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AWM30 and AWM40 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).
14-2-80
Mist Separator Regulator Series AWM20/30/40
Dimensions
H M
AWM20 T D
N J U Panel fitting dimension
Bracket
S (Option)
Y
W
IN OUT
Z
C
P
V
Plate thickness
IN OUT AWM20: Max. 3.5
K
F.R.L.
B
OUT
Pressure gauge
port size AV
pressure gauge (Option) AU
Port size
O S
AF
G
A for maintenance AR
AWM30/40 H M
IR
T D
N J U Panel fitting dimension VEX
Bracket Y
S (Option)
IN
W
OUT
AMR
Z
ITV
C
Plate thickness
P
V
IN OUT AWM30: Max. 3.5 IC
K
AWM40: Max. 5
B
Pressure gauge
Pressure gauge OUT VBA
(Option)
port size
Square embedded type VE
VY1
Port size
G
Drain E
Min. clearance
G
A for maintenance PPA

Applicable model AWM20 AWM30, AWM40 AL
Optional
B
B
B
B
B

B
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
(mm)
Model Port size With pressure gauge Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
AWM20 1/8, 1/4 40 173 73 52 40 45 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 190
AWM30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 50 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AWM40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 70 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
B B B B
AWM20 — — 173 —
AWM30 209 208 214 234
AWM40 247 246 252 272
14-2-81
Micro Mist Separator Regulator
Series AWD20/30/40
Series AWD is a component
made up of a regulator and a
micro-mist separator that are
integrated to provide optimum JIS Symbol
results in applications such as
ultraclean air blow operations.
AWD20
Filtration: 0.01 µm AWD40
How to Order
Option
AWD 30 F 03 BE 1N Symbol Description Applicable model
1 (4) 0.05 to 0.2 MPa setting AWD20 to 40
Micro mist 2 Metal bowl AWD20 to 40

separator 6 Nylon bowl AWD20 to 40
regulator 8 Metal bowl with level gauge AWD30/40
C With bowl guard AWD20
J (5) Drain guide 1/4 AWD30/40
Body size N Non-relieving AWD20 to 40
20 30 40 R Flow direction: Right Left AWD20 to 40
W Drain cock with barb fitting: ø6 x ø4 nylon tubing AWD30/40
Thread type Z (6) Name plate, caution plate for bowl, and pressure gauge in imperial units (PSI, °F) AWD20 to 40
Nil Rc ∗ When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
N (1) NPT Note 4) The only difference from the standard specifications is the adjusting spring for
the regulator. It does not restrict the setting of 0.2 MPa or more.
F (2) G Note 5) Without a valve function.
Note 1) Drain guide is for NPT 1/4 Note 6) For NPT thread type. This product is for overseas use only according to the
(applicable to AWD30 and AWD40), new Measurement Law. (The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
and the exhaust port for auto-drain
comes with ø3/8" One-touch fitting Accessory (3)
(applicable to AWD30 and AWD40). Symbol Description Applicable model
Note 2) Drain guide is G 1/4 (applicable to Nil — —
AWD30 and AWD40).
B With bracket AWD20 to 40
Port size C Float type auto-drain (N.C.) (4) AWD20 to 40
Port Body size D Float type auto-drain (N.O.) (4) AWD30/40
Symbol size E With square embedded type pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWD20 to 40
20 30 40
01 1/8 — — G With round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) AWD20 to 40
02 1/4 H With set nut (For panel mount) AWD20 to 40

Note 3) Optional parts are not assembled and are supplied loose at the time of shipment (except
03 3/8 — options C, D and E).
04 2/1 — — Note 4) Applicable tubing O.D for auto-drain connection should be ø3/8" in case NPT thread port is
chosen.

Accessory/Optional Specification Combinations : Varies depending on the model : Available only with NPT thread
Applicable micro mist
Symbol
Combination Accessory Optional specifications separator regulator
Accessory/Optional specifications B C D E G H 1 2 6 8 C J N R W Z AWD20 AWD30 to 40

Accessory

Panel mount (With set nut) H
Metal bowl -2
Nylon bowl -6
With bowl guard -C
Drain guide 1/4 -J
14-2-82
Micro Mist Separator Regulator Series AWD20/30/40
Note 1) Pressure gauge connection threads
Model AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
are not required for the regulator
Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 with a square embedded type
Fluid Air pressure gauge (AWD20 to 40).
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa Note 2) When the compressor oil mist
discharge concentration is 30 mg/m3
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa (ANR).
Set pressure range 0.05 to 0.85 MPa Note 3) Bowl O-ring and other O-rings are
Pressure gauge port size (1) Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 slightly lubricated.
Ambient and fluid temperature Note 4) When the outlet pressure is 0.5
–5 to 60°C (With no freezing)
MPa. (The rated flow varies
Nominal filtration rating 0.01µm (95% filtered particle size) depending on the set pressure.) F.R.L.
Outlet side Max. 0.1 mg/m3 (ANR) (2) (3) Keep the air flow within the rated
oil mist concentration (Before saturated with hydraulic fluid: 0.01 mg/m3 (ANR) or less, approx. 0.008 ppm ) flow to prevent an outflow of
(4) lubricant to the outlet side. AV
Rated flow (l/min (ANR)) 90 180 450
Bowl guard
AU
Option Standard
Drain capacity (cm3) 8 25 45
AF
Weight (kg) 0.44 0.59 1.25
AR
Accessory part no. IR

Note 1) Assembly includes a bracket and set
Applicable model
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40 nuts. VEX
Accessory Note 2) in part numbers for a round
Bracket assembly (1) pressure gauge indicates a type of
AW20P-270AS AR30P-270AS AR40P-270AS AMR
connection thread. No indication is
Set nut AR20P-260S AR30P-260S AR40P-260S necessary for R; however, indicate N
for NPT. Please contact SMC
(2) 1.0 MPa
Round
(3)
G36-10-01 G36-10-01 G46-10-02
regarding the NPT connection thread ITV
Pressure Square embedded type GC3-10AS GC3-10AS GC3-10AS and pressure gauge supply for PSI
gauge Round G36-2-01 G36-2-01 G46-2-02 unit specifications. IC
0.2 MPa (3)
GC3-2AS GC3-2AS GC3-2AS
Note 3) Includes one O-ring and 2 mounting
Square embedded type screws.
Float type (4) N.O. — AD38 AD38N Note) AD48 AD48N Note) Note 4) Minimum operating pressure: N.O. VBA
auto-drain AD27 AD37 AD37N Note) AD47 AD47N Note) type–0.1 MPa; N.C. type–0.1 MPa
N.C.
(AD27) and 0.15 MPa (AD37/47). Set
Note) When “N” is specified in the end of part number of auto drain, applicable tubing O.D should be the pressure to allow a pressure drop VE
ø3/8". when the fluid flows. Please contact
SMC regarding the specifications for VY1
PSI unit and °F.
G
Precautions PPA
Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 14-21-3 to 14-21-4 for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions. AL
Warning Warning • Pull the pressure regulator knob to unlock.
1. Residual pressure release (outlet 1. Set the regulator while checking the (You can visually verify this with the
pressure release) is not complete by displayed values of the inlet and outlet “orange mark” that appears in the gap.)
releasing inlet pressure. Please contact pressure gauges. Turning the knob • Push the pressure regulator knob to lock.
SMC regarding the residual pressure excessively can cause damage to the When the knob is not easily locked, turn it
release. internal parts. left and right a little and then push it (when
2. The pressure gauge included with micro the knob is locked, the “orange mark” will
Air Supply mist separator regulator for 0.05 to 0.2 disappear).
Caution MPa setting is for up to 0.2 MPa only.

Exceeding 0.2 MPa of pressure can
1. Install an air filter (Series AFM) as a damage the gauge.
preliminary filter on the inlet side of the Orange mark
3. Do not use tools on the pressure regulator
micro-mist separator to prevent
premature clogging.
be operated manually.
Maintenance Caution
Warning adjusting the pressure and lock it after
1. Replace the element every 2 years or setting the pressure.
when the pressure drop becomes 0.1 Failure to follow this procedure can
MPa, whichever comes first, to prevent cause damage to the knob and the 2. A knob cover is available to prevent
damage to the element. outlet pressure may fluctuate. careless operation of the knob. Refer to
page 14-2-6 details.
14-2-83
Series AWD20/30/40
Flow Characteristics (Representative value) Condition: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa
AWD20 Rc 1/4 AWD30 Rc 3/8 AWD40 Rc 1/2

Pressure Characteristics (Representative value) Conditions: Inlet pressure 0.7 MPa; Outlet pressure 0.2 MPa; Flow rate: 20 l/min (ANR)
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40

0.25 0.25 0.25

0.20 0.20 0.20
0.15 0.15 0.15

0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Construction
AWD20 AWD30/40
JIS Symbol
w w
t t
q q
IN OUT IN OUT
e
y y
r e
u r
u
Component Parts Drain
Material
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
q Body Zinc die-casted Aluminum die-casted Platinum silver Drain
Replacement Parts
Part no.
AWD20 AWD30 AWD40
e Valve assembly Brass, HNBR AWM20P-090AS AWM30P-090AS AWM40P-090AS
r Element assembly — AFD20P-060AS AFD30P-060AS AFD40P-060AS
t Diaphragm assembly Weatherability NBR AR20P-150AS AR30P-150AS AR40P-150AS
y Bowl O-ring NBR C2SFP-260S C3SFP-260S C4SFP-260S
u Bowl assembly (1) PC C2SF C3SF (2) C4SF (2)
Note 1) Including O-ring. Please contact SMC regarding the bowl assembly supply for PSI and °F unit
specifications.
Note 2) Bowl assembly for AWD30 and AWD40 comes with a bowl guard (steel band material).
14-2-84
Micro Mist Separator Regulator Series AWD20/30/40
Dimensions
AWD20
H M
T D
N J U
Panel fitting dimension
Bracket
S (Option) Y
W
IN OUT
Z
C
P
V
Plate thickness
IN OUT F.R.L.
K
AWD20: Max. 3.5
B
AV
OUT
Pressure gauge Pressure gauge

port size (Option)

AU
O S
Port size AF
AR
G
A for maintenance
IR
H M
AWD30/40 T D
N J
U Panel fitting dimension VEX
Bracket
Y
S (Option)
IN
W
OUT
AMR
Z
ITV
C
Plate thickness
P
V
IN OUT AWD30: Max. 3.5 IC
K
AWD40: Max. 5
B
Pressure gauge
(Option)
OUT
VBA
Pressure gauge
port size
pressure gauge (Option) VE
Port size VY1
Drain Min. clearance E G
G
A for maintenance
PPA
Applicable model AFD20 AWD30, AWD40
AL
Optional
B
B
B
B
B

B
B
O S N.C.: Gray O
M5 x 0.8 ø10
S
1/4
(mm)
With pressure gauge With
Model Port size Bracket mounting size Panel mount auto-drain
A B C D E G
H J K M N P Q S T U V W Y Z B
AWD20 1/8, 1/4 40 173 73 52 40 45 63 27 5 30 34 44 5.4 15.4 55 2.3 30 28.5 14 6 190
AWD30 1/4, 3/8 53 201 86 59 57 50 66 30.5 3.5 41 40 46 6.5 8 53 2.3 31 38.5 19 7 242
AWD40 1/4, 3/8, 1/2 70 239 92 75 73 70 76 38.5 1.5 50 54 54 8.5 10.5 70 2.3 35.5 42.5 21 7 278
B B B B
AWD20 — — 173 —
AWD30 209 208 214 234
AWD40 247 246 252 272
14-2-85
14-2-86
POSITIONER MOUNTING &
OPERATING 3730-5 MANUAL
Series 3730
Electropneumatic Positioner
Type 3730-5
with FOUNDATION™ fieldbus communication
Fig. 1 · Type 3730-5
Mounting and
Operating Instructions
EB 8384-5 EN
Firmware version K 1.25/ R 1.45
Edition August 2008
Definitions of the signal words used in these instructions
DANGER! NOTICE
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation NOTICE indicates a property damage
which, if not avoided, will result in death or message.
serious injury.
Note: Supplementary explanations,

WARNING! information and tips
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
2 EB 8384-5 EN
Contents
Contents Page
1 Important safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2 Article code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 Design and principle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories . . . 18
4.1 Direct attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.1 Type 3277-5 Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1.2 Type 3277 Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.2 Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4.3 Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.4 Attachment to rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.5 Reversing amplifier for double-acting actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.5.1 Pressure gauge attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.6 Attaching an external position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.6.1 Mounting the position sensor with direct attachment. . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.6.2 Mounting the position sensor with attachment according to IEC 60534-6 34
4.6.3 Mounting the position sensor to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve . . . . . . 35
4.6.4 Mounting the position sensor to rotary actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.7 Attaching positioners with stainless steel housings. . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.8 Air purging function for single-acting actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.9 Required mounting parts and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1 Pneumatic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.1 Signal pressure gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.2 Supply pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.1.3 Signal pressure (output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2 Electrical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2.1 Establishing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6 Operator controls and readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
7 Start-up – Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.1 Determining the fail-safe position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7.2 Setting the volume restriction Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.3 Adapting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.4 Limiting the signal pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
EB 8384-5 EN 3
Contents
7.5 Checking the operating range of the positioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

7.6 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.6.1 MAX – Initialization based on maximum range . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.6.2 NOM – Initialization based on nominal range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
7.6.3 MAN – Initialization based on a manually selected range . . . . . . . 57
7.6.4 SUb substitute calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7.7 Zero calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
7.8 Reset to default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
7.9 Start-up via local interface (SSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.1 Enabling and selecting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2.1 Automatic and manual modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.2.2 SAFE – Fail-safe position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.3 Malfunction/maintenance alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3.1 Confirming error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9 Status and diagnostic alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.1 Standard EXPERT diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.2 Extended EXPERT+ diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
10 Adjusting the limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
11 Retrofitting an inductive limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
12 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
13 Servicing explosion-protected devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
14 Fieldbus specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.1 Device description (DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.2 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
14.3 Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
14.4 Status classification and condensed state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
15 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.1.1 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
15.2 Installing TROVIS-VIEW software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
15.3 Starting TROVIS-VIEW and performing basic settings . . . . . . . . . 77
15.4 Data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
15.4.1 Offline operation (indirect data transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
15.4.2 Online operation (direct data transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
15.4.3 Setting parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4 EB 8384-5 EN
Contents
15.5 Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test . . . . . . 83

15.6 Status classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
16 Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
16.1 Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
16.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.1 Resource Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.2 Analog Output Transducer Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
16.2.3 Discrete Input Transducer Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16.2.4 Analog Output Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
16.2.5 Discrete Input Function Block DI1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
16.2.6 Discrete Input Function Block DI2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
16.2.7 PID Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
16.3 Other parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.1 Stale Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.2 Link Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.3.3 LAS Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
16.4 Parameter lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
17 Dimensions in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
18 Valve characteristic selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Test certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
EB 8384-5 EN 5
Modifications of positioner firmware
Modifications of positioner firmware in comparison to previous versions

Previous New
Communication K 1.11 K 1.21
Leakage sensor at binary input 2 The connection of a leakage sensor at binary input 2 (by selecting
LEAKAGE SENSOR in CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2 parameter of
the AO Transducer Block) causes:
4 Information specified in XD_ERROR_EXT parameter in the AO
Transducer Block and the generation of a diagnostic alarm
which is logged
4 The state of the binary input is reported in BINARY_INPUT2
parameter in the Transducer Block
Diagnostic alarm The diagnostic alarm “Device not initialized” is generated when
“Device not initialized“ the positioner is not initialized and the condensed status is set to
“Maintenance alarm”.
Display of the working range The correction of the working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE over
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE on-site operation of the positioner (Code 8/9) is also transferred
over fieldbus in firmware version K 1.21 and higher.
Inactivated internal solenoid valve A masking allows to be set whether an inactivated internal sole-
noid valve generates an AO block error and a resulting block
alarm.
SOLENOID_SELECT parameter The SOLENOID_SELECT parameter in firmware K 1.21 and
higher allows to be set whether a “Maintenance now“ block error
of the AO Transducer Block results in an output error in the AO
Block.
TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM parameter New range: 1000 … 990 000 000
K 1.22
Working range The working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE of the AO Transducer
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE Block is compared on entering it with TRANSM_PIN_POS.
If the TRANSM_PIN_POS parameter is changed, the positioner
checks whether the setting and unit match the current working
range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE. If this is not the case, the
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE parameter is set to 0 to 100 %.
VALVE_TYPE parameter The parameter of the AO Transducer Block is set depending on
the selected PIN_POS. The last setting is kept when VALVE_TYPE
is set to OFF.
FINAL_VALUE parameter The manipulated variable is scaled with FINAL_VALUE_ RANGE
in firmware K 1.22 and higher, and not with XD_SCALE.
Display of O/S mode in If the AO Transducer Block is set to O/S mode, this is indicated in
AO Transducer Block the positioner display by MAN/AUTO.
6 EB 8384-5 EN
Modifications of positioner firmware
Modifications of positioner firmware in comparison to previous versions

Previous New
K 1.23
Internal modifications
K 1.24
BUS_ADDRESS parameter The bus address has the default setting of 248.
Device type In the delivery state, the device is configured as a basic device.
K 1.25
Control R 1.43 R 1.44

R 1.45
EB 8384-5 EN 7
8 EB 8384-5 EN
Important safety instructions
1 Important safety instructions

For your own safety, follow these instructions concerning the mounting, start-up and opera-
tion of the positioner:
4 The positioner may only be mounted, started up or operated by trained and
experienced personnel familiar with the product.
According to these Mounting and Operating Instructions, trained personnel refers to
individuals who are able to judge the work they are assigned to and recognize
possible dangers due to their specialized training, their knowledge and experience as
well as their knowledge of the relevant standards.
4 Explosion-protected versions of this positioner may only be operated by personnel
who have undergone special training or instructions or who are authorized to work
on explosion-protected devices in hazardous areas. Refer to section 13.
4 Any hazards that could be caused by the process medium, the operating pressure,
the signal pressure or by moving parts of the control valve are to be prevented by
means of the appropriate measures.
4 If inadmissible motions or forces are produced in the actuator as a result of the supply
pressure, the supply pressure must be restricted by means of a suitable supply
pressure reducing station.
To avoid damage to any equipment, the following also applies:

4 Do not operate the positioner with the back of the positioner/vent opening facing
upwards.
The vent opening must not be sealed when the positioner is installed on site.
Vent opening
4 Proper shipping and appropriate storage are assumed.

Note: The device with a CE marking fulfills the requirements of the Directives 94/9/EC
(ATEX) and 89/336/EEC (EMC).
The Declaration of Conformity is available on request.
EB 8384-5 EN 9
Article code
2 Article code
Positioner Type 3730-5 x x x 0 x 0 x x 0 x 0 0 x 0 x x
With LCD and autotune, FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
Explosion protection
Without 0
II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 and II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C (ATEX) 1
CSA/FM intrinsically safe / non incendive 3
II 3 G EEx nA II T6, II 3 G EEx nL IIC T6 and 8
II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C acc. to ATEX
Additional equipment
Inductive Without 0
limit switch 1 x Type SJ2-SN 1
Solenoid valve Without 0
With, 24 V DC 4
External position sensor Without 0
With 0 1 0 0
Binary input Without 0
Floating contact 0 1
Diagnostics
EXPERT (standard) 1
EXPERT+ (extended diagnositics) 2
Housing material
Aluminum (standard) 0
Stainless steel 1.4581 0 1
Special applications
None 0
Positioner compatible with paint 1
Vent connection with ¼-18 NPT thread 0 0 0 0 2
Special version
None 0 0 0
NEPSI Ex ia 1 0 0 9
NEPSI Ex nL/nA 8 0 1 0
IECEx 1 0 1 2
10 EB 8384-5 EN
Design and principle of operation
3 Design and principle of When a deviation occurs, the actuator is

operation pressurized or vented. If required, the
changes in the signal pressure can be
The electropneumatic positioner is attached slowed down by a connectable Q restric-
to pneumatic control valves. It is used to as- tion. The signal pressure supplied to the ac-
sign the valve stem position (controlled vari- tuator can be limited by software or on site
able x) to the control signal (reference vari- to 1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar.
able w). The input signal received from a A constant air stream to the atmosphere is
control system is compared to the travel or created by the flow regulator (9) with a
rotational angle of the control valve, and a fixed set point. The air stream is used to
pneumatic signal pressure (output variable purge the inside of the case as well as to op-
y) is produced. timize the air capacity booster. The i/p
The positioner consists of a travel sensor sys- module (6) is supplied with a constant up-
tem proportional to resistance, an analog stream pressure by the pressure regulator
i/p converter with a downstream booster (8) to make it independent of the supply air
and the electronics unit with microcontroller. pressure.
1 Control valve
2 Travel sensor
20 Serial
16 3 PD controller
Interface
13 4 A/D converter
mm
% 5 Microcontroller
FOUNDATION S 15 BE2
fieldbus
6 i/p converter
IEC 61158-2
4 5 7 Air capacity booster
19
14 BE1
8 Pressure regulator
9 Flow regulator
10 Volume restriction
24V DC w
PD 11* Inductive limit switch
x 2 11 12* Solenoid valve
17 18 3
13 IEC 61158-2
G G
interface module
12 14 Binary input, passive
15* Binary input, active
6
9 16 Display
17* Solenoid valve control
18* Galvanic isolation
8 1 19 D/A converter
y
Q 10 x
20 Communication interface
7
* Optional
Fig. 2 · Functional diagram
EB 8384-5 EN 11
The positioner communicates and is pow- can also be issued over the FOUNDATION™
ered using IEC 61158-2 transmission tech- fieldbus network.
nology conforming to FOUNDATION™
fieldbus specification. Version with external position sensor
As a standard feature, the positioner comes In this version, only the sensor is mounted to
with a binary input for DC voltage signals to the control valve. The positioner is located
signalize process information over the separately from the valve.
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus. The connection of x and y signals to the
valve is established by cable and piping for
3.1 Additional equipment air (only without inductive limit switch).
Version with solenoid valve EXPERT+ extended valve diagnostics
If the operating voltage for the solenoid See Table 5 on page 40 for order numbers.
valve (12) fails, the supply pressure for the EXPERT+ upgrades the standard EXPERT di-
i/p module is vented to the atmosphere. The agnostics firmware incorporated in the
positioner can no longer operate and the positioner. The upgraded version provides
control valve moves to the fail-safe position extended functions to pinpoint valve param-
determined by the actuator, independent of eters that have worsened, allowing the user
the reference variable. to plan predictive maintenance and service
work before malfunctions can affect the pro-
NOTICE cess and may cause unscheduled plant shut-
In manual mode (MAN), the manual set downs.
point is also reset to 0 %. A different manual The extended EXPERT+ diagnostics can be
set point must be entered again (Code 1). activated later at the positioner when
EXPERT+ is not already activated on delivery
Version with inductive limit switch of the positioner. The required activation
code or an EXPERT+ USB dongle can be
The rotary shaft of the positioner carries an purchased to activate EXPERT+.
adjustable tag which actuates the installed
proximity switch. 3.2 Communication
Version with binary contact The positioner is completely controlled over
All positioners are fitted with a binary input the digital signal transmission implemented
for DC voltage signals over which process according to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus spec-
information can be issued over the ification.
FOUNDATION™ fieldbus network. Data are transmitted as bit-synchronous
Another optional binary input is an active current modulation at a rate of 31.25 kbit/s
input powered by the positioner to connect
a floating contact. Its switching condition
12 EB 8384-5 EN
over twisted-pair cables conforming to

IEC 61158-2.
Note: In the case, complex functions are

started in the positioner, which require a
long calculation time or lead to a large
quantity of data being stored in the volatile
memory of the positioner, the alert “busy” is
issued over DD.
This alert is not a fault alarm and can sim-
ply be confirmed.
Configuration using TROVIS-VIEW software

The positioner can be configured using
TROVIS-VIEW Configuration and Operator
Interface software.
The positioner is equipped with an addi-
tional digital SERIAL INTERFACE to connect
the RS-232 or USB port of the computer to
the positioner over an adapter cable.
The TROVIS-VIEW software enables the user
to easily set parameters in the positioner
and view process parameters online.
Configuration using the NI-FBUS™
Configurator
The NI-FBUS™ Configurator from National
Instruments can also be used to configure
the positioner. For this purpose, an interface
card must be installed in a computer to con-
nect it to the FOUNDATION™ fieldbus.
The integrated function blocks are linked
using the NI-FBUS™ Configurator.
EB 8384-5 EN 13
3.3 Technical data

Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION fieldbus communication
TM
Direct attachment to Type 3277: 3.6 to 30 mm

Rated travel,
Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6: 3.6 to 200 mm
adjustable
Attachment to rotary actuators (VDI/VDE 3845): 24° to 100°
Travel range, Adjustable within the initialized travel/angle of rotation;
adjustable travel can be restricted to 15 at the maximum
Fieldbus interface acc. to IEC 61158-2 bus-powered
Bus connection Physical Layer Class: 113 (without explosion protection) und 111 (with ex. protection)
Field device acc. to FM 3610 Entity, FISCO and FNICO
Communication
Data transmission as per FOUNDATION™ fieldbus specification,
Fieldbus Communication Profile Class: 31 PS, 32 L;
Interoperability tested according to Interoperability Test System (ITK) Revision 4.6
Local Over SAMSON SSP interface and serial interface adapter
Software requirements
SAMSON TROVIS-VIEW with database module 3730-5
(SSP)
Permissible operating 9 to 32 V DC, power supply over bus line · The limits specified in the EC Type
voltage Examination Certificate additionally apply for explosion-protected devices
Max. operating current 15 mA
Add. current in case of fault 0 mA
Supply pressure from 1.4 to 7 bar (20 to 105 psi),
Air quality acc. to ISO 8573-1 Edition 2001: Max. particle size and density: Class 4
Supply air
Oil content: Class 3; Moisture and water: Class 3; Pressure dew point: At least 10 K
beneath the lowest ambient temperature to be expected
0 bar up to supply pressure,
Signal pressure (output)
limitable to 1.4/2.4/3.7 bar ±0.2 bar via software
Linear/equal percentage/reverse equal percentage · User-defined (over operating
software and communication) · Butterfly valve linear/equal percentage · Rotary plug
Characteristic
valve linear/equal percentage · Segmented ball valve linear/equal percentage
Deviation from terminal-based conformity ≤ 1 %
Hysteresis ≤ 0.3 %
Sensitivity ≤ 0.1 %
Direction of action Reversible
Air consumption Independent from supply pressure approx. 110 ln/h
Air output capacity
At Δp = 6 bar: 8.5 mn /h, at Δp = 1.4 bar: 3.0 mn /h KVmax (20 °C) = 0.09
3 3
Actuator pressurized
Actuator vented at Δp = 6 bar: 14.0 mn3/h, at Δp = 1.4 bar: 4.5 mn3/h KVmax (20 °C) = 0.15
14 EB 8384-5 EN
Type 3730-5 Positioner with FOUNDATION fieldbus communication

TM
–45 to +80 °C
Permissible ambient
The limits specified in the EC Type Examination Certificate additionally apply for
temperature
explosion-protected devices
Temperature: ≤ 0.15 %/10 K
Influences Supply air: None
Vibration: ≤ 0.25 % up to 2000 Hz and 4 g acc. to IEC 770
Electromagn. compatibility Complying with EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3 and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
Explosion protection II 2 G EEx ia IIC T6 / II 2 D IP 65 T 80 °C
II 3 G EEx nA/nL II T6 / II 3 D IP 65 T 80 °C
FM approval: Intrinsically safe; Class I, II, III, Div. 1, Groups A-G; Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T6;
Non incendive; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, III, Div. 2, Groups F, G;
NEMA Type 4X, Type 3730-53
CSA approval: Ex ia IIC T6; Class I, Zone 0; Class II, Div. I, Groups E, F, G; Type 4 Enclosure
Ex nA IIC T6; Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Type 4
Enclosure; Type 3730-53
IECEx: Ex ia IIC T6
One M20 x 1.5 cable gland, for 6 to 12 mm clamping range · Second additional
Electrical connection
threaded M20 x 1.5 hole · Screw terminals for 0.2 to 2.5 mm² wire cross-section
Degree of protection IP 66 / NEMA 4X
–7
Probability of failure on demand of safety functions PFD < 2.8 x 10 for a confidence
Implementation in level of 95 %.
safety-related systems in The safe failure fraction (SFF) according to Table A1 in IEC 61508-2 is greater or
compliance with equal to 0.99.
IEC 61508/SIL The valves are therefore suitable for implementation in safety-related systems with a
hardware fault tolerance of 1 or 2 up to and including SIL 4.
Binary contact 1
0 to 30 V DC reverse polarity protection, static destruction limit 40 V / 5.8 mA,
Input
current consumption 3.5 mA at 24 V, galvanically isolated
Signal Signal “1” at Ue > 5 V Signal “0” at Ue < 3 V
Materials
Die-cast aluminum EN AC-AlSi12(Fe) (EN AC-44300) acc. to DIN EN 1706;
Housing
chromated and powder paint coated · Special version: stainless steel 1.4581
External parts Stainless steel 1.4571 and 1.4301
Cable gland Nickel-plated brass, M20x1.5
Weight Approx. 1 kg
EB 8384-5 EN 15
Options for Type 3730-5
Binary contact 2 for floating contact

R < 100 Ω, contact loadability 100 mA, static destruction limit 20 V / 5.8 mA,
Switching input
galvanically isolated
Solenoid valve Approval acc. to IEC 61508/SIL
24 V DC, reverse polarity protection, static destruction limit 40 V
Input U − 5.7 V
Current consumption I = (corresponding to 4.8 mA at 24 V/114 mW)
3840 Ω
Signal "0" no pick-up ≤ 15 V

Signal "1" safe pick-up >19 V
Service life >5 x 106 switching cycles
KV coefficient 0.15
Implementation in
safety-related systems in
Same as positioner pneumatics
compliance with
IEC 61508/SIL
Inductive limit switch
Type SJ 2SN Proximity
For connection to switching amplifier acc. to EN 60947-5-6
Switch
External position sensor
Travel Same as positioner
10 m with M12x1 connector, designed for continuous flexing, flame retardant acc. to
Cable
VDE 0472, resistant to oils, lubricants, coolants as well as other corrosive media
Perm. ambient temperature –60 to +105 °C
Vibration immunity Up to 10 g in the range between 10 and 2000 Hz
Degree of protection IP 67
16 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 17
Attachment to the control valve – Mounting parts and accessories
4 Attachment to the control Lever and pin position

valve – Mounting parts and The positioner is adapted to the actuator
accessories and to the rated travel by the lever on the
back of the positioner and the pin inserted
WARNING! into the lever.
Attach the positioner, keeping the following The travel tables on page 19 show the maxi-
sequence: mum adjustment range at the positioner. The
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve travel that can be implemented at the valve
2. Connect the supply air is additionally restricted by the selected
3. Connect the electrical power fail-safe position and the required compres-
4. Perform the start-up settings sion of the actuator springs.
The positioner is standard equipped with the
The positioner is suitable for the following lever M (pin position 35).
types of attachment:
4 Direct attachment to SAMSON
Type 3277 Actuator
4 Attachment to actuators according to
IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)
4 Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow
Valve
4 Attachment to rotary actuators
NOTICE
Attach the positioner to the control valve,
Fig. 3 · Lever M with pin position 35
observing the following instructions to avoid
damaging the positioner.
– Use only the mounting parts/accessories
listed in the Tables 1 to 5 (pages 38 to
Note: If the standard mounted lever M (pin
40) to mount the positioner. Observe the
position 35) is replaced, the newly mounted
type of attachment!
lever must be moved once all the way as far
– Observe the assignment between lever
as it will go in both directions to adapt it to
and pin position (see travel tables on
the internal measuring lever.
page 19)!
18 EB 8384-5 EN
Travel tables
Note: The lever M is included in the scope of delivery.

Levers S, L, XL for attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR) are available as acces-
sories (see Table 3 on page 39).
Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 and Type 3277 Actuators

Actuator size Rated travel Adjustment range at positioner Required Assigned
[cm²] [mm] Min. Travel Max. lever pin position
120 7.5 5.0 to 25.0 M 25

120/240/350 15 7.0 to 35.0 M 35
700 30 10.0 to 50.0 M 50
Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)

SAMSON valves/Type 3271 Actuator Other valves/actuators
Required Assigned
Actuator size Rated travel
lever pin position
[cm²] [mm] min. Travel max.
60 and 120 with
7.5 3.6 to 18.0 S 17
Type 3510 Valve
120 7.5 5.0 to 25.0 M 25
120/240/350 15
7.0 to 35.0 M 35
700 7.5
700 15 and 30 10.0 to 50.0 M 50
1400/2800 30 14.0 to 70.0 L 70
1400/2800 60 20.0 to 100.0 L 100
1400/2800 120 40.0 to 200.0 XL 200
Attachment to rotary actuators according to VDI/VDE 3845

Rotary actuators Required Assigned
Min. Opening angle Max. lever pin position
24 to 100° M 90°
EB 8384-5 EN 19
4.1 Direct attachment ing towards the signal pressure connec-

tion. Make sure that the bonded gasket
4.1.1 Type 3277-5 Actuator (14) points towards the actuator yoke.
5. 15 mm travel: Keep the follower pin (2)
Refer to Table 1 on page 38 for the required at lever M (1) on the back of the
mounting parts as well as the accessories positioner in the pin position 35 (deliv-
with their order numbers.
ered state).
Note the travel table on page 19!
7.5 mm travel: Remove the follower pin
Actuator with 120 cm² (2) from the pin position 35, reposition it
Depending on the type of positioner attach- in the bore for pin position 25 and
ment, the signal pressure is routed either left screw tight.
or right of the yoke through a bore to the 6. Insert formed seal (15) in the groove of
actuator diaphragm. Depending on the the positioner casing.
fail-safe action of the actuator "Actuator 7. Place positioner on the cover plate (10)
stem extends" or "Actuator stem retracts" in such a manner that the follower pin
(valve closes or opens if the supply air fails), (2) rests on the top of the follower clamp
the switchover plate (9) must first be at-
(3). Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly
tached to the actuator yoke. Align the
and open the positioner cover to hold
switchover plate with the corresponding
symbol for left or right attachment according the positioner shaft in position at the cap
to the marking (view looking onto the or the switch (Fig. 18).
switchover plate). The lever (1) must rest on the follower
clamp with spring force.
1. Mount connecting plate (6) or pressure
Mount the positioner on the cover plate
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges
(10) using the two fixing screws. During
onto the positioner, making sure both
the installation make sure that the seal
seal rings (6.1) are seated properly.
ring (10.1) is inserted in the bore of the
2. Remove vent plug (4) on the back of the
cover plate.
positioner and close the signal pressure
8. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
output "Output 38" on the connecting
Make sure that the vent plug points
plate (6) or on the pressure gauge
downwards when the control valve is in-
bracket (7) with the stopper (5) included
stalled to allow any condensed water
in the accessories.
that collects to drain off.
3. Place follower clamp (3) on the actuator
stem, align and screw tight so that the
mounting screw is located in the groove
of the actuator stem.
4. Mount cover plate (10) with narrow side
of the cut-out opening (Fig. 4, left) point-
20 EB 8384-5 EN
Symbols Switchover plate (9) 1 Lever

1.1 Nut
Actuator stem 1.2 Disk spring
extends 2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
Attachment left Attachment right 4 Vent plug
5 Stopper
Actuator stem 6 Connecting plate
retracts 6.1 Seal rings
7 Pressure gauge bracket
8 Press. gauge mounting kit
Signal pressure
9 Switchover plate
input for left Signal pressure for actuator
attachment Marking input for right 10 Cover plate
attachment
10.1Seal ring
11 Cover
15
14 Gasket
14 15 Formed seal
Lever M
1
1.1
1.2
Cut-out of cover
plate
10.1
9 11
6.1 10
6
6 Note:
5 Always use the connecting plate (6)
Supply 9 Output 38 included in the accessories to connect
supply and output.
7 Never screw threaded parts directly
into the housing.
8
Fig. 4 · Direct attachment - Signal pressure connection for Type 3277-5 Actuator with 120 cm²
EB 8384-5 EN 21
4.1.2 Type 3277 Actuator rests on the top of the follower clamp
(3). Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly
Refer to Table 2 on page 39 or the required and open the positioner cover to hold
mounting parts as well as the accessories the positioner shaft in position at the cap
or the switch (Fig. 18). The lever (1) must
rest on the follower clamp with spring
Actuators with 240 to 700 cm² force. Mount the positioner on the cover
The positioner can be mounted either on the plate (10) using the two fixing screws.
left or on the right side of the yoke. The sig- 6. Make sure that the tip of the gasket (16)
nal pressure is routed to the actuator over projecting from the side of the connec-
the connection block (12), for actuators with tion block (12) is positioned above the
fail-safe action "Actuator stem extends" in- actuator symbol that corresponds with
ternally through a bore in the valve yoke the actuator with fail-safe action "Actua-
and for "Actuator stem retracts" through ex- tor stem extends" or "Actuator stem re-
ternal piping.
tracts." If necessary, remove the three
1. Place follower clamp (3) on the actuator fixing screws and the cover. Then repo-
stem, align and screw tight so that the sition the gasket (16) turned by 180°.
mounting screw is located in the groove The previous version of the connection
of the actuator stem. block (Fig. 5, bottom) requires the switch
2. Mount cover plate (10) with narrow side plate (13) to be turned such that the cor-
of the cut-out opening (Fig. 5, on the responding actuator symbol points to the
left) pointing towards the signal pressure marking.
connection. Make sure that the bonded 7. Place the connection block (12) with the
gasket (14) points towards the actuator associated seal rings against the
yoke. positioner and the actuator yoke. Screw
3. For actuators with 700 cm², remove the it tight using the fixing screw (12.1). For
follower pin (2) at lever M (1) on the actuators with fail-safe action "Actuator
back of the positioner from pin position stem retracts", additionally remove the
35, reposition it in the bore for pin posi- stopper (12.2) and fit on the external
tion 50 and screw tight. signal pressure piping.
For actuators 240 and 350 cm² with 8. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
15 mm travel, the follower pin (2) re- Make sure that the vent plug points
mains in pin position 35. downwards when the control valve is in-
4. Insert formed seal (15) in the groove of stalled to allow any condensed water
the positioner casing. that collects to drain off.
5. Place positioner on the cover plate in
such a manner that the follower pin (2)
22 EB 8384-5 EN
1 Lever 12.1 Screw

1.1 Nut 12.2 Stopper or connection for
1.2 Disk spring external piping
2 Follower pin 13 Switch plate
15 10 14
3 Follower clamp 14 Gasket
10 Cover plate 15 Formed seal
11 Cover 16 Gasket 1 2 3 11
12 Connection block
Lever M
1.1
1.2
Cut-out of
cover plate (10)
A
16
SUPPLY
Actuator stem 16 12 12.1 12.2
retracts extends
Connection block (old)

with switch plate (13)
13
12
SUPPLY Stem retracts B
Stem extends
Marking 12
12.1 12.2
Fig. 5 · Direct attachment – Signal pressure connection for Type 3277 Actuator with 240, 350 and 700 cm²
EB 8384-5 EN 23
4.2 Attachment according to 4. Select required lever size (1) M, L or XL

IEC 60534-6 and pin position according to the actua-
tor size and valve travels listed in the ta-
Refer to Table 3 on page 39 for the required ble on page 19.
mounting parts as well as the accessories Should you require a pin position other
with their order numbers. than position 35 with the standard in-
stalled lever M, or require a lever size L
The positioner is attached to the control or XL, proceed as follows:
valve with a NAMUR bracket (10). 5. Screw the follower pin (2) in the as-
1. Screw the two bolts (14) to the bracket signed lever bore (pin position) as listed
(9.1) of the stem connector (9), place the in the table. Only use the longer follower
follower plate (3) on top and use the pin (2) included in the mounting kit.
screws (14.1) to tighten. 6. Place lever (1) on the positioner shaft
and screw tight using the disk spring
Actuator size 2800 cm²:
(1.2) and nut (1.1).
For a travel of 60 mm or smaller, screw the
longer follower plate (3.1) directly to the
stem connector (9). For a travel exceeding Note: If you have mounted a new lever (1),
60 mm, mount the bracket (16) first and you must move it once all the way as far as
then the follower plate (3) to the bracket to- it will go in both directions.
gether with the bolts (14) and screws (14.1).
2. Mount NAMUR bracket (10) to the con- 7. Place positioner on the NAMUR bracket
trol valve as follows: in such a manner that the follower pin
For attachment to the NAMUR rib, use (2) rests in the slot of the follower plate
an M8 screw (11), washer, and toothed (3, 3.1). Adjust the lever (1) correspond-
lock washer directly in the yoke bore. ingly.
For attachment to valves with rod-type Screw the positioner to the NAMUR
yokes, use two U-bolts (15) around the bracket using both its fixing screws.
yoke.
Align the NAMUR bracket (10) in such a
way that the slot of the follower plate (3)
is centrally aligned with the NAMUR
bracket at mid valve travel.
(8) on the positioner, making sure both
seal rings (6.1) are seated properly.
24 EB 8384-5 EN
Attachment to rod-type yoke

Rod diameter 20 to 35 mm
15
11
10
Attachment to
9 NAMUR rib
9.1
3.1
16
Additional bracket for
actuators with 2800 cm2
and travel ≥ 60 mm
14
1 3
1 Lever Lever XL and L
1.1 Nut
1 14.1
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower plate
3.1 Follower plate 2
6 Connecting plate 1.1
6.1 6 7 8
6.1 Seal rings 1.2
7 Pressure gauge bracket 1
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
9 Stem connector
9.1 Bracket
10 NAMUR bracket
11 Screw
14 Bolt
14.1 Screw
15 U-bolt
16 Bracket
Note: Always use the connecting plate (6) included in the accessories to
connect supply and output. Never screw threaded parts directly into the housing.
Fig. 6 · Attachment according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)
EB 8384-5 EN 25
4.3 Attachment to Type 3510

Micro-flow Valve
Refer to Table 3 on page 39 for the required
mounting parts as well as the accessories
The positioner is attached to the valve yoke
using a bracket.
1. Place clamp (3) on the valve stem con-
nector, align at a right angle and screw
tight.
2. Screw bracket (10) to the valve yoke us-
ing two screws (11).
to the positioner, making sure both seal
rings (6.1) are seated properly.
4. Unscrew the standard installed lever M
(1) including follower pin (2) from the
positioner shaft.
5. Take lever S (1) and screw follower pin
(2) in the bore for pin position 17.
6. Place lever S on the positioner shaft and
screw tight using the disk spring (1.2)
and nut (1.1).
Move lever once all the way as far as it
will go in both directions.
7. Place positioner on the bracket (10) in
such a manner that the follower pin
slides into the groove of the clamp (3).
Adjust the lever (1) correspondingly.
Screw the positioner to the bracket (10)
using both its screws.
26 EB 8384-5 EN
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Clamp
6 Connecting clamp
6.1 Seal rings
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
10 Bracket
11 Screw 3
10
Note: Always use the connecting plate 11

(6) included in the accessories to connect
supply and output.
Never screw threaded parts directly into
the housing.
11
1.2 1.1 2 1
6 6.1
Lever S
8 7
Fig. 7 · Attachment to Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve
EB 8384-5 EN 27
4.4 Attachment to rotary For double-acting, springless rotary ac-

actuators tuators, a reversing amplifier is required
to attach the positioner to the actuator,
Refer to Table 4 on page 40 for the required see section 4.5.
mounting parts as well as the accessories 6. Unscrew the standard follower pin (2)
with their order numbers. from the positioner's lever M (1). Use the
The positioner is mounted to the rotary actu- metal follower pin (Ø5) included in the
ator using two pairs of double brackets. mounting kit and screw tight into the
Prior to attaching the positioner to the bore for pin position 90°.
SAMSON Type 3278 Rotary Actuator, 7. Place positioner on the top pair of
mount the associated adapter (5) to the free brackets (10) and screw tight. Con-
end of the rotary actuator shaft. sidering the actuator's direction of rota-
tion, adjust lever (1) so that it engages in
Note: On attaching the positioner as de- the slot of the coupling wheel (4) with its
scribed below, it is imperative that the actu- follower pin (see Fig. 9). It must be guar-
ator's direction of rotation is observed. anteed that the lever (1) is parallel to the
long side of the positioner when the ac-
tuator is at half its angle of rotation.
1. Place follower clamp (3) on the slotted
8. Stick scale plate (4.3) on the coupling
actuator shaft or the adapter (5).
wheel so that the arrow tip indicates the
2. Place coupling wheel (4) with flat side
closed position, and it can be easily
facing the actuator on the follower
read when the valve is installed.
clamp (3). Refer to Fig. 9 to align slot so
that it matches the direction of rotation
when the valve is in its closed position.
3. Screw coupling wheel and follower
clamp tightly onto the actuator shaft us- 1.2
1
ing screw (4.1) and disk spring (4.2). 1.1
4. Screw the bottom pair of brackets (10.1)
4.1
with the bends pointing either to the in-
2 4.2
side or to the outside (depending on the
actuator size) to the actuator case. Posi- 3 5
tion top pair of brackets (10) and screw
tight.
gauge bracket (7) with pressure gauges Mounting flange
to the positioner, making sure both

O-rings are seated properly. Fig. 8 · Mounting the coupling wheel with Type 3278
28 EB 8384-5 EN
6.1
6
(7, 8)
10 1
1.2
1.1
2
10.1 4.3
4
5
Note:
Always use the connecting
plate (6) included in the
accessories to connect
supply and output. Control valve opens clockwise
Never screw threaded
parts directly into the Slot
housing.
Legends Figs. 8 + 9
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp (Fig. 8)
4 Coupling wheel Control valve opens counterclockwise
4.1 Screw
4.2 Disk spring
4.3 Scale plate
4.3 Scale plate
5 Actuator shaft
Adapter for Type 3278
6.1 Seal rings
8 Pressure gauge
mounting kit
10 Top pair of brackets
10.1 Bottom pair of brackets Slot
Fig. 9 · Attachment to rotary actuators
EB 8384-5 EN 29
4.5 Reversing amplifier for NOTICE

double-acting actuators Do not unscrew the sealing plug (1.5) out of
the reversing amplifier.
For the use with double-acting actuators, the The rubber seal (1.4) is not required and
positioner must be fitted with a reversing can be removed when the sealing plug is
amplifier. The reversing amplifier is listed as used.
an accessory in the Table 5 on page 40.
The output signal pressure of the positioner
is supplied at the output A1 of the reversing Signal pressure connections
amplifier. An opposing pressure, which A1: Output A1 leading to the signal pressure
equals the required supply pressure when connection at the actuator which opens the
added to the pressure at A1, is applied at valve when the pressure increases
output A2.
The rule A1 + A2 = Z applies. A2: Output A2 leading to the signal pressure
connection at the actuator which closes the
Mounting valve when the pressure increases
1. Mount the connecting plate (6) from the
accessories in Table 5 to the positioner.
Make sure that both O-rings (6.1) are
4 Set slide switch on positioner to
AIR TO OPEN.
seated correctly.
2. Thread the special nuts (1.3) from the
6. After the initialization is completed, set
accessories of the reversing amplifier
Code 16 (Pressure limit) to OFF.
into the boreholes of the connecting
plate.
4.5.1 Pressure gauge attachment
3. Insert the gasket (1.2) into the recess of
the reversing amplifier and push both The mounting sequence shown in Fig. 10 re-
the hollowed special screws (1.1) into mains unchanged. Screw a pressure gauge
the connecting boreholes A1 and Z. bracket onto the connections A1 and Z.
4. Place the reversing amplifier onto the Pressure gauge G¼ 1400-7106
connecting plate (6) and screw tight us- bracket: ¼ NPT 1400-7107
ing both the special screws (1.1).
Pressure gauges for supply air Z and output
5. Use a screwdriver (8 mm wide) to screw
A1 as listed in Tables 1 to 4.
the enclosed filters (1.6) into the con-
necting boreholes A1 and Z.
30 EB 8384-5 EN
From the positioner

Output 38 Supply 9
A1 Z
A2
Control signals to 1.3 1.1 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6

A1 the actuator A2
1 Reversing amplifier 6 Connecting plate
1.1 Special screws 6.1 O-rings
1.2 Gasket 6.2 Screws
1.3 Special nuts
1.4 Rubber seal
6.1 6 6.2 1.5 Sealing plug
1.6 Filter
Supply 9
Z
Output 38
A1
1.3 1.2 1.1 1 1.6
Fig. 10 · Mounting a reversing amplifier
EB 8384-5 EN 31
4.6 Attaching an external 4.6.1 Mounting the position

position sensor sensor with direct
attachment
Refer to Table 6 on p. 41 for the mounting
parts as well as the accessories required. Type 3277-5 Actuator with 120 cm²
In the positioner version with an external The signal pressure from the positioner is
position sensor, the sensor placed in a sepa- routed over the signal pressure connection
rate housing is attached over a plate or of the connecting plate (9, Fig. 12 left) to the
bracket to the control valve. The travel actuator diaphragm chamber. To proceed,
pick-off corresponds to that of a standard first screw the connecting plate (9) included
device. in the accessories onto the actuator yoke.
The positioner unit can be mounted as re-
quired to a wall or a pipe. 4 Turn the connecting plate (9) so that the
correct symbol for the fail-safe position
For the pneumatic connection either a con- "Actuator stem extends" or "Actuator
necting plate (6) or a pressure gauge stem retracts" is aligned with the mark-
bracket (7) must be fixed to the housing, de- ing (Fig. 12, below).
pending on the accessory chosen. Make 4 Make sure that the gasket for the con-
sure the seal rings (6.1) are correctly in- necting plate (9) is correctly inserted.
serted (see Fig. 6, bottom right). 4 The connecting plate has boreholes with
For the electrical connection a 10 meter NPT and G threads.
connecting lead with M12x1 connectors is Seal the threaded connection that is not
included in the scope of delivery. used with the rubber seal and square
plug.
Note: In addition, the instructions in sections Type 3277 Actuator with 240 to 700 cm²:
5.1 and 5.2 apply for the pneumatic and The signal pressure is routed to the connec-
electrical connection. tion at the side of the actuator yoke for the
Operation and setting are described in sec- version "Actuator stem extends".
tions 6 and 7. For the fail-safe position "Actuator stem re-
tracts" the connection on the top diaphragm
case is used. The connection at the side of
the yoke must be fitted with a venting plug
(accessories).
Mounting the position sensor
1. Place the lever (1) on the sensor in
mid-position and hold it in place.
Unthread the nut (1.1) and remove the
Fig. 11 · Positioner unit with sensor mounted on a
micro-flow valve
32 EB 8384-5 EN
lever together with the disk spring (1.2) 5. Place the follower clamp (3) on the actu-
from the sensor shaft. ator stem, align and fasten it, making
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the sure that the fastening screw rests in the
mounting plate (21). groove of the actuator stem.
3. Depending on the actuator size and 6. Place the mounting plate (21) together
rated valve travel, determine the re- with the sensor onto the actuator yoke so
quired lever and position of the follower that the follower pin (2) rests on the top
pin (2) from the travel table on page 19. of the follower clamp (3). It must rest on
The positioner is delivered with lever M it with spring force.
in pin position 35 on the sensor. If nec- Screw tight the mounting plate (21) onto
essary, remove the follower pin (2) from the actuator yoke using both fixing
its pin position and move it to the bore- screws.
hole for the recommended pin position 7. Mount cover (11) on the other side.
and screw tight. Make sure that the vent plug points
4. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2) downwards when the control valve is in-
on the sensor shaft. stalled to allow any condensed water
Place the lever (1) in mid-position and that collects to drain off.
hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
2
3
11
1.1
1.2
20
21 Signal pressure
9 1 Lever
Vent plug 1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
Signal pressure
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
Actuator stem
Symbol 9 Connecting plate
extends retracts
11 Cover
20 Position sensor
Marking 21 Mounting plate
Fig. 12 · Mounting for Type 3277-5 Actuator (left) and Type 3277 Actuator (right)
EB 8384-5 EN 33
4.6.2 Mounting the position For other actuator sizes or travels, select the
sensor with attachment lever and pin position from the travel table
on page 19. Lever L and XL are included in
according to IEC 60534-6 the mounting kit.
For the required mounting parts and the ac- 3. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41. on the sensor shaft.
1. Place the lever (1) on the sensor in Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
mid-position and hold it in place. hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
Unthread the nut (1.1) and remove the 4. Screw both bolts (14) to the bracket
lever together with the disk spring (1.2) (9.1) of the stem connector (9). Attach
from the sensor shaft. the follower plate (3) and fix with the
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the screws (14.1).
bracket (21). 5. Place the bracket with the sensor at the
The standard attached lever M with the fol- NAMUR rib in such a manner that the
lower pin (2) at position 35 is designed for follower pin (2) rests in the slot of the fol-
120, 240 and 350 cm² actuators with lower plate (3), then screw the bracket
15 mm rated travel. using its fixing screws onto the valve.
20 21 1.1, 1.2 14.1 3 14 9.1 9
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower plate
9 Stem connector
9.1 Bracket
14 Bolt
14.1 Screws
20 Position sensor
21 Bracket
Fig. 13 · Mounting according to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR)
34 EB 8384-5 EN
4.6.3 Mounting the position Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
sensor to Type 3510 hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
Micro-flow Valve 4. Place the follower clamp (3) on the stem
connector, align it at a right angle and
For the required mounting parts and the ac- screw tight.
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41. 5. Position the bracket (21) with the positi-
1. Place the lever (1) in mid-position and on sensor on the valve yoke and screw
hold it in place. Unscrew the nut (1.1) tight, making sure the follower pin (2)
and remove the standard attached lever slides into the groove of the follower
M (1) together with the disk spring (1.2) clamp (3).
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
bracket (21).
3. Select the lever S (1) from the accesso-
ries and screw the follower pin (2) into
the hole for pin position 17.
Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
on the sensor shaft.
1.1
20 21 1.2
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
3 Follower clamp
1 20 Position sensor
21 Bracket
2
Fig. 14 · Mounting on a micro-flow valve
EB 8384-5 EN 35
4.6.4 Mounting the position 4. Place the lever (1) and disk spring (1.2)
sensor to rotary actuators on the sensor shaft.
Place the lever (1) in mid-position and
For the required mounting parts and the ac- hold it in place. Screw on the nut (1.1).
cessories, refer to Table 6 on page 41.
1. Place the lever (1) in mid-position and Follow the instructions describing attachment
hold it in place. Unscrew the nut (1.1) to the standard positioner in section 4.4
and remove the standard attached lever Instead of the positioner, attach the position
M (1) together with the disk spring (1.2) sensor (20) with its mounting plate (21).
from the sensor shaft.
2. Screw the position sensor (20) onto the
mounting plate (21).
3. Replace the follower pin (2) normally at-
tached to the lever (1) with the metal fol-
lower pin (Ø 5) from the accessories
and screw it into the hole for pin posi-
tion 90°.
20
21
1 Lever
1.1 Nut
1.2 Disk spring
2 Follower pin
20 Position sensor
2 1 1.1, 1.2 21 Mounting plate
Fig. 15 · Positioner unit with sensor mounted on rotary actuators
36 EB 8384-5 EN
4.7 Attaching positioners with 4.8 Air purging function for

stainless steel housings single-acting actuators
Positioners with stainless steel housings re- The exhaust air from the positioner is di-
quire mounting parts that are completely verted to the actuator spring chamber to
made of stainless steel or free of aluminum. provide corrosion protection inside the actu-
ator. The following must be observed:
Note: The pneumatic connecting plate and a
pressure gauge bracket made of stainless Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 (stem ex-
steel are available (order numbers listed be- tends FA/stem retracts FE)
low). The pneumatic reversing amplifiers in The air purging function is automatically
stainless steel is not available. provided.
Direct attachment to Type 3277, 240 to

Connecting plate G¼ 1400-7476 700 cm2
(stainless steel): ¼ NPT 1400-7477 FA: Remove the stopper 12.2 (Fig. 5 on
page 23) at the connection block and
Pressure gauge Only in make a pneumatic connection to the
bracket (st. steel): ¼ NPT 1400-7108 spring chamber on the vented side.
FE: The air purging function is automati-
The Tables 1 to 5 (pages 38 and 40) apply cally provided.
for attaching positioners with stainless steel
housings with the following restrictions: Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR
Direct attachment rib or attachment to rod-type yokes) and to
All mounting kits from Tables 1 and 2 can rotary actuators
be used. The connection block is not re- The positioner requires an additional port
quired. The stainless steel version of the for the exhaust air that can be connected
pneumatic connecting plate routes the air in- over piping. An adapter available as an ac-
ternally to the actuator. cessory is used for this purpose:
Attachment according to IEC 60534-6

(NAMUR rib or attachment to rod-type Threaded bushing G ¼ 0310-2619
yokes) (M20 x 1.5): ¼ NPT 0310-2550
All mounting kits from Table 3 can be used.
Connecting plate in stainless steel.
NOTICE
Attachment to rotary actuators The adapter uses one of the M20 x 1.5 con-
All mounting kits from Table 4 can be used nections in the housing which means just
except for the heavy-duty version. Con- one cable gland can be installed.
necting plate in stainless steel.
EB 8384-5 EN 37
Should other valve accessories be used

which vent the actuator (e.g. solenoid valve,
volume booster, quick exhaust valve), this
exhaust air must also be included in the
purging function. The connection over the
adapter at the positioner must be protected
with a check valve (e.g. check valve G ¼,
order no. 8502-0597) mounted in the pip-
ing. Otherwise the pressure in the positioner
housing would rise above the ambient pres-
sure and damage the positioner when the
exhausting components respond suddenly.
4.9 Required mounting parts and

accessories
Table 1 · Direct attachment to Type 3277-5 Actuator (Fig. 4) Order no.
Mounting Mounting parts for actuators 120 cm² or smaller 1400-7452

parts
Switchover plate (old) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 (old) 1400-6819
Switchover plate new for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6822
Accessories
1
for the Connecting plate for additional attachment of a solenoid valve: G 8 1400-6820
actuator 1
Connecting plate (old) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 (old): 8 NPT 1400-6821
Connecting plate new for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6823
1
G 4 1400-7461
Connecting plate (6) 1
4 NPT 1400-7462
Accessories G 1
4 1400-7458
for the Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
positioner 4 NPT 1400-7459
St. steel/brass 1400-6950
Pressure gauge mounting kit (8) up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/St. st. 1400-6951
1)
Only new switchover and connecting plates can be used with new actuators (Index 01).
Old and new plates are not interchangeable.
38 EB 8384-5 EN
Table 2 · Direct attachment to Type 3277 Actuator (Fig. 5) Order no.
Mounting Attachment to actuators with 240, 350, 700 cm2 1400-7453

parts
Steel 1400-6444
240 cm2
Stainless steel 1400-6445
Required piping with screw fittings Steel 1400-6446
– for "Actuator stem retracts" 350 cm2
– when the top diaphragm chamber is filled with air Stainless steel 1400-6447
Steel 1400-6448
Accessories 700 cm2
Stainless steel 1400-6449
1
G 4 1400-8811
Connection block with seals and screw 1
4 NPT 1400-8812
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output and supply)
St. steel/st. steel 1400-6951
Table 3 · Attachment to NAMUR ribs or control valves with rod-type yokes

(20 to 35 mm rod diameter) according to IEC 60534-6 (Figs. 6 and 7)
Travel in mm Lever For actuators Order no.
7.5 S Type 3271-5 with 60/120 cm² on Type 3510 Valve (Fig. 7) 1400-7457
5 to 50 M 1) Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271 with 120 to 700 cm² 1400-7454
14 to 100 L Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271, 1400-60 version 1400-7455
Actuators from other manufacturers and Type 3271, versions 1400-120 and
40 to 200 XL 1400-7456
2800 cm² with 120 mm travel
Type 3271, versions 1400-120 and 2800 cm2 with 30/60 mm travel 1400-7466
Mounting bracket for Emerson and Masoneilan linear actuators
30 or 60 L In addition, a mounting kit acc. to IEC 60534-6 is required depending on the 1400-6771
travel. See row above.
Valtek Type 25/50 1400-9554
1
G 4 1400-7461
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Accessories Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/st. st. 1400-6951
1)
Lever M is mounted on basic device (included in the scope of delivery)
EB 8384-5 EN 39
Table 4 · Attachment to rotary actuators (Figs. 8 and 9) Order no.
Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2 1400-7448

Attachment for SAMSON Type 3278 with 160/320 cm2 1400-7614
Attachment for Camflex II 1400-9120
Mounting Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 2, heavy-duty version 1400-9244
parts
Attachment acc. to VDI/VDE 3845, fixing level 1, heavy-duty version 1400-9526
Attachment for SAMSON Type 3278 with 160 cm2 and
1400-9245
also for VETEC Types S160, R and M, heavy-duty version
Attachment for AIR TORQUE 10 000, heavy-duty version 1400-9542
1
G 4 1400-7461
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Accessories Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar (output/supply)
St. steel/st. s. 1400-6951
Table 5 General accessories

Pneumatic reversing amplifier for double-acting G¼ 1079-1118
actuators ¼ NPT 1079-1119
Cable gland M20 x 1.5, nickel-plated brass 1890-4875
Adapter M 20 x 1.5 to ½ NPT, aluminum 0310-2149
Retrofit kit for inductive limit switch 1x SJ 2-SN 1400-7460
Cover plate with list of parameters
German/English (standard) 1990-5328
Accessories and operating instructions
EXPERT+ activation code for Type 3730-5 Positioner 1400-9318
USB dongle for EXPERT+ (specify the number of positioners to be activated)
1400-9555
Can only be used in combination with TROVIS-VIEW 6661-1058
TROVIS-VIEW with device module 3730-5 (order no. 6661-1058) 1262295
Serial interface adapter (SAMSON SSP interface - RS-232 port on computer) 1400-7700
Isolated USB interface adapter (SAMSON SSP interface - USB port on computer) 1400-9740
40 EB 8384-5 EN
Table 6 · Attachment of external position sensor Order no.
Mounting parts for actuators with 120 cm² see Fig. 12 left 1400-7472
1
Connecting plate (9, old) for Actuator G 8 1400-6820
Direct attachment Type 3277-5xxxxxx.00 1
8 NPT 1400-6821
Connecting plate (new) for Actuator Type 3277-5xxxxxx.01 (new) 1) 1400-6823
Mounting parts for actuators with 240, 350 and 700 cm², see Fig. 12 right 1400-7471
NAMUR attachmt. Mounting parts for attachment to NAMUR rib w. lever L and XL, see Fig. 13 1400-7468
Micro-flow valve Mounting parts for Type 3510 Micro-flow Valve, see Fig. 14 1400-7469
VDI/VDE 3845 for all sizes of fixing level 2, with follower clamp and coupling
1400-7473
wheel, version with CrNiMo steel bracket, see Fig. 15
Attachment to
VDI/VDE 3845 for all sizes of fixing level 2, heavy-duty version 1400-9384
rotary actuators
SAMSON Type 3278 with 160 cm2 (also for VETEC Type S160 and Type R),
1400-9385
heavy-duty version
1
G 4 1400-7461
4 NPT 1400-7462
1
G 4 1400-7458
Pressure gauge bracket (7) 1
4 NPT 1400-7459
Accessories for
positioner Pressure gauge mounting kit up to max. 6 bar St. steel/brass 1400-6950
(output/supply) St. steel/st. steel 1400-6951
Bracket to mount the positioner on a wall 0309-0111
Note: The other fastening parts are to be provided at the site of installation as
wall foundations vary from site to site.
1)
Only new switchover and connecting plates can be used with new actuators (Index 01).
Old and new plates are not interchangeable.
EB 8384-5 EN 41
Connections
5 Connections Blow through all air pipes and hoses tho-

roughly prior to connecting them.
WARNING!
Mount the positioner, keeping the following If the positioner is attached directly to the
sequence: Type 3277 Actuator, the connection of the
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve positioner's output pressure to the actuator
2. Connect the supply air is fixed. For attachment according to
3. Connect the electrical power IEC 60534-6 (NAMUR), the signal pressure
4. Perform the start-up settings can be routed to either the top or bottom di-
aphragm chamber of the actuator, depend-
The connection of the electrical auxiliary ing on the actuator's fail-safe action "Actua-
power may cause the actuator stem to move, tor stem extends" or "Actuator stem re-
depending on the operating mode. tracts".
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it For rotary actuators, the manufacturer's
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers. specifications for connection apply.
5.1.1 Signal pressure gauges

5.1 Pneumatic connections
To monitor the supply air (Supply) and sig-
NOTICE nal pressure (Output), we recommend that
Follow the instructions below to avoid dam- pressure gauges be attached (see accesso-
aging the positioner. ries in Tables 1 to 5).
– The threaded connections in the
positioner housing are not designed di- 5.1.2 Supply pressure
rect air connection!
– The screw glands must be screwed into The required supply air pressure depends
the connecting plate, the pressure gauge on the bench range and the actuator's oper-
mounting block or the connection block ating direction (fail-safe action).
from the accessories. The bench range is registered on the name-
The air connections are optionally de- plate either as spring range or signal pres-
signed as a bore with ¼ NPT or G ¼ sure range depending on the actuator. The
thread. direction of action is marked FA or FE, or by
The customary fittings for metal and cop- a symbol.
per pipes or plastic hoses can be used. Actuator stem extends FA (AIR TO OPEN)
– The supply air must be dry and free from
oil and dust. Fail-safe position "Valve Closed"
The maintenance instructions for upstre- (for globe and angle valves):
am pressure reducing stations must be Required supply pressure = Upper bench
observed. range value + 0.2 bar, minimum 1.4 bar.
42 EB 8384-5 EN
Connections
Actuator stem retracts FE (AIR TO CLOSE) 5.2 Electrical connections

Fail-safe position "Valve Open"
(for globe and angle valves): DANGER!
For tight-closing valves, the maximum signal Risk of electric shock and/or
pressure pstmax is roughly estimated as fol- the formation of an explosive
lows: atmosphere!
– For electrical installation, you are re-

d2 ⋅ π ⋅ Δp
pstmax = F + [bar] quired to observe the relevant
4⋅A
electrotechnical regulations and the acci-
d = Seat diameter [cm] dent prevention regulations that apply in
Δp = Differential pressure across the valve the country of use. In Germany, these
[bar] are the VDE regulations and the accident
A = Actuator diaphragm area [cm²] prevention regulations of the employers'
liability insurance association.
– The following standards apply for assem-
If there are no specifications, calculate as bly and installation in hazardous areas:
follows: EN 60079-14: 2003 (VDE 0165 Part 1/
Required supply pressure = 8.98) "Electrical apparatus for explosive
Upper bench range value + 1 bar. gas atmospheres" and EN 50281-1-2:
1999 (VDE 0165 Part 2/11.99) "Electri-
cal apparatus for use in the presence of
5.1.3 Signal pressure (output)
combustible dust".
The signal pressure at the output (Out- – For the interconnection of intrinsically
put 38) of the positioner can be limited to safe electrical equipment, the permissible
1.4, 2.4 or 3.7 bar in Code 16. maximum values specified in the EC type
examination certificate apply (Ui or Uo, Ii
The limitation is not activated [OFF] by de- or Io, Pi or Po, Ci or Co, and Li or Lo).
fault. – The following applies for equipment with
type of protection EEx nA (non-sparking
apparatus) according to the standard
EN 50021 (1999): Connecting, interrupt-
ing, or switching circuits while energized
is only allowed during installation, main-
tenance or repair work.
– The following applies for equipment con-
nected to energy-limited circuits with
type of protection EEx nL (energy-limited
apparatus) according to the standard
EN 50021 (1999): This type of equip-
EB 8384-5 EN 43
Connections
ment may be switched under normal op- Cable entries

erating conditions.
The cable entry with M20 x 1.5 cable
– For the interconnection of equipment to
gland, 6 to 12 mm clamping range.
energy-limited circuits with type of pro-
There is a second M20 x 1.5 threaded bore
tection EEx nL IIC, the permissible maxi-
in the housing that can be used for addi-
mum values specified in the statement of
tional connection, when required.
conformity or the addenda to the state-
The screw terminals are designed for wire
ment of conformity apply.
cross-sections of 0.2 to 2.5 mm². Tighten by
– The terminal assignment specified in the
at least 0.5 Nm.
certificate must be adhered to. Reversing
the assignment of the electrical terminals
may cause the explosion protection to Note: The power supply for the positioner
become ineffective! can be supplied either over the connection
Do not tamper with enameled screws in- to the fieldbus segment or over a DC voltage
side or on the housing. source (9 to 32 V) connected to the bus ter-
minals in the positioner.
Note on the selection of cables and wires: You are required to observe the relevant
regulations for use in hazardous areas.
– To install intrinsically safe circuits, obser-
ve Paragraph 12 of the standard
EN 60079-14: 2003 (VDE 0165 Part 1). Bus line
To run multi-core cables or lines with
The shielded fieldbus connecting cable is to
more than one intrinsically safe circuit,
be routed over the electromagnetic-compati-
Paragraph 12.2.2.7 of this standard ap-
ble brass cable gland (standard) in the
plies.
positioner to the terminals. The shield, which
An additional cable gland can be instal-
is placed over the clamping insert, is con-
led when connecting the device over two
nected over a large area to the gland and
separate cables. Cable entries left un-
housing.
used must be sealed with blanking plugs.
Devices used at ambient temperatures 1. To connect the bus line, loosen the gland
down to –20 °C must have metal cable nut and the clamping insert from the
entries. positioner and remove the dust cap.
2. Slide the gland nut and clamping insert
over the connecting cable.
3. Strip the insulation off the end of the bus
line to the required connecting length
and cut the wire shield off up to a length
of approx. 13 mm. If necessary, cut off
any cable core filling as well.
44 EB 8384-5 EN
Connections
4. Disentangle the braided shield and pull

NOTICE
it over the clamping insert. To connect the limit switch, binary inputs,
5. Press the clamping insert into the con- and forced venting, an additional cable
necting screw gland and screw tight the gland that needs to be fitted in place of the
gland nut until the connecting cable is existing blanking plug is necessary.
clamped tightly. Open cable glands are not permissible as
6. Route the two-wire bus line to the screw the degree of protection IP 66 only applies
terminals marked "IEC 1158-2", when the positioner housing is sealed.
whereby no polarity has to be observed.
Brass cable gland Shielding Clamping insert Gland nut
G
u
Option
+81 -82 IEC 1158-2 +87 -88 +85 -86 +41 -42 A B
In preparation
Switch. amplifier
24 V DC BE1 BE2
(optional) EN 60947-5-6
Solenoid valve
Forced venting Bus line Binary contacts Inductive limit
(optional) switch (optional)
Fig. 16 · Electrical connections
EB 8384-5 EN 45
Connections
Limit switch 5.2.1 Establishing communication

For operation of the limit switches, switching The communication structure between the
amplifiers have to be connected in the out- controller, logic solvers (PLC) or automation
put circuit. Their function is to control the system, or between a PC or work station
limit values of the control circuit according and the positioner(s) is implemented to con-
to EN 60947-5-6, thus ensuring operational form with IEC 61158-2.
reliability of the positioner. If the positioner
is installed in hazardous areas, the relevant
regulations must be observed.
Binary input 1
An active contact can be operated at binary
input 1. The positioner can report the
switching state over the bus protocol.
Binary input 2
A passive, floating contact can be operated
at binary input 2.
The positioner can report the switching state
over the bus protocol.
Solenoid valve (forced venting function)

For positioners fitted with the optional sole-
noid valve for the forced venting function, a
voltage of 24 V DC must be connected to
the relevant terminals +81 and –82.
NOTICE
If there is no voltage connected for the sole-
noid valve at terminals +81 and –82 or
when the voltage signal is interrupted, the
positioner vents the actuator and does not
respond to the reference variable.
Observe the switching thresholds specified
in the technical data.
46 EB 8384-5 EN
Connections
PowerConditioner
Power conditioner
Power supply unit

Speisegerät
Control system
Leitsystem
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2
Bus termination
Terminierung FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2
3730-50 3730-50 3730-50 3730-50
PowerConditioner
Power conditioner
Control system Power supply unit

Speisegerät
Leitsystem
FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus
EN 61158-2 Ex fieldbus barrier/isolator
Ex-Feldbusbarriere/Trenner
Ex-Bereich
Bus termination Hazardous area
Terminierung FOUNDATIONTM fieldbus EN 61158-2
3730-51 3730-51 3730-51 3730-51
Fig. 17 · Connection acc. to FOUNDATION™ fieldbus, without (top) and with explosion protection (bottom)
EB 8384-5 EN 47
Operator controls and readings
6 Operator controls and Readings on display

readings Icons appear on the display that are as-
signed to parameters, codes and functions.
Rotary pushbutton
Operating modes:
The rotary pushbutton is located underneath
Manual mode (MAN), section 8.2.1
the front protective cover.
Automatic mode (AUTO), section 8.2.1
The positioner is operated on site using the
S Fail-safe position (SAFE), section 8.2.2
rotary pushbutton:
Turn to select codes and values. 4 Bar elements:
In manual and automatic modes,
Press to confirm setting. the bars indicate the system deviation
Slide switch AIR TO OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE that depends on the sign (+/–) and the
4 AIR TO OPEN applies when the increas- value. One bar element appears per 1 %
system deviation.
ing signal pressure opens the valve
4 AIR TO CLOSE applies when the increas- If the device has not yet been initialized,
the icon blinks on the display and the
ing signal pressure closes the valve
lever position in degrees in relation to
The signal pressure is the air pressure at the the longitudinal axis is indicated. One
output of the positioner which is transferred bar element corresponds to approxi-
to the actuator. mately a 5° angle of rotation.
For positioners with an attached reversing If the fifth bar element blinks (reading
amplifier for double-acting rotary actuators > 30°), the permissible angle of rotation
(section 4.5): switch position AIR TO OPEN. has been exceeded. Lever and pin posi-
Volume restriction Q tion must be checked.
The volume restriction is used to adapt the

4 Status alarms
: Maintenance alarm
air delivery to the actuator size. Two fixed : Maintenance required/Maintenance
settings are possible depending on how the demanded
air is routed at the actuator: These icons indicate that an error has oc-
4 For actuators smaller than 240 cm² with curred.
a loading pressure connection at the side A classified status can be assigned to
(Type 3271-5), set restriction to MIN each error. Classifications include “No
SIDE. message”, “Maintenance required”,
4 For a connection at the back (Type “Maintenance demanded” and “Mainte-
3277-5), set restriction to MIN BACK. nance alarm“ (see section 8.3).
4 For actuators 240 cm² and larger, set to 4 Configuration enabled
MAX SIDE for a side connection and to This indicates that the codes marked with
MAX BACK for a connection at the back. an asterisk (*) in the code list (section
16.1) are enabled for configuration (see
section 8.1).
48 EB 8384-5 EN
Operator controls and readings
Displays and their meaning
AUtO Automatic mode RES Reset and together

CL Clockwise RUN Start AO Transducer Block is in the MAN
mode, see page 138
CCL Counterclockwise SAFE Fail-safe position
Err Error SUb Substitute calibration
blinking Emergency mode
ESC Escape TunE Initialization in progress
(see error code 62 on p. 101)
LOW w too small YES Available
MAN Manual mode ZP Zero calibration blinking Not initialized
MAX Maximum range tEStinG Test function active
NO Not available S blinking Valve in mechanical fail-safe
NOM Nominal travel ää Increasing/increasing position (see SET_FAIL_ SAFE_POS
ON ON äæ Increasing/decreasing parameter in the AO Transducer Block,
page 142)
OFF OFF
Maintenance alarm/fault Manual mode Closed-loop operation Code
Bar graph for

Designation
system deviation
Position
or lever position
Parameter %
mm mm Units
%
Binary contact 1
S Binary contact 2
Configuration Maintenance required Fail-safe position

enabled Maintenance demanded active
Initialization key Cap or rotary switch Metal tag of proximity switch

SSP interface
INTERFACE
SERIAL
Switch for
INIT
fail-safe action
VALVE
AIR TO
CAUTION
ACTUATES
of the actuator
CLOSE
OPEN
%
mm mm
%
S
Volume restriction
MAX SIDE
MIN BACK
MIN SIDE
MAX BACK
Rotary pushbutton
Q
Fig. 18 · Display and operator controls
EB 8384-5 EN 49
Start-up – Settings
7 Start-up – Settings NOTICE

Perform the start-up settings in the same se-
WARNING! quence as listed (section 7.1 to section 7.6).
Attach the positioner, keeping the following
sequence:
1. Mount the positioner on the control valve Note: The positioner performs a test in the
2. Connect the supply air start-up phase while following its automa-
3. Connect the electrical power tion task at the same time. During the
4. Perform the start-up settings start-up phase, operation on site is unre-
stricted, yet write access is limited.
Reading on display after connecting the

electrical auxiliary power: 7.1 Determining the fail-safe
4 tEStinG runs across the display and then position
the fault alarm icon appears and
To adapt the positioner to the operating di-
blinks on the display when the positioner
rection of the actuator, set slide switch to
has not yet been initialized. The reading
AIR TO OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE .
indicates the lever position in degrees in
relation to the longitudinal axis. 4 AIR TO OPEN = Signal pressure opens
the valve, for fail-safe position: actuator
stem extends/valve closed
Reading when the 4 AIR TO CLOSE = Signal pressure closes
positioner has not yet been the valve, for fail-safe position: actuator
initialized stem retracts/valve open.
4 If Code 0 appears on the display when a NOTICE

positioner has been initialized. The The AIR TO OPEN setting always applies to
positioner is in the last active operating double-acting actuators.
mode.
WARNING! For checking purposes:

The actuator stem moves while the start-up After successfully completing initialization,
settings are being performed. the positioner display should read 0 % when
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it the valve is closed and 100 % when the
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers. valve is open. If this is not the case, change
the slide switch position and re-initialize the
positioner.
50 EB 8384-5 EN
Note: The switch position is prompted prior

4 The “BACK“ position applies for actua-
tors with a loading pressure connection
to an initialization. After an initialization
at the back, e.g. in Type 3277-5.
has been completed, changing the switch
position does not have any effect on the op- 4 The “SIDE”restriction position always ap-
eration of the positioner. plies for actuators from other manufac-
The positioner only needs to be initialized turers.
again after the fail-safe action of the actua- Overview · Position of volume restriction Q*
tor has been changed.
Transit
Signal time <1s ≥1s
pressure
7.2 Setting the volume restriction
Connection at the side MIN SIDE MAX SIDE
Q
Connection at the back MIN BACK MAX BACK
* Intermediate positions are not permitted.

MAX BACK
MIN SIDE
Q NOTICE
MIN BACK
MAX SIDE
The positioner needs to be initialized again
after the position of the restriction has been
Fig. 19 · Volume restriction Q
changed.
MAX BACK/MIN SIDE setting
The volume restriction Q is used to adapt the 7.3 Adapting the display
air delivery to the size of the actuator:
The data representation on the positioner
4 Actuators with a transit time < 1 s, e.g. display can be turned by 180° to adapt it to
linear actuators with an effective area how the positioner is mounted.
smaller than 240 cm², require a re-
stricted air flow rate (MIN).
4 Actuators with a transit time ≥ 1 s do not Reading direction for right
attachment of pneumatic
require the air flow rate to be restricted connections
(MAX).
The position of volume restriction Q also de-
pends on how the signal pressure is routed
Reading direction for left
at the actuator in SAMSON actuators: attachment of pneumatic
4 The “SIDE“ position applies for actuators connections
with a loading pressure connection at the
side, e.g. Type 3271-5.
If the displayed data appear upside down,
proceed as follows:
EB 8384-5 EN 51
Limiting the signal pressure:

Turn → Code 2
Press → Code 2 blinks. Pressure limit
Default: OFF
Turn → Required direction
Press to confirm reading direction.
Turn → Code 16
7.4 Limiting the signal pressure Press → Code 16 blinks.
If the maximum actuator force may cause Turn until the required pressure limit
damage to the valve, the signal pressure (1.4/2.4/3.7 bar) appears.
must be limited. Press to confirm the pressure limit set-
ting.
NOTICE
Do not activate the pressure limit function in 7.5 Checking the operating
double-acting actuators (with fail-safe action range of the positioner
AIR TO OPEN (OFF = default).
To check the mechanical attachment and the
proper functioning, the valve should be
Enable configuration at the positioner be-
moved through the operating range of the
fore activating the pressure limit function:
positioner in the manual operating mode
with the manual reference variable.
Note: If no settings are entered within
120 seconds, the enabled configuration Selecting manual operating mode:
function becomes invalid.
Operating mode
Default MAN
Configuration enabled
Default: OFF
Turn → Code 0
Turn → Code 3, display: OFF Press → Code 0 blinks.
Press → Code 3 blinks. Turn → MAN
Turn → ON Press . The positioner changes to the

manual operating mode.
Press → display
52 EB 8384-5 EN
Checking the operating range:

fore exchanging the lever or changing the
pin position.
Manual reference variable
w (current angle of rotation
is indicated) 7.6 Initialization
Turn → Code 1 WARNING!

During initialization, the control valve moves
Press → Code 1 and blink. through its entire travel/angle of rotation
Turn until the pressure in the positioner range. Therefore, do not start the initializa-
builds up, and the control valve moves to its tion procedure while a process is running,
final positions so that the travel/angle of ro- but only during start-up when all shut-off
tation can be checked. valves are closed.
The angle of rotation on the back of the
positioner is indicated. A horizontal lever Before starting initialization, check the maxi-
(mid position) is equal to 0°. mum permissible signal pressure of the con-
trol valve. During initialization, the
To ensure the positioner is working prop- positioner issues an output signal pressure
erly, the outer bar elements may not blink up to the maximum supply pressure sup-
while the valve is moving through the oper- plied. If necessary, limit the signal pressure
ating range. by connecting an upstream pressure reduc-
Exit Code 1 by pressing the rotary ing valve.
pushbutton ( ).
The permissible range has been exceeded
when the displayed angle is greater than NOTICE
30°, and the outer right or left bar element After the positioner has been mounted on to
blinks. another actuator or its mounting location
The positioner changes to the fail-safe posi- has been changed and prior to
tion (SAFE). re-initializing the positioner, the positioner
After canceling the fail-safe position (SAFE) needs to be reset to its basic setting (default
(see section 8.2.2) it is absolutely necessary values). Refer to section 7.8.
to check the lever and pin position as de-
scribed in section 4. During initialization the positioner adapts it-
self optimally to the friction conditions and
WARNING! the signal pressure demand of the control
To avoid personal injury or property dam- valve. The type and extent of self-adaptation
age caused by the supply air or electrical depends on the set initialization mode:
auxiliary power, disconnect the supply air
and electrical auxiliary power (bus line) be-
4 MAX maximum range (standard range)
Initialization mode for simple start-up of
EB 8384-5 EN 53
valves with two clearly defined mechani-

cal end positions, e.g. three-way valves Initialization successful,
(see section 7.6.1) positioner in automatic
4 NOM nominal range % operating mode
Initialization mode for all globe valves
(see section 7.6.2)
4 MAN manually selected range
The time required for an initialization pro-
cess depends on the transit time of the actu-
Initialization mode for globe valves with
ator and take several minutes.
an unknown nominal range (see section
7.6.3) After a successful initialization, the
4 SUB substitute calibration (emergency positioner runs in closed-loop operation in-
mode) dicated by .
This mode allows a positioner to be re-
A malfunctioning leads to the process being
placed while the plant is running, with
canceled. The initialization error appears on
the least amount of disruption to the
the display according to how it has been
plant (see section 7.6.4)
classified by the condensed state. See sec-
tion 8.3.
Note: For normal operation, simply start ini-
tialization by pressing the INIT key after
Note: Positioner with extended EXPERT+ di-
mounting the positioner on the valve and
agnostics automatically start to plot the ref-
setting the fail-safe position and volume re-
erence graphs (drive signal steady-state d1
striction. The positioner only needs to work
and hysteresis d2) after initialization has
with its default settings. If necessary, per-
been completed. tESt d1 or tESt d2 appear
form a reset (see section 7.8).
on the display in an alternating sequence.
An error during the plotting of the reference
graphs is indicated on the display by Code
Alternating displays 81.
Initialization running The positioner still works properly, even
Symbol depending on ini- though the reference graph plotting has not
tialization mode selected
been completed successfully.
Bar graph display Fail-safe position AIR TO CLOSE

indicating the progress of
the initialization If the slide switch is set to AIR TO CLOSE,
the positioner automatically switches to the
direction of action increasing/decreasing
(äæ) on successful completion of initializa-
tion.
This results in the following assignment be-
tween reference variable and valve position:
54 EB 8384-5 EN
Fail-safe Direction of Valve

position action Closed at Open at
Actuator stem Default OFF

extends FA ää 0% 100 %
AIR TO OPEN
Actuator stem
retracts FE äæ 100 % 0% Turn → Code 3, display: OFF
AIR TO CLOSE
Press → Code 3 blinks
The tight-closing function is activated. Turn → ON
Press , display
NOTICE
Set Code 15 (final position w>) to 99 % for Select the initialization mode:
three-way valves.
Initialization mode
Canceling an initalization process Default MAX
The initialization procedure can be canceled

while running by pressing the rotary
pushbutton ( ). StOP appears three sec- Turn → Code 6
onds long and the positioner then changes Press
to the fail-safe position (SAFE).
Turn → MAX
Exit the fail-safe position again over Code 0
(see section 8.2.2). Press to confirm the MAX as the initial-
ization mode.
7.6.1 MAX – Initialization based
Start initialization:
on maximum range
4 Press INIT key to start initialization!
The positioner determines travel/angle of
rotation of the closing member from the The nominal travel/angle of rotation is indi-
CLOSED position to the opposite side and cated in % after initialization. Code 5 (nomi-
adopts this travel/angle of rotation as the nal range) remains locked. The parameters
operating range from 0 to 100 %. for travel/angle range start (Code 8) and
travel/angle range end (Code 9) can also
Enable configuration: only be displayed and modified in %.
For a reading in mm/°, enter the pin posi-
Note: If no settings are entered within tion (Code 4).
120 seconds, the enabled configuration
EB 8384-5 EN 55
Enter the pin position: Enable configuration:

Pin position 120 seconds, the enabled configuration
mm Default OFF
Turn → Code 4
Press , Code 4 blinks
Default OFF
Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment)
Press . The reading of the nominal range Turn → Code 3, display: OFF
appears in mm/°.
7.6.2 NOM – Initialization based Turn → ON
on nominal range Press , display
The calibrated sensor allows the effective Enter the pin position and nominal range:
valve travel to be set very accurately. During
the initialization process, the positioner
checks whether the control valve can move
Pin position
through the indicated nominal range (travel mm Default OFF
or angle) without collision.
If this is the case, the indicated nominal
range is adopted with the limits of
travel/angle range start (Code 8) and
travel/angle range end (Code 9) as the op- Nominal range
mm (locked with Code 4 = No)
erating range.
Note: The maximum possible travel must al- Turn → Code 4

ways be greater than the nominal travel en-
tered. If this is not the case, initialization is Press , Code 4 blinks
interrupted (error alarm Code 52) because Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
the nominal travel is not achieved. vant section on attachment)
Press .
Turn → Code 5
56 EB 8384-5 EN
Turn → Nominal travel/angle Enable configuration:

Press .
Select the initialization mode: 120 seconds, the enabled configuration
Initialization mode
Default MAX
Default OFF
Turn → Code 6
Turn → Code 3
Turn → NOM
Press to confirm the NOM as the initial-
Turn → ON
ization mode.
Press , display
Enter the pin position:
4 Press INIT key to start initialization!
Note: After initialization, check the direction Pin position
of action and, if necessary, change it mm Default OFF
(Code 7).
Turn → Code 4
7.6.3 MAN – Initialization based
on a manually selected
range Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment)
Before starting initialization, move the con-
Press . The reading of the nominal range
trol valve manually to the OPEN position.
appears in mm/°.
The positioner calculates the differential
travel/angle using the OPEN and CLOSED
positions and adopts it as the operating
range with limits of travel/angle range start
(Code 8) and travel/angle range end
(Code 9).
EB 8384-5 EN 57
Select the initialization mode: 7.6.4 SUb substitute calibration

A complete initialization procedure takes
Initialization mode several minutes and requires the valve to
Default MAX move through its entire travel range several
times. This initialization mode, however, is
an emergency mode, in which the control
Turn → Code 6 parameters are estimated and not deter-
mined by an initialization procedure. As a
Press , Code 6 blinks result, a high level of accuracy cannot be
Turn → MAN expected. You should always select a differ-
ent initialization mode if the plant allows it.
Press to confirm the MAN as the initial-
ization mode. The SUb initialization mode is used to re-
place a positioner while the process is run-
Enter OPEN position: ning. For this purpose, the control valve is
usually fixed mechanically in a certain posi-
tion, or pneumatically by means of a pres-
Manual reference variable sure signal which is routed to the actuator
(the current angle of rota- externally. The blocking position ensures
tion is displayed)
that the plant continues to operate with this
valve position.
Turn → Code 0 By entering the blocking position (Code 35),
Press , Code 0 blinks closing direction (Code 34), pin position
(Code 4), nominal range (Code 5) and di-
Turn → MAN rection of action (Code 7), the positioner
Press can calculate the positioner configuration.
Turn → Code 1
NOTICE
Press , Code 1 blinks Perform a reset before re-initializing the
Turn until the valve reaches its OPEN po- positioner if the substitute positioner has al-
sition. ready been initialized. Refer to section .
Press to confirm the OPEN position.
Enable configuration:
4 Press INIT key to start initialization! Note: If no settings are entered within
120 seconds, the enabled configuration
58 EB 8384-5 EN
Select the initialization mode:
Default OFF
Initialization mode
Default MAX
Turn → Code 3
Press , Code 3 blinks Turn → Code 6
Turn → ON Press , Code 6 blinks
Press , display Turn → SUb
Enter the pin position and nominal range: Press to confirm the SUb as the initializa-
tion mode.
Enter the direction of action:

mm
Default OFF
Default ää
Nominal range
mm (locked with Code 4 = No)
Turn → Code 7
Turn → Code 4 Turn → Direction of action (ää or äæ)
Press , Code 4 blinks Press .
Turn → Pin position on lever (see rele-
vant section on attachment) Deactivate travel limit:
Press .
Turn → Code 5
Default 100.0
Turn → Nominal travel/angle
Press . Turn → Code 11
Turn → OFF
Press .
EB 8384-5 EN 59
Change pressure limit and control parame- Enter closing direction and blocking posi-
ters: tion:
Closing direction
Note: Do not change the pressure limit Direction of rotation caus-
(Code 16). Only change the control param- ing the valve to move to the
CLOSED position (view
eters KP (Code 17) and TV (Code 18) if the
onto positioner display)
settings of the the replaced positioner are Default: CCL (counterclock-
known. wise)
Blocking position
mm Default: 0
Pressure limit
Default OFF
Turn → Code 34
KP Turn → Closing direction (CCL counter-
Default 7
clockwise/CL clockwise)
Press .
Turn → Code 35
TV Press , Code 35 blinks
Default 2
Turn → Blocking position, e.g. 5 mm
(read off at travel indicator scale of the
Turn → Code 16/17/18 blocked valve or measure with a ruler).
Press , Code 16/17/18 blinks Press to confirm the setting.
Turn to set the control parameter se- Set the fail-safe position:
lected.
Press to confirm the setting.
4 Set switch for fail-safe position AIR TO
OPEN or AIR TO CLOSE as described in
section 7.1 on page 50.
4 Set volume restriction as described in
section 7.2 on page 51.
60 EB 8384-5 EN
parameters KP and TV must be slightly cor-
4 Press INIT key! rected. Proceed as follows:
The positioner switches to manual oper- Set TV to 4 (Code 18).
ating mode. If the positioner still oscillates, the gain KP
The blocking position is indicated. (Code 17) must be decreased until the
positioner shows a stable behavior.
Note: As initialization has not been carried
out completely, the error code 76 (no emer- Zero point calibration
gency mode) and possibly also error code
57 (control loop) may appear on the dis- Finally, if process operations allow it, the
play. zero point must be adjusted according to
These alarms do not influence the section 7.7.
positioner’s readiness for operation.
7.7 Zero calibration
Cancel the blocking position and change to In case of discrepancies with the closing po-
automatic operating mode sition of the valve, e.g. with soft-sealed
plugs, it may become necessary to
For the positioner to follow its reference recalibrate the zero point.
variable again, the blocking position must
be canceled and the positioner must be set We recommend re-initializing the positioner
to automatic operating mode as follows: in case of deviations in the zero point over
5 %.
Turn → Code 1
Press , Code 1 and blink NOTICE
Turn in order to move the valve slightly The valve briefly moves from the current
past the blocking position. travel/angle of rotation position to the
closed position.
Press to cancel mechanical blocking.
Turn → Code 0
Note: The positioner must be connected to
Press , Code 0 blinks. the supply air to perform the zero calibra-
Turn → AUtO tion.
Press . The positioner switches to auto-

matic operating mode. The current valve po- Enable configuration:
sition is indicated in %.
Turn → Code 3
Note: If the positioner shows a tendency to Press , Code 3 blinks

oscillate in automatic operating mode, the Turn → ON
EB 8384-5 EN 61
Press , display Reset start-up parameters:
Perform zero calibration:

Reset
Default OFF
Initialization mode
Default MAX
Turn → Code 36
Turn → Code 6
Turn → RUN
Press . All start-up parameters are reset
Turn → ZP
to their default values.
Press .
4 Press INIT key! 7.9 Start-up via local interface
(SSP)
Zero calibration is started, the positioner
moves the control valve to the CLOSED posi- The positioner can either be commissioned,
tion and readjusts the internal electrical zero configured and operated on site or by using
point. the fieldbus configuration or operating sys-
tem over the fieldbus. Alternatively, the
TROVIS-VIEW operator interface can be
7.8 Reset to default values
used.
This function resets all parameters to the fac- The positioner has an digital serial interface,
tory default values (see code list in sec- which is connected to the RS-232 or USB
tion 16.1). port of a computer using an adapter cable
(see Table 5 on page 40).
Enable configuration:
The positioner can be supplied with power
Turn → Code 3 by connecting it to a fieldbus segment or
over a DC voltage source (9 to 32 V) con-
nected to the bus terminals in the positioner.
Turn → ON The simultaneous operation of
Press , display TROVIS-VIEW and the fieldbus system is
possible without any restrictions when con-
nected to a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus bus
segment.
62 EB 8384-5 EN
Operation
8 Operation You can now configure codes one after the

other:
WARNING! Turn and select the required code.
The actuator stem moves while the positioner Press to access the selected code. The
is being operated. code number starts to blink.
Do not touch the actuator stem or obstruct it
to avoid risk of injury to hands or fingers. Turn and select the setting.
Press to confirm the selected setting.
8.1 Enabling and selecting

Note: If no settings are entered within 120
parameters
seconds, the enabled configuration function
The codes which are marked with an aster- becomes invalid and the display changes to
isk (*) in section 16.1 on page 88 onwards Code 0.
must be enabled with Code 3 before the as-
sociated parameters can be configured as
Cancel the setting:
described below.
Code 3
Canceling the setting
Configuration
not enabled
To cancel a value before it is confirmed (by

pressing ) proceed as follows:
Configuration
enabled Turn → ESC
Press . The entered value is not adopted.
Turn → Code 3, display: OFF 8.2 Operating modes

Press , Code 3 blinks.
Change the setting of Code 3. 8.2.1 Automatic and manual
Turn → ON modes
Press , display: After initialization has been completed suc-
The configuration is enabled. cessfully, the positioner is in automatic
mode.
EB 8384-5 EN 63
Operation
Note: The positioner automatically returns to

automatic mode
manual mode with Code 0 if no settings
%
are made within 120 seconds.
Switch to automatic operating mode

Turn → Code 0
Switch to manual operating mode
Turn → AUtO
Press . The positioner changes to au-
tomatic operating mode
Turn → Code 0 8.2.2 SAFE – Fail-safe position

Press , display: AUtO, If you want to move the valve to fail-safe po-
Code 0 blinks. sition determined during start-up (see sec-
Turn → MAN tion 7.1), proceed as follows:
Press to switchover to manual mode.

The switchover is smooth since the manual
mode starts up with the set point last used
during automatic mode. The current position
is displayed in %.
Turn → Code 0
Adjust the manual reference variable
Press , display: current operating mode
(AUtO or MAN), Code 0 blinks.
Turn → SAFE
% % Press , display: S.
The valve moves to the fail-safe position.
Once the positioner is initialized, the current
Turn → Code 1
valve position is indicated on the digital dis-
Press , Code 1 blinks. play in %.
Turn until sufficient pressure has been
Exit the fail-safe position
built up in the positioner and the control
valve moves to the required position. Turn → Code 0
64 EB 8384-5 EN
Operation
Turn and select the required operating demand or above average wear has
mode AUtO or MAN. been determined. The wear tolerance
will soon be exhausted or is reducing at
Press . The positioner switches to the op-
a faster rate than expected. Mainte-
erating mode selected.
nance is necessary in the short term.
8.3 Malfunction/maintenance
4 Function check
Test or calibration procedures are being
alarm performed. The positioner is temporarily
unable to perform its control task until
All status and fault alarms are assigned to a this procedure is completed.
classified status in the positioner. The default
settings of the status classification are listed
in the code list. Note: If an event is assigned to the “No
message” status, this event does not have
any effect on the condensed state.
Note: The status classification can be
changed in TROVIS-VIEW and over the pa-
rameters in the DD file (section 15.6) or over The condensed state appears on the display
the FF parameter (section 14.4). with the following icons:
Positioner
Condensed state
To provide a better overview, the classified display
alarms are summarized in a condensed Maintenance alarm
state. The following status alarms are avail- Maintenance required/
able: Maintenance demanded
4 Maintenance alarm Function check
tESting, TunE or
The positioner cannot perform its control tESt
task due to a functional fault in the de-
vice or in one of its peripherals or an ini- If the positioner has not been initialized, the
tialization has not yet been successfully maintenance alarm icon ( ) appears on
completed. the display as the positioner cannot follow
4 Maintenance required its reference variable.
The positioner still performs its control
task (with restrictions). A maintenance If fault alarms exist, the possible source of
requirement or above average wear has error is displayed in Code 49 onwards. In
been determined. The wear tolerance this case, Err appears on the display.
will soon be exhausted or is reducing at The cause and recommended action are
a faster rate than expected. Mainte- listed in the code list (section 16.1).
nance is necessary in the medium term.
4 Maintenance demanded
The positioner still performs its control
task (with restrictions). A maintenance
EB 8384-5 EN 65
Status and diagnostic alarms
9 Status and diagnostic alarms

Example
Error caused by pin The Type 3730-5 Positioner contains inte-
position grated diagnostics to generate classified sta-
S tus and diagnostic alarms.
There are two different types of on-board di-
Note: The optional EXPERT+ diagnostics agnostics available: the standard integrated
generates additional diagnostic alarms diagnostics (EXPERT) and the optional ex-
which are included in the condensed status tended EXPERT+ diagnostics.
with their corresponding status classification. Due to the numerous diagnostic functions
When a diagnostic alarm is issued by provided, the positioner generates classified
EXPERT+, this is displayed by Code 79. status alarms and diagnostic alarms.
9.1 Standard EXPERT diagnostics

8.3.1 Confirming error messages
The standard EXPERT diagnostics provides
Enable configuration: information about positioner states such as
operating hours counter, process monitor-
Note: If no settings are entered within ing, number of zero calibrations and
120 seconds, the enabled configuration initializations, total valve travel, tempera-
function becomes invalid. ture, initialization diagnostics, zero/control
loop errors, logging of the last 30 alarms,
etc.
Turn → Code 3
In addition, the standard EXPERT diagnostics
Press , Code 3 blinks generates diagnostic and status alarms
Turn → ON which allow faults to be pinpointed quickly
when a fault occurs. Besides being dis-
Press , display: played on the positioner display, the classi-
fied alarms are also available over the de-
Confirm error messages: vice description (DD).
Turn → Error code which you want to Alarms are classified in the following main
confirm. groups:
Press to confirm the error message. 4 Status
4 Operation
4 Hardware
4 Initialization
4 Data memory
4 Temperature
66 EB 8384-5 EN
Status and diagnostic alarms
+ by EXPERT+ can be selected when ordering

9.2 Extended EXPERT
diagnostics the positioner. Additionally, it is possible to
activate EXPERT+ at a later point in time in
In addition to the standard EXPERT diagnos- an existing positioner.
tic features, the optional EXPERT+ extended For this purpose, an activation code can be
diagnostics provides the following online ordered, requiring the serial number of the
and offline test functions which enable sig- positioner to be specified.
nificant statements on the condition of the
entire control valve. Note: Details on extended EXPERT+ diagnos-
tics can be found in the Operating Instruc-
Online test functions (monitoring functions) tions EB 8388-5 EN available on the
4 Data logger Internet at http://www.samson.de.
4 Histograms
4 Cycle counter
4 Valve end position trend
4 y = f (x) diagram (drive signal)
4 Hysteresis test
Offline test functions (manual functions)
4 y = f (x) diagram over the entire valve

travel range
4 Hysteresis test over the entire valve travel
range
4 Static characteristic
4 Step response test
The diagnostic tests are completely inte-
grated in the positioner. The DD allows pa-
rameters to be entered and test results to be
read. The graph format depends on the con-
trol system used.
Further status alarms are generated from the
extensive information gained in the diagnos-
tic tests of EXPERT+ which provide the user
with information covering the whole control
valve.
The required reference graphs are automati-
cally plotted after initialization and saved in
the positioner if EXPERT+ is activated.
The optional diagnostic functions provided
EB 8384-5 EN 67
Adjusting the limit switch
10 Adjusting the limit switch The desired switching function, i.e. whether
the output relay shall be picked up or re-
The positioner version with an inductive limit leased when the tag has entered the field,
switch has one adjustable tag (1) mounted has to be determined, if necessary, at the
on the shaft which operates the proximity switching amplifier.
switch (3).
Setting the switching point:
For operation of the inductive limit switch,
the corresponding switching amplifier (see NOTICE
section 5.2.1) must be connected to the out- During adjustment or testing, the switching
put. point must always be approached from
If the tag (1) is inside the field of the switch, mid-position (50 %).
the switch assumes a high resistance. If the
tag is outside of the field, the switch assumes
a low resistance. To ensure safe switching under any ambient
conditions, the switching point should be
Normally, the limit switch is adjusted such adjusted to a value of approx. 5 % before
that it will provide a signal in both end posi- the mechanical stop (OPEN – CLOSED).
tions of the valve. The switch, however, can
also be adjusted to indicate intermediate
valve positions.
Adjustment screw (2) Tag (1) Proximity switch (3)
Fig. 20 · Adjustment of the limit switch
68 EB 8384-5 EN
Adjusting the limit switch
For CLOSED position:

1. Initialize positioner.
2. Use the MAN function to move the
positioner to 5 % (see LC display).
3. Adjust the tag using the yellow adjust-
ment screw (2) until the tag enters or
leaves the field and the switching ampli-
fier responds. You can measure the
switching voltage as an indicator.
Contact function:
Tag leaving the field > contact is made.
Tag entering the field > contact is opened.
For OPEN position:

1. Initialize positioner.
2. Use the MAN function to move the
positioner to 95 % (see LC display).
3. Adjust the tag (1) using the yellow ad-
justment screw (2) until the tag enters or
leaves the field of the proximity switch
(3).
You can measure the switching voltage
as an indicator.
Contact function:
Tag leaving the field > Contact is made.
Tag entering the field > Contact is opened.
EB 8384-5 EN 69
Retrofitting an inductive limit switch
11 Retrofitting an inductive limit

switch
1
Required retrofit kit:
2
Limit switch Order no. 1400-7460
4
Note! For explosion-protected devices, the
requirements in section 13 need to be kept.
3
1. Take off the rotary pushbutton (3) and

cap (1), unthread the five fixing screws 5
(2) and lift off the plastic cover (9).
2. Use a knife to cut an opening at the
marked location (4). 8
3. Push the connector (11) with cable 7
through the opening and secure the
6
proximity switch (7) on the cover with a
dot of glue.
4. Remove the jumper (item no. 9 7
8801-2267) at the socket X7 of the top
board and insert the cable connector
(11).
5. Guide the cable in such a manner that
the plastic cover can be placed back
onto the positioner. Insert the fixing
screws (2) and screw tight. Attach the
clamping plate (8) onto the proximity
switch.
6. Attach the rotary switch (5). Make sure
the flattened side of the positioner shaft
is turned so that the rotary switch (5) can Socket X7 (11)
be attached with the metal tag next to 6 Metal tag
1 Cap 7 Proximity
the proximity switch. 2 Screws switch
7. Important! 3 Rotary pushbutton 8 Clamping plate
On start-up of the positioner, set the op- 4 Marking 9 Plastic cover
5 Rotary switch 11 Connector
tion "inductive alarm" under Code 38
from NO to YES. Fig. 21 · Retrofitting an inductive limit switch
70 EB 8384-5 EN
Maintenance
12 Maintenance 13 Servicing explosion-protected

devices
The positioner does not require any mainte-
nance. If a part of the positioner on which the ex-
There are filters with a 100 μm mesh size in plosion protection is based needs to be ser-
the pneumatic connections for supply and viced, the positioner must not be put back
output which can be removed and cleaned, into operation until an expert has inspected
if required. the device according to explosion protection
requirements, has issued a certificate stating
The maintenance instructions of any up- this or given the device a mark of confor-
stream supply air pressure reducing stations mity.
must be observed.
Inspection by an expert is not required if the
manufacturer performs a routine test on the
device prior to putting it back into opera-
tion. The passing of the routine test must be
documented by attaching a mark of confor-
mity to the device.
Explosion-protected components may only
be replaced by original, checked compo-
nents from the manufacturer.
Devices that have already been used outside
of hazardous areas and are intended for
use in hazardous areas in future must com-
ply with the safety demands placed on re-
paired devices. Prior to operation, they must
be tested according to the specifications
stipulated for "Repairing explosion-pro-
tected devices".
EB 8384-5 EN 71
Fieldbus specification
14 Fieldbus specification
These instructions are based on the following:
4 Fieldbus Foundation Specification "Function Block Application Process Part 1 to 3"
Revision 1.5.
4 Fieldbus Foundation Specification "Transducer Block Application Process Part 1 to 2"
Revision PS 3.0.
14.1 Device description (DD)

The following device description files are needed to integrate the device described into the
host system:
Device Description: < 0101.ffo >, < 0101.sym > Capabilities File: < 010101.cff >
These device description files can be downloaded from the Internet, for example, at
www.fieldbus.org or www.samson.de.
14.2 FOUNDATION™ fieldbus block model

FOUNDATION™ fieldbus assigns all the functions and data of a device to three different
types of blocks. Each type of block has a different range of tasks to fulfill in the block model.
The following types of blocks are implemented in the SAMSON Type 3730-5 Positioner:
4 One Resource Block
The Resource Block contains all the specific characteristics associated with a device on the
Fieldbus, for example, device name, manufacturer number and serial number.
A device can only have one Resource Block.
4 One AO Transducer Block
Each AI or AO Function Block has a Transducer Block which contains all data and de-
vice-specific parameters to connect the device to the process value (sensor or actuator).
The positioner output signal can be directly influenced over the AO Transducer Block.
4 Two DI Transducer Blocks
The DI Transducer Blocks connect binary input signals for transmission and processing
over the fieldbus.
4 One Analog Output Function Block
Function blocks are responsible for the control behavior of a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus
device. A FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application can be configured by connecting the in-
puts and outputs of function blocks.
72 EB 8384-5 EN
The AO Function Block converts the output value from an upstream function block into a
control value for the valve.
Execution time: 20 ms
4 Two Discrete Input Function Blocks
The DI Function Blocks are used as inputs to control binary signals. They support the se-
lection of binary switching conditions of various functions.
4 One PID Function Block
The PID controller has a flexible proportional-integral-differential control algorithm which
can be configured as required to match the application.
14.3 Resetting the device

The positioner can be reset in various ways in accordance with the FF specification.
RESTART (16) parameter in the Resource Block:
4 DEFAULTS:
The device data and the link are reset to the values as defined in the FF specification.
4 PROCESSOR:
Warm start of the positioner, restart of the processor.
14.4 Status classification and condensed state

The status alarms are classified in the positioner, i.e. when an alarm is issued, it is assigned
a status. The classification of the states can be changed over the following FF parameters in
the AO Transducer Block:
4 ERROR_OPTION_INIT_FAILURE (36):
Masking of the initialization error
4 ERROR_OPTION_OPERATION_FAILURE (37):
Masking of the operational error
4 ERROR_OPTION_HW_FAILURE (38):
Masking of the hardware error
4 ERROR_OPTION_DATA_FAILURE (39):
Masking of the data error
4 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_DIAGNOSTIC (40 bis 44):
Masking of the status and fault alarms generated by the diagnostics
EB 8384-5 EN 73
To provide a better overview, the classified alarms are summarized in a condensed state
(CONDENSED_STATE (59) in RES Block). Besides the CONDENSED_STATE parameter, the
condensed state can be issued to the discrete output OUT_D of the DI Function Blocks.
Possible states of the condensed state include:
0 ok
1 Maintenance The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance re-
required quirement or above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will
soon be exhausted or is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is
necessary in the medium term.
2 Maintenance The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance de-
demanded mand or above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon
be exhausted or is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is neces-
sary in the short term.
3 Maintenance The positioner cannot perform its control task due to a functional fault in the device
alarm or in one of its peripherals or an initialization has not yet been successfully com-
pleted.
7 Function check Test or calibration procedures are being performed. The positioner is temporarily
unable to perform its control task until this procedure is completed.
In addition to the condensed status, the block error alarms (BLOCK_ERR) from the Resource
Block and Transducer Block can also be assigned to the events.
In this case, the individual alarms must be classified in the ERROR_OPTION_… (Index 36 to
44) parameter with another status for block errors.
The following classifications are possible:
4 No message
4 Maintenance soon
4 Maintenance now
The block error (BLOCK_ERR) results from the summary of classified alarms that are active.
74 EB 8384-5 EN
Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software
15 Settings in TROVIS-VIEW software
15.1 General
The TROVIS-VIEW software allows various smart SAMSON devices to be configured over a
common operator interface. It consists of the operator interface, communication server, and
the device-specific module. The software has a Windows Explorer® look and feel.
The entire configuration of the positioner can be performed over the TROVIS-VIEW Configu-
ration and Operator Interface. It is not possible to link function blocks of other devices with
the TROVIS-VIEW software. The TROVIS-VIEW software containing online help and the da-
tabase module for Type 3730-5 Positioner is delivered on a CD-ROM (order number
6661-1058). Software updates are available in Internet (http://www.samson.de) in Products
> Support and downloads.
Note: The following instructions include a description on the key functions of the
TROVIS-VIEW software in conjunction with Type 3730-5 Positioner. Refer to the online help
in the ? menu for a detailed description.
15.1.1 System requirements

Hardware requirements
4 PC with Pentium II processor or equivalent (300 MHz or higher), 500 MHz recommended
4 Serial interface and USB/RS-232 adapter
4 Min. 96 MB RAM, 192 MB RAM recommended
4 Min. 150 MB free hard disk space plus approx. 10 to 15 MB additional hard disk space
per SAMSON module
4 SVGA graphic card (min. 800 x 600)
4 CD-ROM drive
Software requirements
4 Operating system: Windows® 2000 (min.SP2), Windows® XP
4 Microsoft.NET Framework Version 2.0 or higher (included on the installation CD-ROM)
4 Internet browser: Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6.0 or higher
Accessories
4 Serial interface adapter, order no. 1400-7700
(SAMSON SSP interface/ RS-232 port of computer)
4 Isolated USB interface adapter, order no. 1400-9740
(SAMSON SSP interface/ USB port of computer)
EB 8384-5 EN 75
15.2 Installing TROVIS-VIEW software

1. Insert the installation CD-ROM to start the installation program.
Once inserted, the CD-ROM usually starts the installation program automatically, de-
pending on the configuration of the operating system. If the program does not start auto-
matically, double-click setup.exe in the root directory of the CD-ROM in order to install
TROVIS-VIEW.
2. Follow the on-screen prompts and instructions of the installation program.
The TROVIS-VIEW Operator Interface can be used for different SAMSON devices. Note that
the installation program also offers you the option of installing a demo module. To use the
software without restrictions, the software needs to be activated by entering a CD key as fol-
lows:
3. After installation, a dialog box will appear, prompting you to enter the CD key, which
you will find on the cover of the original CD-ROM.
Once you have entered the correct CD key, an activation is necessary. The software can
be activated automatically or manually. Internet access on the computer on which
TROVIS-VIEW is installed is required for automatic activation.
Manual activation:
Once you have entered the correct CD key, a request code will be automatically generated
and displayed which contains computer identification details.
4 Enter request code in SAMSON’s product activation server over the Internet.
(http://support.samson-ag.com:8082/activate_eng.html)
An activation code is generated which allows TROVIS-VIEW to be used without any
restrictions in the purchased scope.
4 Enter this activation code in TROVIS-VIEW.
The TROVIS-VIEW software is now ready for use.
Automatic activation:
A request code containing the computer identification details is transferred to the SAMSON
product activation server when an Internet connection is active and an activation code is au-
tomatically entered into TROVIS-VIEW.
The TROVIS-VIEW software is now ready for use.
Note: Refer to the readme.txt file in the root directory of the CD-ROM for further information
on installation, software updates and current system requirements.
76 EB 8384-5 EN
15.3 Starting TROVIS-VIEW and performing basic settings

You can perform the settings in TROVIS-VIEW either when the positioner is connected (on-
line) to the computer or not connected (offline).
Note: When the positioner is not connected, the default settings appear on the operator in-
terface or, alternatively, a stored TROVIS-VIEW file (*.tro) can be loaded and overwritten by
selecting Open in the File menu.
1. Start TROVIS-VIEW. The operator interface appears with menubar and toolbar as well as
various folders.
2. In Options menu, select Language to

change the interface language.
3. Select Customer data in, Edit menu to

enter data relevant to the plant, e. g.
project name, plant location, operator.
4. Select Load Factory Defaults in Edit

menu if you want to load default settings
(see code list in section 16.1) onto the
operator interface.
EB 8384-5 EN 77
5. Set the communications port for data

communication. Proceed as follows:
4 Connect the port (RS-232 or USB) of
the computer using the
corresponding adapter to the
SAMSON SSP interface of the
positioner.
4 Select Communications in Options
menu to open the server settings win-
dow. Click Server settings button.
4 Check Local connection and Auto-
matically local connect boxes and
click OK button to confirm server set-
tings.
The Communication window reap-
pears.
4 Click Port settings button.
4 The settings window opens and
State: not yet searched appears in
the Automatic detection field.
Click Start button.
TROVIS-VIEW has found the
positioner when State: Device found
on COM .... appears.
4 Click on OK button twice to confirm
settings.
6. If required, add a new TROVIS-VIEW

module by selecting Add module in the
Options menu. Enter the CD key (written
on the installation CD-ROM) in the open
window.
7. If required, enter the type, date and se-
lectable parameters which are used to automatically create the TROVIS-VIEW file name.
The file name created in this way appears on saving a TROVIS-VIEW file (e.g.
VIEW3_3730_5.tro) and can be adopted or altered.
78 EB 8384-5 EN
Converting the software version

The TROVIS-VIEW software version must match the firmware of the positioner.
On exchanging data between the positioner and TROVIS-VIEW, the software automatically
checks whether the versions are compatible and, if necessary, converts the data.
If you want to adapt the firmware version without exchanging any data, proceed as follows:
1. Select Convert in the File menu.
A window with a drop-down list of all
the available firmware versions appears.
2. Select the corresponding version.
3. Click on OK button to confirm the se-
lected version.
Note: The TROVIS-VIEW software version for communication with EXPERT+ applies for all
positioners in which the extended valve diagnostics option has been activated.
The EXPERT+ extended valve diagnostics is an optional diagnostic software integrated in the
positioner which allows predictive, status-oriented maintenance of pneumatic control valves.
An activation code is required which needs to be ordered to activate this option.
15.4 Data transmission

Settings performed in the operator interface can be made both when the positioner is con-
nected or not connected. When the positioner is connected, data uploaded from the
positioner can be overwritten.
The default setting appear on the operator interface when no positioner is connected. A
stored TROVIS-VIEW file (*.tro) can be loaded and overwritten by selecting Open in the File
menu.
Connection to the positioner can also be made by clicking the icons on the top right in the
device toolbar:
EB 8384-5 EN 79
Data from the positioner are uploaded and shown in the operator interface.
The complete set of data is downloaded to the positioner from the operator interface.
To transfer individual parameters, open the corresponding context-sensitive menu. Select
Write to just download the selected parameter, refer to section 15.4.3.
The positioner is in the online mode, indicated by the TROVIS-VIEW 3 logo on the top
right in blue.
The positioner is in the offline mode.
The listed functions can be activated in the Device menu.
Note: Perform the electrical connection as described in section 5.2 first before downloading
any data to the positioner.
15.4.1 Offline operation (indirect data transmission)

In offline mode, there is no constant data communication between the computer and
positioner. Communication must first be established to upload data from the positioner and
download data to the positioner.
4 Downloading data to the positioner: Select Download to the device in Device menu to
transfer data to the positioner. The control task is implemented after data are down-
loaded from TROVIS-VIEW.
4 Uploading data from the positioner: Select Upload from device in Device menu to trans-
fer all the data from the positioner. Uploaded data are indicated in TROVIS-VIEW by the
icon.
Note:
Data transmission can also be performed by clicking the icons in the device toolbar:
click to download data from TROVIS-VIEW to the positioner and, click to upload data
from the positioner and to display them in TROVIS-VIEW.
15.4.2 Online operation (direct data transmission)

The positioner and TROVIS-VIEW are constantly connected in online operation. Current con-
figuration and operating data are uploaded from the positioner cyclically and displayed in
TROVIS-VIEW. Likewise, any settings performed in TROVIS-VIEW are directly transferred to
the positioner.
80 EB 8384-5 EN
4 Activate online operation: Select Online in Device menu to activate online mode.
In online mode, on the device toolbar is animated.
4 Deactivate online operation: Select Online in Device menu while the online mode is acti-
vated. The online mode is canceled.
Note!
Alternatively, click on the device toolbar to activate and deactivate online operation.
Operational data graphs (Trend Viewer)

In online mode, process data (positioning value TRD, actual valve position and set point
deviation [e]) are plotted in a graph over time. Select Trend Viewer in the View menu. You
can modify the graphs, for example, by adding data points that should be recorded, or even
remove data points. Right-click on the graph to save the analysis in a file.
Note: Drag and drop other data points in the Trend Viewer to add them.
15.4.3 Setting parameters

Properties of data points are indicated by icons on clicking on a folder:
Icon Meaning
Data cannot be changed
Data can be changed
Data point can be executed
Data point is user-defined
Mark to indicate status/error
Value has exceeded maximum limit
Value has fallen below minimum limit
Source of data:
Value has been modified manually
Value has been uploaded from the positioner.
In online mode, X in the icon indicates a value has been updated.
Value originates from a stored file
EB 8384-5 EN 81
Parameters are data points whose settings can be changed. They are marked by the
icon. Their settings can be made either in online or offline mode.
1. Click on one of the folders in the left tree directory to view the parameter settings on the
right. Place the cursor over a data point to open a tool tip providing more information on
the parameter.
2. Double-click the required parameter to open a pop-up window to modify parameter set-
ting.
Right-click the required parameter to open pop-up window to modify parameter settings:
Modify Opens pop-up window to modify parameter settings.
Read Uploads parameter value from device.
Write Downloads parameter value to device.
Default: ... Resets parameter to default setting (setting in gray to indicate that the
parameter value is the same as the default setting)
Min … Set parameter to the displayed minimum value.
Max … Set parameter to the displayed maximum value
Note: Refer to the code list (section 16.1 on page 88 onwards) for descriptions of each pa-
rameter. The code number assigned to a FF parameter is listed in the Comment column in
TROVIS-VIEW.
82 EB 8384-5 EN
15.5 Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test

Initializing the positioner and performing an operational test are only possible in
TROVIS-VIEW when the positioner has been attached properly to the control valve and has
been connected (see sections 4 and 5). The positioner must be connected to the computer
over the serial interface adapter.
The positioner does not need to be connected to a FOUNDATION fieldbus segment. It just
needs to be supplied over the bus terminals with an electrical power supply (9 to 32 V DC).
Initialization
NOTICE
During the initialization, the control valve moves through its entire travel/angle of rotation
range. Therefore, do not start initialization while a process is running, but only during
start-up, when all shut-off valves are closed.
1. Change parameter settings in Start-up folder in Positioner (AO, TRD).
2. Select the initialization type under Initialization (maximum range, nominal range, man-
ual adjustment, substitute) in the Positioner (AO, TRD) folder in the Start-up subfolder.
EB 8384-5 EN 83
3. Start initialization by right-clicking

Initialization and selecting Execute.
How long the initialization procedure lasts
depends on the actuator transit time and may
take a few minutes.
Operational test
1. Start the test mode by clicking icon.

If the positioner is not connected (online), TROVIS-VIEW establishes the connection auto-
matically.
A warning appears that the operating mode will be changed into the manual mode
(MAN).
2. Confirm the warning message.
The Modify Final Value window appears.
3. Enter required final value.
4. Confirm the final value by clicking the Write button.
The final value is download onto the positioner and the valve is positioned using this new
value.
The positioner exits the manual mode (MAN) and changes back to the operating mode
originally selected.
84 EB 8384-5 EN
15.6 Status classification

Alarms are classified in the positioner with a status when an error occurs. States include
“Maintenance alarm“, “Maintenance required“, “Maintenance demanded “, “Function
check“ and “No message“.
4 Maintenance alarm
The positioner cannot perform its control task due to a functional fault in the device or in
one of its peripherals or an initialization has not yet been successfully completed.
4 Maintenance required
The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance demand or
above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon be exhausted or
is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is necessary in the medium term.
The positioner still performs its control task (with restrictions). A maintenance demand or
above average wear has been determined. The wear tolerance will soon be exhausted or
is reducing at a faster rate than expected. Maintenance is necessary in the short term.
4 Function check
Test or calibration procedures are being performed. The positioner is temporarily unable
to perform its control task until this procedure is completed.
4 No message
When this classification is active, it does not have any affect on the condensed state.
You can change the status classification in the Positioner folder (> Error control > Classifica-
tion report).
Status classification of a single alarm TROVIS-VIEW3/DD
Maintenance alarm red
Maintenance required/demanded blue
Function check orange
No message white
EB 8384-5 EN 85
To provide a better overview, the classified alarms are summarized in a condensed state
which is made up from a summary of all classified positioner alarms.
The condensed state appears in TROVIS-VIEW3 on the right-hand side of the info bar and in
the Diagnosis folder (> Status messages). The Diagnosis folder (> Status messages) indicates
which errors are responsible for setting the condensed state.
Note: Condensed state and status alarms are marked with in TROVIS-VIEW3 until they
are read out.
The reading of the condensed state is as follows:
Condensed state TROVIS-VIEW3/DD Positioner display
Maintenance alarm red
Maintenance required/
blue
Maintenance demanded
Text, e.g.
Function check orange
tESting, TunE or tESt
No message green
86 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 87
Appendix
16 Appendix
16.1 Code list

Code Parameter – Display, values
Description
no. [default setting]
Note: Codes with marked with an asterisk (*) must be enabled with Code 3 prior to configuration.
0 Operating mode Switchover from automatic to manual mode is smooth.

[MAN] Manual mode In fail-safe mode, the symbol S appears on the display.
AUtO Automatic In MAN and AUtO mode, the system deviation is represented by
mode the bar graph elements.
SAFE Fail-safe When the positioner is initialized, the numerical display indicates
position the valve position or the angle of rotation in %, otherwise the po-
ESC Escape sition of the lever in relation to the central axis is displayed in de-
grees °.
1 Manual w Adjust the manual set point with the rotary pushbutton, the
0 to 100 [0] % current travel/angle is displayed in % when the positioner is ini-
of the nominal range tialized, otherwise the position of the lever in relation to the cen-
tral axis is indicated in degrees °.
Note: Can only be selected when Code 0 = MAN
2 Reading direction The reading direction of the display is turned by 180°.

[Normal] or upside down
ESC
3 Enable configuration Enables the option to modify data (automatically deactivated when
[OFF] ON ESC the rotary pushbutton has not been operated for 120 s.)
FF blinks on the display when the on-site operation is locked.
Codes marked with an asterisk (*) can only be read and not
overwritten.
Likewise, codes can only read over the SSP interface.
88 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix

Description
4* Pin position The follower pin must be inserted into the correct pin position ac-
17, 25, 35, 50, 70, 100, cording to the valve travel/angle of rotation.
200 mm For initialization using NOM or SUb, this pin position must be
entered.
90° with rotary actuators
Pin position Standard Adjustment range
[OFF], ESC
Code 4 Code 5 Code 5
17 7.5 3.6 to 17.7
25 7.5 5.0 to 25.0
Note! If you select a pin 35 15.0 7.0 to 35.4
position in Code 4 that is too 50 30.0 10.0 to 50.0
small, the positioner switches 70 40.0 14.0 to 70.7
to SAFE mode for reasons of 100 60.0 20.0 to 100.0
safety 200 120.0 40.0 to 200.0
90° 90.0 24.0 to 100.0
5* Nominal range For initialization using NOM or SUb, the nominal travel/angle of
mm or angle ° rotation of the valve must be entered.
The permissible adjustment range depends on the pin position
ESC
according to the table for Code 4.
Code 5 is generally locked until Code 4 is set to OFF, i.e. after a
pin position has been entered, Code 5 can be configured.
After initialization has been successfully completed, the maximum
nominal travel/angle reached on initialization is displayed.
6* Init mode Select the initialization mode

[MAX] MAX: Travel/angle of the closure member from the CLOSED
NOM position to the opposite stop in the actuator.
MAN NOM: Travel/angle of the closure member measured from the
SUb CLOSED position to the indicated OPEN position.
ZP
MAN: Manually selected range
ESC
SUb: Substitute calibration (without initialization)
ZP: Zero calibration
EB 8384-5 EN 89
Appendix

Description
7* w/x Direction of action of the reference variable w in relation to the

[ää] increasing/increasing travel/angle of rotation x
äæ increasing/decreasing Automatic adaptation:
ESC AIR TO OPEN:
On completing initialization, the direction of action remains in-
creasing/increasing (ää), a globe valve opens as the mA signal
increases.
AIR TO CLOSE:
On completing initialization, the direction of action changes to
increasing/decreasing (äæ), a globe valve closes as the mA
signal increases.
8* Travel/angle range start Lower range value for the travel/angle of rotation in the nominal
(lower x-range value) or operating range.
0.0 to 80.0 [0.0] % of the The operating range is the actual travel/angle of the control
nominal range valve and is limited by the lower x-range value (Code 8) and the
upper x-range value (Code 9).
ESC
Usually, the operating range and the nominal range are identi-
cal. The nominal range can be limited to the operating range by
Note! Specified in mm or the lower and upper x-range values.
angle ° provided Code 4 is Value is displayed or must be entered.
set
The characteristic is adapted. See also the example in Code 9!
9* Travel/angle range end Upper range value for the travel/angle of rotation in the nominal
(upper x-range value) or operating range.
20.0 to 100.0 [100.0] % of Value is displayed or must be entered.
the nominal range The characteristic is adapted.
ESC Example: The operating range is modified, for example, to limit
the range of a control valve which has been sized too large. For
this function, the entire resolution range of the reference variable
Note! Specified in mm or is converted to the new limits. 0 % on the display corresponds to
angle ° provided Code 4 is the adjusted lower limit and 100 % to the adjusted upper limit.
set
10* Travel/angle lower limit Limitation of the travel/angle of rotation downwards to the en-
(lower x-limit) tered value, the characteristic is not adapted.
0.0 to 49.9 % of the
operating range The characteristic is not adapted to the reduced range. See also
[OFF], ESC example in Code 11.
90 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix

Description
11* Travel/angle upper limit Limitation of the travel/angle of rotation upwards to the entered
(upper x-limit) value, the characteristic is not adapted.
50.0 to 120.0 [100] % of Example: In some applications, it is better to limit the valve
the operating range travel, e.g. if a certain minimum medium flow is required or a
OFF, ESC maximum flow must not be reached.
The lower limit must be adjusted with Code 10, and the upper
limit with Code 11.
If a tight-closing function has been set up, it has priority over the
travel limitation!
When set to OFF, the valve can be opened past the nominal tra-
vel with a reference variable outside of the 0 to 100 % range.
14* Reference variable range If w approaches the percentage adjusted at the final value that
start (w-start) causes the valve to close, the actuator is immediately completely
0.0 to 49.9 [1.0] % vented (with AIR TO OPEN) or filled with air (with AIR TO
of the span adjusted via CLOSE). This action always lead to maximum tight-closing of the
Code 12/13 valve.
OFF, ESC Codes 14/15 have priority over Codes 8/9/10/11.
Codes 21/22 have priority over Codes 14/15.
15* Reference variable range If w approaches the percentage adjusted at the final value that
end (w-end) causes the valve to open, the actuator is immediately completely
50.0 to 100.0 % filled with air (with AIR TO OPEN) or vented (with AIR TO
of the span adjusted via CLOSE). This action always lead to the valve being completely
Code 12/13 opened.
Codes 14/15 have priority over Codes 8/9/10/11.
[OFF], ESC
Codes 21/22 have priority over Codes 14/15.
Example: Set the final position w > to 99 % for three-way valves.
16* Pressure limit The signal pressure to the actuator can be limited in stages.
1.4 2.4 3.7 bar After changing a pressure limit already set, the actuator must be
[OFF], ESC vented once (e.g. by selecting the fail-safe position (SAFE) over
Code 0).
NOTICE
Do not activate the pressure limit for double-acting actuators with
fail-safe position AIR TO OPEN (AtO).
EB 8384-5 EN 91
Appendix

Description
17* Proportional-action Displaying or changing KP

coefficient KP (step) Note on changing the KP and TV steps:
0 to 17 [7] During the initialization of the positioner, the KP and TV values are
ESC optimized.
Should the positioner show a tendency for impermissibly high
post-pulse oscillation due to additional interference, the KP and
TV steps can be adapted after the initialization.
For this, either the TV step can be increased in increments until
the desired response behavior is reached or, when the maximum
value of 4 is reached, the KP step can be decreased in incre-
ments.
NOTICE
Changing the KP step influences the system deviation.
18* Rate time TV (step) Displaying or changing TV,

1 [2] 3 4 OFF see note under KP step
OFF, ESC A change of the TV step has no effect on the system deviation.
19* Tolerance band Used for error monitoring

0.1 to 10.0 [5] % of the Determination of the tolerance band in relation to the operating
operating range range.
ESC Associated lag time [30] s is a reset criterion.
If a transit time is determined during initialization which is
six times > 30 s, the six-fold transit time is accepted as the lag
time.
92 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix

Description
20* Characteristic Select the characteristic:

0 to 9 [0] 0 Linear
ESC 1 Equal percentage
2 Reverse equal percentage
3 SAMSON butterfly valve linear
4 SAMSON butterfly valve equal percentage
5 VETEC rotary plug valve linear
6 VETEC rotary plug valve equal percentage
7 Segmented ball valve linear
8 Segmented ball valve equal percentage
9 User-defined (defined over operating software)
Note: The various characteristics are listed in the Appendix
(section 18).
21* Required transit time OPEN The time required to pass through the operating range when the
(w ramp open) valve opens.
0 to 240 s [0] Limitation of the transit time (Code 21 and 22):
For some applications it is recommendable to limit the transit time
ESC
of the actuator to prevent it from engaging too fast in the running
process.
Code 21 has priority over Code 15.
NOTICE
The function is not activated when the fail-safe function or sole-
noid valve is triggered nor upon failure of the auxiliary power.
22* Required transit time The time required to pass through the operating range when the
CLOSED (w ramp closed) valve closes.
[0] to 240 s Code 22 has priority over Code 14.
ESC NOTICE
The function is not activated when the fail-safe function or sole-
noid valve is triggered nor upon failure of the auxiliary power.
23* Total valve travel Totaled double valve travel.

0 to 99 · 107 [0] Can be reset to 0 via RES.
Exponential reading from 9999 travel Note: The total valve travel is saved in a non-volatile memory
cycles onwards
after every 1000 double travel.
RES, ESC
EB 8384-5 EN 93
Appendix

Description
24* LV total valve travel Limit value of total valve travel. If the limit is exceeded, the fault
1000 to 99 · 107 symbol and the wrench symbol corresponding with the collective
[1 000 000] status appear.
Exponential reading from 9999 travel
cycles onwards
ESC
34* Closing direction Turning direction in which the valve is moved to the CLOSED po-
CL Clockwise sition (view onto the rotary switch motion when the positioner
cover is open).
[CCL] Counterclockwise
Needs only be entered in initialization mode SUb (Code 6).
ESC
35* Blocking position Entering the blocking position.

[0] mm/° /% Distance up to the CLOSED position.
Only necessary in initialization mode SUb.
ESC
36* Reset Resets all start-up parameters to default (factory setting). Does not
[OFF], RUN, ESC apply to block configuration.
Note: After setting RUN, the positioner must be re-initialized.
38* Inductive alarm Indicates whether the inductive limit switch option is installed or
[NO], YES, ESC not.
39 System deviation e info Display only,

–99.9 to 999.9 % indicates the deviation from the position required.
40 Transit time Open info Display only,

0 to 240 s [0] minimum opening time determined during initialization.
41 Transit time Closed info Display only,

0 to 240 s [0] minimum closing time determined during initialization.
42 Auto-w/manual-w info Display only,

0.0 to 100.0 % of the span Auto mode: indicates the supplied automatic reference variable
Man mode: indicates the supplied manual reference variable
43 Firmware info control Display only,

indicates the positioner type and current firmware version in
alternating sequence.
94 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix

Description
44 y info Display only.

[0] to 100 % Indicates the control signal y in % based on the travel range de-
0P, MAX, – – – termined on initialization
MAX: The positioner builds up its maximum output pressure, see
description in Code 14 and 15.
0P: The positioner vents completely, see description in Code 14
and 15.
– – –: The positioner is not initialized.
45 Solenoid valve info Display only,

YES, HIGH/LOW, NO indicates whether a solenoid valve is installed or not.
If a voltage supply is connected at the terminals of the installed
solenoid valve, YES and HIGH appear on the display in alternat-
ing sequence. If a voltage supply is not connected (actuator
vented, fail-safe position indicated on the display by the S icon),
YES and LOW appear on the display in alternating sequence.
46* Bus address Select bus address

ESC
47* Write protection FF When the write protection function is activated, device data can
YES, [NO], ESC only be read, but not overwritten over FF communication.
48* Diagnostic parameters d
d0 Current temperature Operating temperature [°C] inside the positioner

–55 to 125
d1 Minimum temperature The lowest temperature below 20 °C that has ever occurred.
[20]
d2 Maximum temperature The highest temperature above 20 °C that has ever occurred.
[20]
d3 Number of zero The number of zero calibrations since the last initialization.
calibrations
d4 Number of initializations The number of initializations that have been performed.
d5 Zero point limit Limit for the zero point monitoring.

0.0 to 100.0 % [5 %]
EB 8384-5 EN 95
Appendix

Description
48* d6 Condensed status Condensed status, made up from the individual states.
0 OK: Okay
1 C: Maintenance required
2 CR: Maintenance demanded
3 B: Maintenance alarm
7 I: Function check
d7 Start reference run Triggering of a reference run for the functions: Drive signal y
[OFF], ON, ESC, 1 steady-state and drive signal y hysteresis.
The reference run can only be activated in manual operating
mode as the valve moves through its entire travel range.
If EXPERT+ is activated at later point in time, the reference graphs
must be plotted in order to activate the diagnostic functions.
d8 EXPERT+ activation Enter the activation code for EXPERT+.

After the activation procedure has been successfully completed,
YES appears under d8.
FF parameters FF-P
F0 Firmware Rev.
Communication
F1 Binary input 1 1 Active 0 Inactive
F2 Binary input 2 1 Active 0 Inactive
F3 Simulate Activation of simulation mode
F4 to F7 Unassigned
AO Function Block A
A0 Target Mode Required operating mode
A1 Actual Mode Actual operating mode
A2 CAS_IN Value Display of the analog reference variable adopted from an

upstream function block
A3 CAS_IN Status and its status
A4 SP Value Displays the set point (reference variable)
A5 SP Status and its status
A6 Out Value Displays the manipulated variable (output value)
96 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix

Description
48* A7 Out Status and its status
A8 Block Error Displays the current block error
PID Function Block P

P0 Target Mode Required operating mode
P1 Actual Mode Actual operating mode
P2 CAS_IN Value Display of the analog reference variable adopted from an
upstream function block
P3 CAS_IN Status and its status
P4 SP Value Displays the set point (reference variable)
P5 SP Status and its status
P6 Out Value Displays the manipulated variable (output value)
P7 Out Status und its status
P8 Block Error Displays the current block error
Transducer Blocks A0, DI1, DI2 t
t0 Target Mode AO TRD Required operating mode
t1 Actual Mode AO TRD Actual operating mode
t2 Transducer State State of the Transducer Block
t3 Block Error AO TRD Displays the current block error
t4 Target Mode DI1 Required operating mode
t5 Actual Mode DI1 TRD Actual operating mode
t6 Block Error DI1 TRD Displays the current block error
t7 Target Mode DI2 TRD Required operating mode
t8 Actual Mode DI2 Actual operating mode
t9 Block Error DI2 Displays the current block error
Resource Block S
S0 Resource Target Mode Required operating mode
EB 8384-5 EN 97
Appendix

Description
48* S1 Resource Actual Mode Actual operating mode

S2 Resource Block Error Displays the current block error
DI1Function Block I
I0 Target Mode DI1 Required operating mode
I1 Actual Mode DI1 Actual operating mode
I2 Field_Val_D.Value Displays the discrete input variable
I3 Field_Val_D.Status and its status
I4 OUT_D.Value Displays the discrete output variable
I5 OUT_D.Status and its status
I6 Block Error Displays the current block error
D2 Function Block L
L0 Target Mode DI2 Required operating mode
L1 Actual Mode DI2 Actual operating mode
L2 Field_Val_D.Value Displays the discrete input variable
L3 Field_Val_D.Status and its status
L4 OUT_D.Value Displays the discrete output variable
L5 OUT_D.Status and its status
L6 Block Error Displays the current block error
Note: The error codes listed in following appear in the display corresponding to their status
classification set over the condensed state (Maintenance required/Maintenance demanded:
, Maintenance alarm: ). If “No message” is assigned to the error code as the status
classification, the error is not included in the condensed state.
A status classification is assigned to every error code in the default setting. The status classifi-
cation of error codes can also be changed as required using an operating software (e.g.
TROVIS-VIEW).
98 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
Initialization errors
Error codes – Recommended action Condensed state alarm active, when prompted, Err appears.
When fault alarms exist, they are displayed here.
50 x > range The value supplied by the measuring signal is either too high or
too low, the measuring sensor is close to its mechanical limit.
• Pin positioned incorrectly.
• Bracket slipped in case of NAMUR attachment or positioner is
not central.
• Follower plate incorrectly attached.
Status classification [Maintenance required]
Recommended action Check attachment and pin position, set operating mode from
SAFE to MAN and re-initialize the positioner.
51 Δx < range The measuring span of the sensor is too low.

• Pin positioned incorrectly.
• Wrong lever.
A rotational angle smaller than 11° at the positioner shaft creates
just an alarm. An angle below 6° leads to the initialization being
canceled.
Recommended action Check attachment and re-initialize the positioner.
52 Attachment • Positioner attachment incorrect.

• Nominal travel/angle (Code 5) could not be achieved during
initialization under NOM (no tolerance downwards
permissible).
• Mechanical or pneumatic fault, e.g. wrong lever selected or
supply pressure too low to move to the required position.
Recommended action Check attachment and supply pressure. Re-initialize the

positioner.
Under certain circumstances, it may be possible to check the
maximum travel/angle by entering the actual pin position and
then performing an initialization under MAX.
After initialization has been completed, the Code 5 indicates the
maximum achieved travel or angle.
EB 8384-5 EN 99
Appendix
53 Initialization time exceeded The initialization routine lasts too long.

(Init time >) • No pressure on the supply line or there is a leak.
• Supply air failure during initialization.
Recommended action Check attachment and supply pressure.

Re-initialize the positioner.
54 Initialization - solenoid 1) A solenoid valve is installed (Code 45 = YES) and was

valve not or not properly connected so that an actuator pressure
could not be built up. The alarm is generated when you
attempt to initialize the positioner.
2) If you attempt to initialize the device from the fail-safe
position (SAFE).
Recommended action Re. 1) Check connection and supply voltage of the forced venting
Code 45 HIGH/LOW
Re. 2) Set the MAN operating mode over Code 0. Then initialize
the positioner.
55 Transit time too short The actuator positioning rates determined during the initialization
(transit time <) are so short that the positioner cannot adapt itself optimally.
Recommended action Check the volume restriction setting as described in section 7.2,
re-initialize the positioner.
56 Pin position Initialization was canceled because you are required to enter the
pin position for the selected initialization modes NOM and SUb.
Recommended action Enter pin position over Code 4 and nominal travel/angle over
Code 5. Re-initialize the positioner.
100 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
Operational errors
57 Control loop Control loop error, the control valve does not react within the tol-
erable times of the controlled variable (tolerance band alarm
Code 19).
• Actuator mechanically blocked.
• Attachment of the positioner subsequently shifted.
• Supply pressure not sufficient.
Recommended action Check attachment.
58 Zero point Zero point incorrect.

Error may arise when the mounting position/linkage of the posi-
tioner moves or when the valve seat trim is worn, especially with
soft-sealed plugs.
Recommended action Check valve and mounting of the positioner. If OK, perform a
zero calibration over Code 6 (see section 7.7 on page 61).
If the lever position on the back of the positioner has been
changed (e.g. while exchanging the lever), move the lever as far
as it will go in both directions to adapt it to the internal mea-
suring lever.
59 Autocorrection Should an error occur in the data range of the positioner, the
self-monitoring function recognizes it and automatically corrects
it.
Status classification [No message]
Recommended action Automatic
60 Fatal error An error was detected in the data relevant for safety,
autocorrection is not possible. This may be due to EMC
disturbances.
The positioner changes to the fail-safe position (SAFE).
Status classification Maintenance alarm (cannot be classified)
Recommended action Reset over Code 36.

Re-initialize the positioner.
EB 8384-5 EN 101
Appendix
Hardware errors
62 x signal Determination of the measured data for the actuator has failed.
Conductive plastic element is defective.
The positioner continues to run in emergency mode, but should
be replaced as soon as possible.
The emergency mode on the display is indicated by a blinking
closed-loop operation icon and 4 dashes instead of the position
indication.
Note on the closed-loop operation:

If the measuring system has failed, the positioner is still in a reli-
able state. The positioner switches to emergency mode where the
position cannot be accurately controlled anymore. However, the
positioner continues operation according to its reference variable
signal so that the process remains in a safe state.
Status classification [Maintenance demanded]
Recommended action Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.
64 i/p converter The circuit of the i/p converter has been interrupted.
Recommended action Cannot be remedied.

Return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.
65 Hardware A hardware error has occurred, the positioner changes to the

fail-safe position (SAFE).
Recommended action Confirm error and return to the automatic operating mode, or
perform a reset and re-initialize the device. If this is not success-
ful, return device to SAMSON AG for repair.
66 Data memory The writing of data to the data memory does not work anymore,
e.g. when the written data deviate from the read data.
Valve moves to the fail-safe position.
102 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
67 Test calculation The hardware controller is monitored by means of a test

calculation.
Recommended action Confirm error. If this is not possible, return the positioner to
SAMSON AG for repair.
EB 8384-5 EN 103
Appendix
Data errors
68 Control parameter Control parameter error
Recommended action Confirm error, perform reset and re-initialize the positioner.
69 Poti parameter Parameter error of the digital potentiometer.
Recommended action Confirm error, perform reset and re-initialize the positioner.
70 Calibration parameter Error in the production calibration data. Subsequently, the device
runs on default values.
71 General parameters Parameter errors that are not critical for the control.
Recommended action Confirm error.

Check and, if necessary, reset required parameters.
73 Internal device error 1 Internal device error
74 FF parameters Parameter errors that are not critical for the control.
Recommended action Confirm error and perform reset.
104 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
76 No emergency mode The travel measuring system of the positioner has a

self-monitoring function (see Code 62).
An emergency mode (open-loop control) is not available for
certain actuators, such as double-acting actuators. In this case,
the positioner changes to the fail-safe position (SAFE) when a
measuring error occurs. During the initialization, the positioner
checks whether the actuator has such a function or not.
Recommended action Merely information, confirm, if necessary.

No further action necessary.
77 Program loading error When the positioner starts operation for the first time after the in-
put signal has been applied, it carries out a self-test (tEStinG runs
across the display).
If the positioner loads the wrong program, the valve moves to the
fail-safe position. It is not possible to make the valve leave this
fail-safe position again.
Recommended action Interrupt current and restart positioner.

Otherwise, return the positioner to SAMSON AG for repair.
78 Options parameter Errors in options parameters
EB 8384-5 EN 105
Appendix
Diagnosis errors
79 Diagnostic alarms Alarms are generated by the extended EXPERT+ diagnostics if

EXPERT+ has been activated under Code 48
Status classification Maintenance required (cannot be classified)
80 Diagnostic parameters Errors that are not critical for control.
Status classification Maintenance required (cannot be classified)
81 Reference graphs An error occurred during plotting the reference graphs for drive
signal y steady-state or drive signal y hysteresis.
• Reference test was interrupted
• Reference line for drive signal y steady-state or drive signal y
hysteresis was not adopted.
Recommended action Check and, if necessary, perform a new reference test
106 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
16.2 Parameters
Several parameters can only be modified in certain modes (see Read/write capability in the
parameter description). In this case, not the actual mode is decisive, but the target mode.
16.2.1 Resource Block

The Resource Block contains all the data that identify the device. It is similar to an electronic
device tag.
Resource Block parameters include device type, device name, manufacturer ID, serial num-
ber as well as parameters which affect the behavior of all other blocks of the device.
Refer to page 118 for the list of parameters.
All time specifications in the Resource Block are specified in the unit of 1/32 ms according to
the Fieldbus Specification Version 1.5.
In the Device Description Library supplied by Fieldbus Foundation upon which the device
description of 3730-5 is also based, these parameters are incorrectly specified as the unit of
ms. The specified values supplied by the device are, however, always to be interpreted as the
unit of 1/32 ms.
16.2.2 Analog Output Transducer Block

The Transducer Block allows the input and output variables of a function block to be influ-
enced. In this way, process data can be used to calibrate measured and control data,
linearize characteristics, or convert engineering units. Transducer Block parameters include
information on the type of actuator, attachment, engineering units, commissioning, diagnos-
tics as well as device-specific parameters.
The Standard Advanced Positioner Valve Transducer Block receives an output value from an
upstream Analog Output Function Block. This value is used to position a control valve. The
block contains parameters to adapt the positioner to the actuator and valve as well as for
valve commissioning and diagnostics.
EB 8384-5 EN 107
Appendix
16.2.3 Discrete Input Transducer Blocks

Discrete Input Transducer Blocks directly connect the physical inputs of the field device to the
assigned function blocks.
The CHANNEL parameter is used to assign the Transducer Blocks to the function blocks.
The Type 3730-5 Positioner has two binary inputs that work independently from one an-
other. A Discrete Input Function Block exists for each input.
The DI Transducer Blocks are implemented according to the FF Specification and do not con-
tain any manufacturer-specific parameters.
108 EB 8384-5 EN
Fig. 22 · Analog Output Transducer Block
FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_HI
FINAL_VALUE from AO Block OUT FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO
Upper
final position
AUTO AUTO
MOVING_DIRECTION
MAN TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT
MAN LIN_TYPE FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
O/S TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT
LO SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS SAFE
Lower
final position
MODE_BLK
PD controller
Capacity booster
D KP_STEP i
PRESSURE_LIMIT
A TV_STEP p
Supply air Vented air
To AO Block
EB 8384-5 EN
D U
MOVING_DIRECTION FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
READBACK A
Appendix
FINAL_POSITION_VALUE
109
Appendix
16.2.4 Analog Output Function Block

The Analog Output Function Block processes an analog signal from an upstream function
block (e.g. PID Block) into an output value intended for the downstream Transducer Block
(e.g. valve positioner). It contains scaling functions and ramp functions as well as other func-
tions.
The AO Block receives its set point depending on the mode (MODE_BLK) from one of the in-
put variables CAS_IN, RCAS_IN or SP. An internal working set point is created from it, tak-
ing into account the PV_SCALE, SP_HI_LIM and SP_LO_LIM, SP_RATE_UP and
SP_RATE_DN.
Depending on the IO_OPTS and XD_SCALE parameters, an output value OUT is generated
which is passed on to the downstream Transducer Block over the CHANNEL parameter.
A Fault State is included in the AO Block which is activated when a fault condition (of the
valid set point) last longer than the time determined in FSTATE_TIME or when SET_FSTATE is
activated in the Resource Block.
The Fault State is determined over FSTATE_TIME, FSTATE_VAL and IO_OPTS parameters.
In the Device Description Library supplied by Fieldbus Foundation upon which the device
description of 3730-5 is also based, "Fault state to value" is indicated as "Fault state type" in
the IO_OPTS parameter of the AO Function Block.
110 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
XD_SCALE
100 %
READBACK
OUT
0% PV_SCALE
0 °C
SP PV
SP_LO_LIM<=SP<=SP_HI_LIM
RCAS_IN
Set point Set point PV, XD Output

limitation SP ramps scaling action
OUT
SP
SP_HI_LIM SP_RATE_DN XD_SCALE IO_OPTS
CAS_IN
SP_LO_LIM SP_RATE_UP PV_SCALE
MODE_BLK OUT
MODE_BLK
PV, XD scaling PV (manual)
READBACK XD_SCALE, PV_SCALE
Fig. 23 · Analog Output Function Block
EB 8384-5 EN 111
Appendix
16.2.5 Discrete Input Function Block DI1

The Type 3730-5 Positioner is fitted with a standard contact input to process binary voltage
signals.
The Discrete Input DI1 Function Block is used for processing the contact input (terminals 87
und 88) and to integrate a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application.
The connected hardware is assigned to the function block by CHANNEL = 1. The OUT_D
parameter is used to link the state of the contact to other function blocks.
Alternatively, an integrated solenoid valve MGV, a discrete valve position with three states
POS_D as well as the Condensed State (NAMUR status) can be processed.
The binary signal to be linked can be selected over the SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_1 parameter
in the Resource Block.
SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_1
PV_D
Bin1
Simulate Optional Filter
MGV CHANNEL
SIMULATE_D Invert PV_FTIME
POS_D Output Out_D
FIELD_VAL_D
Condensed State
MODE Alarms
DISC
Fig. 24 · Discrete Input Function Block 1
112 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
16.2.6 Discrete Input Function Block DI2

The Type 3730-5 Positioner is optionally fitted with a binary input to process a floating con-
tact. The Discrete Input DI2 Function Block is used for processing the contact input (terminals
85 und 86) and to integrate a FOUNDATION™ fieldbus application.
The connected hardware is assigned to the function block by CHANNEL = 2.
The OUT_D parameter is used to link the state of the contact to other function blocks.
Alternatively, an integrated solenoid valve MGV, a discrete valve position with three states
POS_D as well as the Condensed State (NAMUR status) can be processed.
The binary signal to be linked can be selected over the SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_2 parameter
in the Resource Block.
When a pressure sensor (leakage sensor) is connected, its switching state can be issued as a
diagnostic alarm in the XD_ERROR_EXT parameter of the AO Transducer Block and logged.
In this case, the option LEAKAGE SENSOR must be activated in CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2.
Alternatively, the switching state of the binary input can be issued in the BINARY_INPUT2
parameter of the AO Transducer Block.
Parameters of the Discrete Input Function Block 2
The parameters of the DI Function Block 2 are the same as the parameters of DI Function
Block 1.
SELECT_BINARY_INPUT_2
PV_D
Bin2
Simulate Optional Filter
MGV CHANNEL
SIMULATE_D Invert PV_FTIME
POS_D Output Out_D
FIELD_VAL_D
Condensed State
MODE Alarms
DISC
AO Transducer
BINARY_INPUT_2
CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT_2
Fig. 25 · Discrete Input Function Block 2
EB 8384-5 EN 113
Appendix
16.2.7 PID Function Block

A PID Function Block contains the input channel processing, the proportional-integral-deriva-
tive (PID) control loop and the analog output channel processing.
The configuration of the PID Block (PID controller) depends on the automation task.
Simple control loops, control loops with manipulate variable feedforwarding, cascade con-
trol and cascade controls with limitation in combination with another controller function
block can be implemented.
The following options are available for processing the measured variable within the PID
Function Block (PID controller): Signal scaling and limiting, mode control, feedforward con-
trol, limit control, alarm limit detection and signal status propagation.
The PID Block (PID controller) can be used for various automation strategies. The block has a
flexible control algorithm that can be configured to match the application.
The PID Block receives its set point depending on the mode (MODE_BLK) from the input vari-
ables CAS_IN, RCAS_IN or SP. PV_SCALE, SP_HI_LIM, SP_LO_LIM, SP_RATE_UP and
SP_RATE_DN are used to generate an internal operating set point.
The block receives the actual value over the IN input variable which is used to generate the
process variable PV, taking into account the PV_SCALE and the filter of the first order
PV_FTIME.
These values are fed to the internal PID algorithm. This algorithm consists of a proportional,
an integral and a derivative component. The manipulated variable is calculated from the set
point value SP and the process variable PV (actual value) resulting from the system deviation.
The individual PID components are included in the calculation of the manipulated variable as
follows:
4 Proportional component:
The proportional component reacts immediately and directly when the set point SP or the
process variable PV (actual value). The manipulated variable is changed by the propor-
tional factor GAIN. This change corresponds to the system deviation multiplied by the
gain factor. If a controller works only with a proportional component, the control loop
has a permanent system deviation.
4 Integral component:
The system deviation resulting from the calculation of the manipulated variable using the
proportional component is integrated over the integral component of the controller until it
is negligible. The integral function corrects the manipulated variable depending on the
size and duration of the system deviation. If the value for the integration time RESET is set
to zero, the controller works as a P or PD controller. The influence of the integral compo-
nent on the control loop increases when the value of the integration time is reduced.
114 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
4 Derivative component:
In controlled systems with long delay times, e.g. in temperature control loops, it is better
to use the derivative component RATE of the controller. Using the derivative component
RATE, the manipulated variable is calculated depending on the rate of change of the sys-
tem deviation.
An output value OUT is formed from the calculated manipulated variable corresponding to
the OUT_SCALE, OUT_HI_LIM and OUT_LO_LIM parameters. This output value can be
passed on to a downstream connected function block.
The status of the output value OUT can be influenced by the STATUS_OPTS parameter de-
pending on the status of the input variable of the PID Block. This allows, for example, the
fault state of a downstream connected output block to be activated.
The BYPASS parameter allows the internal set point to be directly transferred to the correc-
tion value. Feedforward is possible over the FF_VAL input variable. TRK_IN_D and TRK_VAL
allow the output value to be directly tracked.

RCAS_IN
Set point Set point ON

PV scaling
limitation SP ramps PID
SP TRK_IN_D
SP_HI_LIMSP_ Sp_RATE_DN PV_SCALE OFF algo-
LO_LIM Sp_RATE_UP Bypass rithm
CAS_IN
Output
Scaling OUT
GAIN limitation
RATE OUT_SCALE OUT_HI_LIMO
Filter RESET + – UP_LO_LIM
PV Scaling
IN
PV_TIME PV_SCALE
Gain
FF_GAIN
Scaling Scaling
FF_SCALE TRK_SCALE
FF_VAL TRK_VAL
Feedforward Tracking
Fig. 26 · PID Function Block
EB 8384-5 EN 115
Appendix
16.3 Other parameters
16.3.1 Stale Counter

The Stale Counter serves to judge the “quality” of a process variable received over a config-
ured cyclic connection (publisher/subscriber connection).
These connections are used to transfer the process variable linked amongst the various func-
tion blocks. For this purpose, the upstream block (publisher) sends the process variable over
the bus at scheduled times. The downstream block(s) (subscriber) responds at the scheduled
times. The blocks that are to receive data monitor whether a valid value exists at the sched-
uled time. A value is valid if it exists with the status “Good” at the scheduled time.
The Stale Counter defines how many “Bad” (stale) values can be accepted in sequence be-
fore the Fault State of the block is activated.
This monitoring function is deactivated by setting the Stale Counter to zero.
16.3.2 Link Objects

Link Objects are used to link the inputs and outputs of the function blocks (configurable cyclic
connections).
A maximum of 22 Link Objects can be configured for each positioner.
16.3.3 LAS Functionality

The number of links and schedules that can be used is matched to the requirements of stan-
dard process control systems available on the market.
The positioner functioning as an LAS can support the following:
4 1 schedule
4 1 subschedule
4 25 sequences per subschedule
4 25 elements per sequence
In the delivered state, the positioner is configured as a basic device.
116 EB 8384-5 EN
Appendix
16.4 Parameter lists

Legend
SK (class of memory): S Static parameter

D Dynamic parameter
N Non-volatile parameter
Read/write r Read capability

capability:
w Write capability
(access)
Supported modes: O O/S (out of service) mode

M MAN mode
A AUTO mode
CAS Cascade mode
RCAS Remote cascade mode
ALL O/M/A/CAS/RCAS
NA Not analyzed
Other modes: LO Local override mode

ROUT Remote output mode
EB 8384-5 EN 117
Appendix Resource Block
Resource Block
Parameter Index SK Access Mode Selection/display, [initial value]
ACK_OPTION 38 S r/w O/A [Undefined] . . . No selection
DISC ALM . . . Write lock changed
BLOCK ALM . . Block alarm
ALARM_SUM 37 S r/w O/A DISC ALM . . . Write lock changed
BLOCK ALM . . Block alarm
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/A 1 to 255, [0]
“0” is not a permissible value and will be rejected
when transferring data to the device (alarm).
BLOCK_ALARM 36 D r
BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
SIMULATE ACTIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOST STATIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE SOON . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE NOW. . . . . . .
BUS_ADDRESS 55 D r 1 to 255, [248]
CLR_FSTATE 30 D r/w O/A
CONDENSED_STATE 59 D r 0. . OK
1. . Maintenance required
2. . Maintenance demanded
3 . Maintenance alarm
7 . Function check
CONFIRM_TIME 33 S r/w O/A [640000 1/32 ms]

CYCLE_SEL 20 S r/w O/A [SCHEDULED]
COMPLETION OF BLOCK EXECUTION
CYCLE_TYPE 19 S r SCHEDULED
COMPLETION OF BLOCK EXECUTION
DD_RESOURCE 9 S r
118 EB 8384-5 EN
Resource Block Appendix
Description
Determines whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the fieldbus host system.
Note: The alarm is broadcast to the fieldbus host system, but not acknowledged by it.
Determines the current state of the process alarms in the Resource Block.
Used to specify the identification number of the plant section.

This information can be used by the fieldbus host system to group alert and events.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block.
Indicates active block error
Note: The assignment of error or diagnostic alarms to the desired function block is determined using the
ERROR_OPTION parameter in the Transducer Block.
. . Simulation jumper active, simulation possible
. . Block mode is out of service
. . Data in EEPROM lost
. . Maintenance required soon. Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) in Resource Block is triggered.
. . Maintenance required immediately. Block Alarm (BLOCK_ALM) in Resource Block is triggered.
Bus address
Used to manually clear the Fault State of the AO Function Block.
Indicates the condensed state of the device.
Each possible event or error is classified. This assignment can be modified in the Transducer Block. The con-
densed state provides a summary of all classified status alarms.
The state is also indicated on the LCD of the positioner. “Maintenance required” and “Maintenance demanded”
are indicated by a wrench symbol, “Maintenance alarm” by the fault symbol.
“Function check” is indicated as a text alert.
Specifies the time the device waits for confirmation that an alert report was received before trying again.
Specifies the block execution method determined by the fieldbus host system.
Note: The block execution method is selected directly in the fieldbus host system.
Indicates the block execution method supported by the device.
Specifies the resource that contains the Device Description file in the device.
Note: If the device contains no Device Description, “zero” appears on the display.
EB 8384-5 EN 119

DD_REV 13 S r
DESCRIPTOR 46 S r/w A/O
DEV_REV 12 S r
DEV_TYPE 11 S r 2 for Type 3730-5
DEVICE_CERTIFICATION 45 N r
DEVICE_PRODUCT_ NUM 48 N r
DEVICE_SER_NUM 44 N r
DEVICE_MESSAGE 47 N r/w A/O

FAULT_STATE 28 N r
FEATURES 17 S r
FEATURES_SEL 18 S r/w A/O
REPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARD W LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAULTSTATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT READBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FREE_SPACE 24 D r
FREE_TIME 25 D r
GRANT_DENY 14 D r/w NA
HARD_TYPES 15 S r SCALAR OUTPUT

(scalable analog output variable)
HW_REVISION 43 S r
ITK_VER 41 S
LIM_NOTIFY 32 S r/w A/O 0 to [8]
120 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Specifies the revision number of the Device Description file.
Any desired text to describe the application; the text is saved in the field device.
Indicates the manufacturer’s revision number associated with the device.
Indicates the manufacturer’s model number associated with the device in decimal format.
Specifies the type of protection of the device, i.e. whether explosion protection certificates are available for the
field device.
Specifies the positioner’s product number
Specifies the positioner’s serial number; allows the field device to be clearly identified in conjunction with the
MANUFAC_ID and DEV_TYPE parameters.
Any desired text; the text is saved in the field device.
Indicates the current status of the Fault State of the Analog Output Function Block
Specifies the additionally supported Resource Block options, see FEATURES_SEL.
Enables selection of additionally supported Resource Block options.
. . Fieldbus host system needs to acknowledge receipt of an alert report.
. . Hardware write lock switch is evaluated
. . Fault State can be triggered (see SET_FSTATE /CLR_FSTATE).
. . Current valve position issued in the PV parameter of the Analog Function Block (otherwise SP).
Note: If the AO Block should not move to the MAN mode when the solenoid valve fails, deactivate this option.
Indicates the memory in percent available for implementation of additional function blocks.
Note: This parameter is not supported as no further function blocks may be added to the Type 3730-5.
Indicates the block processing time in percent that is free to process additional blocks.
Grants or denies access of a fieldbus host system to the field device.
Note: This parameter is not supported by Type 3730-5.
Indicates the types of output signal (hardware) available for the Analog Output Function Block.
Specifies the hardware revision number of the electronic/mechanical components.

Specifies the version of the Interoperability Tester used by the Fieldbus Foundation on certifying the device as
interoperable.
Specifies the number of alert reports that the device can send without getting a confirmation.
EB 8384-5 EN 121

LOCAL_OP_ENA 56 N r/w A/O
MANUFAC_ID 10 S r 0 x 00E099 = SAMSON AG
MAX_NOTIFY 31 S r 8
MEMORY_SIZE 22 S r
MIN_CYCLE_T 21 S r 640 1/32 ms
MODE_BLK 5 N r/w A/O
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NV_CYCLE_T 23 S r
READING_DIRECTION 54 D r/w A/O

RESTART 16 D r/w A/O
RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RESOURCE (not supported)
DEFAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS_STATE 7 D r
ONLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ONLINE LINKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT1 57 N r/w A/O
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT2 58 N r/w A/O DI1/2 contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI1/2 internal solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DI1/2 discrete final valve position . . . . . . . . . . .
Continued on next page
122 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Locks/enables local operation.
Indicates the manufacturer’s identification number.
Specifies the maximum number of alert reports that the device can send without getting a confirmation.
Indicates the memory in kilobytes available for additional function blocks.
Indicates the shortest cycle interval that the device can perform
(execution time of AO function block 20 ms).
Indicates the actual operating mode of the Resource Block, the permitted modes supported by the Resource Block,
and the normal mode.
. . The Function Blocks (AO and PID Function Block) are enabled in this mode.
. . In this mode, the processing of the Function Blocks (AO and PID Function Block) is stopped. The blocks are set
to O/S mode.
Specifies the minimum time interval in which device data are stored to the non-volatile memory.
Note: The Type 3730-5 saves non-volatile data immediately after transmission.
Rotates the display contents by 180°.
Enables the positioner to be reset in various ways.
. . Normal operating state
. . Device data and function block linkings are reset to the default settings listed in the specification.
. . Warm start of device, processor restarted.

Indicates the current operating state of the Resource Block.
. . Standard operating state; the function block is in AUTO mode.
. . The Resource Block is in O/S mode.
. . The configured links between the function blocks have not been established yet.
Used to select the data to be processed in Discrete Input Block 1/2.
. . Switching state of binary input 1/2
. . Switching state of internal solenoid valve
. . Current valve position as discrete information:
1 Current valve position < x %
2 Current valve position > x %;
3 Intermediate position
The limits for < x % or > x % are set using FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS parameter [0.5, 99.5]
EB 8384-5 EN 123

Continued DI1/2 condensed state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT1
SELECT_BINARY_ INPUT2
SET_FSTATE 29 D r/w A/O

SHED_RCAS 26 S r/w A/O
SHED_ROUT 27 S r/w A/O [640000 1/32 ms]
ST_REV 1 N r
STRATEGY 3 S r/w A/O [0]
SW_REVISION 42 N r
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w A/O [No text], max. 32 characters
TEST_RW 8 D r/w A/O
TEXT_INPUT_1 49 N r/w A/O
UPDATE_EVT 35 D r
WRITE_ALM 40 D r/w A/O
WRITE_LOCK 34 S r/w A/O LOCKED

NOT LOCKED
124 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
..0 OK
1 Maintenance required
3 Maintenance alarm
7 Function check
Enables manual activation of the Fault State of the Analog Output Function Block.
Determines how long function blocks are supposed to check that the connection between the fieldbus host system
and the PID Block exists in RCAS mode.
When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from RCAS mode to the operating mode selected in the
SHED_OPT parameter.
Determines how long function blocks are supposed to check that the connection between the fieldbus host system
and the PID Block exists in ROUT mode.
When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from ROUT mode to the operating mode selected in the
SHED_OPT parameter.
Indicates the revision number of static data.
Note: The revision state is incremented by one each time a static parameter in the block is written.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks.
Blocks are grouped by entering the same number in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the Resource Block.
Indicates the firmware version (communication/control).
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification.
Note: This parameter is required for conformity tests only and is not used in normal operation.
Any desired text
Indicates that static data were changed, including date and time stamp.
Indicates the state of the write-lock alarm.
Note: The alarm is triggered when the WRITE_LOCK parameter is unlocked.
Indicates the state of the write-lock alarm.
The write-lock can be activated by setting Code 47 to ON.
If setting data are to be changed by remote transmission, set Code 47 to OFF.
EB 8384-5 EN 125

WRITE_PRI 39 S r/w A/O
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter index
Index Parameter Index Parameter Index Parameter

0 – 10 MANUFAC_ID 20 CYCLE_SEL
1 ST_REV 11 DEV_TYPE 21 MIN_CYCLE_T
2 TAG_DESC 12 DEV_REV 22 MEMORY_SIZE
3 STRATEGY 13 DD_REV 23 NV_CYCLE_T
4 ALERT_KEY 14 GRANT_DENY 24 FREE_SPACE
5 MODE_BLK 15 HARD_TYPES 25 FREE_TIME
6 BLOCK_ERR 16 RESTART 26 SHED_RCAS
7 RS_STATE 17 FEATURES 27 SHED_ROUT
8 TEST_RW 18 FEATURES_SEL 28 FAULT_STATE
9 DD_RESOURCE 19 CYCLE_TYPE 29 SET_FSTATE
126 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Used to set the priority for the WRITE_ALM parameter.
. . The write-lock alarm is not processed.
. . The write-lock alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Reserved for block alarms
. . The write-lock alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . The write-lock alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).

30 CLR_FSTATE 40 WRITE_ALM 50 TEXT_INPUT_2
31 MAX_NOTIFY 41 ITK_VER 51 TEXT_INPUT_3
32 LIM_NOTIFY 42 SW_REVISION 52 TEXT_INPUT_4
33 CONFIRM_TIME 43 HW_REVISION 53 TEXT_INPUT_5
34 WRITE_LOCK 44 DEVICE_SER_NUM 54 READING_DIRECTION
35 UPDATE_EVT 45 DEVICE_CERTIFICATION 55 BUS_ADDRESS
36 BLOCK_ALARM 46 DESCRIPTOR 56 LOCAL_OP_ENA
37 ALARM_SUM 47 DEVICE_MESSAGE 57 SELECT_BINARY_INPUT1
38 ACK_OPTION 48 DEVICE_PRODUCT_NUM 58 SELECT_BINARY_INPUT2
39 WRITE_PRI 49 TEXT_INPUT_1 59 CONDENSED_STATE
EB 8384-5 EN 127
Appendix Analog Output Transducer Block
Analog Output Transducer Block

ACT_FAIL_ACTION 21 D r UNINITIALIZED. . . . Undefined
CLOSING. . . . . . . . (in 0 % position)
OPENING . . . . . . . (in 100 % position)
INDETERMINATE . . None
ACT_MAN_ID 22 D r/w O/M/A
ACT_MODEL_NUM 23 S r/w O/M/A

ACT_SN 24 S r/w O/M/A
ACT_STROKE_TIME_ DEC 67 D r
ACT_STROKE_TIME_ INC 68 D r
ADVANCED_PV_BASIC 0 D r
BLOCK_TAG . . . . . Name of block
DD_MEMBER . . . . . 0 (0x0)
DD_ITEM . . . . . . . . Start index of AO
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transducer Block
DD_REVIS . . . . . . . Revision index of DD
PROFILE . . . . . . . . . 33037 (0x810d)
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 255, [0]
when transferring data to the device (error
alarm).
AUTOSTART 111 D r/w O/M/A
BINARY_INPUT 2 53 D r
BLOCK_ALARM 8 D r
128 EB 8384-5 EN
Analog Output Transducer Block Appendix
Description
Sets the fail-safe action to be performed by the actuator in case of a supply air failure, determined automatically
during initialization.
Specifies the actuator manufacturer’s identification number.

Clearly identifies the manufacturer of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the type/model number of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the serial number of the actuator used with the positioner.
Specifies the minimum transit time to reach CLOSED position
The minimum transit time to reach CLOSED (0 % position) position is the actual time in seconds that the system
(consisting of positioner, actuator and valve) needs to move through the rated travel range/angle of rotation to
close the valve (measured during initialization).
Specifies the minimum transit time to reach OPEN position
The minimum transit time to reach OPEN (100 % position) position is the actual time in seconds that the system
(consisting of positioner, actuator and valve) needs to move through the rated travel range/angle of rotation to
open the valve (measured during initialization).
Indicates block-specific and device-specific data.
PROFILE_REVISION. . . . 1 (0x1) NEXT_FB_TO_EXECUTE. Next function block to be exe-
EXECUTION_TIME . . . . Execution time of block cuted
EXECUTION_PERIOD . . Repetition interval VIEWS_INDEX . . . . . . . Initial address of View objects
NUM_OF_PARAMS . . . No. of block parameters NUMBER_VIEW_3 . . . . Number of View-3 objects
NUMBER_VIEW_4 . . . . Number of View-4 objects

Indicates the interval at which the step response function is repeated.

Note: Available in versions with ESD diagnostics and higher.
Indicates the state of DI2.
The value of the output depends on CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block.
EB 8384-5 EN 129

BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE NOW. . . . . . .
DEVICE NEEDS MAINTENANCE SOON . . . . . .
LOCAL OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT FAILURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEMORY FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOST STATIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCKING_POSITION 76 D r/w O/M/A
CLOSING_DIRECTION 66 S r/w O/M/A
COLLECTION_ 12 D r
DIRECTORY
CONFIG_BINARY_ 56 D r/w O/M/A [NOT EVALUATED]
INPUT2 ACTIVELY OPEN
ACTIVELY CLOSED
ACTIVELY OPEN – LEAKAGE SENSOR
ACTIVELY CLOSED – LEAKAGE SENSOR
COUNTER_INIT_START 85 D r
DATALOGGER_ 95 D r 1. . Trigger select
PROGRESS 2. . Trigger not select
3. . Trigger start by travel condition
4. . Trigger start by solenoid condition
5. . End measuring, memory full
DATALOGGER_SELECT 88 D r/w O/M/A 1. . Permanent
2. . Trigger
DEAD_TIME_FALLING 115 D r
DEAD_TIME_RISING 114 D r
130 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Reflects the active errors associated with a block.
. . Block mode is out of service.
. . Maintenance required immediately (error in the electronics).
. . Maintenance required soon (zero error, positioner fault, or total valve travel exceeded).
. . Output value set to “local operation” using TROVIS-VIEW, or forced venting function/zero calibration or
initialization currently in process.
. . Position feedback error or device not initialized
. . Device not initialized
. . Memory error
. . Check sum error
Indicates and modifies the blocking position (see Code 35).
Indicates and modifies the closing direction (see Code 34).
This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.
Sets the logic state of DI2.

The parameter is processed by the BINARY_INPUT2 parameter. The parameter settings do not depend on
Transducer Block DI2.
Specifies the number of initialization cycles that have been performed since the last reset.
Indicates the state of the data logger.
Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher.
Permits selection of data logger recording method.

Available in versions with EXPERT+ extended diagnostics and higher
Specifies the time that has elapsed until a change in the valve position x occurs after a falling step change of the
reference variable w (during diagnostic test).
Specifies the time that has elapsed until a change in the valve position x occurs after a rising step change of the
reference variable w (during diagnostic test).
EB 8384-5 EN 131

DELAY_TIME 46 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 240 s, [10 s]
DEVIATION_MAX 98 D r
DEVIATION_MIN 97 D r
DEVICE_ 32 S r/w O/M/A

CHARACTERISTICS ACTUATOR_SIZE
ACTUATOR_VERSION
ATTACHMENT
PRESSURE_RANGE_START
PRESSURE_RANGE_END
SUPPLY_PRESSURE
DEVICE_INIT_STATE 64 D r
DIAG_LEVEL 101 D r EXPERT . . . Standard valve diagnostics
EXPERT+ . . . Extended valve diagnostics
ESD . . . . . . Emergency shutdown
ELAPSED_HOURS_ 82 D r
METERS ELAPSED_HOURS_TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELAPSED_HOURS_IN_CLOSED_LOOP. . . . . . . .
ELAPSED_HOURS_SWITCHED_ON_SINCE_ INIT
ELAPSED_HOURS_IN_CLOSED_LOOP_SINCE_INIT
ENHANCED_DIAG_ 81 D r/w O/M/A
CMD 1. . No function
2. . Start data logger
3. . Abort data logger
ERROR_OPTION_ 39 S r/w O/M/A
DATA_FAILURE 1. . Control parameter
2. . Potentiometer parameter
3. . Adjusted parameter
132 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Specifies the delay time (reset criterion when control loop monitoring is in progress).
If the entered DELAY_TIME is exceeded and the system deviation is outside the specified TOLERANCE_BAND, a
control loop error is issued.
Determined from the minimum transit time during initialization.
Specifies the positioner’s maximum system deviation that has occurred.
Specifies the positioner’s minimum system deviation.
Reflects positioner-specific data.
BOOSTER NOM_DIAMETER
STUFFING_BOX NOM_DIAMETER_DN
SEALING_EDGE (plug/seat facing) KVS_UNIT
PRESSURE_BALANCING KVS_VALUE
FLOW_CHARACTERISTIC SEAT_DIAM_VALVE
FLOW_DIRECTION
Indicates whether the device has been initialized.
Indicates the currently installed diagnostic version.
Indicates the hours the device has been in operation.

. . Total hours the device has been switched on
. . Device in closed loop
. . Hours the device has been switched on since last initialization
. . Hours in closed loop control since last initialization
Indicates an extended diagnostic test.
4. . Hysteresis online test 7. . Abort step response
5. . Abort hysteresis online test 8. . Start tests in turn
6. . Start step response
Indicates the masking of data errors.
4. . General parameter 7. . Info parameter
5. . Internal device error 1 8. . Check sum program code
6. . Valve dimension parameter
EB 8384-5 EN 133

ERROR_OPTION_ENH_ 40 S r/w O/M/A
DIAGNOSTIC_1
to to
ERROR_OPTION_ENH_ 44 S r/w O/M/A
DIAGNOSTIC_5
ERROR_OPTION_HW_ 38 S r/w O/M/A
FAILURE 1. . x signal
2. . i/p converter
ERROR_OPTION_INIT_ 36 S r/w O/M/A
FAILURE 1. . x > range
2. . Delta x < range
3. . Mechanics/pneumatics
ERROR_OPTION_ 37 S r/w O/M/A
OPERATION_FAILURE 1. . Control loop
2. . Zero point
ERRORBYTE 106 D r
EVENT_LOGGING_1 86 D r
EVENT_LOGGING_2 87 D r
FINAL_POSITION_ 20 D r
VALUE
FINAL_POSITION_ 52 D r/w
VALUE_DISC
FINAL_POSITION_ 51 D r/w O/M/A FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS
VALUE_LIMITS FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_HIGH_LIMIT
FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LOW_LIMIT
FINAL_VALUE 13 N r/w O/M Scaling over FINAL_VALUE_RANGE
FINAL_VALUE_ 15 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 125 %, [99 %]
CUTOFF_HI
134 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Specifies the masking of diagnostic status or error alarms.
Specifies the masking of hardware errors.

3. . Hardware 5. . Control calculation
4. . Data memory 6. . Program loading error
Specifies the masking of initialization errors.
4. . Init. time exceeded 7. . Pin position
5. . Init./solenoid valve 8. . No emergency mode
6. . Travel time too short
Specifies the masking of operating errors.
3. . Autocorrection 5. . w too small
4. . Fatal error 6. . Total valve travel exceeded
Specifies the cancellation flag of the step response (criterion for cancelation).
Indicates the logs 0 – 14 with the time they were recorded.
Indicates the logs 15 – 29 with the time they were recorded.
Specifies the current valve position in % in relation to the operating range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE.
Specifies FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_LIMITS, e.g. limit values reached or status of the value.
Indicates the limit of FINAL_POSITION_VALUE.

This actual value is sent to the AO Transducer Block directly from the valve.
Contains the output value received from the upstream AO Function Block.
Final position if set point exceeds the adjusted value (see Code 15).
If the set point exceeds the adjusted value, the valve is moved to the final position that corresponds to 100 % of
the manipulated variable. This causes the actuator to either be vented completely or fully filled with air
(corresponding to the fail-safe action).
Note: The function is deactivated by entering –2.5 %.
As this function causes the actuator to be fully vented or filled with air, the valve moves to its absolute final
position. Restrictions set by the travel range or travel limitation functions do not apply. In the case that this creates
excessive positioning forces, this function must be deactivated.
EB 8384-5 EN 135

FINAL_VALUE_ 75 S r/w O/M/A
CUTOFF_HI_ON
FINAL_VALUE_ 16 S r/w O/M/A –2.5 to 100 %, [1 %]
CUTOFF_LO
FINAL_VALUE_ 74 S r/w O/M/A

CUTOFF_LO_ON
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE 14 S r/w O FINAL VALUE RANGE EU_100 (see Code 9)
FINAL VALUE RANGE EU_0 (see Code 8)
FINAL VALUE RANGE UNITS_INDEX
FINAL VALUE RANGE DECIMAL
HIS_TEMPERATURE 100 D r
T_CURRENT_TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T_MAX_TEMPERATURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIS_T_ZEIT_MAX_TEMPERATUR . . . . . . . . . . . .
T_MIN_TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIS_T_ZEIT_MIN_TEMPERATUR . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMP_PERIOD_TIME_HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEMP_PERIOD_TIME_LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HISTOGRAMM_X 96 D r
HISTOGRAMM_Z 99 D r
HYS_STELL_Y 102 D r/w O/M/A
136 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Enables the final position w > (see Code 15).
Final position if set point falls below adjusted value (see Code 14).
If the set point falls below the adjusted value, the valve is moved to the final position that corresponds to 0 % of
the manipulated variable. This causes the actuator to either be vented completely or fully filled with air
(corresponding to the fail-safe action).
Note: The function is deactivated by entering –2.5 %.
As this function causes the actuator to be fully vented or filled with air, the valve moves to its absolute final
positions. Restrictions set by the travel range or travel limitation functions do not apply. In the case that this
creates excessive positioning forces, this function must be deactivated.
Enables final position w< (see Code 14).
Sets the travel range/angle of rotation.

The set point FINAL_VALUE is sent to the AO Transducer Block directly from an upstream AO Function Block.
Note: The working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE is compared with the TRANSM_PIN_POS. If the TRANSM_
PIN_POS is changed, the positioner checks whether the setting and unit matches the current working range
FINAL_VALUE_ RANGE. If this is not the case, the working range FINAL_VALUE_RANGE is set to 0-100 %.
Indicates temperature-specific data.
. . Current temperature
. . Max. temperature
. . Duration of max. temperature
. . Min. temperature
. . Duration of min. temperature
. . Time the temperature below 80 °C
. . Time the temperature below –40 °C
Reflects the valve position x. The valve position histogram provides a static evaluation of the recorded travel
positions. The histogram indicates, for example the travel range in which the valve has mainly been operating
and whether a recent trend can be recognized, indicating a change of the main operating range.
The cycle counter records the number of spans and the associated heights of the spans, which are categorized in
fixed intervals (classes). The cycle counter histogram provides a static evaluation of the cycle spans, thus furnish-
ing data on the dynamic stress that a bellows or an installed packing are exposed to.
Specifies the minimum interval at which hysteresis tests are performed.
EB 8384-5 EN 137

IDENT_LIMIT_SWITCHES 55 D r/w O/M/A NOT IMPLEMENTED
IMPLEMENTED
[depending on hardware upgrade]
IDENT_OPTIONS 54 D r 1. . Not implemented
2. . Binary input 2
3. . Solenoid valve
4. . Limit switch
INIT_METHOD 60 S r/w O/M/A 0. . Maximum range
1. . Nominal range
2. . Manual adjustment
3. . Substitute
4. . Zero point
KP_STEP 17 S r
LATENCY_AFTER_STEP 109 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 120 s, [1 s]
LIN_TYPE 69 S r/w O/M/A

1. . Linear
2. . Equal percentage
3. . Equal percentage reverse
4. . SAMSON butterfly linear
LOGGING_LIMIT 92 D r/w O/M/A 1. . Lower limit
2. . Upper limit
MODE_BLK 5 S r/w O/M/A
AUTO Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O/S Out of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO Local Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MOVING_DIRECTION 65 S r/w O/M/A
138 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Specifies whether optional inductive limit switches are installed. Limit switches are not detected automatically; they
need to be entered manually (see Code 38).
Indicates which optional components are installed.
Indicates the selected initialization mode (see Code 6).
Specifies KP (see Code 17).

This parameter can only be read over FOUNDATION fieldbus. The value is detected during initialization.
This parameter sets the waiting time required to jump back from the final value of the first step change to the
initial value of the second step change (reverse step change).
Sets the characteristic (see Code 20)
5. . SAMSON butterfly equal percentage 9. Segmented ball valve equal percentage
6. . VETEC rotary linear 10. User defined
7. . VETEC rotary equal percentage
8. . Segmented ball valve linear
Indicates the initial value of an event that triggers logging.
Used to indicate/select the actual mode of the Resource Block, the permitted modes supported by the Transducer
Block, and the normal mode.
. . In this operating mode, a positioning value is calculated from the output value from the AO Function Block
and the control valve is positioned accordingly.
. . In this operating mode, the output value from the AO Function Block is not used. The control valve is moved to
its mechanical fail-safe position set by ACT_FAIL_ACTION. The mode is also changed to O/S when the
forced venting function is triggered.
. . In this operating mode, FINAL_VALUE can be entered manually (display: ).
. . If the device is locally set to the MAN mode, the Analog Output Transducer Block is set to LO.
Specifies the direction of action of the reference variable w in relation to the controlled variable x (see Code 7).
EB 8384-5 EN 139

NO_OF_ZERO_ 83 D r
POINT_ADJ
OVERSHOOT_FALLING 113 D r
OVERSHOOT_RISING 112 D r
PRESSURE_LIMIT 80 S r/w O/M/A 1. . Off . . . . . . . . . 3. . 2.4 bar

2. . 3.7 bar . . . . . . 4. . 1.4 bar
PRESSURE_Y 50 D r
PRETRIGGER_TIME 93 D r/w O/M/A
RAMP_DOWN 108 D r/w O/M/A [0]
RAMP_UP 107 D r/w O/M/A [0]
RATED_TRAVEL 58 S r/w O/M/A 0 to 255.9 mm, [15.0 mm]
SAMPLE_RATE 90 D r/w O/M/A
140 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Specifies the number of zero calibrations performed since the last initialization.
Evaluation parameter for step response test. Overshooting of falling reference variable step change.
Evaluation parameter for step response test. Overshooting of rising reference variable step change.
Used to set the pressure limit (see Code 16).
Specifies the actuator pressure in percent after initialization (see Code 44).
The data logger can be triggered as soon as a certain event occurs. The pretrigger function can be used to display
data recorded before this event. This is made possible by a ring buffer in which all events are saved continuously.
For example, if the pretrigger time is set to 1 s, all events that occurred in the second before the data logger was
triggered are displayed.
The dynamic control response of the control valve can be tested by recording step responses. Sets the time in
which the reverse step change is expected to fall.
The dynamic control response of the control valve can be examined by recording step responses. Sets the time in
which the reverse step change is expected to rise.
Specifies the rated travel [mm] or rotational angle [degrees] of the valve (see Code 5).
Note: The unit [mm] or [degrees] depends on the VALVE_TYPE parameter.
Used to set the sampling rate of the data logger in ms.
EB 8384-5 EN 141

SELF_CALIB_CMD 61 D r/w O/M/A
1 . . No test, normal operation
2 . . Start with default values
3 . . Start initialization
4 . . Abort initialization
5 . . Start zero point adjustment
6 . . Abort zero point adjustment
7 . . Search device
8 . . Reset “Total valve travel”
/*xd_error_ext_1*/
9 . . Reset “Solenoid valve active“
10 . . Reset “Total valve travel limit exceeded“
11 . . Reset “Control loop“
12 . . Reset “Zero point“
SELF_CALIB_STATUS 63 D r
1 . . Not active
2 . . Running
3 . . Test aborted
4 . . Zero point adjustment
SERVO_RESET 18 S r
SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS 57 S r/w O/M/A 1 . . Not active
2 . . Set fail-safe position
3 . . Clear fail-safe position
SETP_DEVITATION 45 D r
SIGNAL_PRESSURE_ 77 D r
ACTION
SOLENOID_SELECT 94 D r/w O/M/A
ST_REV 1 S r
START_VALUE 91 D r/w O/M/A
142 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Starts the calibration sequences in the field device and the resetting of error alarms.
13 . . Reset “Autocorrection“ 25 . . Reset “Hardware“
14 . . Reset “Fatal error“ 26 . . Reset “Control parameter“
15 . . Reset “Extended diagnosis“ 27 . . Reset “Poti parameter“
16 . . Reset “x > range“ 28 . . Reset “Adjustment parameter“
17 . . Reset “Delta x < range“ 29 . . Reset “General parameter“
18 . . Reset “Attachment“ 30 . . Reset “Internal device error 1“
19 . . Reset “Initialization time exceeded“ 31 . . Reset “No emergency mode“
20 . . Reset “Initialization/solenoid valve“ 32 . . Reset “Program load error“
21 . . Reset “Travel time too short“ 33 . . Reset “Options parameter“
22 . . Reset “Pin position“ 34 . . Reset “Info parameter“
/*xd_error_ext_2*/ 35 . . Reset “Data memory“
23 . . Reset “x signal“ 36 . . Reset “Control calculation“
24 . . Reset “i/p converter“ 37 . . Reference_Test_Aborted
Indicates the state of the calibration sequence started with SELF_CALIB_CMD.
5 . . Maximum point adjustment 9 . . Step 1 (step response)
6 . . Detection of mech. steps 10 . . Step 2 (step response)
7 . . Controller optimization 11 . . Terminated
8 . . Fine adjustment
This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.
Allows the valve to be moved to its actual fail-safe position. Fail-safe position is indicated by an S blinking on the
display.
Indicates the system deviation e (see Code 39).

This parameter is determined during initialization and indicates the position of the slide switch (AIR TO
OPEN/CLOSE). The positioner needs to be re-initialized when the switch position is changed.
Indicates the status of the solenoid valve (see Code 45).
Note: By selecting “1“ (Close) the “Maintenance now“ Block of the AO Transducer Block is entered in the AO
Block as an “Output Error“ block error.
The revision state of static data is displayed.
The start value is specified for a triggered start condition of the data logger (valve position in %).
EB 8384-5 EN 143

STEP_PROGRESS 120 D r
STEP_SAMPLE_RATE 105 D r/w O/M/A [0.1] to 120 s
STEP_SELECTION 110 D r/w O/M/A 1. . One step

2. . Two steps
STEPEND 104 D r/w O/M/A 0 to [100 %]
STEPSTART 103 D r/w O/M/A [0] to 100 %
STRATEGY 3 S r/w O/M/A [0]
SUB_MODE_INIT 62 D r
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w O/M/A Max. 32 characters
TIME_63_FALLING 117 D r
TIME_63_RISING 116 D r
TIME_98_FALLING 119 D r
TIME_98_RISING 118 D r
TOLERANCE_BAND 47 S r/w O/M/A 0.1 to 10 %, [5 %]

TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM 49 S r/w O/M/A 1000 to 990 000 000, [1 000 000]
TOTAL_VALVE_TRAVEL 48 D r
144 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
The progress of the step response test is indicated.
Used to set the sampling rate of the step response logging
The dynamic control behavior of the valve can be tested by recording the step responses. Two reference variable
steps are performed by default and the course of the valve position x and the manipulated variable y are plotted
until they reach a steady state. The first step starts at an intial value defined beforehand and finishes at the
determined final value. After the entered waiting time, the second step is performed in reverse starting with the
final value back to the initial value.
This parameter is used to select whether just one step is to be performed or whether also the reverse step is to be
performed after the first step.
Used to set the final value to perform the step response.
Used to set the initial value to perform the step response.
Permits strategic grouping and thus faster processing of blocks. Blocks are grouped by entering the same number
in the STRATEGY parameter of each block.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the Transducer Block.
Indicates whether an initialization has been performed in the SUB mode.
Assigns a unique description to each block for clear identification
Determined from the step response test T63 for the falling step.
Determined from the step response test T63 for the rising step.
Determined from the step response test T98 for the falling step.
Determined from the step response test T98 for the rising step.
Tolerance band (see Code 19)
Indicates limit of absolute total valve travel (see Code 24).
Absolute total valve travel: Sum of the nominal travel cycles (double strokes), total number of valve strokes (see
Code 23).
EB 8384-5 EN 145

TRANSDUCER_ 9 D r
DIRECTORY
TRANSDUCER_STATE 34 D r
1. . See operating mode
2. . Solenoid valve active
3. . Lower travel limit active
TRANSDUCER_TYPE 10 N r
TRANSM_PIN_POS 59 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT 71 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT_ 70 S r/w O/M/A

ON
TRAVEL_RATE_DEC 79 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_RATE_INC 78 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT 73 S r/w O/M/A
TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT_ ON 72 S r/w O/M/A

TRIGGER_SELECT 89 S r/w O/M/A 1. . Valve position
2. . Solenoid condition
3. . Valve position or solenoid condition
TV_STEP 19 S r
UPDATE_EVT 7 D r
USER_ CHARACTERISTIC 33 S r/w O/M/A
VALVE_MAN_ID 25 S r/w O/M/A

VALVE_MODEL_NUM 26 S r/w O/M/A
VALVE_SN 27 S r/w O/M/A
146 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
This parameter is not processed in Type 3730-5.
Indicates the state of the Transducer Block.

4. . Upper travel limit active 7. . Fail-safe position active
5. . End position < active 8. . Normal operation
6. . End position > active
Indicates the type of transducer. Standard Advanced Positioner Valve in this case.
The pin position must be entered for initialization in NOM or SUB modes.
The follower pin must be placed in the correct pin position depending on the valve travel/angle of rotation (see
Code 4).
Limits the travel/angle of rotation downwards. The characteristic is not adapted compared to the
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE (see Code 10).
Enables the lower x-limit (see Code 10).
Indicates the time required by the valve to move through the operating range when the valve closes (see Code 22).
Indicates the time required by the valve to move through the operating range when the valve opens (see Code 21).
Limits the travel/angle of rotation upwards. The characteristic is not adapted compared to
FINAL_VALUE_RANGE (see Code 11)
Enables the upper x-limit (see Code 11)
On selecting TRIGGER in DATALOGGER_SELECT parameter, the user can select which events are to trigger the
event logger.
Indicates Tv (see Code 19)

Note: This parameter can only be read over FOUNDATION fieldbus. The value is recorded during initialization.
Allows the user-defined characteristic to be entered.
The characteristic to be used is selected over the LIN_TYPE parameter (user-defined in this case).
The following condition must be fulfilled in this case: x (t–1) < x (t), i.e. the values for x must continually rise.
Clear identification of the manufacturer of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.
Indicates the model version of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.
Indicates the serial number of the valve that the positioner is mounted on.
EB 8384-5 EN 147

VALVE_TYPE 28 S r/w O/M/A
UNINITIALIZED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[LINEAR] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROTARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XD_CAL_DATE 30 S r/w O/M/A
XD_CAL_LOC 29 S r/w O/M/A
XD_CAL_WHO 31 S r/w O/M/A
XD_ERROR 11 D r
NONE (0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNSPECIFIED ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GENERAL ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALIBRATION ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRONICS FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MECHANICAL FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA INTEGRITY ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALGORITHM ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XD_ERROR_EXT 35 D r
1. . xd_error_ext_1
“Device not initialized“
“Solenoid valve active“ or
“SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS active“
“Total valve travel limit exceeded“
“Control loop“ (see Code 57)
“Zero point“ (see Code 58)
“Autocorrection“ (see Code 59)
“Fatal error“ (see Code 60)
“Extended diagnosis“
“x > range“ (see Code 50)
“Delta x < range“ (see Code 51)
“Attachment“ (see Code 52)
“Initialization time exceeded“ (see Code 53)
“Initialization/solenoid valve“ (see Code 54)
“Travel time too short“ (see Code 55)
“Pin position“ (see Code 56)
“Test or calibration running“
148 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Type of valve Note! The Type 3730-5 differentiates merely between linear and rotary valves
. . (Type 3730-5: Treated like a globe valve)
. . (Control valves with straight moving plug, e.g. globe valves)
. . (Control valves with rotating closure members)
. . (Type 3730-5: Treated like a globe valve)
. . The last setting is kept.
Indicates the time when the last calibration was performed.
Indicates the location where the last calibration was performed.
Indicates the person who performed the last calibration.
Errors listed in the Transducer Block
. . No error
. . Unspecified (device not initialized, initialization or zero calibration in progress or total valve travel exceeded)
. . General device error
+
. . Zero point, internal control loop, or initialization error, reference test canceled (Code 81, only with EXPERT )
. . Parameter or characteristic faulty
. . i/p converter (Code 64), hardware (Code 65), bus connection
. . Fault in the mechanics
. . Check sum error
. . Dynamic values outside of the range
Extended errors listed in the Transducer Block
2. . xd_error_ext_2 4 . . Air supply (EXPERT+ function)
“x signal“ (see Code 62) 5 . . Actuator spring (EXPERT+ function)
“i/p converter“ (see Code 64)
6 . . Shifting working range (EXPERT+ function)
“Hardware“ (see Code 65)
“Control parameter“ (see Code 68) 7 . . Friction (EXPERT+ function)
“Poti parameter“ (see Code 69) 8 . . Leakage pneumatic (EXPERT+ function)
“Adjustment parameter“ (see Code 70) 9 . . Limit working range (EXPERT+ function)
“General parameter“ (see Code 71)
10 . . Dynamic stress factor ( EXPERT+ function)
“Internal device error 1“ (see Code 73)
“No emergency mode“ (see Code 76) 11 . . Inner leakage (EXPERT+ function)
“Program load error“ (see Code 77) 12 . . External leakage (EXPERT+ function)
“Options parameters“ (see Code 78) 13 . . Observing end position (EXPERT+ function)
“Info parameters“ (see Code 75)
14 . . Connection positioner valve (EXPERT+ function)
“Data memory“ (see Code 66)
“Control calculation“ (see Code 67) 15 . . Working range (EXPERT+ function)
“Reference test aborted“ (see Code 81) 16 . . Emergency shutdown (EXPERT+ function)
3. . xd_error_txt_3 (EXPERT+ function) 17 . . Temperature error (EXPERT+ function)
EB 8384-5 EN 149

ZERO_POINT_LIMIT 84 D r/w O/M/A
Parameter index

0 ADVANCED_PV_BASIC 22 ACT_MAN_ID 41 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
DIAGNOSTIC_2
1 ST_REV 23 ACT_MODEL_NUM
42 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
2 TAG_DESC 24 ACT_SN
DIAGNOSTIC_3
3 STRATEGY 25 VALUE_MAN_ID
43 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
4 ALERT_KEY 26 VALUE_MODEL_NUM DIAGNOSTIC_4
5 MODE_BLK 27 VALVE_SN 44 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
DIAGNOSTIC_5
6 BLOCK_ERR 28 VALVE_TYPE
45 SETP_DEVIATION
7 UPDATE_EVT 29 XD_CAL_LOC
46 DELAY_TIME
8 BLOCK_ALARM 30 XD_CAL_DATE
47 TOLERANCE_BAND
9 TRANSDUCER_ 31 XD_CAL_WHO
DIRECTORY 48 TOTAL_VALVE_TRAVEL
32 DEVICE_CHARACTERISTICS
10 TRANSDUCER_TYPE 49 TOT_VALVE_TRAV_LIM
33 USER_CHARACTERISTIC
11 XD_ERROR 50 PRESSURE_Y
34 TRANSDUCER_STATE
12 COLLECTION_DIRECTORY 51 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_
35 XD_ERROR_EXT LIMITS
13 FINAL_VALUE
36 ERROR_OPTION_INIT_ 52 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE_
14 FINAL_VALUE_RANGE FAILURE DISC
15 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_HI 37 ERROR_OPTION_ 53 BINARY_INPUT2
OPERATION_FAILURE
16 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_LO 54 IDENT_OPTIONS
38 ERROR_OPTION_HW_
17 KP_STEP 55 IDENT_LIMIT_SWITCHES
FAILURE
18 SERVO_RESET 56 CONFIG_BINARY_INPUT2
39 ERROR_OPTION_DATA_
19 TV_STEP FAILURE
57 SET_FAIL_SAFE_POS
20 FINAL_POSITION_VALUE 40 ERROR_OPTION_ENH_
58 RATED_TRAVEL
DIAGNOSTIC_1
21 ACT_FAIL_ACTION
150 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Indicates the zero point limit [%]

59 TRANSM_PIN_POS 79 TRAVEL_RATE_DEC 101 DIAG_LEVEL
60 INIT_METHOD 80 PRESSURE_LIMIT 102 HYS_STELL_Y
61 SELF_CALIB_CMD 81 ENHANCED_DIAG_CMD 103 STEPSTART
62 SUB_MODE_INIT 82 ELAPSED_HOURS_METERS 104 STEPEND
63 SELF_CALIB_STATUS 83 NO_OF_ZERO_POINT_ 105 STEP_SAMPLE_RATE
ADJ
64 DEVICE_INIT_STATE 106 ERRORBYTE
84 ZERO_POINT_LIMIT
65 MOVING_DIRECTION 107 RAMP_UP
85 COUNTER_INIT_START
66 CLOSING_DIRECTION 108 RAMP_DOWN
86 EVENT_LOGGING_1
67 ACT_STROKE_TIME_DEC 109 LATENCY_AFTER_STEP
87 EVENT_LOGGING_2
68 ACT_STROKE_TIME_INC 110 STEP_SELECTION
88 DATALOGGER_SELECT
69 LIN_TYPE 111 AUTOSTART
89 TRIGGER_SELECT
70 TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT_ 112 OVERSHOOT_RISING
ON 90 SAMPLE_RATE
113 OVERSHOOT_FALLING
71 TRAVEL_LOWER_LIMIT 91 START_VALUE
114 DEAD_TIME_RISING
72 TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT_ON 92 LOGGING_LIMIT
115 DEAD_TIME_FALLING
73 TRAVEL_UPPER_LIMIT 93 PRETRIGGER_TIME
116 TIME_63_RISING
74 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_ 94 SOLENOID_SELECT
117 TIME_63_FALLING
LO_ON
95 DATALOGGER_PROGRESS
118 TIME_98_RISING
75 FINAL_VALUE_CUTOFF_
96 HISTOGRAMM_X
HI_ON 119 TIME_98_FALLING
97 DEVIATION_MIN
76 BLOCKING_POSITION 120 STEP_PROGRESS
98 DEVIATION_MAX
77 SIGNAL_PRESSURE_
ACTION 99 HISTOGRAMM_Z
78 TRAVEL_RATE_INC 100 HIS_TEMPERATURE
EB 8384-5 EN 151
Appendix Analog Output Function Block
Analog Output Function Block

ALERT_KEYS 4 S r/w ALL 1 to 255, [0]
alarm).
BKCAL_OUT 25 D r
BLOCK_ALM 30 D r
BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONFIGURATION_ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INPUT FAILURE PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUTPUT FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS_IN 17 N r/w ALL
CHANNEL 22 S r/w O [3]
FSTATE_TIME 23 S r/w ALL [0]
FSTATE_VAL 24 S r/w ALL Value and range of PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]
152 EB 8384-5 EN
Analog Output Function Block Appendix
Description
Reflects the analog output value and its status required by the BKCAL_IN parameter of the upstream Function
Block for cascade control.
This value provides windup protection in the upstream block and a bumpless transfer on mode changes.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block in-
cluding date and time stamp.
. . A configuration error exists in the block.
. . Position feedback has bad status, e.g. because the Transducer Block is in O/S mode.
. . OUT cannot be issued, e.g. because the Transducer Block is not initialized or is in LO mode.
Reflects/defines the analog reference variable and its status from an upstream function block.
Assignment between the output of each Analog Output Function Block and the logical hardware channels (Trans-
ducer Block)
Note: In order to be able to put the AO Function Block into operation, CHANNEL must be set to a valid value.
The valid value is 3 in this case as there are three Transducer Blocks (Standard Advanced Positioner Valve) in the
Type 3730-5.
The length of time, in seconds, that the AO Function Block will wait to set Fault State after the recognition of an
error of the valid set point.
The Fault State is triggered when the fault still exists after the time interval has elapsed.
Note: The Fault State of the AO Function Block is set in the IO_OPTS parameter of this block.
Determines the set point for the AO Function Block when the Fault State is triggered.
Note: This value is used when the option “Fault State to value” is set in the IO_OPTS parameter.
Note: This parameter is not used by Type 3730-5.
EB 8384-5 EN 153

IO_OPTS 14 S r/w O
SP-PV Track in MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track in LO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SP Track retained target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Increase to close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault State to value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Fault State Value on restart . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target to MAN if Fault State activated . . . . . . . .
Use PV for BKCAL_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE_BLK 5 N r/w ALL
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT 9 N r/w M/O Range of OUT_SCALE ±10 %

Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group
PV 7 D r Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group
PV_SCALE 11 S r/w O 0 to 100 %
RCAS_IN 26 N r/w ALL
154 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Used to select how the input/output is processed in the AO Block
. . The set point tracks the process variable in MAN mode (ACTUAL_MODE) SP-PV
. . The set point tracks the process variable in LO mode (ACTUAL_MODE)
. . The set point tracks RCAS_IN or CAS_IN depending on the set TARGET_MODE in LO or MAN mode
(ACTUAL_MODE). This option has priority over SP_PV Track in MAN/LO mode.
. . The output value to the Transducer Block is inverted (same as direction of action).
. . FSTATE_VAL is used as the set point when the Fault State is triggered (see FSTATE_VAL, FSTATE_TIME).
. . FSTATE_VAL is used for the set point until there is a valid value on restarting the device.
. . On triggering the Fault State, the TARGET_MODE is set to MAN. The original target mode is lost as a result.
After leaving the Fault State, the block remains in MAN and must be set to the required target mode by the
user.
. . The process variable is used instead of the working set point in BKCAL_OUT. If OUT READBACK is set in the
FEATURES_SEL parameter in the Resource Block, the current valve position is reported back over
BKCAL_OUT.
Indicates the actual mode of the AO Block as well as the target and permitted modes supported by the AO Block
and the normal mode.
. . The AO algorithm of the block is not processed. The last value is issued at OUT or the determined value when
the Fault State is activated.
. . The user can directly determine the output value of the AO Block.
. . The set point determined by the user is used over the SP parameter on implementation of the AO Block.
. . The AO Function Block receives the reference variable directly from an upstream function block over the
CAS_IN parameter to calculate the manipulated variable internally. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The AO Function Block receives the reference variable directly from the host system over the RCAS_IN
parameter to calculate the manipulated variable internally. The AO Block is implemented.
Indicates the manipulated variable, value, limit, and status of the AO Function Block.
Note: The output value OUT can be set manually if the MAN mode is selected in MODE_BLK..
Indicates the process variables including their status used for implementation of the function block.
Note: If OUT READBACK is set in the FEATURES_SEL parameter in the Resource Block, PV contains the current
valve position (same as FINAL_POSITION_VALUE).
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used for
the process variables (PV).
Input and display of the analog reference variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system for in-
ternal calculation of the manipulated variable.
Note: This parameter is only active in the RCAS mode.
EB 8384-5 EN 155

RCAS_OUT 28 D r
READBACK 16 D r Value determined from FINAL_POSITION_

VALUE parameter of the associated Transducer
Block.
Unit from XD_SCALE parameter group
SHED_OPT 27 S r/w ALL
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToRetainedTarget_NormalReturn . . . . . . . .
ShedToRetainedTarget_NoReturn. . . . . . . . . . . .
SIMULATE 10 D r/w ALL
SP 8 N r/w O/M/A Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %

Unit from PV_SCALE
SP_HI_LIM 20 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [100]
SP_LO_LIM 21 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]
156 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Display of analog reference variable (value and status) after ramping.
This value is provided to the fieldbus host system for back calculation to allow action to be taken under mode
changes or limited signals.
Reflects current valve position.
Determines what action is to be taken when the monitoring time is exceeded (see SHED_RCAS parameter in the
Resource Block) while the connection between the fieldbus host system and the AO Block in RCAS mode is being
checked. When the time has elapsed, the AO Block switches from RCAS mode to the mode selected in
SHED_OPT. The action to be taken after the Fault State ends is also determined.
Note: This parameter is only active in RCAS mode in the AO Block. The AO Block cannot be set to the RCAS
mode when the value is set to Uninitialized.
. . Not inititialized
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode. The block remains in this mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in AUTO mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode until RCAS mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in MAN mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block attempts to attain the retained target mode until RCAS mode is
restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block sets the target mode to the retained target mode.
The value and status of process variable PV of the block are simulated.
Note: During the simulation, the OUT value is not passed on to the Transducer Block. It keeps the last value valid
prior to activating the simulation. The simulation can only be activated if the Simulation Enable hardware switch
is set in the device (see also Resource Block).
Used to enter the set point (reference variable) in AUTO mode.
Used to enter the upper limit of the set point (reference variable).
Note: This value must be adapted correspondingly if the scale end setting is changed in PV_SCALE parameter.
Used to enter the lower limit of the set point (reference variable).
EB 8384-5 EN 157

SP_RATE_DN 18 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]
SP_RATE_UP 19 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]
ST_REV 1 N r
STATUS_OPTS 15 S r/w O
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propagate Fault Backward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRATEGY 3 S r/w ALL [0]
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w ALL [No text], max. 32 characters

UPDATE_EVT 29 D r
XD_SCALE 12 S r/w O 0.0 to 100.0 %
Specified in [%], [mm] or [degrees]
Parameter index

0 – 6 BLOCK_ERR 12 XD_SCALE
1 ST_REV 7 PV 13 GRANT_DENY
2 TAG_DESC 8 SP 14 IO_OPTS
3 STRATEGY 9 OUT 15 STATUS_OPTS
4 ALERT_KEYS 10 SIMULATE 16 READBACK
5 MODE_BLK 11 PV_SCALE 17 CAS_IN
158 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Used to enter the ramp rate for downward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero. The rate limit is active for output blocks
in the AUTO and CAS modes.
Used to enter the ramp rate for upward set point changes in AUTO mode.
Note: The set point is used immediately when the ramp rate is set to zero.
Indicates the revision state of static data.
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status.
. . Not initialized
. . Status of the Transducer Block is passed on to the upstream block over the status of BKCAL_OUT.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the AO Function Block.
Definition of the range (initial and final values), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places used to
display the manipulated variable (OUT).
Note: When [%] is used, the OUT value is based on a scale of 100 %. In case of [mm] (with globe valves) or
[degrees] (with rotary valves), the OUT value corresponds to the value set in the RATED_TRAVEL parameter in the
Transducer Block which is scaled as 100 %.

18 SP_RATE_DN 24 FSTATE_VAL 30 BLOCK_ALM
19 SP_RATE_UP 25 BKCAL_OUT
20 SP_HI_LIM 26 RCAS_IN
21 SP_LO_LIM 27 SHED_OPT
22 CHANNEL 28 RCAS_OUT
23 FSTATE_TIME 29 UPDATE_EVT
EB 8384-5 EN 159
Appendix Discrete Input Function Block
Discrete Input Function Block 1

ACK_OPTION 21 S r/w O/M/A [0] . . . . . . . . . . No selection
BLOCK_ALM . . Block alarm
DISC_ALM . . . . Discrete alarm
ALARM_SUM 20 S/D r/w O/M/A BLOCK_ALM . . Block alarm
DISC_ALM . . . . Discrete alarm
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w O/M/A 1 to 255, [0]
alarm).
BLOCK_ALM 19 D r
BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHANNEL 15 S r/w O [1] to 3
DISC_ALM 24 D r
DISC_LIM 23 S r/w O/M/A [0], 1

DISC_PRI 22 S r/w O/M/A
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IELD_VAL_D 17 N r
IO_OPTS 13 S r/w O
INVERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160 EB 8384-5 EN
Discrete Input Function Block Appendix
Description
Determines whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the fieldbus host system.
Determines the current status of the process alarms in the DI1 Function Block
Note: The process alarms can also be deactivated in this parameter group.
This information can be used by the Fieldbus host system to group alert and events.
Indicates the current block state with details on all configuration, hardware or system problems in the block
including date and time stamp.
Determines which Transducer Block is assigned to the DI1 Function Block.
Indicates the status of the discrete alarm including details on the time of the alarm (time and date stamp) and on
the value which triggered the alarm.
The value entered in DISC_LIM is exceeded.
Note: In addition, an active block alarm can be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The state of the discrete input that causes the alarm.
Determines the action to be taken when the value entered in DISC_LIM is reached.
. . The limit violation is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system.
. . Low limit alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High limit alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates the discrete input value of the DI1 Function Block with details on the status.
Note: This parameter is not processed by Type 3730-5.
Used to select how the input/output is processed in the DI1 Block.
. . Used to logically invert the value of FIELD_VAL_D before it is stored as OUT_D.
EB 8384-5 EN 161
Appendix Discrete Input Function Block

MODE_BLK 5 N r/w O/M/A
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT_D 8 N r/w O/M
PV_D 7 D r
PV_FTIME 16 S r/w O/M/A [0]
SIMULATE_D 9 S r/w O/M/A
STATUS_OPTS 14 S r/w O [Uninitialized]

Propagate Fail Fwd
STRATEGY 3 S r/w O/M/A [0]
ST_REV 1 N r
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w O/M/A [No text], max. 32 characters

UPDATE_EVT 18 D r
Parameter index

0 – 5 MODE_BLK 10 –
1 ST_REV 6 BLOCK_ERR 11 –
2 TAG_DESC 7 PV_D 12 GRANT_DENY
3 STRATEGY 8 OUT_D 13 IO_OPTS
4 ALERT_KEY 9 SIMULATE_D 14 STATUS_OPTS
162 EB 8384-5 EN
Discrete Input Function Block Appendix
Description
Indicates the actual mode of the DI1 Block, the permitted modes supported by the DI1 Block, and the normal mode.
. . The binary input value FIELD_VAL_D is processed by the Function Block and issued as OUT_D.
. . The user can directly enter the output value of the Function Block over OUT_D.
. . The DI algorithm of the block is not processed. The last value is issued at OUT_D.
Indicates/defines the discrete output value of the DI1 Block with the associated status.
Indicates the discrete state used for the Function Block with status. The parameter is identical to the OUT_D in
AUTO mode.
Used to enter the filter time constant (in seconds) of the digital filter until a binary state at the input of the function
block is adopted in the PV_D parameter.
A discrete input value FIELD_VAL_D can be simulated with status.
Note: The simulation can only be activated when this has been enabled at the field device (Code 48/FF-P/F03)
as well as in the Function Block.
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the DI Function Block.
The revision state of static data is displayed.
Note: The revision state will be incremented each time a static parameter in the block is changed.
Indicates whether static block data have been changed, including date and time stamp.
Index Parameter Index Parameter

15 CHANNEL 20 ALARM_SUM
16 PV_FTIME 21 ACK_OPTION
17 FIELD_VAL_D 22 DISC_PRI
18 UPDATE_EVT 23 DISC_LIM
19 BLOCK_ALM 24 DISC_ALM
EB 8384-5 EN 163
Appendix PID Function Block
PID Function Block

ACK_OPTION 46 S r/w ALL
[Undefined] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK ALM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALARM_HYS 47 S r/w ALL 0 to 50 %, [0.5 %]
ALARM_SUM 45 S/D r/w ALL
HI_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_HI_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_LO_ALM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BLOCK ALM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALERT_KEY 4 S r/w ALL 1 to 255, [0]
when transferring data to the device (error alarm)
BAL_TIME 25 S r/w ALL [0]
164 EB 8384-5 EN
PID Function Block Appendix
Description
Used to select whether an alarm is to be automatically acknowledged in the positioner, i.e. without intervention of
the Fieldbus host system.
. . . No selection
. . . High high alarm
. . . High alarm
. . . Low low alarm
. . . Low alarm
. . . Deviation high alarm
. . . Deviation low alarm
. . . Block alarm
Used to specify the amount the alarm value must return to within the alarm limit before the associated active
alarm condition clears. The hysteresis value affects the following alarms of the PID Function Block:
HI_HI_LIM; HI_LIM; LO_LO_LIM; LO_LIM; DV_HI_LIM; DV_LO_LIM
Note: The hysteresis value is based upon the percent of the range of the PV_SCALE parameter group in the PID
Function Block.
Indicates the current status of the process alarm in the PID Function Block.
Note: The process alarms can also be deactivated in this parameter group.
. . High high alarm
. . High alarm
. . Low low alarm
. . Low alarm
. . Deviation high alarm
. . Deviation low alarm
. . Block alarm
Used to specify the time constant at which the integral term will move to obtain balance (calculated manipulated
variable > OUT_HI_LIM or < OUT_LO_LIM)
Note: Balance is immediately obtained when the value 0 (initial value) is set.
EB 8384-5 EN 165

BKCAL_HYS 30 S r/w ALL 0 to 50 %, [0.5 %]
BKCAL_IN 27 N r/w ALL
BKCAL_OUT 31 D r
BLOCK_ALM 44 D r/w ALL
BLOCK_ERR 6 D r
OUT OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BYPASS 17 S r/w M/O
Uninitialized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[OFF]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS_IN 18 N r/w ALL
CONTROL_OPTS 13 S r/w O
[None]
Bypass Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Acting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Track in Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PV for BKCAL_OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No OUT Limits in Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Used to specify the amount the manipulated variable must change away from its range limits OUT_HI_LIM and
OUT_LO_LIM before the limit status is turned off.
If the manipulated variable moves off a limit, in percent of scale, the limit status is indicated in the OUT
parameter and passed on to the following blocks.
The range limit status remains active as long as the value of the manipulated variable does not move off the limits
again.
Indicates the analog input value and status from the BKCAL_OUT parameter of a downstream function for a cas-
cade control.
This value provides a bumpless transfer on mode changes by backward output tracking.
Reflects the analog output value and status required by the BKCAL_IN parameter of the upstream function block
for a cascade control.
This value provides windup protection in the upstream block and a bumpless transfer on mode changes.
Indicates the current block state with information about configuration, hardware, or system failure including de-
tails on the time of the alarm (time and date stamp).
. . The block mode is out of service.
Used to activate or deactivate the calculation of the manipulated variable using the PID control algorithm.
Note: When “Uninitialized” is set, the block remains in O/S mode. To activate the bypass (set to ON), the
bypass must be enabled in the options (CONTROL_OPTS parameters).
. . Same as ON
. . Bypass deactivated: The manipulated variable determined using the PID control algorithm is issued over the
OUT parameter.
. . BYPASS activated: The value of the reference variable SP is issued directly over the OUT parameter.
Used to indicate/define the analog reference variable and its status from an upstream function block.
Allows selection of controller options available to determine the automation strategy.
. . Enable BYPASS parameter

. . Direct action
. . Enable tracking
. . Tracking in MAN mode
. . Value and status of PV parameter used for BKCAL_OUT parameter
. . No output limits in MAN mode
EB 8384-5 EN 167

DV_HI_ALM 64 D r/w ALL
DV_HI_LIM 57 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]
DV_HI_PRI 56 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DV_LO_ALM 65 D r
DV_LO_LIM 59 S r/w ALL [-3402823466 x 1038]
DV_LO_PRI 58 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FF_GAIN 42 S r/w M/O [0]
FF_SCALE 41 S r/w M/O [0 to 100 %]
FF_VAL 40 N r/w ALL Range and unit from FF_SCALE
GAIN 23 S r/w ALL [1.0]
168 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Indicates deviation high alarm status including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
that triggered the alarm.
The controlled variable exceeds the reference variable by more than the value determined in DV_HI_LIM parameter.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the deviation high alarm condition.
If the controlled variable exceeds the reference variable by this value, the DV_HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the deviation high alarm is exceeded (DV_HI_LIM).
. . The limit for deviation high alarm is not processed.
. . Deviation high alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Deviation high alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates deviation low alarm status including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
The controlled variable does not reach the reference variable by more than the value determined in DV_LO_LIM
parameter.
Note: In addition, an active alarm can be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the deviation low alarm condition.
If the controlled variable does not reach the reference variable by this value, the DV_LO_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the deviation low alarm is not reached (DV_LO_LIM).
. . The limit for deviation low alarm is not processed.
. . Alarm is not broadcast to fieldbus host system
. . Reserved for block alarms.
. . Deviation low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Deviation low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high)
Used to input the gain of the manipulated variable.
Note: The gain is multiplied with the feedforward input (FF_VAL) and the result added to the OUT value.
Defines the measuring range (upper and lower limits), the engineering unit and the number of decimal places
used for the feedforward input (FF_VAL).
Indicates/specifies the value and status of the feedforward input.
Note: The feedforward input is multiplied with the gain (FF_GAIN) and the result added to the OUT value.
Specifies the proportional gain (factor).
Note: The parameter must be set to a value other than 0, otherwise a configuration error will be set in the
BLOCK_ERR parameter and the block will go to O/S mode.
EB 8384-5 EN 169

HL_ALM 61 D r Unit from PV_SCALE
HI_HI_ALM 60 D r/w Unit from PV_SCALE
HI_HI_LIM 49 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[3402823466 x 1038]
HI_HI_PRI 48 S r/w ALL

[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HI_LIM 51 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,
[3402823466 x 1038]
HI_PRI 50 S r/w ALL

0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IN 15 N r/w ALL
LO_ALM 62 D r Unit from PV_SCALE
LO_LIM 53 S r/w Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[-3402823466 x 1038]
LO_LO_ALM 63 D r Unit from PV_SCALE
LO_LO_LIM 55 S r/w ALL Range and unit from PV_SCALE,

[-3402823466 x 1038]
170 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Note: This parameter is not used by Type 3730-5.
Indicates high alarm status (HI_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
Indicates high high alarm status (HI_HI_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as
the value that triggered the alarm.
Note: The active alarm can also be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the high high alarm (HI_HI_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the HI_HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the high high alarm is exceeded (HI_HI_LIM).
. . The limit for high high alarm is not processed.
. . High high alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High high alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the high alarm (HI_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the HI_ALM is issued.
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the high alarm is exceeded (HI_LIM).
. . The limit for high alarm is not processed.
. . High alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . High alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates/specifies the analog input variable with details on state and value.
Indicates low alarm status (LO_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as the value
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the low alarm (LO_ALM) condition.
If the PV value exceeds this limit, the LO_ALM is issued.
Indicates low low alarm status (LO_LO_LIM) including details of time of alarm (date and time stamp) as well as
the value that triggered the alarm.
Note: The active alarm can also be acknowledged manually in this parameter group.
The setting for the alarm limit used to detect the low low alarm (LO_LO_ALM) condition.
If the PV value falls below this limit, the LO_LO_ALM is issued.
EB 8384-5 EN 171

LO_LO_PRI 54 S r/w ALL
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO_PRI 52 S r/w ALL
[0]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 to 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MODE_BLK 5 S r/w ALL
O/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RCAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OUT 9 N r/w O/M Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,

Unit from XD_SCALE
OUT_HI_LIM 28 S r/w ALL Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,

Unit from OUT_SCALE, [100]
OUT_LO_LIM 29 S r/w ALL Range OUT_SCALE ±10 %,
Unit from OUT_SCALE, [0]
OUT_SCALE 11 S r/w O [0 to 100 %]
PV 7 D r Unit from PV_SCALE
172 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the low low alarm is not reached (LO_LO_LIM).
. . The limit for low low alarm is not processed.
. . Low low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Low low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Determines the action to be taken when the value for the low alarm is not reached (LO_LIM).
. . The limit for low alarm is not processed.
. . Low alarm is issued to notify the operator with the corresponding priority (3 = low, 7 = high).
. . Low alarm is issued as a critical alarm with the corresponding priority (8 = low, 15 = high).
Indicates the actual mode of the PID Block, the target and permitted modes supported by the PID Block, and the
normal mode.
. . The PID algorithm of the block is not implemented. The last value or the value determined when the Fault State
is activated is issued at OUT parameter.
. . The output value of the block can directly be entered by the user over the OUT parameter.
. . The set point determined by the user is used to implement the PID Block over the SP parameter.
. . The PID Function Block receives the reference variable directly from an upstream function block over the
CAS_IN parameter for internal calculation of the manipulated variable. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The AO Function block receives the reference variable directly from the fieldbus host system for internal
calculation of the manipulated variable. The AO Block is implemented.
. . The PID Function Block receives the manipulated variable directly from the fieldbus host system over the
ROUT_IN parameter. The manipulated variable is issued again over OUT without the internal PID algorithm
being implemented.
Indicates the manipulated variable, the value, limit, and status of the AO Function Block.
Note: If the MAN mode is selected in the MODE_BLK parameter, the output value OUT can be entered manually.
Specifies the upper limit of the analog manipulated variable (OUT).
Specifies the lower limit of the analog manipulated variable (OUT).
the manipulated variable (OUT).
Indicates the process variables used to implement the block including their status.
EB 8384-5 EN 173

PV_FTIME 16 S r/w ALL [0 s]
PV_SCALE 10 S r/w O [0 to 100 %]
RATE 26 S r/w ALL [0 s]

RCAS_IN 32 N r/w ALL
RCAS_OUT 35 D r
RESET 24 S r/w [3402823466 x 1038 (max. possible value])
ROUT_IN 33 N r/w ALL
ROUT_OUT 36 D r
174 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Used to enter the filter time constant (in seconds) of the first-order digital filter.
This time is needed to allow a 63 % change of the input IN in the value of PV to become effective.
the process variable (PV).
Specifies the time constant for the differential function.
Input and display of the analog reference variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system for in-
ternal calculation of the manipulated variable.
Display of analog reference variable (value and status) after ramping.
This value is provided to the fieldbus host system for back calculation to allow action to be taken under mode
changes or limited signals.
Specifies the time constant for the integral-action function.
Note: The initial value or 0 deactivates the integral-action function.
Input and display of the manipulated variable (value and status) provided by the fieldbus host system.
Note: This parameter is only active in the ROUT mode.
Indicates the analog reference variable (value and status) that has been written to the ROUT_IN parameter.
This value is provided by the fieldbus host system over this parameter to perform back calculation to allow action
to be taken under mode changes or limited signals.
Note: This parameter is only active in the ROUT mode.
EB 8384-5 EN 175

SHED_OPT 34 S r/w ALL
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NormalShed_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToAuto_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NormalReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToManual_NoReturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ShedToRetainedTarget_NormalReturn . . . . . . . .
ShedToRetainedTarget_NoReturn. . . . . . . . . . . .
SP 8 N r/w O/M/A Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %
SP_HI_LIM 21 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [100]
SP_LO_LIM 22 S r/w ALL Value and range from PV_SCALE ±10 %, [0]
SP_RATE_DN 19 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]
SP_RATE_UP 20 S r/w ALL [3402823466 x 1038]
ST_REV 1 S r
176 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Determines what action is to be taken when the monitoring time is exceeded (see SHED_RCAS parameter in the
Resource Block) while the connection between the fieldbus host system and the PID Block in RCAS or ROUT mode
is being checked. When the time has elapsed, the PID Block switches from RCAS or ROUT mode to the mode
selected in SHED_OPT. The action to be taken after the Fault State ends is also determined.
Note! This parameter is only active in RCAS or ROUT mode in the PID Block. The PID Block cannot be set to the
RCAS or ROUT mode when the value is set to Uninitialized.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to next possible mode the block remains in this mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to AUTO mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in AUTO mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode until RCAS or ROUT mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, change to MAN mode. No attempt is made to restore the mode and the
block remains in MAN mode.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block attempts to attain the retained target mode until RCAS or ROUT
mode is restored.
. . On failure of remote connection, the block sets the target mode to the retained target mode.
Used to enter the set point (reference variable) in AUTO mode.
Used to enter the high limit of the set point (reference variable).
Used to enter the low limit of the set point (reference variable).
Used to enter the ramp rate for downward set point changes in AUTO mode.
in the AUTO mode.
Used to enter the ramp rate for upward set point changes in AUTO mode.
in the AUTO mode.
Indicates the revision number of static data.
EB 8384-5 EN 177

STATUS_OPT 14 S r/w O
[Uninitialized] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IFS if Bad IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IFS if Bad CAS_IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Uncertain as Good . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Target In Manual if Bad IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STRATEGY 3 S r/w ALL [0]
TAG_DESC 2 S r/w ALL max. 32 characters, [no text]

TRK_IN_D 38 N r/w ALL
TRK_SCALE 37 S r/w O/M [0...100 %]
TRK_VAL 39 N r/w ALL

UPDATE_EVT 43 D r
Parameter index

0 – 11 OUT_SCALE 22 SP_LO_LIM
1 ST_REV 12 GRANT_DENY 23 GAIN
2 TAG_DESC 13 CONTROL_OPTS 24 RESET
3 STRATEGY 14 STATUS_OPT 25 BAL_TIME
4 ALERT_KEY 15 IN 26 RATE
5 MODE_BLK 16 PV_FTIME 27 BKCAL_IN
6 BLOCK_ERR 17 BYPASS 28 OUT_HI_LIM
7 PV 18 CAS_IN 29 OUT_LO_LIM
8 SP 19 SP_RATE_DN 30 BKCAL_HYS
9 OUT 20 SP_RATE_UP 31 BKCAL_OUT
10 PV_SCALE 21 SP_HI_LIM 32 RCAS_IN
178 EB 8384-5 EN
Description
Allows the selection of status options available to determine the handling and processing of the status:
. . Trigger IFS substate of downstream AO Function Block, of the input value (IN) changes the status to BAD.
. . Trigger IFS substate if the external reference variable (CAS_IN) changes the status to BAD.
. . The status UNCERTAIN is used as GOOD.
. . Reverts to MAN mode if the input value changes the status to BAD.
Note: These data are neither checked nor processed by the PID Function Block.
Indicates/specifies the discrete input (value and status) which activates the external or output tracking.
On activating tracking, the block changes to LO mode. The manipulated variable at OUT adopts the value
defined over the input TRK_VAL.
external tracking value (TRK_VAL).
Indicates/specifies the analog input value and status from another function block for external tracking function.

33 ROUT_IN 44 BLOCK_ALM 55 LO_LO_LIM
34 SHED_OPT 45 ALARM_SUM 56 DV_HI_PRI
35 RCAS_OUT 46 ACK_OPTION 57 DV_HI_LIM
36 ROUT_OUT 47 ALARM_HYS 58 DV_LO_PRI
37 TRK_SCALE 48 HI_HI_PRI 59 DV_LO_LIM
38 TRK_IN_D 49 HI_HI_LIM 60 HI_HI_ALM
39 TRK_VAL 50 HI_PRI 61 HI_ALM
40 FF_VAL 51 HI_LIM 62 LO_ALM
41 FF_SCALE 52 LO_PRI 63 LO_LO_ALM
42 FF_GAIN 53 LO_LIM 64 DV_HI_ALM
43 UPDAT_EVT 54 LO_LO_PRI 65 DV_LO_ALM
EB 8384-5 EN 179
Dimensions in mm
17 Dimensions in mm
Pressure gauge or connecting plate Attachment acc. to IEC 60534-6
bracket External position
sensor
Lever mm
S = 17
M = 50 Schild
28
L = 100
XL = 200
15
70
46 58
70
34 70
Direct attachment
210
M20 x 1.5
80
34
14
40 28
58
164 Output (38) Supply (9)
Attachment to rotary actuators

86
VDI/VDE 3845
for all sizes of fixing level 2
Output A1
50 Supply (9)
A1 Z
76
A2
Connecting
49
59
plate G ¼ 58
79
or ¼ NPT
Output A2
Reversing amplifier
50 80
(option)
130
150
180 EB 8384-5 EN
Valve characteristic selection
18 Valve characteristic selection

The characteristics that can be selected in Code 20 are shown in following in graph form.
Note: A characteristic can only be defined (user-defined characteristic) using a workstation/

operating software (e.g. TROVIS-VIEW).
Linear (select characteristic: 0)
Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

100
50
Reference variable [%]

0
0 50 100
Equal percentage (select characteristic: 1) Rev. equal percentage (select characteristic: 2)

100
100
50
50

0
0 50 100 0
0 50 100
EB 8384-5 EN 181
SAMSON butterfly valve linear SAMSON butterfly valve equal percentage
(select characteristic: 3) (select characteristic: 4)

Travel/ angle of rotation [%] 100
100
50
50

Reference variable [%] 0
0 0 50 100
0 50 100
VETEC rotary plug valve linear VETEC rotary plug valve equal percentage
Travel/ angle of rotation [%] Travel/ angle of rotation [%]

100 100
50 50
Reference variable [%] Reference variable [%]

0 0
0 50 100 0 50 100
Segmented valve ball linear Segmented ball valve equal percentage


100
100
50
50

0
0 50 100 0
0 50 100
EB 8384-5 EN 195
196
EB 8384-5 EN
Addendum Page 1 Addendum Page 2
Installation Manual for apparatus certified by CSA for use in hazardous locations. Intrinsically safe if installed as specified in manufacturer’s installation manual.
TM
Communication is optionally either according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification or CSA- certified for hazardous locations Type 4 Enclosure
according to PROFIBUS PA in compliance FISCO-Concept
Ex ia IIC T6
The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F + G; Class III.
such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage (Vmax) the current (Imax) and the power (Pmax) which
intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal or greater than the voltage CSA-certified associated
Serial interface, for connection apparatus suitable
(V0C) the current (ISC) and the power (P0) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults and to CSA certified intrinsically for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF
safe circuit FIELDBUS
applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of each apparatus (other than the
termination) connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 µH respectively. Fieldbus
11+
Isolating amplifier 1 or 2
In each segment only one active device, normally the associated apparatus, is allowed to provide the necessary energy for the . 12- channels
circuit 1 CSA- certified
fieldbus system The allowed voltage (V0C) of the associated apparatus is limited to the range of
Model 3730-43/3730-53
14V DC. to 24V DC. All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive, meaning that they are not allowed to
Positioners
provide energy to the system, except to a leakage current of 50mA for each connected device. Separately powered equipment 41+ Limit switch circuit 2
needs a galvanic isolation to assure that the intrinsically safe fieldbus circuit remains passive. 42-
81+ Forced venting function
82- circuit 3
The cable used to interconnect the devices need to have the parameters in the following range:
87+ Binary contact 1
Loop resistance R‘: 15 ... 150 Ohm/km
88- circuit 4
Inductance per unit length L‘: 0,4 ... 1 mH/km
85+
Capacitance per unit length C‘: 80 ... 200 nF/km supply barrier
86-
C‘ = C‘ line/line + 0,5 C‘ line/screen, if both lines are floating or, C‘ = C‘ line/line + C’line/screen, if the screen is Binary contact 2
connected to one line circuit 5
Length of spur cable: ≤ 30 m Terminal No. evaluation barrier
Length of trunk cable: ≤ 1 km External position sensor
supply barrier
(optionally)
At each end of the trunk cable an approved infallible line termination with the following parameters is suitable:
R = 90 ... 100 Ohm C = 0 ... 2,2 µF evaluation barrier
One of the allowed terminations might already be integrated in the associated apparatus.
I.S.Ground
The number of passive devices connected to the bus segment is not limited due to I.S. reasons. If the above rules are respected,
the inductance and capacitance of the cable will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation. CSA- certified barrier
CSA-certified
Notes: intrinsically safe
apparatus suitable
1. Approved associated apparatus must be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions for FIELDBUS
2. Approved associated apparatus must meet the following requirements:
Hazardous Safe
Voc ≤ Vmax, Isc ≤ Imax, Po ≤ Pmax
3. The maximum non-hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V. Location Location
4. The installation must be in accordance with the Canadian Electrical code Part 1.
5. Each set of wires must be provided with grounded shield. The shield must extend as close to the terminal(s) as possible CSA-certified
intrinsically safe Installation shall be in accordance with the C.E.C. Part 1
and it must be grounded shield at I. S. Barrier ground. apparatus suitable
6. Caution: Use only supply wires suitable for 5 °C above surrounding. for FIELDBUS
7. Warning: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety. PE = I. S. Ground CSA-certified

termination with
8. The polarity for connecting 11 and 12 is of no importance due to an internal rectifier. R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
9. FISCO concept applies to fieldbus / circuit only.
10. Entity parameters apply to circuit 2, 3 and 4 and further required to meet the following conditions:
Co ≥ Ci + Ccable; Lo ≥ Li + Lcable
Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN Revisions Control No. 1: March.2006 Addendum to EB 8384-5 EN
Table 1: Intrinsic Safety Parameters Table 2: CSA – certified barrier parameters of circuit 4
Fieldbus Limit- Forced Binary- input Serial-Interface Supply barrier Evaluation barrier
switches venting- Barrier
Foundation Profibus inductive function 1 2 Active Passive V0C Rmin V0C Rmin
Circuit No. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 circuit 3 ≤28V ≥245Ω ≤28V Diode
Terminal 11 / 12 11 / 12
41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 87 85 / 86 plug circuit 4 ≤30V ≥300Ω ≤30V Diode
No. (IEC 1148-2) (IEC 1148-2)
Groups IIC IIB IIC IIB #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# The correlation between temperature classification and permissible ambient
temperature ranges is shown in the table 3 below:
Vmax 28 28
24 17,5 16 ### ### 16
[V] 30 30 Table 3:
U0 or V0C ############################################## 5,88V 8,61V ### Permissble ambient

Temperature class
temperature range
Imax 25 115 115
360 380 380 ### ### 25
[ mA ] 52 100 100 T6 +60°C
I0 or ISC ############################################## 1mA 55mA ### T5 -40°C ≤ Ta ≤+70°C
Pmax 64mW 250 64 T4 +80°C

1,04 2,58 5,32 ## ## 7,2 mW
[W] 169mW mW mW
Ci [ nF ] 2 60 5,3 0 ### ### 0 Table 4: Energy-Limited (Non- Incendive) Parameters
Limit- Forced
Maximum values for serial-interface and binary input 2 see

C0 or Ca ############################################## 2µF 0,61µF ### Foundation Fieldbus or Profibus PA Binary-
switches venting
(Non incendive Equipment) (inductive) Input 1
Li [ µH ] 10 100 0 0 ### ### 0 function
L0 or La ############################################## 10mH 9mH ### Terminal 11 / 12 (IEC 1148-2) 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88
Groups A, B and IIC C, D and IIB #/# #/# #/#

Binary- input 1: For connection of an active signal circuit
Ui or Vmax 28V 28V
Binary- input 2: For connection of an passive contact circuit directly on the control valve, e.g. 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 30V 30V
table 1
[VDC]
passive pressure switch for leakage monitoring 32V 32V
Notes: Ii or Imax 1,117 25mA 115mA 115mA

464 261 152 130 650 379 324 100mA 100mA
[mA] A 52mA
90mA 90mA
1. Entity parameters must meet the following requirements:
Pi or Pmax 64mW
V0C ≤ Vmax , ISC ≤ Imax, P0 ≤ Pmax 2,32 1,56 1,14 1,14 5,88 3,89 3,85 2,77 ## ##
[W] 169mW
C0 or Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable and L0 or La ≥ Li + Lcable
Ci 2nF 30 5,3 0
2. Install in accordance with the Canadian Electrical Code Part I
Li 10µH 100 0 0
3. Cable entry M 20 x1,5 or metal conduit acc. to dwg. No. 1050-0540
* Circuit 3 can be connected to a CSA Certified zener barrier that is rated as follows:
- Supply channel (connect to Terminal 81): Voc ≤ 28V max. and Rmin ≥ 245 Ω
EB 8384-5 EN
- Return channel (connect to Terminal 82): ≤ 28V max with diodes Return (zero current)
** Circuit 4 can be connected to a CSA Certified zener barrier that is rated as follows:
- Supply channel (connect to Terminal 87): Voc ≤ 30V and Rmin ≥ 300 Ω
- Return channel (connect to Terminal 88): Voc ≤ 30V max with diodes Return (zero current)
197
198
EB 8384-5 EN
CSA certified for hazardous locations: Installation drawing Control Relay KHA5-OTI/Ex2, KHA6-OTI/Ex1 or
KHA6-OTI/Ex2 with Model SJ-b-N Proximity Sensors
Ex nA II T6 / Ex nL IIC T6
Class I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Div. 2 Groups E, F + G; Class III
HAZARDOUS SAFE
Type 4 Enclosure
LOCATION LOCATION
CSA-certified associated
Serial interface, apparatus suitable
CSA certified for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF intrinsically output
FIELDBUS 1+ 12+
to sensor or contact
87+ 2+ 11+
Fieldbus to intrinsically channel 1
11+ Isolating amplifier 1 or 2 safe output
Model 3730-43
. 88- 3- 10-
12- channels
or 3730-53
circuit 1 to one common
Switch-Isolators
Model 3730-43/3730-53
line possible
Type KHA5 – OTI/Ex2
or KHA6 - OTI/Ex.
intrinsically output
41+ Proximity sensor 4+ 9+
Positioners
41+ Limit switch circuit 2

42- software limit switch to sensor or contact 5+ 8+
42-
81+ Forced venting function terminal No. channel 2
6- 7-
82- circuit 3
UNSPECIFIED APPARATUS
e.g. transmitter relay
87+ Binary contact 1 Model designation code Type KHab – cExde
88- circuit 4 External a= Supply Voltage type A or D

position sensor a=AC, d=DC
85+ b= Supply Level
2=24V DC±15%; 5=120V AC +10%-15%;
86- 6=230V AC+10%-15%;
Binary contact 2 c= Output type RTA/; RW1/; SS1/; SS2/; RS1/;
circuit 5 SR/; ST-or SOT
Terminal No. d= Number of channels 1 or 2
e= Power rail designation, P, 2S.P or GS.P
(includes Model KHD2-EB-PB Power Feed Module) or
External position sensor
Blank
(optionally)
GROUND The total series inductance and shunt capacitance of shield wiring shall maximum capacitance of each inductive sensor 30nF
be restricted to the following maximum values maximum inductance of each inductive sensor 100µH
CSA-certified
apparatus suitable System parameters
for FIELDBUS
Control Relay L C V0C ISC Vmax Rmin
Terminal No. Groups
Hazardous Safe [ mH ] [ µF ] [V] [ mA ] [V] [Ω]
Location A+B 192 2,66

Location 1-3; 2-3
4-6; 5-6
C+E 671 7,9 10,5 13 10,5 811
CSA-certified
apparatus suitable D, F, G 1000 21,3
for FIELDBUS
Division 2 wiring method must be in accordance to
CSA-certified the Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 Division 2 wiring method shall be in accordance to the
termination with Canadian Electrical Code Part 1.
R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
Installation Manual for apparatus approved by FM for use in hazardous locations.

TM Intrinsically safe if installed as specified in manufacturer’s installation manual.
Communication is optionally either according to the FOUNDATION Fieldbus Specification or
according to PROFIBUS PA in compliance FISCO-Concept FM- approved for hazardous locations
The FISCO Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in Class I, Zone 0 AEx ia IIC T6:
such combination. The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage (Vmax/Ui) the current (Imax/Ii) and the power (Pi) which Class I, II, III Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D, E, F + G. Field enclosure NEMA 4X
intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal or greater than the voltage
FM-approved associated
(V0C/U0) the current (ISC/I0) and the power (P0) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus, considering faults Serial interface, for connection apparatus suitable
to FM approved intrinsically for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF
and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li) of each apparatus (other than safe circuit FIELDBUS
the termination) connected to the fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5 nF and 10 µH respectively.
Fieldbus
In each segment only one active device, normally the associated apparatus, is allowed to provide the necessary energy for the 11+
Isolating amplifier 1 or 2
fieldbus system The allowed voltage (V0C /Uo) of the associated apparatus is limited to the range of 14V DC. to 24V DC. All
. 12- Channels FM-approved
circuit 1
Model 3730-43/3730-53
other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive, meaning that they are not allowed to provide energy to the system,
except to a leakage current of 50mA for each connected device. Separately powered equipment needs a galvanic isolation to
Positioners
assure that the intrinsically safe fieldbus circuit remains passive. 41+ Limit switch circuit 2
42-
The cable used to interconnect the devices need to have the parameters in the following range: 82- circuit 3
Loop resistance R‘: 15 ... 150 Ohm/km
Inductance per unit length L‘: 0,4 ... 1 mH/km
88- circuit 4
Capacitance per unit length C‘: 80 ... 200 nF/km
85+
C‘ = C‘ line/line + 0,5 C‘ line/screen, if both lines are floating or, C‘ = C‘ line/line + C’line/screen, if the screen is supply barrier
86-
connected to one line
Binary contact 2
Length of spur cable: ≤ 30 m circuit 5
Terminal No. evaluation barrier
Length of trunk cable: ≤ 1 km
supply barrier
At each end of the trunk cable an approved infallible line termination with the following parameters is suitable: External position sensor
(optionally)
R = 90 ... 100 Ohm C = 0 ... 2,2 µF
One of the allowed terminations might already be integrated in the associated apparatus. evaluation barrier
The number of passive devices connected to the bus segment is not limited due to I.S. reasons. If the above rules are respected, I.S.Ground
the inductance and capacitance of the cable will not impair the intrinsic safety of the installation.
FM-approved barrier
Notes: FM-approved
1. Approved associated apparatus must be installed in accordance with manufacturer instructions intrinsically safe
apparatus suitable
2. Approved associated apparatus must meet the following requirements: for FIELDBUS
Uo or Voc ≤ Ui or Vmax, Io or Isc ≤ Ii or Imax, Po ≤ Pi or Pmax

Hazardous Safe
3. The maximum non-hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V.
4. The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and Location Location
ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
FM-approved
5. Each set of wires must be provided with grounded shield. The shield must extend as close to the terminal(s) as possible intrinsically safe The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical
and it must be grounded shield at I. S. Barrier ground. apparatus suitable
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
for FIELDBUS
6. Caution: Use only supply wires suitable for 5 °C above surrounding.
FM-approved
7. Warning: Substitution of components may impair intrinsic safety. PE = I. S. Ground termination with
8. The polarity for connecting 11 and 12 is of no importance due to an internal rectifier. R = 90 . . .100Ω,
EB 8384-5 EN
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
9. FISCO concept applies to fieldbus / circuit only.
10. Entity parameters apply to circuit 2, 3 and 4 and further required to meet the following conditions:
Co ≥ Ci + Ccable; Lo ≥ Li + Lcable
199
200
EB 8384-5 EN
Table 2: FM – approved barrier parameters of circuit 4

Table 1: Maximum values
Supply barrier Evaluation barrier
Fieldbus Limit- Forced Binary- input Serial-Interface Barrier
switches venting- V0C Rmin I0C Pmax V0C Rmin
Foundation Profibus inductive function 1 2 active passive
circuit 3 ≤28V ≥245Ω ≤115mA ## ≤28V Diode
Circuit No. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6
circuit 4 ≤30V ≥300Ω ≤100mA ## ≤30V Diode
Terminal 11 / 12 11 / 12 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88 85 / 86 plug
No. The correlation between temperature classification and permissible ambient
temperature ranges is shown in the table 3 below:
A, B C, D A, B, C, D
Groups IIC IIB IIC / IIB #/# #/# #/# #/# #/# #/#
Table 3:
Ui or Vmax 24 17,5 16 28 30
V0C V0C Vmax
[V] 5,88 8,61 16 Permissble ambient
Temperature class
temperature range
Ii or Imax 360 380 380 25 115 100
ISC ISC Imax
[ mA ] 1 55 25 T6 +60°C
Pi or Pmax 64 250 64 T5 -40°C ≤ Ta ≤+70°C

1,04 2,58 5,32 ## ## 7,2 mW
[W] mW mW mW
T4 +80°C
Ci [ nF ] 5 60 5,3 0 2µF 0,61µF 0
Table 4:
Li [ µH ] 10 100 0 0 10mH 9mH 0
Limit- Forced
Maximum values for serial-interface and binary input 2

Foundation Fieldbus or Profibus PA Binary-
switches venting
(Non incendive Field wiring) (inductive) Input 1
Binary- input 1: For connection of an active signal circuit function
Binary- input 2: For connection of an passive contact circuit directly on the control valve, e.g. Terminal 11 / 12 41 / 42 81 / 82 87 / 88
passive pressure switch for leakage monitoring
Groups A, B and IIC C, D and IIB #/# #/# #/#
Notes:
Ui or Vmax
see table 1
1. Entity parameters must meet the following requirements: 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 24V 30V 32V 20V 30V 30V
[VDC]
U0 ≤ Ui or Vmax , I0 ≤ Ii or Imax, P0 ≤ Pi or Pmax Ii or Imax
C0 or Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable and L0 or La ≥ Li + Lcable 464 261 152 130 1,117 650 379 324 25mA 100mA 100mA
[mA] A
Pi or Pmax 2,32 1,56 1,14 1,14 5,88 3,89 3,85 2,77 64mW ## ##
2. The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code [W]
ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
Ci 5nF 60 5,3 0
3. Cable entry M 20 x1,5 or metal conduit acc. to dwg. No. 1050-0540
Li 10µH 100 0 0
FM approved for hazardous locations: Installation drawing Control Relay KHA5-OTI/Ex2, KHA6-OTI/Ex1 or
Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6 Zone 2. KHA6-OTI/Ex2 with Model SJ-b-N Proximity Sensor
Class I, II, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, E+F. Field enclosure NEMA 4X
HAZARDOUS SAFE
FM-approved associated LOCATION LOCATION
Serial interface, apparatus suitable
FM-approved Ex nA II T6; Ex nL IIC T6 Zone 2.
for Profibus PA or FOUNDATION FF Class I, II, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D, E+F.
FIELDBUS intrinsically output
1+ 12+
Fieldbus to sensor or contact
11+ Isolating amplifier 1 or 2 87+ to intrinsically 2+ 11+
. channel 1
Model 3730-43
12- channels safe output
circuit 1 88- 3- 10-
or 3730-53
Model 3730-43/3730-53
to one common
line possible Switch-Isolators
Type KHA5 – OTI/Ex2
or KHA6 - OTI/Ex1
Positioners
41+ 41+ Proximity sensor intrinsically output

Limit switch circuit 2 4+ 9+
42- 42- software limit switch to sensor or contact
5+ 8+
terminal No. channel 2
82- circuit 3 6- 7-
UNSPECIFIED APPARATUS
e.g. transmitter relay
88- circuit 4 External position sensor
(optionally)
85+ Model designation code Type KHab – cExde
86- a= Supply Voltage type A or D
Binary contact 2 a=AC, d=DC
circuit 5 b= Supply Level
2=24V DC±15%; 5=120V AC +10%-15%;
Terminal No.
6=230V AC+10%-15%;
c= Output type RTA/; RW1/; SS1/; SS2/; RS1/;
External position sensor maximum capacitance of each inductive sensor 30nF SR/; ST-or SOT
(optionally) maximum inductance of each inductive sensor 100µH d= Number of channels 1 or 2
e= Power rail designation, P, 2S.P or GS.P
(includes Model KHD2-EB-PB Power Feed
Module) or Blank
Each pair of I.S. wires must be protected by a shield that is grounded at the I.S. Ground. The shield must be extend as close
to the terminals as possible installation shall be in accordance with the National
GROUND Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01.
FM-approved The total series inductance and shunt capacitance of shield wiring shall be restricted to the following maximum values
apparatus suitable
for FIELDBUS
Hazardous Safe System parameters
Control Relay L C V0C ISC Vmax Rmin

Location Location Terminal No. Groups
[ mH ] [ µF ] [V] [ mA ] [V] [Ω]
10,5 811
1-3; 2-3 A+B 192 2,66
FM-approved
apparatus suitable 4-6; 5-6
for FIELDBUS C+E 671 7,9 10,5 13
The installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical
FM-approved
Code ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/ISA RP 12.06.01
D, F, G 1000 21,3
termination with
R = 90 . . .100Ω,
C = 0 . . .2,2µF
EB 8384-5 EN
201
202 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 203
S/Z 2009-05
SAMSON AG · MESS- UND REGELTECHNIK

Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main · Germany
Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507
Internet: http://www.samson.de EB 8384-5 EN
SAMSON CERTIFIED
184 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 185
186 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 187
188 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 189
190 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 191
192 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 193
194 EB 8384-5 EN
EB 8384-5 EN 195
CS1 CERTIFIED

Manual Celdas Primera Limpieza

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Celdas Primera Limpieza

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FLSMIDTH® WEMCO® 300m3 FLOTATION MACHINES

Serial No.: CSP0000891-01 A thru E

Esperanza Cleaner Expansion

Purchase Order No.: 136753 V.0

FLSmidth Salt Lake City, Inc. Order No.: CSP0000891-01

Esperanza Project – Chile

Created by: Rob Bailey

Revision Summary of changes Author Revision date

1.0 Initial Release-Instruction Manual Rob Bailey 31-March-2014

Chapter 1: General Information 7

Chapter 2: General Safety Information 13

2.4.8 Process Samples ...................................................................19

Chapter 7: Final Mechanical Checklist 74

1.2 Receiving and Inspection

Keep a record of all claims and correspondence. Photographs are recommended.

1.3 Packing Boxes and Covers

1.3.1 Shipping Braces and Bars

1.3.3 Erection Bolts

FLSmidth Salt Lake City Inc.

7158 South FLSmidth Drive

Midvale, Utah 84047-5559

Toll Free: 1-800-826-6461

North American Region Headquarters Europe, Africa, Mid-East Region

7158 South FLSmidth Drive 11 Mitchell Court

Midvale, Utah 84047-5559, U.S.A. Castle Mound Way

Telephone: 1 + 801-871-7000 Central Park

Toll Free: 1 + 800-826-6461 Rugby, Warwickshire

Facsimile: 1 + 801-871-7001 CV23 0UY

FLSmidth S.A. de C.V Telephone: +44 (0) 1788 555777

San Alberto 406 Facsimile: +44 (0) 1788 560738

Col. Residencial Santa Barbara

Facsimile: +52 81 1001-9545 Constantia Kloof, Roodepoort, 1709, Gauteng, South

Latin American Region Headquarters Asia-Pacific Region Headquarters

FLSmidth S.A. FLSmidth Pty. Ltd.

FLSmidth Ltda. FLSmidth Beijing Ltd.

Canada Region Headquarters

1.5 Mechanical Warranty

ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A

1.6 Copyright Information

Chapter 2: General Safety Information

2.1 Safety - Introduction

No personnel, authorized or unauthorized, should depend wholly on safety devices to prevent

WARNING: Understanding and experience with this equipment is essential for

In case of a question on how to safely proceed, contact the appropriate

WARNING: If the safety procedures given in this manual are compromised or

WARNING: To prevent injuries to yourself or others, use extreme care when

WARNING: Disable power from electrical equipment using a manual breaker or

WARNING: Only trained, competent personnel should adjust electrical

WARNING: No electrical safety function should ever be jumped or bypassed.

WARNING: Where corrosive or dangerous chemicals are handled, or there is

WARNING: Hydraulic oil is an eye irritant, a skin irritant, and is toxic if

WARNING: To prevent injuries to yourself or others, use extreme care when

WARNING: Stand clear as the equipment is lifted.

2.2 Hearing Protection

WARNING: Use hearing protection anytime there is exposure to noise.

• Know the types of hearing protection required in your work area.

• Select the hearing protection that is most effective.

2.3 Safety Signs

2.3.1 Area Safety Signs

• Suggested text for these signs in appropriate language would be:

o Multilingual signs may be needed.

2.4 Equipment Safety Signs

• If the signs are damaged or deteriorated; replace them.

2.4.1 Environment Management Cautions